®t  *c  mok9h!  jf 

PRINCETON,  N J. 


Presented  by  Mr.  Samuel  Agnew  of  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


Division 
Section  \ 


DS4-IZ 

WZ5 


Number 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/indiahindoosbein00ward_0 


PALANQUIN  UNDERWAY 


INDIA  AND  THE  HINDOOS 


BEINQ 


A ‘POPULAR  VIEW 


OF 


THE  GEOGRAPHY,  HISTORY,  GOVERNMENT,  MANNERS,  CUSTOMS, 
LITERATURE  AND  RELIGION  OF  THAT  ANCIENT  PEOPLE  ; 


WITH  AN  ACCOUNT  OF 


CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  AMONG  THEM 


BY 


F.  De  W/WARD, 


LATE  MISSIONARY  AT  MADRAS,  AND  MEMBER  OF  THE  AMERICAN 


ORIENTAL  SOCIETY. 


V 


NEW  YORK: 

CHARLES  SCRIBNER 
1851. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1350,  by 
BAKER  AND  SCRIBNER, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern 
District  ot  New  York. 


C.  W.  BENEDICT, 

Stereotyper , 

201  William  st.,  N.  Y 


TO 

EDWARD  ROBINSON,  D.D., 

PRESIDENT; 

WITH  THE 

OTHER  OFFICERS  AND  MEMBERS 


OF  THE 

Alffffll&SO.A.K  ©EanJBST'jf.A.IIa  ffl  © ffl  H S IP 
THIS  VOLUME 

18  EE SPECTFULLY  DEDICATED  BY  THEIR  FELLOW  LABORER  IN  THB 
CAUSE  OF  EASTERN  LEARNING, 


THE  AUTHOR. 


A FEW  WORDS  TO  THE  READER. 


Of  those  who  take  this  volume  in  hand,  a few  may  recog- 
nize in  the  author  an  acquaintance  and  friend,  while  to  others 
he  is  a stranger,  whose  name  even  they  have  never  before 
heard.  To  this  latter  and  more  numerous  class,  a few  intro- 
ductory statements  may  not  be  inappropriate. 

In  the  Fall  of  1836  I sailed  from  Boston,  a missionary  to 
the  natives  of  Southern  India.  My  shipmates  were  the  Rev. 
Messrs.  Cherry,  Cope,  Crane,  Muzzy,  Tracy,  Dr.  Steele,  and 
our  wives.  Two  of  these,  Dr.  Steele  and  Mrs.  Muzzy,  lie 
buried  on  the  continent,  and  Mrs.  Cherry  at  Jaffna,  Ceylon. 
Our  destination  was  the  ancient  and  far-famed  city  of  Madura,* 
where  and  in  the  neighboring  villages  Christian  operations  had 
been  successfully  commenced,  under  the  direction  of  the  Rev. 
Messrs.  Todd,  Eckard,  Hall,  Lawrence,  Poor,  and  Dwight,  the 
first  and  last  three  of  whom  were  in  the  field  when  we  arrived. 
After  residing  for  about  six  years  in  that  city,  I removed  to 
Madras,  and  was  associated  with  Rev.  Messrs.  "Winslow  and 
Hutchings,  and  Mr.  Hunt.  Here  I labored  in  preaching, 
superintending  schools,  and  writing  for  the  press,  until  the 
state  of  my  health  required  a return  to  my  native  land,  from 
which  I had  been  absent  ten  years.  During  my  residence  in 
* Pronounced  Madjura. 


VI 


PREFACE. 


India,  I travelled  much  over  the  southern  districts — went  tv 
Ceylon  twice,  and  acquainted  myself  with  the  condition  of  that 
long-established  and  successful  mission — journeyed  southward 
and  witnessed  the  wonderful  effects  of  evangelizing  efforts  in 
Tinnevelly,  with  its  whole  villages  of  converts  to  Christianity 
— spent  several  days  at  TaDjore,  under  the  roof  of  the  aged  and 
venerable  Kohloff,  a pupil  and  successor  of  the  celebrated 
Swartz — travelled  westward  to  Bangalore,  where,  during  several 
months  of  ill  health,  I shared  the  hospitality  of  the  Rev.  Mr. 
Crisp,  (whose  necessary  return  to  England  cannot  be  too  much 
regretted,  so  well  qualified  was  he  for  the  post  he  then  held,  of 
instructor  to  a large  class  of  native  young  men,  who  were  pre- 
paring for  the  ministry,) — passed  on  to  Mysore,  also  the  centre 
of  interesting  missions  under  the  London  and  Wesleyan  Socie- 
ties. Hundreds  of  miles  have  I journeyed  through  native 
towns  and  villages,  alone  or  accompanied  by  esteemed  fellow- 
laborers,  preaching  th^  Gospel,  superintending  schools,  circu- 
lating Bibles,  distributing  tracts,  arguing  with  Brahmins,  min- 
gling with  the  thousands  who  were  congregated  at  annual 
festivals,  and  warning  them  of  their  sin  and  danger — entreat- 
ing the  common  people,  who  “ heard  us  gladly,”  to  behold  the 
“ Lamb  of  God,”  and  using  all  means  at  our  command  to 
secure  for  our  faith  an  interested  attention  from  the  multitude 
of  idolaters.  Hours  were  spent  in  exchanging  thoughts  with 
missionaries  of  all  societies  and  denominations  upon  the  condi- 
tion of  the  Hindoos,  and  the  most  hopeful  way  of  inducing 
them  to  embrace  the  better  faith  of  Christ.  While  there,  I 
took  notes  upon  what  I saw  and  heard  ; and  since  my  return  I 
have  been  permitted  to  plead  for  the  Hindoos  in  most  of  the 
cities  of  New  York,  in  many  of  the  churches  of  Connecticut, 


PREFACE. 


VJl 


in  company  with  my  worthy  friend,  the  Rev.  Mr.  Cowles,  and* 
to  a limited  extent  at  the  West.  The  reception  I everywhere 
met  with  was  of  the  most  gratifying  character,  and  I would 
express  thus  publicly  my  thanks  to  the  many  pastors  who  have 
allowed  me  to  address  their  congregations  upon  this  subject  of 
deep  and  enduring  interest — the  wants  of  India,  and  the  way 
to  relieve  them. 

Providence  at  length  indicated  that  I should  assumo  a pas- 
toral charge,  which  I have  done,  over  an  endeared  people,  but 
with  no  abatement  of  my  interest  in  the  cause  of  India  mis- 
sions. 

During  my  journeyings  over  the  country,  it  was  often  sug- 
gested to  me,  that  when  I had  no  further  use  for  my  manu- 
scripts, in  oral  lectures  and  addresses,  I should  put  them  in  a 
form  for  the  press.  Hence,  this  book,  which  is  designed  as  a 
plain,  colloquial  statement  of  facts,  the  results  of  reading  and 
conversation,  confirmed  and  illustrated  by  personal  observation 
and  reflection.  The  aim  of  the  work  is  to  bring  before  the 
reader’s  mind  India  as  it  was  and  as  it  is,  in  a secular  as  well 
as  a religious  aspect. 

Reader,  allow  me,  in  conclusion,  to  entreat  you  to  think 
more  about  the  Hindoos,  especially  in  respect  to  their  religious 
state  and  prospects.  Thinking  will  lead  to  feeling ; feeling  to 
prayer ; and  prayer  to  effort.  If  this  book  awaken  in  any 
mind  a deeper  interest  in  the  Hindoos,  or  lead  in  any  instance 
to  increased  exertion  for  their  social  happiness  or  spiritual  im- 
provement, my  aim  will  be  secured  and  my  prayer  answered. 

F.  De  W.  WARD. 

Geneseo , ( Livingston  Co .,  N.  Y. ,)  Sept.,  1850. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 

Pag* 

Relative  position — Boundaries — Geographical  divisions — Names  of 
opposite  Sea  Coasts  — Mountains  described  — Droogs  — Rivers — 
Tanks — Wells — Modes  of  drawing  water — Cataracts — Courtallum 
— Nullahs  — Hot  Springs  — Lakes — Salt  Marshes  — Face  of  the 
Country — Seasons — Climate — Extremes  of  heat  and  cold — Means 
of  avoiding  the  constant  and  oppressive  warmth — Longevity' — Dis- 
eases— Features  of  Constitution  needful  in  a foreigner  who  would 
live  long  in  India — Rapidity'  of  death's  doings  illustrated  by  facts 
— Comparative  healthfulness  of  different  seasons — Cities  and  large 
Towns  named  and  described  - 1 

CHAPTER  II. 

NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 

Introductory  remarks — Elephants — Rajah  of  MysoreTs  State  Car- 
riage— Rhinoceros — Wild  Boar — Camel — Dromedary — Bear  (an- 
ecdote of  an  Indian  Hunter  and  Mountain  Bear) — Deer,  various 
species  — Goat — Sheep — Buffalo — Ox — Cow — Brahminee  Bull — 
Ganjal — Arnee — Yak — Horse — Ass — Mule — Dziggetai — Monkey, 
various  tribes  (anecdote  of  a Monkey  and  flock  of  Crows) — Bat — 
Porcupine — Sloth — Armadillo  — Mangoose  — Loris  — Squirrel  — 
Chipmuck — Rats — Ratel — Rabbits — Martin — Civet  — Ichneumon 
— Tiger — Lion — Panther — Leopard — Cheetah  (mode  of  use  by 
hunters) — Cat — Jackal — Hyena  — Lynx  — Thibet  Dog  — Native 
Dog  — Lizzard  — Gecko  — Scorpion  — Centipede  — Tarantula  — 


X 


CONTENTS. 


P AOM 

Cobra-de-Capella — Tic  Polonga — Mountain  Snake — Crocodile — 
Anaconda — Tortoise — Frog — Insects  (scene  presented  when  enter- 
ing a long-closed  house) — White  Ant  (a  choice  dish) — Ant  Hills 
as  seen  by  Bp.  Heber — Birds  and  Fishes,  a large  variety  of  each 
Class  — Botany,  including  Vegetable,  Fruit  and  Forest  Trees, 
Flowers — Minerals,  &c.  - - -----  27 


CHAPTER  III. 

HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 

What  is  known  of  Ancient  India — Invasions  by  Sesostris,  Semira- 
mis,  Darius  and  Alexander — Invasion  by  Mahmoud  of  Guznee — 
Somnaut  captured — Its  venerated  Idol  and  Temple  Gate — Success- 
ors of  Mahmoud  — Invasions  by  the  Portuguese  — Dutch — East 
India  Company — Black  Hole  of  Calcutta  — Governors-General — 
Relation  of  India  to  England  — Remark  cf  Dr.  Duff — Measures 
pursued  by  the  English — Opinions  and  Feelings  of  the  Hindoos — 

An  Historic  Law  respecting  India — Characteristics  of  the  several 
periods  of  Hindoo  History  — An  Eloquent  Extract  - - ?1 

CHAPTER  IV. 

INHABITANTS  OF  INDIA  CLASSIFIED. 

Population — Native  Hindoos — Mohamedans  (Annual  Festivities) — 

East  Indians  — European  Residents,  of  several  grades  — Arabs — 
Parsees — Chinese  and  Jews  - - - - - - 83 

CHAPTER  V. 

GOVERNMENT  OF  INDIA. 

The  three  Presidencies — Governor-General — Metropolitan  Bishop — 
Officers,  &c.  in  the  four  Departments,  Revenue,  Judicial,  Mili- 
tary, and  Ecclesiastical — General  Remarks  - - - - 91 

CHAPTER  VI. 

PERSONAL  APPEARANCE  AND  DRESS  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 

Figure  and  Physiognomy — Bodily  Structure  and  Strength — Pedes- 
trian Agility  and  Endurance  — Emblematical  Marks  upon  the 


CONTENTS. 


xi 

Pjiea 

Forehead,  Neck,  &c.,  — Dress  of  the  Men,  of  the  Women,  of  the 
Children — Ornaments;  their  lSnd,  value,  and  dangers  - - 100 

CHAPTER  VII. 

COURTEOUS  CUSTOMS. 

Hindoos  a polite  people — Visit  from  a Native — Salaam — Namaska- 
rum  — Sashiimgam  — Modes  of  addressing  superiors — Epistles — 
Materials  of  Writing — Different  Styles  of  Address,  to  an  Inferior, 
an  Equal,  and  a Superior — Remark  by  Abbe  Du  Bois  - - 108 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

A HINDOO  AT  HOME. 

Native  Dwelling  described — Furniture — Its  apartments,  especially 
the  Room  of  Anger — The  Hindoo  returning  home — Preparations 
for  a meal — Rice  and  Curry— Mode  of  Eating — Sleeping-room — 
Different  modes  pertaining  to  different  classes — Price  of  dwelling 
— Evil  Eye,  and  other  superstitious  fears  — Flower  Gardens — 
Market — Times  of  eating— Topics  of  conversation  ...  119 

CHAPTER  IX. 

HINDOO  WATER  CRAFT  AND  SAILORS. 

Author’s  arrival  at  Madras  — Reflections  — Catamaran  — Massuli- 
boat  — War  Steamer  — Merchantman  — Dhony  — Basket-boat — 
Budgerow  - --  --  --  --  - 127 


CHAPTER  X. 

HINDOO  LAND  CONVEYANCES. 

Travelling  propensity  of  the  Hindoos — Primitive  mode  of  carrying 
a child — Cart  and  Bullocks — Canopied  cart — Palanquin — Tonjon 
— Miscellaneous  vehicles  in  City  and  Town  ....  140 

CHAPTER  XI. 

HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


Languages  of  India — Antiquity  of  the  Sanscrit — The  Vedas — Shas- 
tras  — Pooranas — Ramayanum,  Analysis  of,  and  Quotation  from 


Xll 


CONTENTS. 


Pass 

the  Poem — Remark  by  Dr.  Duff — Institutes  of  Menu,  and  other 
Works  on  Hindoo  Jurisprudence — Ethics — Extracts  from  the  Cu- 
ral  and  Ovviya — Miscellaneous  Proverbs — Puncha  tantrakathy — 
Moothory — Nannery  — Nalladiyar—-  Hindoo  Poetry  - - 155 


CHAPTER  XII. 

SCIENCE  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 

The  Hindoos  not  a barbarous  People — Arithmetic — Geometry — Al- 
gebra — Trigonometry — Astronomy — Geography — Chronology — 
Natural  Philosophy — Chemistry — Mineralogy — Botany — Geology 
— Doctors — Medical  Institutions  at  Calcutta — Polytechnic  Institu- 
tions— Lawyers — Present  state  of  Learning  in  the  land  - - 181 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

ARTS  AND  OCCUPATIONS  OF  INDIA. 

Introductory  Remark — Agriculture — Modes  of  Cultivation — Native 
Plow,  Harrow  and  Threshing  Machines  — Cultivation  of  Rice, 
Wheat,  Barley,  Indigo,  Opium.  Sugar,  and  Tobacco— Fabrics — Na- 
tive Loom — Glass  — Potter — Carpenter — Blacksmith — Goldsmith 
— Shoemaker  — Brassfounder  — Barber — Confectioner — Florist — 
Shopman  — Washer-man — Oilman — M il  kman — F isherman — Dis- 
tiller-Palanquin Bearer — Difficulty  of  introducing  Modem  Im- 
plements — Public  Buildings  — Descriptions  of  Temples  at  Ele- 
phants, Syringham,  and  Madura  — Droogs— Reflections  upon  be- 
holding these  Ruins  - 195 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

POPULAR  AMUSEMENTS  OF  INDIA. 

Hindoos  not  fond  of  work— Card-playing — Backgammon— Domi- 
noes — Checkers  — Chess  — Quoits  — Marbles  — Cock-fighting- 
Dancing — Story-telling  ; Tale  of  the  three  deaf  men— Theatrical 
Exhibitions— Hunting— Gymnastics  and  Jugglery,  illustrated  by 
descriptions  of  wondrous  feats— Remarks  ....  206 


CONTENTS. 


xiii 


Fao> 

CHAPTER  XV. 

MUSIC  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 

Remarks  on  the  universal  prevalence  of  Music — Antiquity  of  Hin- 
doo Song — Remarkable  statements  by  Sir  William  Jones — “No 
accounting  for  tastes” — Hindoo  Gamut — Extract  from  Abbe  Du 
Bois — Names  of  musical  instruments — Style  illustrated  by  Stan- 
zas from  the  Poem  of  Arumuga  Tambiran,  sung  at  his  baptism 
— Two  verses  written  in  English  by  a Convert  at  Calcutta — Au- 
thors of  “Spiritual  Songs”  in  Southern  India  ...  219 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

PECULIAR  CEREMONIES. 

Two  circumstances  that  impart  impoitance  to  the  Birth  of  a Hindoo 
— Hindoo  Names,  whence  derived,  and  the  Ceremony  of  giving 
them — Hindoo  Marriages — Courtship — Desirable  Qualities  in  a 
Wife  — Kooleen  Brahmins — Death — Exclamations  of  a Mother 
over  a Dead  Child — Strange  Comforters — Nuisances  on  the  Gan- 
ges— Burning  of  Bodies — Singular  Custom  in  the  Northern  Dis- 
tricts— Parsee  mode  with  their  Dead — Mohamedan  Cemeteries — 

Also  Roman  Catholic — Graves  of  Foreigners — Superiority  of  the 
Gospel  over  Brahminism  in  the  Dying  Hour  - - - 228 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 

Importance  of  Female  Influence — Facts  illustrating  the  relative  posi- 
sition  of  women  in  India : (1)  Grief  at  their  birth ; (2)  Subjection 
exacted ; (3)  Not  to  mention  her  husband’s  name ; (4)  Not  to 
speak  of  her  husband’s  excellencies ; (5)  Not  to  be  seen  walking 
with  him ; (6)  Not  to  take  food  with  him ; (7)  Is  not  inquired  after 
by  guests ; and  (8)  Is  not  taught  even  the  rudiments  of  knowledge 
— Remarks  by  a Hindoo  writer — Life  and  self-immolation  of  Hol- 
lee  Lutchema — Suppression  of  Sutteeism — Lord  William  Bentinck 
— Appeal  - - ........  240 


XIV 


CONTENTS. 


FUI 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

HINDOO  CASTE. 

Definition  of  Caste — Four-fold  division — Origin  and  duties  of  Brah- 
mins, Kshatiras,  Veishas,  and  Soodras — Pariars — Six  facts  illus- 
trating the  evil  influence  of  Caste  upon  its  adherents — Its  anti- 
social and  anti-benevolent  character — A barrier  to  the  progress  of 
Christian  truth — A convert  at  Calcutta — Apology  by  Abbe  Du 
Bois  — Early  Views  of  Swartz,  Bishop  Heber,  &c.  — Action  of 
Bishop  Wilson  and  Modem  Missionaries — Caste  doomed,  and 
what  is  now  expected  of  all  converts  to  Christianity  - - 256 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

RELIGION  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 

Design  of  the  Chapter — Brahm — Brahma — Vishnu — Siva — Ganesa 
— Supramunyan  — Doorga  — Ka!e6 — Latchmi—  Sarasvati — Mun- 
muthan  — Indru  — Sooryu  — Kartikeya  — Parvuna  — Vuroona  — 
Yumu — Weakness  of  them  all — Immorality — Character  of  the 
worshippers — What  can  elevate  India — Appeal  to  the  Reader  267 

CHAPTER  XX. 

IIINDOOISM  IN  PRACTICE. 

Facts  indicating  the  Religious  Tendency  of  the  Hindoos — Car  Draw- 
ing— Sailing — Hook  Swinging — Passing  through  the  Fire — Other 
and  like  Observances — Quotation  from  Bishop  Heber  respecting 
the  Moral  Character  of  the  Hindoos  -----  278 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA. 

Harmony  between  these  means — First  Agency,  Preaching  ; to  Stated 
Congregations,  in  the  Highways,  at  the  Mission-House  and  at 
Tayats,  with  Trials  of  Body,  Mind  and  Heart — Second  Agency, 

Bible  and  Tract  Distribution — Its  Necessity  and  Success — Third 
Agency,  Education , (1)  Day  Charity  Schools,  (2)  Boarding 
Schools,  (3)  Literary  Seminaries,  (4)  Theological  Academies, 
and  (5)  English  Schools — Concluding  Remarks  ...  288 


CONTENTS. 


XV 


Paob 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 

Quotations  from  the  Abb6  Du  Bois,  with  Remarks  in  Opposition — 
Considerations  favorable  to  the  Cause  of  Christian  Truth  in  India 
— (1)  Change  in  Governmental  Policy;  (2)  Disconnection  of  Gov- 
ernment from  Hindoo  Festivals  and  Superstitious  Ceremonies ; (3) 
Improved  Character  of  Foreign  Residents;  (4)  Posture  of  the  Na- 
tive Mind  towards  the  Religion  of  Christ;  (5)  The  existence  in 
India  of  a Christian  Church,  with  many  thousand  Members;  (6) 

The  array  of  Organized  Means  for  Propagating  the  Truth ; and  (7) 

The  Practical  Interest  of  all  Christendom  in  the  Prospects  of  the 
Hindoos — Certain  Offsets  to  these  Encouragements — Summing  up 
of  the  whole  subject  - --  --  --  - 306 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 

The  interest  felt  by  Christendom  in  India — St.  Thomas — Roman 
Catholic  Missions — Society  for  Propagating  the  Gospel — Danish 
Missionary  Society — English  Baptist  Missionary  Society — London 
Missionary  Society — Scottish  Missionary  Society — Church  Mis- 
sionary Society  — Free  Church  of  Scotland  Missions — American 
Board  of  Commissioners  for  Foreign  Missions — American  Baptist 
Missionary  Society — Presbyterian  Foreign  Missionary  Society — 
Free  Will  Baptist  Missions — Evangelical  Lutheran  Missions — 
Concluding  Remarks  -------  - 323 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

GLOSSARY  J 

Or,  Vocabulary  of  Words  and  Terms  in  common  use  by  writers  on 
India,  arranged  in  alphabetical  order  -----  330 


. 


■ 


CHAPTER  I. 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SI/RVEY. 

Relative  position — Boundaries — Geographical  divisions — Names  of 
opposite  Sea  Coasts — Mountains  described — Droogs — Rivers — Tanks 
— Wells — Modes  of  drawing  water  — Cataracts  — Courtallum — 
Nullahs — Hot  Springs — Lakes — Salt  Marshes — Face  of  the  country 
— Seasons — Climate — Extremes  of  heat  and  cold  — Means  of 
avoiding  the  constant  and  oppressive  warmth  — Longevity — 
Diseases — Features  of  Constitution  needful  in  a Foreigner  who 
would  live  long  in  India — Rapidity  of  death’s  doings  illustrated  by 
facts — Comparative  healthfulness  of  different  seasons — Cities  and 
large  Towns  named  and  described. 

The  vast  continent  of  Asia  terminates  on  the  south 
in  three  peninsulas,  the  central  and  most  important  of 
which  is  India.  Bounded  on  three  sides  by  water,  and 
on  the  fourth  disjoined  from  the  high  table-land  of 
Thibet  by  the  lofty  Himalayas,  nineteen  hundred 
miles  in  length  and  in  breadth  fifteen  hundred,  with 
its  extreme  points  in  8°  and  35’  Korth  Latitude,  and 
in  67°  and  92'  East  Longitude,  this  extensive 
country  embraces  within  its  ample  limits  forty 
districts,  viz  : in  Northern  India , Cashmere,  Sirmoor, 
G-urwal,  Kumaoon  and  Nepaul  ; — in  India  Proper, 
X 


2 


INDIA. 


Lahore  or  the  Punjaub,  Mooltan,  Delhi,  Oude,  Sind, 
Ajneer  or  Rajpootana,  Agra,  Kuch,  Guzerat,  Malwa, 
Allahabad,  Bahar  and  Bengal ; — in  the  Deccan , 
Khandesh,  Gondwana,  Berar,  Orissa,  Aurungabad, 
Beder,  Hyderabad,  the  Northern  Circars,  and  Beja- 
poor ; and  in  Southern  India , Dooab,  Ceded  Dis- 
tricts, Northern  Carnatic,  Kanara,  Mysore,  Barama- 
hal,  Salem,  Central  Carnatic,  Malabar,  Koorg,  Coim- 
batoor,  Southern  Carnatic  and  Travancore.  . 

The  Sea  Coast  on' the  west  side  from  Bombay  to 
Cape  Comorin  is  called  by  Europeans  the  Malabar , 
and  that  on  the  East  side  the  Coromandel. 

The  Mountains  of  the  Peninsula  are  few  in  number, 
but  lofty  and  majestic.  The  Himalayas  (or  “ Seats 
of  Snow”)  which  form  its  northern  boundary  constitute 
one  of  the  sublimest  features  in  the  structure  of  our 
globe,  the  highest  peak  as  yet  ascertained,  rising 
27,000  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  lofty  as  the 
Green  Mountains  of  Vermont  if  piled  upon  the  Chim- 
borazo of  South  America.  This  cloud-capped  summit 
is  esteemed  the  chosen  residence  of  Siva,  who,  in  re- 
tiring from  Ceylon,  threw  up  the  Himalayahs  as  his 
place  of  retreat.  Dewtas  or  spirits,  are  supposed  to 
inhabit  the  most  inaccessible  glens,  and  by  feigned 
sounds  to  lure  the  unfortunate  traveller  on  to  his  ruin. 
In  those  lofty  ranges  the  extremes  of  heat  and  cold 
are  excessive,  the  former  melting  the  snow  and  laying 
the  mountains  bare,  while  the  latter  is  so  intense  as  to 
split  and  detach  huge  masses  of  rock,  which  roll  into 
the  valleys  and  deep  chasms  below  with  loud  and 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 


3 


terrific  reverberations.  These  mountains  and  elevated 
plains,  rich  in  the  precious  metals,  furnished,  in  the 
time  of  Herodotus  and  Ctesias,  that  quantity  of  na- 
tivo  gold  and  auriferous  sand,  which  gave  riso  to 
the  fabled  ants,  industriously  amassing  stores  of 
this  precious  ore,  and  fountains  from  which  it  bub- 
bled up  from  a seemingly  exhaustless  depth.  The 
inhabitants  of  the  villages  skirting  the  sides  are  poor, 
illiterate  yet  simple  minded — the  chiefs,  however,  being 
jealous  of  foreign  visitors.  This  stupendous  chain  of 
hills  is  indented  with  “passes,”  through  which  travel- 
lers and,  at  times,  armies  journey  to  and  from  Nepaul 
on  the  south  side  and  Thibet  on  the  north,  for  com- 
merce and  on  predatory  excursions.  Encircling  the 
base  is  a plain  about  twenty  miles  broad  (called 
“ Tarryani”)  upon  which  the  waters  from  above  pour 
down  with  such  profusion  that  tho  river  beds,  unable 
to  contain  the  torrent,  overflow  and  convert  the 
ground  into  a species  of  swamp,  which,  acted  upon 
by  the  rays  of  a tropical  sun,  throws  up  a rank 
vegetation,  long  grass  and  coarse  shrubs,  dense  and 
almost  impenetrable.  In  these  gloomy  regions  the 
elephant,  the  tiger  and  rhinoceros,  prowl  unmolested, 
while  the  few  human  beings  who  can  resist  the  pesti- 
lential vapors,  present  a meagre,  dwarfish  and  sickly 
aspect.  "Waiving  any  special  mention  of  the  Kumaoon, 
Sewalick,  and  Vindhya  Mountains,  all  of  which  lie  north 
of  the  Dekkan,  our  attention  may  be  directed  to  a 
double  range  of  hills,  lining  the  opposite  coasts  of  the 
southern  peninsula  and  called  the  Eastern  and  Western 


4 


INDIA. 


Ghats.  The  latter  commences  near  the  river  Tuptee, 
in  20°  North  Latitude,  and  extends  to  Cape  Comorin, 
while  the  former,  beginning  near  the  river  Kistna,  in 
16°  North  Latitude,  stretches  to  the  Cauvery  River  on 
the  south.  From  the  Gulf  of  Cambay  to  the  Bay  of 
Bengal  is  a tract  of  high  country,  which,  with  the  two 
ranges  before  named,  form  a triangle  enclosing  a table 
land  elevated  three  thousand  and  more  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea.  The  mountain  scenery  of  this  region, 
though  destitute  of  those  features  which  invest  the 
Himalayas  with  so  awful  and  sublime  a character,  is 
beautiful  and  picturesque.  A traveller  leaving  Madras, 
after  traversing  a country  of  prairie  smoothness  for 
a distance  of  a hundred  miles,  finds  himself  at  the 
foot  of  the  Western  Ghats,  where  a steep  ascent  of 
two  thousand  feet  brings  him  upon  the  level  surface 
when  he  moves  forward  with  ease  until  he  reach  the 
base  of  the  Neilgherries,  to  attain  the  summit  of  which 
he  has  six  thousand  feet  more  to  rise.  Here  the  air  is 
clear,  the  climate  cool  and  healthy,  the  fields  fertile, 
well  cultivated,  and  free  from  jungle,  while,  as  a 
farther  compensation  for  his  labor,  here  he  meets  the 
violet,  primrose,  butter-cup,  wild  thyme,  fern,  dog- 
rose,  woodbine,  mosses  and  litchen,  with  various 
vegetables  and  fruits,  which  he  has  not  before  seen 
since  leaving  his  fatherland.  The  native  of  that 
delightful  region  will  tell  you  that  he  dwells  in  a 
favored  spot — in  a country  whose  origin  was  celestial. 
<(  The  God  Rama,”  he  says,  “ being  in  pursuit  of  his 
enemy,  Ravena,  who  had  forcibly  carried  off  the  Divine 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 


5 


Goddess  Sita,  sped  through  the  vaulted  heavens,  hav- 
ing his  sword  drawn,  ready  to  deal  the  death-blow  of 
revenge.  In  the  forgetfulness  of  his  direful  wrath,  lo  ! 
by  an  incautious  wave  of  his  mighty  weapon,  he 
struck  the  moon  with  the  point  thereof,  and  severed 
from  the  face  of  that  beautiful  orb  a chain  of  verdant 
mountains,  which  immediately  fell  to  the  earth  in  the 
province  of  Coimbatoor  and  united  the  Eastern  and 
'Western  Ghats.  Hence  the  name  Chandgherry,  (or 
Mountains  of  the  Moon,)  which  was  subsequently 
changed  by  Rama  to  Neilgherri,  (or  Blue  Mountains.) 
because  he  would  not  be  reminded  of  his  awkward 
mistake.”  In  proof  of  his  statement,  the  Coimbatori 
will  point  out  the  place  on  the  lunar  orb  from  which 
the  hills  fell  off! 

Ootaeamund,  a village  about  six  thousand  five 
hundred  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  two  hun- 
dred miles  S.  West  from  Madras,  is  much  resorted  to 
by  European  invalids  from  all  parts  of  the  Peninsula, 
as  also  from  the  adjoining  islands,  because  of  its  clear 
air  and  invigorating  climate.  Excepting  these  table 
lands  and  cloud-piercing  heights,  Southern  India  is 
very  level,  presenting  immense  areas  of  barren  sand 
and  dense  jungle,  with  occasional  rocks  rising  from  the 
plain  to  the  height  of  100  to  200  feet,  like  icebergs 
in  the  northern  seas.  Upon  the  summit  of  these  rocky 
acclivities  the  traveller  often  finds  a fort,  (called  a 
Droog)  which  has  done  good  service  in  years  long  past, 
when  life  and  property  were  exposed  to  the  invader’s 
power.  One  of  the-  mest  remarkable  of  these  is  the 


6 


INDIA. 


fortress  of  Dowlatabad,  the  Capital  of  Arungabad 
This  fort  is  a mass  of  granite,  standing  more  than  a 
mile  and  a half  from  the  hills,  and  rising  to  an  eleva- 
tion of  five  hundred  feet.  Another,  and  the  most 
remarkable  in  India,  is  Sevendoorg,  twenty  miles  north- 
west from  Bangalore.  This  has  a base  of  about  eight 
miles  in  circumference  and  a height  of  about  half  a 
mile.  In  some  cases  a temple  has  been  erected  on  the 
solitary  summit  which,  with  a pagoda  at  the  base, 
secures  a large  share  of  reverential  attention  from 
Bramins  and  other  devotees. 

The  largest  Rivers  of  India  are  the  Indus,  Sutlij, 
Jumna,  Ganges,  Brahmapootra,  Nerbudda,  Tuptee, 
Muhanuddee,  Godavery,  Toombudra,  Pennar,  Palar 
and  Cavery — which  run  a united  distance  of  about  ten 
thousand  miles : — most  of  them  rising  in  the  lofty 
Himalayas,  and  falling  into  the  Bay  of  Bengal  or  Ara- 
bian sea.  Of  these  the  Indus  is  noted  for  its  length 
and  variety  of  appearance,  flowing  a distance  of  1700 
miles,  and  forming  the  boundary  line  between  the  Pe- 
ninsula and  Afghanistan.  The  Ganges  is  far  famed 
for  the  spiritual  efficacy  of  its  waters,  especially  those 
parts  of  the  stream  which  happen  to  run  from  South  to 
North,  contrary  to  the  general  direction.  The  Brah- 
mapootra rises  in  Thibet,  near  the  mouth  of  the  Indus, 
sweeps  through  Assam  with  a curve  westward,  uniting 
with  the  Ganges  just  above  Calcutta.  The  Godavcry 
is  sometimes  called  the  Second  Ganges,  because  of  its 
sacred  origin  and  purifying  efficacy.  The  Krishna, 
from  the  resemblance  in  its  color  to  that  of  Vishna 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 


7 


in  his  ninth  incarnation,  is  also  an  object  of  reli- 
gious worship.  The  name  of  Punjaub  (or  land  of 
streams)  which  the  natives  apply  to  a small  portion  of 
the  Northern  Hindostan  is  descriptive  of  at  least  one 
half  of  the  peninsula.  The  valley  of  the  Ganges  is  tho 
most  extensive  and  luxuriant  on  the  face  of  the  globe, 
forming  a tract  of  400,000  square  miles,  the  greater 
part  of  which  is  susceptible  of  cultivation  of  some  kind, 
and  much  is  extremely  fertile.  In  the  southern  dis- 
trict there  are  but  few  perennial  streams.  During  a 
large  part  of  the  year  the  bed  of  the  river  presents  the 
appearance  of  an  extended  plain  of  arid  sand,  with  a 
mere  brook  running  through  its  midst,  but  so  soon  as 
the  rainy  season  sets  in,  the  mountains  pouring  down 
the  flood  that  has  fallen  upon  them,  the  desert  is  con- 
verted into  a stream,  or  more  frequently  a raging  tor- 
rent, majestic  to  behold,  refreshing  to  the  neighboring 
vegetation  but  annoying  to  the  traveller  who  must  wait 
till  it  has  subsided,  ere  he  can  safely  attempt  to  cross. 
As  these  rivers  are  an  uncertain  reliance  for  agricultu- 
ral purposes  the  country  is  supplied  with  tanks  or  large 
artificial  lakes,  measuring  from  two  to  twenty  miles  in 
circumference,  encircled  with  an  embankment  of  clay 
and  clods,  into  which  the  water  is  allowed  to  flow  du- 
ring the  rainy  season,  and  is  there  retained  for  future 
use.  Upon  each  side,  gates  are  built,  by  the  raising 
of  which  the  neighboring  fields  are  irrigated  and  made 
fruitful.  One  of  these  is  essential  to  every  extensive 
farm,  as  without  it  man  and  beast  could  not  subsist, 
and  the  fields  would  lie  barren  and  useless.  There 


INDIA. 


are,  it  is  true,  large  wells  to  be  frequently  met  with, 
but  these  would  be  quite  insufficient  to  supply  water 
for  cattle,  and  field-irrigation.  The  mode  of  obtaining 
water  from  the  wells  or  tanks  (when  a large  quantity 
is  needed)  is  by  means  of  a sweep,  or  Pecotah.  One 
man  climbs  an  upright  post  and  placing  himself  on  a 
transverse  beam,  treads  backward  and  forward,  thus 
sinking  and  raising  an  iron  bucket,  which  another 
standing  below  guides  as  it  passes  up  and  down  and 
empties  when  full  into  the  channel  prepared  for  it. 
This  labor  is  performed  with  great  rapidity,  and  is  ac- 
companied by  a pleasant  song,  almost  the  first  sound 
the  foreigner  hears  after  landing,  and  the  last  he  for- 
gets. 

In  respect  to  Waterfalls  India  is  unequalled.  This 
might  be  expected  from  the  loftiness  and  rugged  char- 
acter of  the  Himalayas  and  other  mountain  ranges. 
Two  instances  must  suffice  by  way  of  illustration  and 
proof.  The  river  Shlrawati  or  Carawoot.y  rises  in  the 
western  Ghats,  and  falls  into  the  Arabian  Sea  not  far 
from  Bombay.  The  bed  of  the  stream  near  the  Cata- 
ract is  one  fourth  of  a mile  in  direct  breadth,  but  the 
edge  of  the  fall  is  elliptical,  with  a sweep  of  about  half 
a mile.  This  body  of  water  rushes,  at  first,  for  about 
three  hundred  feet  at  an  angle  of  45°  in  a sheet  of 
white  foam,  and  is  then  precipitated  to  the  depth  of 
eight  hundred  and  fifty  more  into  a black  abyss,  with  a 
noise  like  thunder.  It  has,  therefore,  a depth  of  eleven 
hundred  arul  fifty  feet,  quadrupling  Niagara  in  the 
depth  to  which  it  sends  its  foaming  waters.  Another 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 


9 


fall  of  less  grandeur  though  greater  utility  is  to  be  met 
with  at  Courtallum  about  100  miles  north  from  Capo 
Comorin.  A horse-shoe  indentation  is  made  into  the 
east  side  of  the  Ghats,  near  their  southern  extremity, 
about  two  miles  in  breadth  and  one  in  depth,  within 
which  the  village  is  situated,  with  its  native  huts,  for- 
eign dwellings  and  consecrated  temples.  During  the 
prevalence  of  the  western  monsoon  the  clouds  are  so 
driven  as  to  cause  almost  hourly  showers  of  light  rain 
to  fall  within  this  enclosure,  giving  to  the  air  a de- 
lightful and  invigorating  coolness,  especially  when  con- 
trasted with  the  heat  which  prevails  but  a few  miles 
inland.  Upon  the  summit  of  the  mountain  the  water 
collects  in  large  quantities  and  is  precipitated  over 
seven  lofty  ledges  before  it  reaches  the  basin  below. 
At  this  place  Hindu  superstition  has  erected  several 
temples  of  large  dimensions  and  great  sanctity,  and  a 
native,  who  would  not  hesitate  to  take  a false  oath 
elsewhere,  would  tremble  to  do  so  on  this  sacred  spot. 
This  is  a favorite  resort  for  foreigners,  who  will 
bear  patiently  the  greatest  domestic  inconvenience,  if 
they  can  but  inhale  its  refreshing  air  and  bathe  in  its 
health-giving  flood.  So  soon,  however,  as  the  western 
rains  cease,  a rank  vegetation  springs  up,  dangerous 
to  the  life  of  all  but  native  inhabitants.  I spent  sev- 
eral weeks  in  this  delightful  Sanatarium  and  have 
full  knowledge  of  its  worth  and  beauties,  as  well  as 
the  society  of  the  agreeable  and  good  who  are  wont 
to  assemble  in  that  “ happy  valley.” 

The  traveller  through  India  is  ever  meeting  with 


10 


INDIA. 


small  streams,  from  a few  feet  to  several  yards  in 
breadth,  called  nullahs.  These  arc  either  arms  pro- 
jecting from  neighboring  rivers,  or  streams  from  the 
adjacent  hills,  and,  though  not  imposing  in  appear- 
ance, are  useful  in  feeding  tanks  and  watering  the 
herds. 

Hot  Springs  are  very  numerous  in  the  mountains, 
and  river  beds  being  much  frequented  for  medicinal 
purposes,  and  with  religious  reverence.  An  English 
officer  speaks  of  one  he  met  with  near  the  source  of 
the  Jumna,  the  water  of  which  was  sufficiently  warm 
to  boil  rice,  and  the  deposition  of  which  led  him  to 
suppose  that  it  was  occasioned  by  the  decomposition 
of  pyrites.  In  some  of  those  Geysers  the  temperature 
is  170  and  even  194°  Fah.,  and  at  the  elevation  of  ten 
thousand  feet  above  the  sea.  Others  have  been  found 
in  the  middle  of  the  river  Godavery,  in  the  valley  of  the 
Nerbudda,  in  the  Gondwana  district,  in  Bundelcund, 
in  a village  near  Pooree,  in  Setacuno  on  the  Ganges, 
and  in  a village  near  the  city  of  Delhi.  In  these 
springs  the  thermometer,  plunged  in,  ranges  from  100° 
to  140°,  and  a strong  smell  is  diffused  throughout  the 
surrounding  neighborhood. 

Lakf.s  are  but  few  in  number,  and  those  of  limited 
dimensions.  Just  north  of  the  Bay  of  Cambay  there 
is  an  immense  region  of  marshy  land  called  the  “run,” 
where  the  waters,  accumulating  during  the  monsoon, 
evaporate  when  the  rain  ceases  to  fall,  leaving  a saline 
incrustation,  which  the  natives  collect,  cleanse,  and 
use  for  culinary  purposes.  Another  salt  lake  was 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY 


11 


found  high  in  the  Himalayas  at  an  elevation  of  six- 
teen thousand  feet. 

As  to  the  face  of  the  country  characterizing  the 
four  geographical  divisions  before  named,  Northern 
India  is  very  mountainous,  but  the  regions  between 
the  hills  susceptible  of  high  cultivation,  India  Proper 
is  divided  between  the  vast  desert  of  Rajpootana,  the 
extensive  valleys  of  the  Ganges  and  Indus,  the  salt 
marshes  of  Kutch,  and  the  jungly  regions  about  the 
mouth  of  the  sacred  stream,  the  Dekkan  has  the  two- 
fold features  of  level  and  sandy  plains  from  the  sea  to 
the  foot  of  the  Ghats,  and  a table  land  upon  their 
summit,  while  the  same  features  belong  to  the  Southern 
region,  where  it  terminates  in  a dense  jungle  and  re- 
mains without  cultivation  and  well  nigh  uninhabited 
several  miles  north  from  the  Cape. 

Of  Seasons  there  are  but  two  in  India,  the  dry  and 
rainy,  produced  by  the  periodical  winds  called  mon- 
soons. During  the  former,  vegetation  labors  under  a 
deadly  languor,  and  the  sunlight  penetrates  with  diffi- 
culty the  dense  vapors  with  which  the  atmosphere  is 
loaded.  Then  follow  the  rains,  a fall  of  twro  or  more 
weeks  of  which  without  interruption  being  not  at  all 
uncommon,  during  which  inundations  from  the  burst- 
ing of  tanks  and  the  overflowing  of  streams  frequently 
level  to  the  earth  the  mud  hut  of  the  distressed  native, 
and  drown  his  flocks  beneath  their  swelling  waves. 
In  the  year  1822,  the  Brahmapootra  overflowed  its 
banks,  by  which  calamity  thirty-seven  thousand  per- 
sons were  drowned,  besides  sheep  and  cattle  without 


12 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 


number.  If  the  rain  come  not  at  the  ordinary  time, 
or  if  not  in  sufficient  quantities,  disastrous  effects  fol- 
low during  the  entire  year.  In  1793  so  great  was  the 
scarcity  occasioned  by  the  drought,  that  parents  sold 
their  children  for  a few  pounds  of  rice.  Distress  of 
such  severity  is  uncommon,  but  inconvenience,  desti- 
tution and  suffering  from  a like  cause  is  far  from  un- 
usual in  those  equatorial  regions.  To  talk  of  an  Indian 
summer  would  be  to  include  the  whole  year  ; to  speak 
of  its  autumn  would  be  absurd,  for  its  trees  are  never 
denuded  of  leaves  ; spring  would  be  equally  unmean- 
ing, when  vegetation  blossoms  in  every  month,  and 
winter  is  there  unknown. 

The  Climate  of  India,  as  distinguished  from  that 
of  the  western  world,  is  characterized  by  warmth, 
continual,  and  often  extreme.  A few  statistics  will 
illustrate  the  point.  During  the  month  of  January 
the  mean  temperature  is — 

in  Calcutta  . . . 693  o'  Fall. 

“ Bombay  ...  77°  “ 

“ Madras  . . . 78°  15'  “ 

While  in  the  State  of  New  York  it  is  25°,  making  a 
difference  during  the  coldest  part  of  the  year  of  49°. 
Again  during  the  month  of  May  the  mean  tempera- 
ture is — 

in  Calcutta  . . . SS3  6'  Fah. 

“ Bombay  . . . 85°  “ 

“ Madras  . . . 89°  “ 

while  in  New  York  State  it  is  70  in  July — making  the 
difference  in  the  warmest  weather  of  17°.  The  mean 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SliR\  EY. 


13 


temperature  throughout  the  year  is  30°  higher  in  In- 
dia than  in  the  State  of  New  York.  The  average  cold- 
est month  in  India  (the  mountainous  region  excepted) 
is  warmer  by  6°  than  the  average  warmest  month  in 
this  State.  Over  the  largest  part  of  the  peninsula  the 
thermometer  never  sinks  below  00°  while  it  often 
rises  to  95  or  100°.  In  the  Northern  Circars  it  has 
stood  at  100°  at  midnight  and  110°  at  8 o’clock  A.  M. 
On  the  15th  of  May,  1849,  the  thermometer  stood  in 
the  City  of  Madras  as  follows  : 

at  10  o’clock  . . . 156°  Fah. 

“ 12  “ ...  169  “ 

“ 12  “ . . 181  “ 

This  was,  of  course,  under  the  direct  action  of  the 
solar  rays.  In  the  shade,  it  was  above  100°.  Such  is 
the  intensity  of  the  heat,  that  birds  sometimes  drop 
down  dead  in  the  streets  and  squares  of  Calcutta. 
Travellers  who  are  compelled  to  pass  the  day  in  tents, 
often  creep  beneath  the  table  or  cot  to  shield  them- 
selves from  the  heat  that  strikes  through  the  canvass. 
A modern  author  upon  these  equatorial  regions,  says, 
with  much  liveliness  and  truth : (i  It  is  all  well  for 
any  one  to  sit  by  his  fireside  in  Old  England,  and  im- 
agine and  talk  about  the  “ sunny  east”  as  superemi- 
nently splendid,  and  to  be  coveted ; but  if  he  ever  have 
the  opportunity  of  being  conveyed  in  a palky,  (palan- 
quin) about  2,  P.  M.,  on  any  day  in  April,  from  Fort 
St.  William  to  Government-house  and  back  he  will 
never  after  repine,  though  doomed  forever  to  remain 
in  that  climate  which  Prince  Cariciolli  described  to  be 


14 


INDIA. 


in  Britain,  “ where  the  sun  is  never  seen  ; and  where 
there  is  no  ripe  fruit,  but  roasted  apples.”  The  cli- 
mate of  India  is  little  understood  by  Englishmen 
(Americans)  “ at  home,”  and  an  instance  of  which 
appeared  in  a letter  I read,  in  which  the  fair  writer 
said  “she  could  picture  her  correspondent  reading 
under  the  shade  of  a palm-tree;”  whereas  the  only 
endurable  place  was  a room  with  all  the  blinds 
closed,  and  a punka  waving  over  head.  The  reader 
may  like  to  know  what  means  are  in  use  to  shield  the 
foreigner  from  the  distressing  effects  of  this  constant 
and  fatally-tending  heat.  Dwellings  are  located  in 
places  most  open  to  the  sea,  are  large  and  airy,  with 
lofty  ceilings,  terraced  roof  for  promenading,  Vene- 
tian blinds,  instead  of  window-sash  and  glass,  bamboo 
mats  for  the  floor,  (carpets  being  too  warm,  and  at- 
tractive to  snakes,  scorpions  and  smaller  vermin,)  and 
the  whole  painted  white  or  green.  Between  the  rising 
and  setting  of  the  sun,  a foreigner  should  not  leave  his 
house  without  the  shelter  of  a carriage,  a palanquin, 
or  a thick  umbrella.  Large  fans,  called  punkahs ,. 
made  of  the  fragrant  Cuskus  grass,  arc  suspended 
from  the  ceiling,  and  kept  in  motion  by  a servant  sta- 
tioned on  the  verandah  or  in  an  adjoining  room.  Mats 
formed  from  the  same  material,  are  hung  outsido  of 
the  door  and  window,  and  kept  saturated  with  water. 
These  adjuncts  relieve  the  heat  of  the  parlor,  the  din- 
ing-room, office  and  church.  Hand  fans  are  often 
used  at  meals,  by  a native,  standing  behind  the  chair. 
Bathing  once  a day,  is  universally  practiced,  two  or 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 


15 


more  rooms  for  this  purpose  being  attached  to  each 
dwelling.  It  has  become  an  admitted  fact,  after 
many  and  fatal  trials,  that  spirituous  liquors,  and 
even  wine  and  beer,  so  far  from  being  needful  to  an 
Indian  resident,  are  injurious  and  to  be  avoided.  In 
the  higher  parts  of  the  Peninsula,  as  at  Delhi,  in  Lat. 
28°  the  winter’s  cold  is  sometimes  3°  or  4°  below  the 
freezing  point,  and  the  tanks  are  frozen  over.  The 
previous  statements  have  respect  to  the  country  gen- 
erally, those  parts  removed  from  the  chilling  influ- 
ence of  the  snow-clad  Himmalayahs. 

With  a due  regard  to  these  precautions,  and  a calm, 
contented  disposition,  a foreigner  may  live  many 
years  in  that  “ land  of  the  sun"’  while  such  is  the 
liability  to  transgress  in  one  or  more  of  these  impor- 
tant respects,  that  human  life  is  held  by  a brittle 
thread.  Extreme  simplicity  of  diet,  and  great  tran- 
quility of  mind,  may  procure  for  some  of  the  native 
fakeers  (or  religious  devotees)  a lengthened  life  ; but 
taken  as  an  average,  this  is  a climate  in  which  the 
force  of  vitality  receives  a quick  developement,  and  is 
subjected  to  speedy  exhaustion.  The  oldest  native 
I met  in  India,  was  a preacher  in  Tanjore — a pupil  of 
Swartz,  and  ordained  by  that  illustrious  Missionary. 
He  had  passed  his  ninetieth  year ; was  very  decrepid, 
yet  in  preaching,  his  voice  was  clear,  and  sufficiently 
loud  to  be  heard  by  a large  audience,  and  his  manner 
earnest  and  effective.  But  a few  months  after  the  occa- 
sion of  my  being  at  that  interesting  station,  he,  and  the 
Rev.  Mr.  Kohloff,  (pupils,  both,  of  Swartz)  ascended  to 


16 


INDIA. 


the  presence  of  that  Saviour,  whom  for  more  than  sev- 
enty years  they  had  preached  with  boldness  and  success. 
India  has  been  called  “ Scotland’s  church-yard,”  the 
tombs  of  those  deceased  islanders  meeting  the  eye  of 
the  traveller  at  every  stage  of  his  journey. 

The  diseases  most  prevalent  in  India  are  cholera, 
fever,  hepatic  derangements,  dysentery,  and  various 
forms  of  inflammation.  Among  the  natives,  scrofula, 
leprosy,  elephantiasis,  and  opthalmia,  are  very  common. 
Cholera  had  its  origin  in  that  land,  and  there  remains 
the  same  mysterious  and  fell  messenger  now  that  it 
was  forty  years  ago.  Elephantiasis  (where  one  leg 
or  both  assume  the  shape  and  almost  the  size  of  that 
of  an  elephant)  and  leprosy  (where  large  white  spots 
appear  upon  the  face,  hands,  arms,  and  where  the 
toes  and  fingers  drop  off  in  gradual  succession)  are 
very  frequent  with  natives,  and  at  times  with  Euro- 
peans. 

Here  I will  repeat  the  remark  of  an  eminent  sur- 
geon upon  the  features  of  constitution  desirable  in 
one  who  expects  to  live  long  and  enjoy  health  in  that 
land.  “ A vivid  color,  animated  countenance,  firm 
step  and  voice,  clean  tongue  and  inoffensive  breath, 
with  what  is  called  the  white  of  the  eyes  clear,  or 
without  the  slightest  yellow  tinge,  are  in  general  very 
sufficient  proofs  of  good  digestion  and  well  performed 
visceral  secretions  ; and  these,  with  the  other  requi- 
sites, may,  with  propriety  entitle  their  possessor  to  a 
passport  to  the  plains  of  India.  On  the  other  hand, 
young  men  who  seem  sluggish,  sallow,  w ith  somewhat 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 


17 


bloated  countenances,  whose  movements  are  languid, 
and  the  white  of  whose  eyes  has  a yellowish  or  suf- 
fused appearance,  ought  to  meet  with  a decided  rejec- 
tion ; for  in  them  there  certainly  lurks  the  seed  of 
future  disease,  which  will  not  be  slow  to  show  itself  if 
ever  they  arc  exposed  to  ardent  heat  in  a tropical 
country.” 

If  there  be  those  of  the  human  family  to  whom  it 
may  be  with  special  appropriateness  said,%“  Be  ye 
ready,  for  at  such  an  hour  as  ye  think  not  the  Son  of 
man  cometh” — it  is  to  the  foreigners  resident  in 
India. 

“ This  hour,  perhaps,  our  friend  is  well, 

The  next  we  hear  his  passing  bell.” 

Let  a few  facts  suffice  by  way  of  illustration  : 

A civilian  of  Bengal  whose  duty  had  led  him  to  a 
remote  district,  was  returning  home  on  account  of  an 
attack  of  fever,  having  written  to  his  wife,  acquaint- 
ing her  of  his  intention.  Resting,  during  the  day,  at 
the  Bungalow  of  a village,  he  learned  that  a European 
had  just  breathed  his  last  in  an  adjoining  room. 
Anxious  to  secure  decent  interment  for  the  body,  he 
struggled  with  his  illness,  and  attended  the  remains 
of  his  fellow  sufferer  to  the  grave,  reading  the  burial 
service  at  the  sepulture.  Exhausted  by  this  sad  and 
painful  duty,  he  got  into  his  palanquin,  but  had  not 
proceeded  far  before  he  was  overtaken  by  the  pangs 
of  death  ; a paroxysm  of  fever  seized  him,  and  he  died 
on  the  road.  The  bearers  set  down  the  palanquin  and 
fled  into  the  wood,  leaving  their  deceased  master 


18 


INDIA. 


alone,  for  nothing  but  the  strongest  attachment  can 
induce  a Hindoo  to  touch,  or  even  to  continue  with  the 
dead  body  of  a person  who  belongs  not  to  his  caste. 
In  the  meantime,  the  wife  of  the  deceased  gentleman, 
alarmed  by  the  tidings  of  his  illness,  had  hastened  to 
meet  him,  and  was  made  acquainted  with  her  loss  by 
the  frightful  spectacle  that  met  her  eyes.  She  could 
gain  no  assistance  from  her  own  bearers,  whose  caste 
kept  them  aloof,  and  finding  it  impossible  to  induce 
them  to  touch  the  body,  she  sent  them  to  a neighbor- 
ing village  to  find  those  that  would  aid  her,  while  she 
took  upon  herself  the  melancholy  task  of  watching  the 
fast  decaying  remains.  She  soon  found  that  her  ut- 
most strength  would  be  insufficient  to  repel  the  daring 
attacks  of  insects,  ravenous  birds,  and  savage  animals, 
which  were  gathering  around,  waiting  for  an  advan- 
tageous moment  for  attack,  and,  in  the  energy  of  de- 
spair, she  tore  away  the  earth  with  her  hands  and 
buried  her  dead  husband  ! Such  is  the  rapidity  with 
which  death  does  its  work  in  that  Eastern  clime,  such 
the  heartlessness  produced  by  the  false  system  of  re- 
ligion there  dominant,  and  such  the  trials  to  which 
females  are  subjected  to  in  that  strange  land — trials 
under  which  they  often  sink  beyond  recovery,  but 
sometimes  display  an  energy  and  heroism  which 
awaken  in  the  beholders  emotions  of  equal  wonder 
and  admiration. 

When  leaving  Madras  for  a journey  to  the  South,  I 
partod  with  Mrs.  Winslow,  in  the  possession  of  usual 
health.  Reaching  Trichinopoly  we  found  a letter 


GEOGRAPHICAL  6URVEY. 


19 


informing  us  of  her  death  on  the  day  after  we  left. 
We  had  not  long  resided  in  Madura,  when  a letter 
from  Ceylon  brought  the  intelligence  that  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Terry  followed  each  other,  at  an  interval  of  but  two 
days,  to  their  heavenly  home.  My  colleague,  the  Rev. 
Mr.  Dwight,  attended  divine  service  on  Sabbath  after- 
noon, and  was  a corpse  next  morning.  Mrs.  Cherry, 
and  Mrs.  North  were  called  away  during  the  same 
week.  When  Heber  wrote  those  touching  lines — 

“ Death  rides  on  every  passing  breeze, 

And  lurks  in  every  flower ; 

Each  season  has  its  own  disease, 

Its  peril  every  hour,” 

little  did  that  amiable  prelate  imagine  that  he  would 
himself  illustrate  their  meaning,  and  confirm  their 
truth.  I have  recited  them  when  standing  in  the  bath 
room  at  Trichinopoly,  which  he  entered,  in  the  posses- 
sion of  perfect  health  but  to  be  brought  out  a lifeless 
corpse. 

The  comparative  healthfulness  of  the  different 
seasons  is  indicated  by  the  following  table,  con- 
taining the  observations  made  during  seven  years. 
Of  1000  deaths  of  Europeans,  the  proportions  stood 
thus : 


92i 

occurred  in  the  month  of 

January, 

67  i 

u 

a 

F ebruary, 

65  i 

u 

u 

March, 

69i 

u 

u 

April, 

63j 

u 

u 

May, 

54  i 

a 

a 

June, 

20 


INDIA. 


70|  occurred 

in  the  month  of 

July, 

90i  “ 

cc 

August, 

98i  “ 

u 

September, 

104i  “ 

u 

October, 

116*  “ 

a 

November, 

106  “ 

a 

December. 

It  may  seem  extraordinary  that  the  cooler  season  of 
India  is  the  most  pre-judicial  to  health.  I give  the 
reason  in  the  language  of  another  : “Accustomed  to 

a constant  and  profuse  determination  of  moisture  to 
the  skin,  the  cold  season,  causing  a complete  revul- 
sion, occasions  more  unhealthiness  than  any  other,  and 
a dry,  irritable  state  of  the  surface,  which  is  indescrib- 
ably unpleasant.  To  the  old  Indian  it  is  peculiarly 
distressing.”  “I  can  bear  the  chilling  blasts  of  Cale- 
donia,” said  a Scotchman,  “but  this  cold,  I know  not 
ivli at  to  do  with  it” 

A descriptive  view  of  the  leading  cities  and  towns 
of  India,  will  conclude  this  geographical  survey  of 
the  Peninsula. 

LOCALITY  AND  CHARACTERISTICS. 

Calcutta,  situated  on  the  Hoogly,  (a  branch  of  the 
• Ganges)  one  hundred  miles  from  the  Sea,  in  latitude 
22°  30'  North,  and  little  more  than  half  a century 
ago  a petty  village  of  mud  huts,  is  now  the  “ city  of 
palaces,”  the  “ metropolis  of  the  East,”  the  residence 
of  the  Governor- General,  Metropolitan,  with  other 
high  officials,  civil,  military  and  ecclesiastical,  of  the 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 


2i 


East  India  Company,  and  contains  an  estimated  pop- 
ulation of  550,000. 

Madras,  a large  and  fortified  town  on  the  eastern 
coast  in  lat.  13°  5'  North,  and  the  capital  of  the  South- 
ern provinces  was  obtained  by  purchase  from  the 
reigning  prince  in  the  year  1G93,  and  now  numbers 
about  450,000  inhabitants. 

Bombay , the  third  principal  English  town  in  India, 
is  situated  on  an  island  of  the  same  name,  at  about 
200  yards  from  the  western  coast,  in  lat.  18°  56' 
North.  Ceded  by  the  Portuguese  in  1661  it  has  be- 
come eminent  for  its  excellent  harbor,  superior  ship- 
wrights, and  extensive  commerce,  and  comprises,  of 
Hindoos,  Parsees,  Mohamedans,  Portuguese,  Jews, 
and  Armenians  not  far  from  200,000. 

Benares,  the  “ Jerusalem”  of  India,  is  located  on 
the  northern  bank  of  the  Ganges,  in  lat.  25°  30', 
about  460  miles  northeast  from  Calcutta.  The  In- 
dian legends  have  it,  that  this  place  was  originally 
constructed  of  gold,  which,  because  of  the  wickedness 
of  the  people,  has  degenerated  into  mud  and  thatch! 
It  is  esteemed  by  religious  Hindoos  as  “the  most  Holy 
City” — “the  Lotus  of  the  world,  not  founded  on  com- 
mon earth,  but  on  the  point  of  Siva’s  trident,  a place 
so  sacred  that  even  a beaf-eater , if  he  die  there,  (hav- 
ing been  charitable  to  the  Brahmins)  is  sure  of  salva- 
tion.” The  resort  of  pilgrims  the  country  over,  and 
a mart  for  very  extensive  commerce  it  contains  a pop- 
ulation of  Hindoos,  Mohammedans,  Turks,  Persians 
and  Armenians  to  the  number  of  700,000. 


22 


INDIA. 


Delhi , the  ancient  capital  of  the  Mohammedan  em- 
pire in  India,  lies  upon  the  river  Jumna,  in  lat.  28° 
40',  and  900  miles  N.  E.  from  Calcutta.  Ruins  of 
splendid  palaces,  lofty  gateways,  and  noble  mansions, 
covering  an  area  of  twenty  miles,  attest  its  former 
grandeur.  The  Badshahi  Mahal,  built  by  the  Empe- 
ror Shah  Jehan,  and  still  the  residence  of  the  royal 
family,  retains  its  form  and  beauty — the  boastful  in- 
scription surmounting  the  State  presence-chamber, 
“ If  there  be  a paradise  on  earth , it  is  this,  it  is  this," 
remaining  legible  as  when  first  engraved.  With  a 
population,  in  the  time  of  Aurungzebe,  of  not  less  than 
two  millions,  it  has  diminished,  in  these  later  years, 
to  about  250,000 

Agra,  at  one  time  the  capital  of  the  Moghul  em- 
pire, and  one  of  the  most  splendid  cities  of  India, 
stands  on  the  river  Jumna,  in  lat.  27°,  and  about  fifty 
miles  south  from  Delhi.  The  Taj  Mahal,  an  edifice 
erected  by  Shah  Jehan,  is  considered  the  most  perfect 
specimen  of  oriental  architecture  in  existence.  Its 
present  importance  is  derived  from  its  being  the  resi- 
dence of  the  Lieut.  Governor  of  the  north-western 
provinces  of  the  East  India  Company’s  dominions. 

Ahmenabad,  formerly  a city  of  great  opulence  and 
commerce,  lies  on  the  river  Subrmuttee,  in  lat.  23°, 
321  miles  north  from  Bombay,  in  the  Guzerat  district, 
and  contains  an  estimated  population  of  100,000. 

Ahmednuggur — one  of  the  principal  stations  of  tho 
British  government  in  the  Deccan,  is  situated  in  lat. 


GEOGRAPHCAL  SURVEY. 


23 


19°  12',  with  inhabitants  to  tho  number  of  about 

200,000. 

Allahabad , at  the  confluence  of  the  Jumna  and 
Ganges,  in  lat.  25°  27',  is  maintained  by  the  Brit 
ish  government,  as  the  chief  military  depot  of  the  up 
per  provinces.  Its  position  at  the  junction  of  two  sa- 
cred streams  gives  to  it  unusual  sanctity,  and  suicide 
at  the  spot  where  the  rivers  unite  is  a frequent  prac- 
tice. The  travelling  distance  from  Benares  is  about 
75  miles  eastward. 

Aurangabad , the  favorite  residence  of  Aurungzebe 
when  viceroy  of  the  Deccan,  is  situated  in  lat.  19° 
54',  and  about  150  miles  east  from  Bombay. 

Bangalore  is  a large  fortified  town,  upon  the 
first  summit  of  the  Eastern  Ghats,  and  about  200 
miles  fom  Madras.  The  healthfulness  of  the  climate 
causes  it  to  be  much  resorted  to  by  invalids  from  the 
low  country. 

Bejapoor,  in  lat.  17°,  was,  in  former  times,  one  of 
the  largest  cities  in  Asia,  the  fort  measuring  eight 
miles  round  the  outside.  The  principal  object  of 
interest  now  remaining,  is  the  Mausoleum  of  Moham- 
med Shah,  a plain  square  building  surmounted  by  a 
dome  of  350  feet  in  circumference,  and  visible  four- 
teen  miles  distant. 

Calicut , on  the  Western  coast,  in  lat.  11°  15',  is 
celebrated  as  being  the  landing  place,  and  first  settle- 
ment of  the  Portuguese  in  1498. 

Cuddalore,  a town  on  the  Eastern  coast,  12  miles 
South  from  Pondicherry,  derives  historical  import- 


24 


INDIA. 


auce  from  its  being  the  locality  of  the  third  English 
factory  established  in  the  country. 

Dindigul  a populous  village,  about  40  miles  north 
from  the  city  of  Madura,  is  the  seat  of  one  of  the 
Missionary  Stations  under  the  direction  of  the  Amer- 
ican Board  of  Foreign  Missions. 

Goa,  situated  upon  a small  island  on  the  Eastern 
coast,  in  lat.  15°  30',  and  once  the  most  splendid  city 
in  India,  and  for  many  years  capital  of  the  Portuguese 
dominions  in  the  East,  retains  but  a shadow  of  its  for- 
mer greatness.  The  city,  with  a territory  of  40  miles 
in  length  and  20  in  breadth,  still  belongs  to  the  crown 
of  Portugal. 

Hyderabad,  standing  on  the  south  side  of  the 
Moosan,  in  lat.  17°  is  the  capital  of  a Mussulman  gov- 
ernment, the  principal  resort  of  the  Mohammedan 
families  of  the  Deccan,  and  contains  a population  of 
about  200,000. 

Juggernaut,  on  the  Bengal  coast,  in  lat.  19°  49',  is 
one  of  the  most  celebrated  places  of  Hindoo  pilgrim- 
age in  India,  and  multitudes  annually  resort  thither 
to  be  present  at  the  bathing  and  car  festivals. 

Kuttack  is  a large,  well-built  town,  in  lat.  20°  27', 
containing,  of  native  inhabitants,  not  far  from  40,000. 

Loodiana  and  Ferozepoor  arc  important  stations  of 
the  British  territories,  on  the  north-western  frontier, 
both  in  lat.  30,  and  the  centre  of  Missionary  estab- 
lishments under  the  Presbyterian  Church  of  America. 

Madura,  (pronounced  Madjiira)  the  former  capital 
of  a Hindoo  kingdom  is  situated  in  lat.  9’  55',  on 


GEOGRAPHICAL  SURVEY. 


25 


the  south  side  of  the  river  Vygaroo,  and  contains  somo 
of  the  most  extraordinary  specimens  of  Hindoo  archi- 
tecture now  extant ; among  which  is  the  temple  of 
Tiroomul-Naik,  measuring  312  feet  in  length,  and 
covered  with  descriptive  sculptures.  Travelling  dis- 
tance south  from  Madras,  292  miles.  It  is  known  to 
the  people  of  this  country  as  the  centre  of  a success- 
ful Missionary  Station  ; having  connected  with  it, 
Dindigul,  Teramungulum,  Tirapovanum,  Sivagunga, 
and  Maloor. 

Moorshedabad , in  lat.  24,  was  the  capital  of  Ben- 
gal until  superseded  by  Calcutta,  and  contains  a 
present  population  of  160,000. 

Nellore , a populous  town,  about  100  miles  north 
from  Madras,  is  the  seat  of  the  Am.  Baptist  Mission. 

Seringapatam,  memorable  in  the  wars  of  Hyder 
and  Tippoo,  Cornwallis  and  Harris,  is  situated  in  lat. 
12,  and,  from  being  one  of  great  populousness  and  im- 
portance, has  been  almost  abandoned,  on  account  of 
its  remarkable  unhealthiness. 

Tinnevelly , a region  just  north  from  Cape  Comorin, 
is  agreeably  known  as  the  centre  of  a most  success- 
ful Missionary  establishment  of  the  English  Episco- 
palians. 

Trichinopoly,  a large  and  populous  town  on  the 
Cauvery  River,  was  much  noted  in  the  wars  between 
the  English  and  the  French,  having  in  its  centre  a 
rock  300  feet  high,  on  which  are  a pagoda  and  other 

buildings,  and  is  at  present  one  of  the  principal  military 
2 


26 


INDIA. 


stations  of  the  British  government.  Situated  in  lat. 
10°  30';  it  is  207  miles  south  from  Madras. 

Tanjore , near  to  Trichinopoly,  was,  at  one  time, 
the  chief  seat  of  learning  in  Southern  India,  and  is 
still  memorable  as  the  residence  of  the  Missionary 
Swartz. 

Tranquebar,  just  east  from  Tanjore  was  settled  by 
the  Danes  in  the  year  16.16,  and  sold  to  the  English 
about  four  years  since. 

Pondicherry , on  the  coast,  about  90  miles  south 
from  Madras  is  a well-built  city,  belonging  to  the 
French,  and  was  once  the  most  splendid  European 
settlement  in  India. 

The  reader  will  do  the  author  injustice  by  suppos- 
ing that  the  statements  now  made  respecting  the  ge- 
ography of  India,  have  had  for  their  object  the  impart- 
ing of  information  never  before  met  with.  The  design 
has  been  the  rather  the  bringing  to  his  recollection  par- 
tially forgotten  truths,  or  effaced  impressions,  that 
thus  the  way  may  be  prepared  for  a more  interested 
perusal  of  the  pages  which  are  to  follow.  India  has 
now  been  entered — its  mountains,  rivers,  plains,  and 
cities  have  been  hastily  surveyed — the  way  is  thus 
cleared  for  a nearer  view  of  its  productions,  history, 
and  national  manners  and  customs. 


4 


CHAPTER  II. 

NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 

Introductory  remarks — Elephants — Rajah  of  Mysore's  State  Carriage — 
Rhinoceros — Wild  Boar — Camel — Dromedary — Bear  (anecdote  of 
an  Indian  Hunter  and  Mountain  Bear)  — Deer,  various  species — Goat — 
Sheep — Buffalo — Ox — Cow — Brahminee  Bull — Ganjal — Amee — Yak 
— Horse — Ass — Mule — Dziggetai — Monkey,  various  tribes  (anecdote 
of  a Monkey  and  flock  of  Crows) — Bat — Porcupine — Sloth — Armadil- 
lo— Mangoose — Loris — Squirrel — Chipmuck — Rats — Ratel  — Rabbits 
Martin — Civet  — Ichneumon — Tiger  — Lion  — Panther  — Leopard  — 
Cheetah  (mode  of  use  by  hunters) — Cat — Jackal — Hyena — Lynx — 
Thibet  Dog — Native  Dog — Lizzard — Gecko — Scorpion — Centipede — 
Tarantula — Cobra-de-Capella — Tic  Polonga — Mountain  Snake — Croc- 
odile— Anaconda — Tortoise — Frog — Insects  (scene  presented  when  en- 
tering a long-closed  house) — White  Ant  (a  choice  dish) — Ant  Hills  as 
seen  by  Bp.  Heber.  Birds  and  Fishes,  a large  variety  of  each  Class — 
Botany,  including  Vegetable,  Fruit  and  Forest  Trees,  Flowers — Min- 
erals, &c. 

India  abounds  with  illustrations  of  zoological,  bo- 
tanical, and  mineralogical  science.  Almost  touch- 
ing the  equator  on  the  south,  and  on  the  north, 
losing  itself  in  snowy  peaks  of  unmeasured  height ; 
presenting  vast  wastes  of  arid  and  barren  sand  inter- 
sected with  large  tracts  of  jungle  and  forest,  where 
the  foot  of  man  has  seldom  trod  ; with  a climate  that 
passes  from  the  extreme  of  tropical  heat  to  arctic  cold, 


28 


INDIA. 


the  peninsula  is  an  ‘ epitome  of  the  world,’  and  its 
natural  productions  answer  in  variety  and  value  to 
this  diversity  of  climate  and  soil. 

Beginning  with  animated  nature , the  Elephant 
first  claims  our  attention.  This  large  and  noble  ani- 
mal abounds  throughout  the  moist  forests  of  South- 
ern Bengal,  a portion  of  the  western  Ghats  and  the 
base  of  the  Himalaya  Mountains.  Vast  droves  ten- 
ant the  forests  of  Ceylon,  where  they  are  captured  for 
their  massive  trunks  of  valued  ivory,  and  for  trans- 
portation to  the  continent,  there  to  become  the  auxil- 
iary of  armies,  the  pride  of  princes,  and  the  servant  of 
merchants.  When  at  Bangalore,  I counted  seventy 
elephants  of  various  sizes  and  age,  attached  to  the  pal- 
ace of  the  Rajah,  several  of  which  were  trained  to 
draw  the  royal  chariot.  In  the  terriples  of  the  land, 
may  be  seen  from  one  to  ten  of  these  animals,  ready 
for  use  in  imparting  eclat  to  religious  processions  and 
marriage  festivities.  We  are  told  that  at  Vizier  Ali’s 
wedding,  in  the  year  1796,  there  was  a grand  proces- 
sion of  twelve  hundred  elephants  ; of  which  a hundred 
had  howdahs,  magnificently  adorned  with  silver  trap- 
pings ; while  that  upon  the  animal  which  the  Nabob 
rode  was  made  of  massive  gold,  richly  set  with  pre- 
cious stones.  The  elephant  has  been  much  used  by 
Europeans  and  native  princes,  in  hunting  the  tiger, 
but  the  sport  is  attended  with  great  danger,  and  is  re- 
pulsive to  this  naturally  mild  and  timid  animal, 
though  in  the  contest  it  is  usually  the  victor — receiv- 
ing its  enemy  on  its  tusks,  tossing  it  into  the  air,  and 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


21) 


standing  ready  to  stamp  its  ponderous  foot  upon  it  so 
soon  as  it  reaches  the  ground. 

The  Rhinoceros  exceeds  the  elephant  in  clumsiness 
of  figure,  and  is  not  much  inferior  in  size  and  weight. 
The  leading  feature  of  interest  in  its  physical  struc- 
ture, is  the  horn  vpon  its  nose,  which  projects,  not 
unfrequently,  thirty  inches  upward.  So  long  as  the 
animal  is  quiet,  this  appendage  lies  loose  between  the 
nostrils ; but  when  excited,  the  muscular  tension  is 
so  great  that  it  becomes  immovably  fixed,  and  can  be 
darted  into  a tree  to  the  depth  of  several  inches. 
From  the  earliest  times,  this  horn  has  been  regarded 
as  an  antidote  against  poison.  Goblets  made  from 
it  were  much  in  use  among  the  Hindoo  princes,  be- 
cause, when  poisonous  liquids  were  poured  into  them, 
the  noxious  qualities  were,  it  was  thought,  certain  of 
betrayal,  by  a brisk  effervescence.  In  some  of  the 
northern  districts,  attempts  have  been  made  to  render 
this  animal  available  for  carrying  travellers  and  bur- 
dens, but  with  little  success.  Bishop  Heber  mentions 
meeting  with  one  which  was  so  tame  as  to  allow  a 
howdah  and  driver  upon  its  back.  The  rhinoceros 
lives  in  Bengal,  and  the  lower  ranges  of  the  Hima- 
layahs ; feeding  on  coarse  grass  and  other  vegetable 
substances,  especially  those  containing  much  succulent 
matter ; seeking  amidst  mud  and  water  protection 
from  the  scorching  heat ; disposed  to  be  at  peace  with 
the  tiger  and  its  other  neighbors,  but  when  provoked, 
becoming  a furious  and  deadly  foe.  A few,  only, 
have  been  brought  to  the  western  continent,  the  ex- 


30 


INDIA. 


pense  of  transportation  being  great,  its  appetite  vora- 
cious, and  hunger  throws  it  into  a paroxysm  of  rage. 

The  Wild  Boar  still  roams  the  jungles  of  India, 
and  to  hunt  it  is  one  of  the  field  sports  to  which  for- 
eigners are  enthusiastically  attached  ; though  the  ar- 
dor has  somewhat  abated  during  later  years. 

Camels  are  found  in  large  droves  throughout  Guze- 
rat,  Patna,  and  Mooltan ; and,  like  the  elephant,  are 
made  serviceable  to  the  merchant,  the  traveller,  and 
the  warrior.  The  East  India  Company  maintain  a 
corps  of  Dromedaries , mounted  by  two  men  each,  and 
armed  with  musketoons  and  swivels. 

Two  species  of  Bear  are  common  in  India,  of 
which  the  kind  inhabiting  the  Ghats  is  hardly  exceed- 
ed in  ferocity  of  temper  by  the  tiger  or  hyena  ; and 
the  second,  or  Ursine,  which  makes  its  appearance  in 
the  forests  of  Oude,  Orissa,  the  Carnatic  and  Coro- 
mandel, is  far  more  mild  and  harmless.  A northern 
traveller  gives  us  an  account  of  an  escape  from  the 
fatal  embrace  of  the  former  species,  which  indicates 
much  forethought  and  ingenuity  on  the  part  of  his 
native  attendant.  I present  it  in  the  words  of  the 
writer.  “Upon  gaining  the  summit  of  a hill  which 
overhung  a precipice,  a bear  started  from  a recess  in 
a neighboring  covert,  and  advanced,  evidently  with 
sinister  intentions,  towards  us.  I was  about  to  fire 
when  one  of  my  guides  motioned  me  to  desist,  giving 
me  to  understand  that  he  would  attack  the  enemy 
unarmed.  Almost  upon  the  extreme  edge  of  the  pre- 
cipice, stood  a tall  tree  with  vertical  branches,  very 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


31 


tough  and  elastic.  The  hill-man  approached  the  bear, 
and  thus  withdrew  its  attention  from  me,  toward  him- 
self, when  he  adroitly  sprang  upon  the  tree,  as  nim- 
bly followed  by  the  exasperated  beast.  Having  reached 
the  upper  branches,  the  man  slipped  a strong  cord 
over  the  top  of  the  limb  upon  which  he  stood,  at  the 
same  time  dropping  the  reverse  end  upon  the  ground. 
This  was  instantly  seized  by  another  native,  who, 
pulling  with  all  his  strength,  drew  the  point  of  tho 
bough  downward  until  the  branch  projected  nearly 
in  a horizontal  line  from  the  stem.  This  being 
done,  the  mountaineer  crept  cautiously  as  near  the 
extremity  as  he  safely  could,  followed  as  cautious- 
ly by  the  bear : but  so  soon  as  he  saw  his  angry  foe 
upon  the  bent  bough  he  dexterously  let  himself  down 
by  a cord  to  the  ground.  The  bear  thus  unexpectedly 
deprived  of  its  victim  made  an  effort  to  retrace  its 
steps,  when  no  sooner  had  it  relaxed  its  grasp  of  the 
bough  for  this  purpose,  than  the  hill-man  suddenly 
cut.  the  cord,  which  had  been  securely  tied  to  a tree, 
and  the  depressed  branch  instantly  gained  its  origi- 
nal position  with  an  irresistible  momentum.  The 
suddenness  and  vigor  of  the  recoil  shook  the  disap- 
pointed and  angry  creature  from  its  hold,  elancing  it, 
like  the  fragment  of  a rock,  into  the  empty  air,  from 
whence,  uttering  a stifled  groan,  it  was  hurled  over 
the  precipice,  and  falling  with  a dull  crash  upon  the 
rocks  below,  became  food  for  beasts  and  birds  of  prey.” 
Bears  of  smaller  size  and  milder  temper  are  led  about 
the  country  with  trained  monkeys  and  goats,  soliciting 


32 


INDIA. 


attention  by  their  absurd  postures  and  antic  move- 
ments, by  which  not  a little  gain  comes  to  the  owners 
from  the  amused  and  astonished  multitude. 

Of  the  Deer  tribe  India  contains  many  species. 
The  Antelope , which  occupies  the  place  of  Capricorn 
in  the  Indian  zodiac,  and  in  size  and  form  resembles 
the  Arabian  gazelle,  the  well-known  emblem  of  maiden 
beauty,  is  spread  over  the  entire  peninsula,  and  is  re- 
markable for  elasticity  of  bound,  symmetry  of  figure, 
and  soft  lustre  of  its  full  and  hazle  eye.  The  Musk 
deer  is  a nocturnal  animal  of  a solitary  disposi- 
tion, dwelling  among  the  elevated  ranges  of  the 
Himalaya  Mountains.  The  perfume  for  which  it  is 
hunted  is  contained  in- a bag  beneath  its  belly,  and  is 
removed  from  the  creature  when  alive,  otherwise  it  is 
taken  up  by  the  absorbents,  and  thus  lost  to  the  hun- 
ter, and  the  flesh  throughout  rendered  unfit  for  food. 
The  Ceylon  deer  is  the  smallest  of  the  cervine  tribe, 
being  about  the  size  of  a fox,  and  furnished  with  ex- 
quisitely-formed legs,  scarcely  larger  than  a lady's  fin- 
ger. The  Nepaul  stag  nearly  resembles  the  red  deer 
of  America.  The  Rusa  or  Tamboo  deer  is  antlered, 
strong  and  brave,  and  roams  free  and  fearless  amid 
the  jungles  of  Bengal  and  Ceylon.  The  Spotted  Axis 
is  similar  to  the  fallow  deer,  and  abounds  in  Bengal 
and  on  the  banks  of  the  Ganges.  The  Ilog  deer  is 
found  in  the  Rohilla  country  and  Dccca  districts, 
roaming  in  heavy  grass  jungles,  feeding  at  night,  and 
sleeping  during  the  day.  It  is  easily  irritated  and  fe- 
rocious in  defence.  The  common  Roebuck  makes  its 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


33 


home  among  the  crags  and  ravines  of  the  western  fron- 
tier. The  White  Oryx , a species  of  the  antelope,  with 
a bulky  body,  slender  legs  and  dark  mane,  is  met  with 
upon  the  banks  of  the  Indus.  The  Chira , another 
species  of  the  antelope,  and  an  inhabitant  of  the  Hi- 
malayas is  the  unicorn  of  traditionary  existence. 
The  Chickara , or  four-horned  antelope,  which  inha- 
bits the  forests  and  hilly  districts  of  Bengal  and  Ba- 
har  is  small  in  height,  fleet  in  movement,  and  timid 
in  disposition.  The  Nyt-ghaic , or  blue  cow,  a dweller 
in  the  central  provinces  and  base  of  the  Himalayas,  is 
large  and  strong,  and  considered  in  past  times  as  royal 
game  to  be  hunted  only  by  princes.  The  Giraffe  is 
occasionally  met  with  in  the  north-western  provinces. 

Among  the  Goat-tribe , by  far  the  most  noted 
and  valuable  is  the  species  spread  throughout  Thi- 
bet, and  in  the  valley  of  Cashmere,  from  the  wool 
of  which  are  made  the  shawls  of  world-wide  fame. 
The  Empress  Aurungzebe  had  one  of  so  delicate  tex- 
ture that  she  could  draw  it  through  the  ring  of  her  fin- 
ger. Goats  of  a more  common  kind  are  numerous 
throughout  the  country,  being  kept  for  their  flesh, 
milk  and  skins.  Sheep  are  numerous  and  their  flesh 
much  used  as  an  article  of  food. 

The  Indian  Buffalo  is  large  and  ungainly,  with 
long,  rough  horns,  lying  back  almost  upon  its  shoul- 
ders, its  dark  skin,  covered  with  hair  short  and 
wiry,  its  eyes  dull  and  unmeaning,  its  gait  slow  and 
measured.  But  for  all  these  disagreeable  and  re- 
pulsive features  there  is  the  compensation  of  great 
2* 


34 


INDfA. 


utility  for  the  plow  and  heavy  draught,  while  the  fe- 
male furnishes  milk  from  which  is  made  a butter  much 
used  ir  culinary  preparations.  The  buffalo  is  well- 
nigh  amphibious,  delighting  in  the  long,  rank  pas- 
ture which  springs  up  in  moist  and  undrained  lands, 
and  lying  for  hours  submerged  almost  to  the  muzzle 
beneath  the  cooling  waters. 

The  Indian  Ox  resembles  the  American  in  varieties 
of  color  and  size,  but  with  the  exceptions  of  having  a 
bunch  above  the  shoulders,  and  a dewlap  hanging  half 
way  to  the  ground.  Those  used  in  the  artillery  corps 
and  by  travellers  are  large  and  strong,  moving  at  tho 
rate  of  three  to  four  miles  per  hour. 

Cows  yield  much  less  milk,  and  that  of  an  inferior 
quality  in  the  eastern  than  western  continent.  Those 
of  English  breed  are  at  times  to  be  met  with  among 
Europeans,  but  seldom  among  the  natives.  The  cow, 
as  first  created  of  all  animals,  is  held  in  highest  vene- 
ration by  pious  Hindoos,  and  to  kill  it  is  the  last 
of  pardonable  offences.  Several  years  ago,  a king 
of  Travancore,  in  order  to  atone  for  his  cruelties, 
caused  a colossal  golden  cow  to  be  made,  through  the 
body  of  which  he  passed  with  profoundest  reverence, 
and  made  it  the  era  from  which  all  his  edicts  were 
dated.  The  rock  from  beneath  which  the  Oranges 
takes  its  rise  is  supposed  to  be  a petrified  cow,  and  the 
orifice  is  called  the  cow's  mouth .” 

The  Brahminee  Bull  claims  a special  notice. 
These  creatures  are  consecrated  when  calves  to  th*» 
divinity  Siva,  whose  emblem  is  usually  painted  upon 


1 

Bplii  : 

$ 

If  )$\  iV  " 

NATURAL  PRODUCTION'S  OF  INDIA. 


35 


their  haunches  and  forehead.  They  are  allowed  full 
liberty  to  go  where  they  please  and  feed  upon  what 
they  like.  One  is  always  to  be  seen  near  the  bazaar, 
where  it  unceremoniously  appropriates  to  itself  grain, 
grass,  hay,  or  whatever  takes  its  fancy  ; the  owner 
bearing  the  depredation  with  religious  patience,  be- 
lieving that  to  inflict  upon  it  a blow  would  ensure  the 
divine  displeasure.  They  are  the  greatest  pests  with 
which  the  country  is  annoyed,  and  respect  to  national 
prejudices  alone  saves  them  from  the  fatal  bullet  of 
the  vexed  foreigner. 

India  presents  many  species  of  Wild  Oxen,  some  of 
which  have  been  domesticated  and  made  useful  to  the 
agriculturist  and  traveller.  Of  these  the  Ganjal  is 
most  important,  resembling  in  size  and  shape  the  En- 
glish bull.  A species  called  the  Arnee  inhabits  the 
southern  base  of  the  Himalayah  Mountains,  and  ex- 
ceeds in  size  any  of  the  oattle  kind  yet  discovered. 
One  shot  near  Sangree  Island  weighed  2,000  pounds, 
though  pronounced  by  ship  butchers  but  two  years 
old.  Some  of  the  native  princes  keep  them,  under  the 
name  of  fighting  bullocks. 

The  Yak  roams  over  the  mountainous  regions  of 
Bootan  and  Thibet,  and  is  domesticated  throughout  the 
central  parts  of  the  Peninsula.  The  horse-tails,  as 
they  are  commonly  called,  used  as  standards  by  the 
Persians  and  Turks,  are  made  of  hair  (dyed  of  a fine 
crimson)  from  the  tail  of  this  animal. 

Horses  are  numerous  throughout  India,  those  of 
highest  value  being  brought  from  Arabia,  the  Cape  of 


36 


INDIA. 


G-ood  Hope  and  England.  The  native  horse  is  small, 
ugly  and  slow,  its  use  being  confined  almost  wholly  to 
the  aborigines.  Ponies  imported  from  Pegu  and 
Acheen  are  in  very  general  use,  the  former  resembling 
in  shape,  strength  and  temper  the  Canadian  pony — the 
latter  that  of  our  western  prairie.  The  value  of  a 
first  class  Arabian  or  Cape  steed  varies  from  two 
hundred  dollars  to  four  hundred,  though  one  of  suffi- 
cient excellence  for  family  purposes  may  be  purchased 
for  one  hundred  and  fifty.  A civilian  of  rank,  with  a 
family,  keeps  from  three  to  six  horses,  the  climate  re- 
quiring great  care  in  their  use.  Each  animal  has  a 
groom,  who  not  oijly  attends  to  it  when  stabled,  but 
who  runs  by  its  side  when  the  gentleman  goes  out 
for  a ride,  and  is  ready  to  receive  the  reins  when  he 
alights.  Horses  are  not  used  for  drawing  conveyances 
except  within  the  city  or  town  limits,  long  journeys 
being  performed  in  palanquins,  or  spring  carts,  drawn 
by  oxen. 

In  the  northern  districts  the  traveller  meets  with 
the  Wild  Ass,  where  it  frequents  the  salt  marshes  and' 
open  plains  of  Cutch  and  Gtuzerat. 

Mules  are  common,  the  country  over,  and  are  ser- 
viceable in  conveying  burdens,  especially  salt  and  rice; 
— a useful  but  abused  animal.  Far  in  the  north,  the 
Dziggetai  is  met  with  in  large  droves.  Quick  and 
watchful,  it  takes  alarm  at  the  least  appearance  of 
danger,  and,  on  the  approach  of  the  enemy,  skims  the 
desert,  clears  the  hills,  and  bids  defiance  to  pursuit. 

Turning  to  the  quadrumanous  order  of  animals,  the 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


37 


Monkey  claims  our  special  consideration.  With  this 
creature  India  greatly  abounds.  In  addition  to  a 
favorable  climate  and  agreeable  food,  a reason  for  this 
abundance  may  be  found  in  the  fact  that  the  monkey 
is  held  in  religious  esteem.  Temples  of  magni- 
ficent structure  and  gorgeous  decoration  have  been 
erected  in  its  honor,  one  of  which,  when  plun- 
dered by  the  Portugese  on  the  island  of  Ceylon, 
contained  the  tooth  of  an  ape,  encased  in  pure  gold. 
In  such  esteem  was  this  relic  held  by  the  natives, 
that  they  offered  700,000  ducats  for  its  ransom.  At 
Ahmenabad,  the  Capital  of  Gruzerat,  there  are  three 
hospitals  for  monkeys,  where  the  sick  and  lame  aro 
fed  and  nursed  by  salaried  medical  attendants.  City, 
town,  and  village,  throng  with  these  mischievous, 
chattering,  and  amusing  specimens  of  mock  humanity 
When  a resident  of  Madura,  I saw  them  by  hundreds, 
fearlessly  scaling  the  lofty  pagodas  which  grace  that 
ancient  city,  perched  upon  the  dwellings  of  the 
native  inhabitants,  engaged  in  earnest  and  noisy  dis- 
cussions, or  committing  depredations  by  tearing  off 
the  tiles,  and  grinning  at  the  surprised  and  vexed 
inmates  thus  unceremoniously  exposed  to  sun  and  rain  ; 
— all  this,  in  part,  to  satisfy  hunger,  but  the  rather 
as  it  would  seem,  to  gratify  an  instinctive  desire  for 
mischief  and  fun.  The  following  scene  was  witnessed 
but  a short  time  since,  at  Tillicherry,  and  is  thus 
stated  by  the  beholder  himself.  “ A few  yards 
from  the  house  where  I was  stopping,  a thick 
pole,  at  least  thirty  feet  high,  had  been  fixed  into 


33 


INDIA. 


the  earth,  round  which  was  an  iron  ring,  and  to 
this  was  attached  a strong  chain,  of  considerable 
length,  fastened  to  a collar  round  the  monkey’s  mid- 
dle. The  ring  being  loose,  easily  slid  upon  the  pole 
when  he  ascended  or  descended.  He  was  in  the  habit 
of  taking  his  station  upon  the  top,  where  he  seemed 
perched,  as  if  to  enjoy  the  beauties  of  the  prospect 
around.  The  crows,  which  in  India  are  very  abun- 
dant and  audacious,  taking  advantage  of  his  elevated 
position,  had  been  in  the  daily  habit  of  robbing  him  of 
his  food,  which  was  placed  every  morning  and  evening 
at  the  foot  of  the  pole.  To  this,  he  had  vainly 
expressed  his  dislike,  by  chattering  and  other  indica- 
tions of  his  displeasure  equally  ineffectual.  Finding 
that  he  was  perfectly  unheeded,  he  adopted  a plan 
of  revenge  equally  ingenious  and  successful.  One 
morning,  when  his  tormentors  had  been  particularly 
troublesome,  he  appeared  as  if  seriously  indisposed. 
No  sooner  were  his  ordinary  rations  placed  at  the  foot 
of  the  bamboo,  than  tho  crows  watching  their  oppor- 
tunity, descended  in  great  numbers,  and  began  as 
usual  to  demolish  his  provisions.  The  monkey  now 
began  to  slide  down  the  pole  by  slow  degrees,  as  if  the 
effort  were  painful  to  him,  and  reaching  the  ground, 
rolled,  about  for  some  time  in  apparently  great  agony, 
until  he  found  himself  close  by  the  vessel  containing 
his  food,  where  ho  lay  in  a state  of  seeming  insensi- 
bility, waiting  a favorable  opportunity  of  perfecting 
his  scheme.  With  one  eye  but  half  closed,  he  sees  a 
crow  approaching  ; it  nears  him  ; it  stretches  out  its 


NATURAL  PRODUCTION'S  OF  INDIA.  • 


3fl 


neok,  when,  lo ! it  is  seized  by  the  wrathful  avenger, 
who,  after  a few  preliminary  grimaces  and  chatter- 
ing?, deliberately  placed  the  captive  between  his  knees, 
and  began  to  pluck  it,  with  tho  most  humorous  grav- 
ity. When  he  had  completely  stripped  it,  except  the 
large  feathers  in  the  pinions  and  tail,  he  flung  it  into 
the  air  as  high  as  his  strength  would  permit,  and, 
after  flapping  its  wings  for  a few  seconds,  it  fell  on  tho 
ground  with  a stunning  shock.  The  other  crows, 
which  had  been  fortunate  enough  to  escape  a similar 
castigation,  now  surrounded  it  and  immediately  picked 
the  poor  thing  to  death.  The  expression  of  joy  on  the 
monkey’s  countenance  was  altogether  indescribable. 
Never  again  was  he  molested  by  those  voracious 
intruders.” 

After  what  I have  personally  observed  of  this  ani- 
mal, I am  prepared  to  attach  full  credence  to  this  sin- 
gular incident.  My  friend,  the  Rev.  Mr  Crane,  of 
Dindigul,  had  a large  black  monkey  with  a face  most 
tastefully  decorated  with  whisker,  mustache,  and 
like  genteel  appendage,  which,  if  placed  in  similar 
circumstances,  would  fully  equal  his  Tillicherry 
brother.  The  species  most  common  in  India,  are  the 
Gibbon , or  long-armed,  the  Entellus , or  long-tailed, 
the  Wanderer,  and  the  Togul.  A few  specimens  of 
the  Ourang  Outang  have  been  met  with  in  the  cen- 
tral regions. 

Bats  of  various  sizes  are  numerous,  and  to  the  trav- 
eller, in  his  bungalow,  exceedingly  annoying.  Some 
of  them  are  furnished  with  wings,  which,  when  out- 


40 


INDIA. 


stretched,  measure  five  fact  from  tip  to  tip,  and  are 
very  destructive  to  fruit-trees  in  Guzerat  a_id  on  the 
Coromandel  Coast. 

Porcupines  extensively  inhabit  the  mountainous 
ranges,  and  the  long  quills  with  which  they  are  fur- 
nished, and  which  they  annually  shed,  are  gathered 
by  the  natives,  and  used  for  beautifying  boxes  and 
dresses,  in  the  same  way  as  by  our  American  Indians, 
but  more  perfectly  wrought. 

On  different  occasions  I purchased  a Sloth  and  an 
Armadillo , both  of  which  I kept  for  several  weeks, 
observing  their  habits,  which  were  curious  and  instruc- 
tive. In  Bengal,  and  along  the  eastern  shore,  is  found 
the  Tivo-tocd  Sloth  ; and  in  Bahar  there  is  a variety 
which  has  a considerable  resemblance  to  the  bear,  and 
lives  on  ants. 

The  Mongoose  is  about  the  size  of  a weasel,  and  is 
the  only  creature  that  dare  attack  the  cobra  de  ca- 
pella.  If  bitten,  it  runs  into  the  neighboring  wood, 
feeds,  it  is  thought,  upon  some  antidote,  and  returns 
to  the  combat.  The  animal  is  domesticated,  and' 
trained  to  guard  the  sleeping  infant  from  snakes  and 
vermin,  while  the  mother  is  at  work  in  the  field. 

The  Bengal  l oris , or  slow  lemur,  is  about  the  size 
of  a small  cat,  of  a palo  brown  color,  and,  during 
most  of  the  day,  sleeps,  or  lies  without  motion,  like 
the  sloth,  of  which  some  consider  it  but  another 
species. 

Among  various  kinds  of  Squirrel , the  Malabar  holds 
a first  rank.  It  measures  from  fourteen  to  twenty 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


41 


inches  in  length,  and  is  furnished  with  a fine  bushy 
tail,  and  moves  with  much  ease  and  gracefulness. 

Chipmucks  are  abundant,  as  also  various  species  of 
Rats  and  Mice.  Among  the  former  of  which,  is  the 
Rate/,  which  is  very  troublesome  in  disinterring  and 
feeding  upon  the  buried  dead. 

Hares , Rabbits,  and  Martins,  find  a home  in  the 
northern  districts,  while  Civets,  Badgers,  Racoons , and 
Ichneumons  hunt  the  rats,  bats,  and  larger  serpents. 

Among  the  Carnivorous  Quadrupeds  of  India,  the 
Tiger  holds  a distinguished  place.  This  most  agile 
and  daring  of  beasts,  which  forms  a prominent  fea- 
ture in  the  zoology  of  that  land,  makes  its  homo 
amid  the  jungles  of  Bengal,  and  the  mountain  ranges 
of  the  northern  and  central  districts,  where  it  roams 
free  and  fearless,  finding  no  enemy  daring  to  measure 
strength  with  it,  except,  occasionally,  the  elephant 
and  rhinoceros.  In  the  the  province  of  Ivhandesh  one 
thousand  and  thirty-two  of  these  fierce  creatures  were 
killed  between  the  years  1825  and  1829,  as  given  in 
official  reports.  To  hunt  the  tiger,  mounted  upon 
the  lofty  elephant,  was  once  a favorite  sport  with 
native  princes  and  foreign  residents  ; but  its  extreme 
danger  has  led  to  its  general  abandonment.  The 
bound  of  the  tiger,  when  springing  upon  its  prey,  is 
tremendous,  extending,  as  it  is  said,  to  the  distance  of 
one  hundred  or  more  feet.  It  is  from  this  spring  that 
the  animal  gets  his  name.  He,  as  it  were,  “ shoots 
himself  at  his  prey  and  tiger,  in  the  Arminian  lan- 
guage, signifies  the  arrow — the  name  also  given  to  the 


42 


INDIA. 


River  Tigris,  on  account  of  its  velocity.  In  many 
of  the  Indian  languages,  the  name  of  tiger  is  tippoo. 

Lions  exist  in  vast  numbers  throughout  the  pro- 
vinces of  Saharampoor  and  Loodianah,  some  of  them 
equalling  in  size  those  at  the  Cape.  A maneless 
species  is  so  numerous  in  G-uzerat,  that  an  English 
officer  killed  eleven  in  one  month.  The  Bengal  lion 
has  the  mane  magnificently  developed,  attains  a very 
large  stature,  and  displays  equal  courage  with  that 
of  its  African  relative. 

Panthers  and  Leopards  tenant  the  jungly  and  hilly 
districts  of  the  peninsula,  and  are  hunted  for  their 
beautiful  skins,  which  are  used  by  religious  mendi- 
cants and  Government  officers.  A species  of  leopard 
called  the  Cheetah , with  limbs  long  and  slender,  is 
trained  to  aid  the  hunter  in  his  field  and  jungle  sports. 
One  of  them,  after  being  blinded  and  chained,  is 
placed  upon  a cart  and  carried  far  out  into  the  field, 
and  when  the  hunter  sees  an  antelope  or  deer,  turning 
the  head  of  the  Cheetah  in  that  direction,  he  removes 
the  blinds  and  chains,  allowing  it  to  move,  as  its  in- 
stinct suggests,  slowly  and  stealthily  towards  its  vic- 
tim. When  approaching  sufficiently  near,  it  makes  a 
few  astounding  springs,  seizes  its  prey  by  the  neck, 
and  will  not  relax  its  hold  till  the  owner  entice  it 
away  by  pieces  of  meat  and  a draught  of  fresh  blood. 

Other  of  the  feline  genus,  as  the  Domestic  Cat  and 
the  Nepaul  tiger  cat,  make  their  habitation  in  tho 
Peninsula,  though  to  a limited  extent. 

Of  the  Canine  tribes  inhabiting  India,  a prominent 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


43 


place  belongs  to  the  Jackal.  The  foreigner  has  not  to 
journey  far  into  the  interior  before  becoming  acquainted 
with  its  nocturnal  cries,  (resembling  the  scream  of  a 
woman  in  deepest  distress)  arousing  him  lrom  his  slum- 
bers by  its  unwonted  sounds.  So  soon  as  night  falls 
they  commence  their  predatory  excursions  to  the  vil- 
lages, seizing  upon  fowls  and  other  domestic  animals, 
carrying  away  lifeless  carcasses  and  offal,  thus  uniting 
the  evil  habit  of  the  thief  with  the  good  offices  of  a 
scavenger.  In  some  parts  of  the  country  the  custom 
prevails  of  bathing  the  hands  in  the  blood  of  a slain 
jackal,  whenever  one  kills  or  witnesses  the  death  of  a 
wild  beast.  The  origin  of  this  strange  habit  has  not 
come  to  my  knowledge. 

The  Striped  Hyena  resides  in  the  caverns  of  the 
mountains  and  clefts  of  rocks  or  in  dens,  from  which 
it  comes  forth  with  more  strength  and  daring  than  the 
wolf,  following  the  flocks,  breaking  open  sheepcotes  at 
night,  and  committing  ravages  with  an  insatiable 
voracity.  In  some  instances  the  hyena  has  become 
tame  and  domestic  like  the  dog. 

The  Lynx  lives  in  the  northern  provinces,  and  the 
Caracal  makes  his  appearance  in  Bengal.  The 
Ounce  is  found  in  all  the  central  part  of  the  Deccan, 
and  in  Gruzerat.  The  most  remarkable  of  the  canine 
animals  of  India  is  the  Thibet  dog , a gigantic  kind  of 
mastiff,  which  inhabits  the  table-lands  of  the  Hima- 
layas. It  is  used  as  a watch  dog,  for  which  it  is  well 
adapted  by  its  size,  strength  and  ferocity  of  temper. 
Another  of  the  canine  species  frequenting  jungly 


44 


INDIA. 


and  hilly  regions,  and  resembling  in  many  features 
the  jackal,  hunt  in  packs,  and  even  will  rush  upon  the 
tiger,  tearing  him  in  pieces  ere  he  can  strike  more 
than  two  or  three  down  with  his  fatal  paw. 

The  domestic  or  Pariar  dog  is  mean  in  appearance 
and  destitute  of  all  those  noble  traits  which  belong  to 
his  western  relative,  and,  as  a consequence,  receives 
rough  usage  from  native  and  foreigner. 

In  our  view  of  the  animated  nature  of  India,  the 
next  class  to  be  noticed  is  that  of  Reptiles,  includ- 
ing various  species,  from  the  Crocodile  to  the  harm- 
less Lizard ; — with  which  last-named  creature  our  il- 
lustrations will  begin.  “ Shaped  like  unto  a crocodile, 
of  a sad,  green  color,  and  but  a little  creature,  the 
fear  of  whom  presents  itself  mostly  to  the  eye,  for 
they  are  in  no  wise  hurtful,”  is  a description  of  the 
lizard,  which,  though  quaint,  is  correct  and  gra- 
phic. Measuring  from  three  to  six  inches  in  length, 
having  feet  so  shaped  as  to  allow  of  creeping  safely 
and  rapidly  upon  the  sides  and  ceiling  of  the  smoothest 
wall,  it  feeds  upon  flies  and  insects,  which  it  ap- 
proaches with  a slow  and  cautious  tread,  and  trans- 
fixes with  a sudden  thrust  of  its  sharp  and  forked 
tongue.  To  look  upward  and  see  a half  dozen  of  these 
reptiles  creeping  upon  the  polished  ceiling  is  not  at  all 
agreeable  to  a new  comer,  while  to  have  one  fall  upon 
the  hand  when  writing  or  reading  sends  a chill  through 
the  frame  not  to  be  coveted.  But  the  alarm  is  not  all 
on  one  side,  for  the  animal  makes  such  a descent  sole- 
ly by  a mistake,  and  wero  it  possible  would  certainly 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


45 


apologize  for  this  intrusion,  as  he  rectifies  his  error  in 
the  very  practical  manner  of  making  himself  off  with 
the  greatest  possible  speed.  A few  of  these  harmless 
creatures  find  their  home  upon  every  wall,  remaining 
concealed  behind  a mirror  or  other  suspended  frame 
during  the  day,  and  coming  forth  at  night  to  seize 
upon  their  tiny  prey.  In  some  parts  of  the  country 
there  is  a large  green  lizard  called  the  Gecko , named 
from  its  favorite  and  habitual  sound,  and  in  distinction 
from  the  last  mentioned,  containing  a bag  filled  with 
poison,  with  which  it  can  suffuse  its  victim  and  pro- 
duce death,  unless  the  part  be  removed. 

India  abounds  with  Scorpions  of  various  sizes  and 
color,  from  one  which  may  be  covered  with  a dollar 
coin  to  that  which  equals  a full-sized  hand,  the  former 
usually  of  a light  cast,  and  the  latter  dark  or  jet 
black.  An  elongated  body  terminates  in  a slender 
tail,  formed  of  several  joints,  the  last  of  which  ends 
in  a small,  conical  bag  containing  the  poisonous  fluid, 
to  wdiich  is  attached  a tubular  sting,  through  which 
it  is  thrown  into  the  object  it  seeks  to  harm.  This 
tail  is  carried  above  the  body,  when  the  animal  is 
walking,  and  is  projected  beyond  the  front  of  the  head 
when  put  to  harmful  use.  The  wound  is  painful 
though  seldom  destructive,  ammonia  being  the  most 
successful  curative.  The  cautious  Hindoo  will  not 
put  his  hand  into  or  under  a jar  or  box  before  he  as- 
sures himself  that  he  will  not  encounter  this  noxious 
reptile.  It  is  currently  believed  that  if  encircled  with 
fire  it  will  sting  itself  to  death.  A celebrated  natu- 


46 


INDIA. 


ralist  speaks  of  putting  a female  scorpion  with  her 
young  into  a glass  case.  She  soon  destroyed  all  but 
one,  which  took  refuge  upon  the  back  of  its  parent, 
and  avenged  the  death  of  its  brethren  by  killing  the 
old  one  in  its  turn.  It  is  a timid  creature,  flying  ra- 
pidly from  impending  danger,  and  never  using  its 
sting  except  as  a means  of  defence,  or  to  secure  food. 

Centipedes  are  found  in  similar  localities  with  the 
scorpion,  and  are  at  times  more  than  a foot  long  and 
thick  as  a man’s  finger,  having  two  sharp  teeth  with 
which  they  inflict  wounds  painful  and  dangerous. 

Tarantulas , the  largest  of  the  spider  kind,  arc  occa- 
sionally met  with  in  unfrequented  places,  or  long  un- 
opened rooms.  I killed  one,  the  body  of  which  was 
nearly  the  size  of  the  palm  of  my  hand,  of  an  olive 
brown  color,  and  covered  with  a soft  down.  The  bite 
is  painful,  though  not  fatal. 

Dr.  Russel,  an  eminent  scholar  in  zoology,  has  de- 
scribed forty-three  distinct  species  of  Snakes  common 
in  India.  Among  the  seven  which  are  poisonous,  there 
is  one — the  Cobra-dc-CapcUa — that  is  dreaded  be- 
yond any  object  with  which  our  earth  is  cursed.  In 
length  from  three  to  six  feet,  in  circumference  about 
two  inches,  its  head  is  small,  and  covered  on  the  fore- 
part with  large  smooth  scales,  just  below  which  is  a 
dilatation  of  the  skin  which  is  capable  of  being  raised 
or  depressed  at  the  pleasure  of  the  animal.  When  irri- 
tated the  skin  is  expanded  and  elevated  like  a hood  ; 
hence  the  name  of  “hooded  snake.”  The  animal  never 
bites  so  long  as  this  outer  skin  is  folded,  but  its  eree- 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


47 


tion,  with  an  accompanying  hiss,  is  a signal  of  ag- 
gression and  peril — peril , for  let  the  minutest  globulo 
of  the  concentrated  poison  find  its  way  into  the  sys- 
tem and  death  must  ensue.  Lunar  caustic,  though 
efficacious  as  remedial  to  the  bite  of  the  viper,  is  found 
of  little  or  no  avail  as  a counteraction  to  the  venom  of 
the  cobra.  Jugglers  carry  them  about  the  country  for 
exhibition  and  reward,  keeping  them  in  subjection  by 
the  power  of  music.  Though  very  numerous  there  are 
but  few  instances  on  record  of  death  from  their  attacks, 
such  precautions  are  used  to  avoid  the  places  where 
they  dwell.  By  the  natives  they  are  regarded  with 
religious  reverence,  and  the  title  of  “ good  snake”  is 
that  by  which  they  are  usually  designated. 

On  the  Island  of  Ceylon  a venomous  snake  called 
the  Tic  Polonga  is  occasionally  met  with.  Such  is 
the  strength  of  its  poison  that  the  first  bite  will  kill  a 
fowl  in  less  than  a minute.  It  is  naturally  indolent, 
and  will  not  attack  unless  it  is  irritated. 

The  Whip  Snake  conceals  itself  among  the  foliage 
of  trees,  darts  at  cattle  grazing  below,  causing  the 
largest  ox  to  die  of  agony  within  an  hour’s  time. 

Mountain  Snakes , from  four  to  eight  feet  in  length, 
and  quite  harmless,  are  carried  about  the  country  by 
indigent,  low-bred  natives  for  exhibition,  with  trained 
monkeys  and  bears. 

The  Crocodile  of  the  Ganges  is  distinguished  from 
the  Nilotic  species  by  its  projecting  eyes,  and  narrow, 
elongated  muzzle.  Its  teeth  are  many,  and  disposi- 
tion carnivorous.  The  habit  of  throwing  infants  and 


48 


INDIA. 


small  children  to  these  monsters  of  the  sacred  stream, 
has  long  formed  a leading  feature  in  the  superstitious 
observances  of  that  idolatrous  land.  Alligators  are 
common  in  the  rivers  of  the  north,  especially  the 
Ganges,  upon  the  shores  of  which  they  are  ever  seen 
basking  in  the  rays  of  the  sun. 

Anacondas , twenty  to  thirty  feet  in  length,  infest 
the  Delta  of  the  Ganges,  concealing  themselves  in 
large  trees  standing  upon  the  water’s  edge,  and  by 
a terrible  fling  of  their  massive  and  powerful  bodies 
encircling  and  crushing  whatever  comes  within  their 
fatal  reach. 

We  have  an  account  of  a Boa  Constrictor , killed 
upon  the  banks  of  the  Ganges  but  a few  years  since 
which  was  found  to  measure  sixty- two  feet  and  some 
inches  in  length. 

Tortoises  measuring  four  and  a half  feet  from  the 
tip  of  the  nose  to  the  tail,  and  fourteen  inches  high, 
are  to  be  met  with  at  times  in  the  northern  regions. 

Frogs  are  abundant.  Bishop  Heber  speaks  of  see- 
ing one  which  was  large  as  a gosling,  and  very  beau- 
tiful, being  green,  speckled  with  black,  and  almost 
transparent. 

India  swarms  with  Insects,  arising  chiefly  from 
the  warmth  of  the  climate,  there  being  no  portion  of 
the  year  throughout  the  largest  districts,  when  the 
cold  is  suflicient  to  destroy  the  minutest  animal  life. 
Let  a house  remain  closed  for  a few  weeks,  and  upon 
opening  the  door  and  windows,  the  reader,  were  he 
here,  would  observe  several  things  which  would  startle, 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


49 


if  not  terrify  him.  Turning  his  eye  upward  he  would 
see  two,  three,  or  more  lizards  (before  referred  to)  seem- 
ingly ready  to  make  a descent  upon  him.  Looking 
downward  he  would  observe  the  mat  covered  with  in- 
numerable tiny,  black  ants  moving  in  all  directions 
with  business-like  order  and  speed.  If  there  be  a ta- 
ble in  the  room  he  would  notice  the  upright  post  pro- 
vided with  an  encircling  brass  cup,  into  which  water 
or  oil  may  be  poured,  and  thus  the  food  be  guarded 
from  the  attacks  of  these  intruders,  and  a like  pre- 
caution with  the  bedsteads,  bureaus,  and  safes.  He 
would  observe  tho  book-case  standing  at  a little 
remove  from  the  wall,  to  protect  it  from  the  rav- 
ages of  the  white  ant , that  marvel  in  natural  history. 
Though  small  and  apparently  harmless,  they  are  the 
most  destructive  creatures  with  which  we  are  ac- 
quainted. Nothing  but  stone  or  mortar  can  resist 
their  power  of  devastation.  Moving  just  beneath  the 
surface,  mole-like,  they  enter  by  myriads  a table,  box 
of  books,  chest  of  clothes,  or  whatever  be  left  exposed 
to  their  intrusion,  and  cease  not  their  work  of  destruc- 
tion until  nothing  is  left  but  the  bare  shell.  Boxes 
must  be  placed  upon  a stone  or  some  metallic  substance 
three  to  four  inches  in  height — books  must  be  bound  in 
Russia  leather,  or  often  removed  and  brushed — beams 
of  dwellings  must  be  saturated  with  tar ; and  all  to 
guard  against  one  of  the  tiniest,  most  insignificant- 
looking, and  yet  most  formidable  of  the  animate  crea- 
tion. Let  the  visitor  beware  how  he  lift  up  the  corner 
of  the  mat  lest  the  sting  of  a concealed  scorpion  make 
3 


50 


INDIA. 


him  repent  the  incautious  act,  or  a snake  erect  its 
threatening  crest.  Let  him  wait  till  evening  draws 
on,  and  a light  is  brought  into  the  room,  and  if  it  be 
at  the  right  season  of  the  year,  a cloud  of  winged  ants 
will  make  their  entrance,  encircling  the  lamp  in  a 
countless  swarm,  some  just  burning  their  feet  upon 
the  glass  shade,  others  more  boldly  flying  right  into 
the  crater,  there  to  meet  their  death.  In  an  hour  or  so 
they  begin  to  disappear,  leaving  their  wings  on  the 
table,  and  adopting  the  more  humble  mode  of  creeping 
like  their  less  aspiring  brethren.  Let  him  go  out  the 
next  morning,  and  the  native  lad  will  be  seen,  bag  in 
hand,  gathering  from  their  hiding  places  these  wing- 
less visitors,  from  which  is  made  a curry  more  deli- 
cious than  turtle  soup  to  an  alderman  ! If  he  retire 
to  rest  without  the  shelter  of  a muslin  hanging  sur- 
rounding his  couch  the  music  and  fang  of  the  mosqui- 
to will  forbid  repose.  If  upon  rising  he  take  not  the 
precaution  of  looking  into  his  shoes  his  foot  may  borne 
in  contact  with  a scorpion,  or  small  snake.  Casting 
his  eye  around  during  the  day  he  would  see  the  com- 
mon fly  without  number.  Opening  a drawer  a com- 
pany of  roaches  will  manifest  their  terror  by  a sudden 
and  rapid  withdrawal  from  notice.  The  wasp  will 
be  seen  passing  up  and  down  the  Venetian  blind  in 
search  of  food,  and  the  locust  will  pierce  the  ear  with 
its  sharp,  shrill  notes.  These  statements  may  give  to 
the  reader  a no  very  pleasant  impression  of  a residence 
in  that  Eastern  clime.  I state  but  the  facts  in  the 
case,  admitting,  however,  that  there  is  such  a thing  as 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


51 


becoming  so  accustomed  to  these  sights  that  they  may 
be  seen  and  heard  with  but  slight  effect  upon  tho 
weakest  nerves.  Constant  precautions  are  needful  in 
protecting  person  and  property  from  their  painful  and 
destructive  visits,  but  tho  eye  becomes  so  habituated 
to  seeing  them  in  all  places  and  times,  that  no  special 
emotions  are  awakened  so  long-  as  they  keep  at  a 
respectful  distance.  At  night  fire-flies  glitter  among 
the  boughs  of  the  Banyan  tree,  or  dance  around  the 
spreading  tamarind,  producing  a singular  but  beautiful 
effect.  Bees  abound  in  hilly  districts,  building  their 
nests  in  hollow  trees  and  rocky  caverns,  and  yielding 
a honey  of  but  inferior  excellence.  The  silkworm 
produces  materials  for  a fabric  greatly  used  in  years 
past,  but  confined  at  present  to  Brahmins,  Mohamme- 
dans, and  the  more  wealthy  of  the  natives.  Tho 
Termes  form  a substance  which  yields  a beautiful  Ver- 
million, and  was  much  used  before  the  discovery  of 
cochineal.  Within  another  insect  is  an  article  called 
lac,  which  is  much  used  in  fabricating  brads,  rings, 
and  other  ornaments  of  female  dress.  Ant-hills,  seven 
and  more  feet  in  circumference,  and  five  and  six  feet 
high,  are  often  met  with  upon  the  plains,  especially  in 
jungly  districts,  which  seem  so  much  beyond  the  power 
of  a tiny  insect  to  construct  as  to  lead  to  an  ancient 
opinion  that  “ in  India  there  are  monstrous  ants,  as 
large  as  foxes.”  Bishop  Heber  remarks,  that  “ the 
pyramids,  when  the  comparative  bulk  of  those  who 
reared  them  is  taken  into  the  estimate,  are  as  nothing 
compared  to  the  works  of  these  termites.  The  coun- 


52 


INDIA 


terpart  of  one  of  these  hills  is  as  if  a nation  should  set 
to  work  to  build  up  an  artificial  Snowdon  and  bore  it 
full  of  halls  and  galleries.” 

The  Birds  of  India,  though  less  splendid-  on  the 
whole  than  those  of  South  America,  are,  in  many 
cases  remarkable  for  splendor  of  plumage,  symmetry 
of  form,  and  sweetness  of  tone.  We  have  the  Condor, 
occasionally  met  with  in  the  extreme  northern  regions 
measuring  fifteen  feet  between  the  tips  of  its  out- 
spread pinions ; the  Pondicherry  Vulture,  equalling 
in  size  a large  goose  ; the  Bengal  Vulture,  which  is 
often  seen  preying  upon  the  human  corpses  that  float 
down  the  sacred  Granges  to  the  sea ; the  Lammer- 
geyer  or  bearded  vulture,  a rare  and  unsocial  bird, 
whose  home  is  among  the  Himmalaya  ranges ; the 
Pondicherry  Eagle,  esteemed  sacred  on  the  Malabar 
coast ; the  Finch-Falcon  of  Bengal ; the  Fork-tailed 
Shrike,  also  a native  of  Bengal,  and  named  “ king  of 
the  crows,”  because  of  its  incessant  assaults  upon 
that  tamer  and  weaker  race  ; the  Calao  of  Malabar  ; 
the  Malabar  Shrike,  with  its  head  surmounted  by  a 
tufted  plume;  the  Rhinoceros  Horn  Bill ; the  Jocose 
Shrike,  named  from  its  lively  disposition  and  amusing 
manners,  and  known  in  the  writings  of  Hafiz  as  the 
Bulbul  or  Persian  nightingale;  the  Mina  or  Grakle, 
most  noted  linguist  of  the  feathered  tribes  ; the  Par- 
adise Grakle,  remarkable  for  its  destruction  of  locusts 
and  which,  when  kept  near  the  farmyard,  spontane- 
ously acquires  the  various  cries  of  ducks,  dogs,  geese, 
sheep,  pigs,  and  poultry ; the  Pagoda  Thrush,  so  called 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


53 


from  its  frequent  occurrence  among  the  pagodas  of 
Malabar  and  Coramandel ; the  King  Fisher,  inhabiting 
the  hottest  parts  of  the  continent ; the  Wooil-peckcr 
ranging  the  whole  country  from  the  southern  Cape  to 
the  sombre  forests  of  the  Himalayas ; Parrots  of 
various  binds  and  abundant  in  number;  the  Peacock 
which  roams  in  a w’ild  state  throughout  the  forests  of 
tho  Peninsula ; the  Jungle  cock,  whose  locality  is 
among  the  Ghats;  the  Crow,  which  in  multitudes 
throng  the  yard  of  every  dwelling,  allowing  no  frag- 
ment of  food  to  escape  their  vigilant  eye  and  ravenous 
appetite  ; the  Impeyan  Pheasant,  whose  home  is  in 
the  northern  mountains ; the  Horned  Pheasant,  com- 
mon in  the  Nepaul  district ; the  Quail  and  Patridge 
of  various  species,  and  general  distribution  ; the  Pas - 
sarage  Bustard  highly  esteemed  on  account  of  the 
delicacy  and  fine  flavor  of  its  flesh  and  consequently 
bearing  a high  price  in  the  India  market ; tho  Golden 
Plover;  the  Coromandel  Courier;  the  Promeprop ; 
the  Gigantic  Stork  or  Adjutant,  a voracious  creature, 
devouring  at  one  meal  what  wrould  satisfy  four  men, 
very  useful  as  a scavenger  in  clearing  the  streets 
of  offal,  and  regarded  writh  superstitious  reverence 
because  supposed  to  be  possessed  of  the  souls  of  Brah- 
mins ; the  Pondicherry  and  Coromandel  Heron, 
which  last  is  also  common  on  the  banks  of  the  Ganges 
and  other  Indian  rivers ; the  Bengal  Snipe ; the 
Horned  Turkey  of  Bengal,  wTith  a fleshy,  blue,  cal- 
lous substance  behind  each  eye  giving  it  the  full  effect 
of  a horned  animal ; the  P early -plumaged  Gull ; the 


54 


INDIA. 


Black-backed  Goose  ; with  many  species  of  the  Duck 
kind , and  Poultry  such  as  are  found  in  the  farmyards 
of  the  western  continent. 

Our  limits  allow  little  else  than  the  naming  of  these 
various  tribes,  leaving  the  reader  to  consult  elabo- 
rate treatises  on  ornithology  for  a more  extended 
acquaintance  with  their  pecularities  of  structure  and 
habit. 

India  being  almost  surrounded  by  water,  is  supplied 
with  a variety  of  excellent  fish,  among  which  may  be 
named  the  Pomfret,  of  a flavor  more  delicate  than  the 
turbot ; the  Robal,  the  Scir  Fish,  the  Bumbalo , which, 
when  dried,  forms  a principal  article  of  food  among 
the  Lascars,  or  Hindoo  sailors  ; the  pale  brown  Eel, 
King’  of  the  herrings,  more  than  eight  feet  in  length  ; 
the  Russelian  Gymnetris , the  Remora,  which  is  em- 
ployed by  the  natives  in  capturing  the  tortoise  ; the 
Dolphin,  distinguished  by  the  splendor  of  its  varying 
hues ; the  insidious  Dory , inhabiting  the  rivers  and 
other  fresh  waters,  which,  when  perceiving  a flying 
insect  hovering  over  the  water,  shoots  out  a jet  of 
water  from  its  tubular  mouth  so  suddenly,  and  with 
such  unerring  aim,  as  to  tumble  the  insect  in  a 
stupified  state  upon  the  surface  of  the  stream  ; the 
Unicorn  Acanth aims',  the  Climbing  Spams,  which 
moves  at  pleasure  up  the  trunks  of  trees  growing  by 
the  water  side,  remaining  hours  out  of  water  ; the 
Soher,  with  pre-eminent  flavor  and  beauty ; the 
Whrahl,  inhabiting  the  lakes,  and  much  esteemed  as  a 
nutritious  and  healthful  food  for  invalids;  the  Leopard 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA.  £*> 

Mackerel,  the  Flying  Gurnard,  which  swim  in  shoals, 
ever  and  anon  darting  into  tho  air,  and  making  its  way 
to  a considerable  distance;  the  Carp ; and  the  Mangoe 
Fish,  called  by  the  natives  Tupsy  Mucliec,  and  regarded 
by  Europeans  as  the  most  delicate  food  brought  into 
market,  and  is,  therefore,  dried  and  salted  for  sale ; 
with  several  lesser  species  not  worthy  of  special 
notice.  India  does  not  excel  in  the  character  of  its 
£ hell-fish,  though  the  number  is  great.  Oysters  and 
Lobsters  are  abundant,  but  of  an  inferior  flavor.  Crabs 
are  large,  palatable,  and  often  dressed  for  the  table 
of  the  European.  Tanks  swarm  with  small  Land 
Crabs,  which  are  eaten  only  by  the  more  indigent 
natives.  The  Pearl  Oyster  inhabits  the  straits  of 
Manaar,  between  the  Continent  and  Ceylon,  and  is 
obtained  by  diving.  These  beds  are  less  abundant  and 
valuable  than  in  former  years,  yet  still  yielding  a 
revenue  to  government  and  wealth  to  individuals. 
The  shells  to  be  found  upon  the  shores  of  India,  are 
world-renowned,  and  need  no  particular  mention.  A 
valve  of  the  Tridacna  Gigas,  the  largest  shell  known, 
presented  to  Francis  I.  of  France,  is  used  as  a bap- 
tismal font,  in  the  church  of  St.  Sulpice,  in  Paris. 

Thus  far  of  zoology,  or  animated  nature,  as  it  ap- 
pears in  India.  A few  facts  must  suffice  upon  its 
Botany.  The  vegetable  productions  of  a country  so 
extensive,  and  with  such  varieties  of  temperature  and 
soil  as  those  in  Hindostan,  must  be  very  numerous 
and  diverse.  The  herbarium  in  the  museum  of  the 
East  India  Company,  contains  about  nine  thousand 


56 


INDIA. 


species,  which  would  be  greatly  multiplied  were  the 
whole  country  to  be  searched  with  the  diligence  and 
zeal  that  portions  have  already  been.  The  vales  of 
Cashmere,  Delhi,  and  Serinagur,  abound  with  varie- 
ties of  the  rose  and  the  flowering  jessamine.  In  ad- 
dition to  these,  we  find  in  different  parts  of  the 
country  the  elegant  atimuca  ; the  tcliambaga,  much 
used  for  adorning  the  hair  and  perfuming  the  clothes ; 
the  missccnda,  with  its  white  leaves  and  blood-red 
flowers  ; the  ixora,  which,  from  boughs  six  feet  in 
height,  exhibits  its  scarlet  and  yellow  tufts  of  bloom, 
enlivening  the  foliage  of  the  wood  ; the  sindrimal , 
opening  at  four  in  the  evening  and  closing  at  four 
in  the  morning ; the  nyctantlies  sambac,  with  which 
the  Hindoos  perfume  their  hair  before  retiring  to  rest ; 
the  nagatalli,  which  creeps  along  the  wall,  covering 
them  with  its  foliage,  together  with  various  species  of 
the  violet , primrose , buttercup,  lily,  &c.,  which  are 
chiefly  found  on  the  mountain  sides  or  deep  valleys. 

The  chief  food  of  the  frugal  Hindoo  is  rtce,  in 
which  all  the  provinces  abound.  Wheat,  barley, 
maze,  and  millet,  arc  also  grown,  especially  wheat, 
which  is  the  prevailing  crop  throughout  the  northern 
districts.  To  these  may  be  added  peas,  beans,  and 
several  vegetable  species,  unknown  in  this  western 
world,  are  met  with  in  the  uplands,  as  also  potatoes 
and  many  kinds  of  berries.  Commerce  is  indebted  to 
India  for  indigo,  opium,  flax,  hemp,  tobacco,  sarsa- 
parilla, jalap,  cotton,  anise,  betel,  saffron,  sesamum, 
many  dyes,  besides  various  reeds  and  canes.  Theso 


NATURAL  PRODUCTIONS  OF  INDIA. 


57 


are  cultivated  with  different  degrees  of  success 
throughout  the  peninsula. 

Among  the  forest  trees  of  India,  the  first  place  in 
utility,  and  far  from  the  last  in  majestic  beauty, 
belongs  to  the  Tca/c,  a hard  and  almost  incorruptible 
timber,  fitted  to  supply  the  place  of  the  oak  in  ship- 
building, and  is,  in  this  respect,  its  superior;  that  it 
will  not  corrode  iron,  nails,  and  bolts.  For  universal 
application,  rapid  growth  and  durability,  the  Bamboo 
occupies  the  next  place.  It  shoots  up  to  the  height  of 
sixty  feet  in  a single  season,  acquires  a diameter  of 
more  than  six  inches  at  the  base,  is  tough,  strong, 
firm  and  light,  and  may  be  made  to  answer  a variety 
of  most  needful  purposes.  Thick  jungles  of  bamboo 
cover  large  portions  of  the  peninsula,  and  by  prevent- 
ing circulation  of  air  make  the  regions  around  very 
unwholesome.  Various  species  of  Palm  trees  give  a 
character  to  the  scenery  of  India  and"  furnish  the  in- 
habitants with  many  valuable  products.  Of  this  largo 
tribe  the  Cocoanut  tree  holds  the  first  place.  Our 
limits  forbid  an  enumeration  of  the  various  uses  to 
w’hich  this  tree  is  appropriated,  and  it  must  suffice  to 
say  that  not  a portion  is  allowed  to  remain  unused. 
The  great  fan  palm  furnishes  roofs  for  the  native  cot- 
tages. The  smaller  fan  palm  and  palmyra  yield 
toddy,  an  intoxicating  liquor  much  used  among  the 
lower  class  of  Hindoos,  and  leaves  upon  which  letters 
&c.,  are  written  with  the  iron  style;  and  the  Sago  and 
Area  palm.  The  Babul  tree  is  one  of  the  most  beau- 
tiful and  ornamental  in  India,  its  flowers  emitting  a 
3* 


58 


INDIA. 


delightful  fragrance,  and  its  timber  much  esteemed 
where  lightness  and  strength  are  required.  To  these 
may  be  added  the  Sandal  wood  tree , which  grows  in 
the  south-Avest  part  of  Mysore,  and  is  exported  to  Ara- 
bia and  China,  and  to  close  the  list  the  Indian  fig  or 
Banyan , which  stretches  its  immense  branches  and 
holy  shade  not  only  over  the  pagodas  and  choultries, 
but  over  serpents  and  other  venomous  creatures — an 
emblem  of  benevolent  nature  which  sustains  and 
blesses  the  evil  and  the  good.  This  tree  is  regarded 
with  religious  homage  by  the  Hindoos,  believing,  as 
they  do,  that  the  birth-place  of  their  god,  Yishnoo,  Avas 
beneath  its  overspreading  branches:  temples  are  erected 
near  it  and  images  placed  under  its  shade.  On  the 
banks  of  the  rh^er  Nerbudda  stands  a tree  of  this  ven- 
erated species  Avhich  measures  tAAro  thousand  feet 
around  the  principal  stems,  the  larger  trunks  of  AA’hich 
amount  to  three  hundred  and  fifty,  and  the  smaller 
ones  exceed  three  thousand.  This  tree  is  called  Cub- 
beer-burr  by  the  Hindoos,  in  memory  of  a favorite 
saint,  who  took  it  under  his  special  patronage  and- 
care,  and  it  has  been  known  to  shelter  seven  thousand 
men  beneath  its  shade.  This  species,  though  thus 
honored  and  useful,  is  doing  more  to  demolish  the 
splendid  edifices  of  India  than  any  other  cause,  tho 
seeds  falling  into  the  crevices  of  the  Avail,  vegeta- 
ting, spreading  apart  the  long-cemented  piles  of  stono 
and  brick,  causing  temples  and  palaces  and  pagodas 
to  become  heaps  of  shapeless  ruin.  The  Saul  tree, 
producing  a resin  much  used  for  naval  purposes,  and 


NATURAL  TBODUCTIOXS  OF  INDIA.  59 

as  incense  in  the  temples.  This  tree  is  used  in  detect- 
ing  witchcraft,  an  account  of  which  tho  reader  will 
find  in  the  last  chapter  of  the  volume ; the  Cadukali 
of  Telinga,  bearing  a gall  producing  a very  permanent 
yellow ; the  Jack  tree , with  its  pumpkin  shape  fruit 
hanging  from  its  loftiest  branches. 

Our  fruit  trees,  as  the  apple,  pear,  plum,  apricot, 
peach,  walnut,  almond,  &c.,  thrive  in  the  northern  pro- 
vinces, while  the  southern  districts  abound  in  mangoes, 
guavas,  plantains,  custard  apple, -limes,  lemons,  but 
not  oranges,  (these  being  confined  to  the  northern  re- 
gions and  Ceylon,)  pine  apple  and  shaddock.  In  the 
Himalaya  Mountains  trees  are  sometimes  of  enormous 
size,  measuring  twenty  feet  in  girth,  more  than  a hun- 
dred and  fifty  in  height,  and  exhibiting  a sheer 
branchless  trunk  of  sixty  feet,  surmounted  by  a vast 
crest  which  waves  above  like  a gigantic  canopy.  In 
those  regions  all  kinds  of  European  trees  and  plants 
flourish  in  abundmce. 

Among  the  smaller  trees  and  shrubs  common  to 
India  are  the  Daphne  Cannabina,  from  which  is 
manufactured  common,  but  useful,  paper;  the  Rice - 
paper  plant  which  grows  luxuriously  in  Bengal ; and 
the  Acacia , well-known  for  its  airy  and  elegant 
foliage,  besides  yielding  the  gum-arabic  of  commerce. 

In  respect  to  Mineral  wealth  India  is  one  of  the 
richest  of  known  countries.  Grains  of  gold  are  to  be 
found  in  the  bed  of  many  of  the  northern  rivers,  while 
rich  mines  of  the  same  precious  ore  and  of  silver  oc- 
cur in  the  Carnatic,  Assam  and  Bengal.  There  arc 


60 


INDIA. 


copper  mines  in  the  mountains  of  Kumaoon,  and  in 
the  provinces  of  Agra  and  Ajmere.  Iron  is  common 
throughout  the  peninsula.  Assam  and  the  Kumaoon 
Mountains  furnish  large  quantities  of  Lead.  Some 
mines  of  Tin  are  worked  in  the  district  of  Ajmere. 
Zinc  is  exported  in  large  quantities  from  India  to 
England.  Quicksilver  and  Antimony  are  found  in  a 
few  places.  This,  too,  is  the  land  of  the  Diamond , 
Ruby , Sapphire , Amethyst , Onyx  and  other  precious 
stones.  And  in  this  country  are  quarries  of  Marble 
and  Alabaster , of  Sulphur , Coal  and  Naptha , of  com- 
mon Salt  and  Saltpetre.  Tradition  has  hardly  exag- 
gerated in  the  accounts  it  has  transmitted  to  us  re- 
specting the  minerals  and  metals — the  precious  stones 
and  gems  of  heaven-favored  Ind. 

Such  is  a rapid  view  of  nature,  animate  and  inani- 
mate, as  presented  in  that  eastern  clime.  We  but 
enter  the  field  of  inquiry  and  research  before  we  are 
compelled  to  leave  it,  the  proportionate  limits  allowed 
to  this  branch  of  the  subject  being  more  than  reached, 
and  yet  much  remaining  to  be  said.  But  what  we 
have  seen  suffices  to  convince  us  that  the  Hindoos 
have  ample  acquaintance  with  the  Most  High  as  made 
known  by  His  works,  so  that  they  are  “ without  ex- 
cuse” if  they  render  not  to  Him  the  homage  of  grati- 
tude and  praise. 


CHAPTER  III. 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 

What  is  known  of  Ancient  India — Invasions  by  Sesostris,  Semiramis, 
Darius  and  Alexander — Invasion  by  Mahmoud  of  Guznee — Somnaut 
Captured — Its  venerated  Idol  and  Temple  Gate — Successors  of  Mah- 
moud— Invasions  by  the  Portuguese — Dutch — East  India  Company — 
Black  Hole  of  Calcutta — Govemors-General — Relation  of  India  to 
England — Remark  of  Dr.  Duff — Measures  pursued  by  the  English — 
Opinions  and  Feelings  of  the  Hindoos — An  Historic  Law  respecting 
India — Characteristics  of  the  several  Periods  of  Hindoo  History — An 
Eloquent  Extract. 

“Whoever  attempts  to  trace  the  operations  of  men 
in  remote  times,  and  to  mark  the  various  steps  of  their 
progress  in  any  line  of  exertion,  will  soon  have  the 
mortification  to  find  that  the  period  of  authentic 
history  is  very  limited.  Beyond  the  era  of  written 
annals  lies  the  region  of  uncertainty  and  conjecture.” 
Respecting  no  country  does  the  student  of  antiquity 
find  this  to  be  more  true  than  of  India.  The  Hindoos 
having  no  historical  records  that  deserve  the  name, 
and  such  accounts  as  they  do  possess  are  mixed  up 
with  so  many  improbable  and  monstrous  fictions,  that 
we  are  left  in  total  ignorance  as  to  well-determined 
facts.  From  the  “ Vedas,”  which  were  written  about 
the  time  of  King  David,  and  the  “ Institutes  of  Me- 


62 


INDIA. 


nu,”  we  learn  that  the  country  anciently  composed 
several  separate  kingdoms,  varying  in  extent,  and  at 
constant  warfare  among  themselves.  Two  families,  in 
a special  manner,  bore  rule,  distinguished  as  the  sun 
and  moon , probably  on  account  of  their  comparative 
power  and  splendor.  Other  accounts  tell  us  that  in 
the  early  days  there  were  ten  kingdoms  in  India, 
speaking  different  languages,  five  of  which  occupied 
the  southern,  and  five  the  northern  districts.  It  is  a 
well-ascertained  fact  that  neither  the  present  race  of 
Hindoos  or  their  immediate  ancestors  are  the  aborigi- 
nes of  the  soil — but  who  the  original  possessors  of  the 
country  were,  and  whence  they  came,  are  questions 
which  have  called  into  requisition  the  learning  and 
research  of  England  and  the  Continent,  though  with 
ill  success.  The  Rev.  Dr.  Ward,  of  Serampore,  closes 
a labored  examination  of  Hindoo  manuscripts  in  this 
decisive  manner  : “ Such  is  Hindoo  history  as  given 
by  themselves,  or  rather  an  imperfect  gleaning  from  a 
great  and  confused  mass  of  materials,  which  have 
been  thrown  together  in  the  Puranas,  to  arrange  arid 
settle  which,  so  as  to  chose  what  is  true  and  re- 
ject what  is  false,  requires  a mind  more  than  hu- 
man. A real  and  accurate  history  of  this  country, 
from  its  commencement  to  the  present  time,  with  the 
dates  of  events  attached  to  them,  is  out  of  the  ques- 
tion.”  Sir  Win.  Jones  says,  “ The  dawn  of  true  In- 
dian history  appears  only  three  or  four  centuries  be- 
fore the  Christian  era,  the  preceding  ages  being  cloud- 
ed by  allegory  and  fable.”  Major  Milford,  an  eminent 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


63 


Orientalist,  adds  his  testimony,  that  “ with  regard  to 
history  the  Hindoos  have  really  nothing  but  romances, 
from  which  but  occasional  truths  may  be  extracted.” 
After  saying  that  India  was  one  of  the  earliest  inhab- 
ited portions  of  our  earth,  the  sober  historian  is  com- 
pelled to  admit  that  a veil  of  obscurity  hangs  above 
its  rise  and  early  progress,  which  has  thus  far  baffled 
all  attempts  at  removal.  But  few  can  hope  for  victory 
where  Bobertson  and  Jones  and  Milford  have  met 
with  signal  and  admitted  defeat. 

o • 

Leaving  ancient  India  concealed  beneath  the  mist  of 
antiquity  and  fable  we  will  view  the  country  when 
shone  upon  by  the  rays  of  historical  truth. 

Sesostris,  Semiramis,  Darius  and  Alexander  were 
the  earliest  to  bring  that  peninsula  before  the  modern 
world.  Respecting  the  first  of  these  heroes  there  is 
much  difference  of  opinion.  Some  contending  that  he 
came  against  India  in  the  year  970  before  Christ  and 
made  large  conquests,  and  exported  much  booty,  while 
Robertson  and  others  are  in  doubt  as  to  the  extent  and 
oven  the  fact  of  these  invasions.  It  is  thought  “ that 
some  light  may  be  thrown  upon  this  subject  by  the 
researches  now  in  progress  for  the  interpretation  of 
Egyptian  hieroglyphics.”  The  expedition  undertaken 
by  Semiramis  rests  upon  more  reliable  testimony  and 
commands  our  more  intelligent  belief.  From  the 
pages  of  Diodorus  we  learn  that  this  illustrious  queen 
having  extended  her  dominion  over  western  Asia  to 
Bactria,  and  having  been  informed  that  India  was  the 
most  populous,  wealthy,  and  beautiful  of  kingdoms, 


64 


INDIA. 


determined  upon  its  conquest.  After  three  years  spent 
in  preparation,  she  landed  an  army  of  half  a million 
horse  and  foot  upon  the  eastern  bank  of  the  Indus, 
crossing  upon  a bridge  of  boats  built  under  the  direc- 
tion of  architects  from  Phoenicia,  Cyprus,  and  other 
maratime  provinces.  Here  she  was  met  by  Strabro- 
bates,  a Hindoo  general,  who  had  collected  a force 
even  greater  than  that  of  Semiramis,  supported  by  a 
numerous  band  of  elephants  trained  for  warfare. 
The  contest  was  long,  sanguinary  and  doubtful,  but  at 
length  the  proud  and  ambitious  invader  was  obliged 
to  sound  a retreat  to  the  boats,  amid  the  wild  confu- 
sion of  which  it  is  thought  that  she  herself  perished. 
Next  following  the  Egyptian  king  and  Phoenician 
queen,  we  read  of  Darius,  the  Persian  monarch,  as 
undertaking  to  explore  and  conquer  that  country. 
Having  learned  through  a general  whom  he  sent 
thither,  the  populousness,  fertility  and  high  cultivation 
of  the  country  lying  east  of  the  Indus,  he  crossed  that 
stream  with  an  invading  army  in  the  beginning  of  the 
fifth  century  before'  Christ ; subdued  the  provinces  of 
Mooltan,  Lahore,  and  possibly  Guzerat,  drawing  from 
these  conquered  princes  a large  tribute  in  gold  and 
other  valuable  commodities.  This  dominion  of  the 
Persians  continued  for  less  than  two  hundred  years, 
but  during  the  latter  part  of  that  period  it  was  merely 
nominal. 

In  the  year  327  before  Christ,  Alexander  the  Great 
having  conquered  the  Persian  empire,  crossed  the  In- 
dus with  the  professed  design  of  compelling  these  trib- 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


65 


utary  states  to  pay  their  dues  to  him  as  the  successor 
of  Darius.  Commencing  his  march  for  the  far-famed 
Ganges  he  was  met  by  Porus  at  the  head  of  a nu- 
merous army  of  native  soldiery.  This  resistance,  add- 
ed to  a mutiny  in  his  ranks  upon  the  banks  of  the 
Sutledge,  compelled  him  with  much  reluctance  to 
retrace  his  steps  without  gratifying  his  ambitious’ 
designs  and  long-cherished  hopes.  Determining,  how- 
ever. not  to  return  in  disgrace,  he  performed  the  extra- 
ordinary and  hitherto  unattempted  project  of  sailing 
down  the  Indus,  exultingly  beholding  the  Arabian 
Sea,  and  thence,  after  incredible  toil  and  danger,  re- 
turning to  his  capital.  "When  Alexander  withdrew, 
the  natives  set  about  corrupting  the  troops  left  behind, 
by  encouraging  them  in  every  manner  of  excess,  which 
resulted  in  the  final  extinction  of  all  foreign  suprem- 
acy among  them.  Seleucus,  and  after  him  several 
generals,  ending  with  Antiochus,  undertook  excursions 
to  regain  those  distant  possessions,  but  their  success 
was  limited  in  extent  and  duration. 

After  these  repeated  inroads  of  the  Persian  and 
Greek  armies,  the  Hindoos  enjoyed  a quiet  of  several 
centuries,  during  which  an  enemy  was  preparing, 
whose  impression  upon  the  country  was  to  be  exten- 
sive, lamentable  and  lasting. 

About  the  middle  of  the  sixth  century  of  the  Chris- 
tian era  the  eagle  eye  of  Mohammedan  ambition  and 
rapacity  was  directed  towards  India,  and  this  ill-fated 
land  was  destined  to  become  the  prey  of  conquerors 
surpassing  in  cruelty  all  who  had  as  yet  crossed  its 


66 


INDIA. 


borders.  After  several  attempts  at  a permanent  do- 
minion, but  repulsion  by  the  Hindoo  princes,  the  time 
was  at  hand  when  resistance  would  no  longer  avail  for 
their  protection  and  freedom.  In  the  year  998  Mah- 
moud ascended  the  throne  of  G-huznee,  one  of  the  most 
important  principalities  of  Afghanistan,  and  speedily 
commenced  preparations  for  adding  India  to  his  do- 
minions. In  the  year  1001  he  made  his  first  appear- 
ance on  the  east  of  the  Indus,  penetrating  so  far  into 
the  Punjaub  as  totally  to  defeat  the  King  of  Lahore 
and  Mooltan,  returning  with  fame  and  booty  to  his 
mountain  fastnesses.  During  the  following  twenty- 
four  years  he  made  twelve  expeditions  into  the  coun- 
try, in  the  course  of  which  he  overran  most  of  the 
western  provinces,  plundering  Delhi  and  other  eminent 
cities,  carrying  away  vast  stores  of  gold  and  silver, 
diamonds  and  precious  stones,  which  he  displayed  to 
the  admiring  gaze  of  the  Ghuznee  mountaineers,  thus 
arousing  their  ambition  and  eager  desire  for  more  ex- 
tensive inroads  upon  a land  so  teeming  with  wealth 
and  luxury.  In  the  last  of  these  incursions  Mahmoud 
entered  the  province  of  Guzerat,  upon  the  southern 
boundary  of  which  was  located  the  village  of  Somnaut, 
renowned  as  the  abode  of  a shrine  of  extraordinary 
sanctity.  Attached  to  this  far-famed  temple  were  two 
thousand  Brahmins,  five  hundred  dancing  girls,  three 
hundred  musicians,  and  other  attendants  in  great 
numbers.  After  a long  and  desperate  contest  Mah- 
moud succeeded  in  capturing  this  venerated  town,  and 
upon  beholding  the  gigantic  and  far-famed  idol,  with 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


67 


wrathful  zeal  struck  off  its  nose,  giving  orders  for  its 
entire  and  instant  demolition.  As  the  attendant  Brah- 
mins saw  the  threatened  downfall  of  this  object  of  their 
profoundest  veneration,  they  fell  on  their  knees  and 
proffered  an  immense  sum  for  its  preservation  ; — but 
the  king  indignantly  replied,  “ I am  a breaker,  not  a 
buyer  of  Idols."  The  work  of  demolition  proceeded ; 
and  on  its  reaching  the  interior  of  the  image,  there 
was  disclosed  a treasure  in  pearls,  rubies,  and  dia- 
monds, almost  beyond  conception,  and  far  surpassing 
the  immense  sum  tendered  for  its  redemption.” 
These  were  carried  to  the  metropolis,  and  conspired, 
with  other  events,  to  render  Ghuznee  for  the  time  one 
of  the  most  eminent  cities  of  the  east.  With  the  trea- 
sures of  Somnaut,  Mahmoud  carried  the  gates  of  that 
town  wherewith  to  grace  his  mountain  home — which 
latter  trophy  has  obtained  no  little  modern  notoriety 
from  the  attempt  of  a late  governor-general  to  recon- 
vey them  to  their  former  abode — an  attempt  which 
brought  upon  his  lordship  the  reproof  of  Christendom, 
the  rebuke  of  his  employers,  and  which  conspired 
with  other  acts  of  like  folly  to  lose  him  his  vice- 
regal crown.  In  the  year  1291  Mohammed  (successor 
of  Mahmoud)  succeeded  in  establishing  himself  at 
Delhi,  and  thus  commenced  the  first  Afghan  or  Patan 
dynasty,  the  second  commencing  in  the  year  1291, 
and  continuing  until  near  the  close  of  the  fifteenth 
century.  Then  followed  the  Mogul  dynasty  begun  by 
Baber,  a descendant  of  Tamerlane,  in  the  year  1525, 
when  Mohammedanism  reached  its  height  in  India, 


68 


INDIA. 


extending  from  Allahabad  on  the  North  to  Ahmednug- 
gur,  (40  miles  East  from  Bombay)  on  the  South. 
One  of  the  most  eminent  of  these  Mogul  emperors  was 
Akber  Khan,  who  flourished  between  the  years  1556 
and  1695,  and  who  ruled  with  so  much  excellence  of 
wisdom  and  righteousness  that  the  native  historian 
tells  us  that  “ his  memory  still  floats  upon  the  tears 
of  all  India."  By  his  daring  and  judicious  manage- 
ment the  central  provinces  were  preserved  in  complete 
tranquillity,  and  G-uzerat,  Bengal,  and  a part  of  the 
Deccan  were  added  to  his  already  extensive  empire. 
During  the  reign  of  his  son  Jehoughier  (1605  to  1628) 
the  English  first  established  themselves  on  the  western 
coasts  of  the  Peninsula.  Then  followed  Aurungzebe, 
great-grandson  of  Akber,  who  ruled  from  1658  to 
1707.  From  his  great-grandson  Feroksere  the  East 
India  Company  obtained  the  grant  of  a large  township 
in  Bengal,  through  the  personal  influence  of  Dr.  Ham- 
ilton who  had  succeeded  in  relieving  the  Emperor  of 
a painful  malady.  The  Persians,  under  the  celebrated 
Nadir  Shah,  obtained  a short-lived  notoriety  over  parts 
of  this  down-trodden  land.  Our  limits  forbid  a 
detailed  narrative  of  the  events  that  signalized  the 
rule  of  Mahmoud  and  his  successors  during  their  rule 
over  India.  “ Nothing  in  modern  times  has  equaHed 
the  ferocity  and  desperation  of  these  Moslem  conquer- 
ors. Urged  on  by  a mad  enthusiasm ; intoxicated 
with  the  hope  of  rich  booty,  and  inspired  with  the 
promise  of  beatitude  if  they  died  fighting  with  the 
infidels,  they  sprang  like  tigers  on  their  prey.  A fer- 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


69 


tile  country  was  left  desolate  ; flourishing  cities,  heaps 
of  ruins;  palaces  were  burnt,  temples  pillaged,  and 
rivers  sacred  to  their  fathers  flowed  with  human 
blood.” 

During  the  reign  of  Tamerlane,  surnamed  the 
“destroying  prince,"  an  hundred  thousand  natives 
were  massacred  in  a single  hour.  Timur  the  “fire- 
brand of  the  universe ” and  greatest  wholesale  butcher 
of  our  species  ever  known,  plundered  and  massacred 
without  distinction  of  religion  or  sex  ; his  track  was 
followed  by  blood,  desolation,  famine  and  pestilence.” 
The  Mogul  Aurungzebe  and  Mahrattee  Sevagee, 
were  scarcely  less  ruthless  destroyers  of  the  Hindoo 
race,  wherever  obstacles  were  presented  to  their  mad 
and  plundering  ambition.  Nadir  Shah  entered  In- 
dia, slaughtered  the  inhabitants  of  Delhi,  without 
regard  to  age  or  sex — captured  Oude — seized  upon  the 
imperial  treasures  and  conveying  thence  $15,000,000 
in  specie — $5,000,000  in  plate,  $75,000,000  in  jewels, 
— the  renowned  Peacock  throne  valued  at  $5,000,000 
and  other  valuables  to  the  amount  of  $60,000,000, 
besides  elephants,  horses  and  camp  equipage  of  the 
deposed  Emperor.  From  the  ill-fated  days  of  Nadir 
Shah,  the  Moghul  Empire  in  India  began  to  decline — 
the  various  provinces  became  independent  principali- 
ties, some  under  Mohammedan  governors,  and  others 
under  Mahrattas,  until  the  city  of  Delhi,  with  a small 
district  around,  formed  all  that  remained  to  the  house 
of  Timur. 

“The  cessation  of  the  Mohammedan  power  in  India 


70 


INDIA. 


can  never  be  regretted  by  one  to  whom  are  familiar 
the  records  of  that  beautiful  but  ill-fated  country.” 
Providence  was  so  arranging  events  that  these  ruthless 
spoilers  of  that  fair  land  were  to  yield  their  dominion 
to  a people  of  another  faith  and  higher  impulse.  No 
more  do  we  read  of  twenty,  seventy,  or  an  hundred 
thousand  slaughtered  in  one  day  without  compunction 
of  conscience,  or  the  assigning  of  any  plausible  excuse, 
the  inhabitants  of  whole  provinces  hunted  like  wild 
beasts  for  royal  amusement,  women  devouring  their 
own  children  in  excess  of  asronv.  That  dark  volume 

O J 

finds  a close,  and  the  day  has  dawned,  dim  and  faint 
at  first,  but  the  light  of  which  will  ever  increase  till 
that  land  become  enlightened  and  Christian. 

In  the  year  of  our  Lord  1498,  Yasco  de  Gama,  a 
Portuguese  navigator,  having  performed  the  unwonted 
feat  of  doubling  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  landed  at  Cal- 
icut, a place  of  great  trade  upon  the  western  coast  of 
the  peninsula.  The  period  was  very  favorable  to  the 
interests  he  sought  to  promote,  and  which  were  ere 
long  to  be  realized.  After  fewer  delays  and  less  oppo- 
sition than  might  have  been  anticipated,  the  Portu- 
guese established  a commercial  empire  which  lasted  a 
century,  and  to  which,  whether  we  consider  its  extent, 
its  opulence,  or  the  slender  power  by  which  it  was 
formed,  or  the  splendor  by  which  the  government  of  it 
was  conducted,  there  had  been  nothing  comparable  in 
the  history  of  nations.  When  de  Gama  landed  for  tho 
first  time  on  the  shores  of  India,  he  endeavored,  by 
the  numbers  of  his  retinue,  their  splendid  attire,  and 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


71 


orderly  movements  to  make  a favorable  and  deep  im- 
pression. But  the  historian  has  recorded  a mistake 
made  by  these  foreigners,  which  detracts  somewhat 
from  the  dignity  of  the  occasion.  Some  of  the  sailors, 
seeing  a pagoda  and  concluding  from  the  beads  worn 
by  the  Brahmins  and  the  sandal  wood  incense,  that  it 
was  a Christian  temple,  at  once  entered,  and  noticing 
a variety  of  pictures  upon  the  wall,  prostrated  them- 
selves before  them,  as  before  the  Madonna  and  Saints. 
But  one  of  the  worshippers,  as  by  chance  he  looked  up 
and  observed  the  strange  and  uncouth  aspect  of  these 
imaginary  apostles,  some  of  whom  brandished  four 
and  five  arms,  and  had  enormous  teeth  projecting  out 
of  their  mouths,  judged  it  advisable  to  guard  himself 
by  the  exclamation,  “ If  these  be  devils  it  is  God 
whom  I ivor ship." 

In  the  year  1596,  Houtman,  a Dutch  navigator, 
sailed  for  India  in  charge  of  four  ships  laden  with  mer- 
chandize, and  well  equipped  for  an  encounter  with 
enemies  on  sea  or  land.  Traffic  was  commenced  with 
the  islands  of  Sumatra  and  Java — was  extended  in 
1605  to  Ceylon,  and  thence  to  India.  Omitting  his- 
torical detail,  let  it  suffice  to  say  that  “so  bold,  assid- 
uous and  enterprising  were  the  Dutch,  that  in  less 
than  eighty  years  from  the  time  that  Houtman  first 
sailed  from  Rotterdam  they  possessed  all  the  ports  and 
places  at  which  the  Portuguese  had  been  established, 
with  the  exception  of  Groa  and  a few  subordinate 
towns,  and  had,  besides,  formed  settlements  on  the 
Co/omanci?!  coast.” 


72 


INDIA. 


But  the  golden  prize,  the  land  of  gold  and  gems, 
was  destined  a third  time  to  change  possessors.  An 
English  armament,  coursing  the  Southern  and  Eastern 
seas,  captured,  on  different  occasions,  Portuguese  and 
Dutch  Indiamen,  laden  with  spices,  calicoes,  pearls, 
porcelain,  ebony,  and  other  rich  productions  of  this 
teeming  land.  A display  of  these,  in  London  and 
other  cities  of  Great  Britain,  inflamed  the  desire  of 
the  English  to  be  engaged  in  so  lucrative  a trade  and 
accordingly  application  was  made  to  Elizabeth,  the 
reigning  queen,  for  the  necessary  charter  of  protection 
and  privilege.  In  the  year  1599,  her  Majesty  com- 
plied with  the  request,  and  “ granted  an  exclusive 
charter  to  a company  of  London  merchants,  to  trade 
with  all  the  countries  between  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope  and  the  Straits  of  Magellan,”  under  a name  sim- 
ilar to  that  which  is  still  retained  to  their  successors 
of  the  present  day.  One  feature  of  the  Charter  was 
that  no  gentleman  should  be  connected  with  the  com- 
pany— a dubious  privilege  in  our  modern  estimation. 
The  first  factories  or  trading  houses  of  this  company 
were  established  at  Surat,  Ahmenabad  and  Gogo,  on 
the  Gulf  of  Cambay  ; — then  followed  the  acquisition 
in  1639  of  Madras,  in  1664  of  Bombay,  in  1696  of 
Calcutta,  and  in  succeeding  years,  of  Benares, 
Seringapatam,  Ceylon,  Guzerat,  Sinde,  and,  lastly, 
the  Punjaub.  In  many  of  these  instances  of  annexa- 
tion, resistance  was  made  by  the  native  residents,  in 
some  cases  aided  by  the  French  and  other  European 
Colonists,  but  under  Clive,  Hastings,  Wellesley,  Corn- 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


73 


wallis,  Harris,  Col.  Wellesley  (now  Duke  of  Welling- 
ton,) and  other  eminent  English  Generals,  Hindoos 
and  Mohammedans,  rulers  and  people  have  been  com- 
pelled to  cower  before  the  English  lion. 

The  history  of  that  vast  and  powerful  monopoly, 
“The  East  India  Company,”  is  deeply  interesting  as 
illustrating  the  trite  adage  of  “great  effects  from 
little  causes.”  The  charter  which  was  granted  in 
December  of  1600,  received  modifications  and  renew- 
als in  1609  ’36  ’57- ’61  ’67  ’83  ’86  ’98  and  in  1702  ’8, 
and  throughout  the  reigns  of  the  Georges,  to  the  year 
1812 — while  the  company  itself  has  been  extending 
its  limits,  increasing  its  power,  until  its  terminus  has 
become  the  limit  of  the  Peninsula  itself.  Events  of 
thrilling  and  often  most  painful  interest  arrest  the 
reader's  attention  when  perusing  the  history  of  British 
ascendency  in  India.  Let  one  suffice.  For  fifty  or 
more  years  after  the  occupancy  of  Calcutta  as  a 
trading  town,  an  event  occurred,  which,  for  condensed 
suffering  and  terrible  results,  scarcely  has  an  equal  in 
the  annals  of  human  barbarity  and  war.  The  reign- 
ing Prince  (Suraja  Dowlah)  had  become  suspicious  of 
the  foreigners  and  manifested  a determination  to  visit 
them  with  displeasure.  Unable,  from  the  condition 
of  their  fort  and  fewness  of  their  numbers,  to  resist  an 
invasion  were  it  made,  they  determined  to  desert  their 
insecure  abode,  and  embark  on  the  ships  which  lay  in 
the  river.  But  when  the  hour  of  embarkation  arrived, 
the  crew  of  the  vessels,  anxious  for  their  own  safety, 

moved  down  the  stream  and  could  not  be  induced  by 
4 


74 


INDIA. 


the  most  earnest  appeals  addressed  to  their  humanity 
and  patriotism,  to  return  for  the  rescue  of  their  endan- 
gered countrymen.  Night  was  at  hand,  and  with  it 
a command  from  the  Nabob,  to  keep  the  foreigners  in 
custody  for  examination  on  the  coming  day.  In  look- 
ing for  a place  of  confinement,  the  guard  found  a 
room  in  the  Fort  which  had  been  employed  to  confine 
refractory  soldiers,  and  here  were  they  destined  to  pass 
that  memorable  and  to  many  of  them  a last  night. 

“ The  place  selected  was  but  eighteen  feet  square, 
with  only  two  small  windows  barred  with  iron,  opening 
into  a close  verandah,  and  scarcely  admitting  a breath 
of  air.  Into  this  narrow  receptacle  the  whole  of  the 
officers  and  troops,  one  hundred  and  sixteen  in  num- 
ber, were  compelled  to  enter,  and  on  their  venturing 
to  remonstrate,  the  commander  ordered  every  one  who 
should  remonstrate  to  be  instantly  cut  down.  Thus 
were  they  forcibly  thrust  into  this  fearful  dungeon, 
into  which  the  whole  number  could  with  difficulty  be 
squeezed,  and  the  door  was  then  fast  barred  from 
without.  Their  first  impression  upon  finding  them- 
selves thus  immured,  was  the  utter  impossibility  of 
surviving  one  night,  and  the  necessity  of  extricating 
themselves  at  whatever  cost.  The  Jemadars  (or 
Indian  Guards)  were  walking  before  the  window  and 
Mr.  Holwell  seeing  one  who  bore  upon  his  face  a more 
than  usual  expression  of  humanity,  adjured  him  to 
procure  for  them  room  in  which  they  could  breath, 
assuring  him  of  a reward  next  morning  of  a thousand 
rupees.  The  man  went  away,  but  returned,  saying  it 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


75 


was  impossible.  The  prisoners  thinking  the  offer  too 
low,  tendered  two  thousand.  The  man  again  went 
and  returned  saying  that  the  Nabob  was  asleep  and 
no  one  durst  wake  him.  The  lives  of  a hundred  and 
forty-six  men  were  nothing  in  comparison  with  dis- 
turbing for  a moment  the  slumbers  of  a tyrant! 
Every  moment  added  to  their  distress.  All  attempts 
to  obtain  relief  by  a change  of  posture,  from  the  pain- 
ful pressure  to  which  it  gave  rise,  only  aggravated 
their  suffering.  The  air  soon  became  pestilential, 
producing  at  every  respiration  a feeling  of  suffocation. 
The  perspiration  flowed  in  streams  and  they  were  tor- 
mented with  the  most  burning  thirst.  Loud  cries 
being  made  for  “ water,”  the  humane  Jemadar  pushed 
through  the  bars  several  skins  filled  with  that  fluid, 
but  this  produced  only  an  increase  of  calamity, 
through  the  violent  efforts  made  to  obtain  it.  About 
eleven  o’clock  the  prisoners  began  to  die  fast — six  of 
Mr.  Holwell’s  best  friends  expiring  at  his  feet  and 
being  trampled  upon  by  the  survivors.  Of  those  still 
alive,  a great  proportion  were  raving  or  delirious ; 
some  uttered  incoherent  prayers,  others  the  most  fear- 
ful blasphemies.  They  endeavored  by  most  furious 
invectives  to  induce  the  guards  to  fire  into  the  prison 
and  end  their  miseries — but  without  effect.  When 
day  dawned  the  few  who  had  not  expired,  were  most 
of  them  either  raving  or  insensible,  and  of  the  one 
hundred  and  forty -six  who  had  been  enclosed,  there 
breathed  only  twenty-three  /”  The  reader  after  perus- 
ing this  narrative,  will  no  longer  wonder  that  the 


76 


INDIA. 


“ blcu.lt  hole  of  Calcutta'''  is  proverbial,  the  world 
over. 

The  news  of  this  disaster  reaching  Madras,  Col. 
(afterwards  Lord)  Clive  was  at  once  despatched  to 
Calcutta  with  a considerable  force  by  land  and  sea,  to 
avenge  the  death  of  their  countrymen.  Success 
attended  the  enterprise — the  author  of  the  black-hole 
tragedy  fell  by  an  assassin’s  hand — and  the  com- 
mencement of  British  rule  in  Bengal  may  be  dated 
from  that  hour.  The  reins  of  government  first 
held  by  Lord  Clive,  passed,  in  1772,  to  Warren 
Hastings,  and  successively  to  Lords  Cornwallis — Teign- 
mouth — Wellesley — Min  to — Marquis  Hastings — Ben- 
tinck — Auckland — EUenborough — Hardinge  and  Dal- 
housie — whose  differences  of  character  gained  for  them 
the  titles  of  the  “unscrupulous,”  “prudent,”  “am- 
bitious,” “good,”  “foolish,”  “brave,”  &c.,  but  whose 
administrations  without  exception,  though  in  different 
ways,  tended  to  produce  the  result  we  now  behold — 
that  of  British  Sovereignty  from  the  Himalayas  to 
Cape  Comorin , and  from  the  Bay  of  Bengal  to  the 
Arabian  Sea.  Within  these  limits  there  are,  it  is 
true,  small  territories  under  the  jurisdiction  of  other 
European  powers.  The  French,  the  Portuguese,  and 
the  Danes  have  small  colonies  on  the  Eastern  and 
Western  Coasts  at  Pondicherry,  G-oa,  &c.  Theso  they 
are  allowed  to  retain  by  courtesy  and  because  at- 
tempts at  their  expulsion  might  involve  the  home  gov- 
ernments in  war.  Serampore,  near  Calcutta,  onoo 
held  by  the  Danes,  has  been  purchased  by  the  East 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


77 


India  Company  as  also  Tranquebar,  south  from 
Madras,  and  the  like  transfer  will  be  made  ere  long 
of  the  other  territories.  There  are  also  several 
provinces,  the  native  rulers  of  which  are  allowed  to 
retain  an  appearance  of  independent  possession  and 
rule.  Such  are  Hyderabad,  Nagpore,  Oude,  Guzerat, 
Mysore,  and  Travancore.  These  territories  differ  but 
in  name  from  other  parts  of  the  country.  They  aro 
directly  subservient  to  the  East  India  Company,  and 
let  them  act  as  if  independent  they  would  soon  wake 
from  their  delusion.  An  English  gentleman,  called 
“ Resident,”  is  placed  near  the  capital  of  these  tribu- 
tary provinces  and  a military  force  officered  by  English- 
men is  paid  from  the  treasury  of  the  Rajah.  Let  this 
Prince,  with  all  his  parade  of  royalty  and  independ- 
ence adopt  a course  opposed  to  the  will  of  this  Resi- 
dent, he  is  at  first  warned,  and  if  that  do  not  suffice 
the  semblance  of  power  is  taken  from  him  and  he  in- 
carcerated (perhaps  in  his  own  palace)  with  a large 
pension,  but  still  a State  prisoner. 

This  topic  may  be  closed  with  the  following  remarks 
from  the  eloquent  pen  of  Rev.  Dr.  Duff : “A  region  of 
Asia,  equal  in  extent  to  the  whole  of  Europe  (exclu- 
sive of  Russia)  with  a population  of  more  than  a hun- 
dred and  forty  millions, — all  of  them  aliens  in  blood, 
language,  and  religion ; and  many  consisting  of  war- 
like tribes,  so  gallant  and  brave  as  to  have  again  and 
again  repelled  the  combined  hosts  of  the  Moslem  con- 
querors, with  a heroism  not  unworthy  of  the  best  sons 
of  Greece  : — this  vast  region,  situate,  by  the  ordinary 


78 


INDIA. 


route,  at  a distance  exceeding  half  the  globe’s  circum- 
ference, has,  to  its  uttermost  borders,  been  subjected 
to  the  uncontrolled  dominion  of  British  sway.  So 
absolute  and  undisputed  is  the  supremacy  of  the  Bri- 
tish sceptre — so  regular  and  perfect  the  organization 
of  the  British  power, — that  an  English  subject,  under 
the  designation  of  Governor-General — who  may  never 
have  trodden  on  the  Indian  soil, — may  embark  on 
board  a vessel  in  the  Thames — traverse  fifteen  thou- 
sand miles  of  ocean — proceed  up  the  mighty  Ganges 
as  far  as  Dover  is  from  Gibraltar — perch  himself  on 
one  of  the  peaks  of  the  Himalayas — and  there,  by  a 
single  sentence  from  his  lips,  or  a stroke  of  his  pen,  as 
by  the  waving  wand  of  a mighty  enchanter,  set  all  the 
teeming  millions  of  India  in  motion !”  This  language 
though  strong  and  eulogistic  of  national  prowess,  is 
strictly  correct.  The  Seiks  were  the  last  power  to 
resist  foreign  invasion,  but  they  have  been  compelled 
to  succumb  to  the  hitherto  unconquered  arms  of  the 
English  in  the  East.  All  India  is  now  in  truth,  what 
it  has  long  been  in  name,  “ British  India." 

“ Have  the  measures  employed  to  secure  this  result 
been,  in  all  cases,  accordant  with  justice,  integrity 
and  mercy  ?”  Far  from  it.  The  public  will  not  bear 
such  a portraiture  of  Clive  and  Hastings  as  will  pre- 
sent them  free  from  blemishes  dark  and  forbidding. 
In  proof  of  this,  the  reader  is  commended  to  the  narra- 
tives of  those  earliest  Governors  of  India  from  the 
powerful  pen  of  Macaulay.  Without  wishing  to  class 
these  officers  with  Teignmouth  and  Metcalf  and 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


79 


“ honest  William  Bentinck,”  yet  history  compels  us  to 
the  opinion  that,  with  great  differences  in  the  charac- 
ters of  the  Governors,  the  same  general  features  have 
characterized  every  administration  from  Clive  to  Dal- 
housie,  and  that  when  force  has  not  been  practicable, 
recourse  has  been  had  to  intrigue  and  other  sinister 
measures. 

“ How  do  the  Hindoos  bear  the  yoke  of  their  for- 
eign conquerors  ?”  They  know  that  they  are  an 
enslaved  people,  and  that  for  ages  past  they  have  been 
as  dust  under  the  rolling  wheel  of  the  war-chariot  and 
attempts  have  been  made  to  reassert  their  independ- 
ence. One  of  the  latest  of  these  efforts  occurred  in 
the  year  1806,  at  Vellore,  when  there  perished  of  the 
four  European  companies  encamped  in  the  Fort,  one 
hundred  and  sixty-four  soldiers,  besides  many  British 
officers.  A later  effort  of  the  kind  was  made  at  Ban- 
galore in  the  year  1834,  which  (had  it  not  have  been 
discovered)  would  have  resulted  in  the  death  of  the 
whole  cantonment  of  a thousand  or  more  persons. 
These  instances  are  few  in  number  and  limited  in 
results.  The  system  of  caste  among  the  Hindoos  is 
preventive  of  that  unity  of  action  essential  to  the  suc- 
cess of  such  an  enterprise,  while  the  Mohammedans 
are  too  few  in  number  (though  not  destitute  of  desire 
and  zeal)  for  such  an  enterprize. 

Much  conversation  with  intelligent  Hindoos  and 
Mohammedans  upon  this  subject,  has  led  me  to  the  ad- 
vised conclusion,  that  however  iniquitous  may  have 
been  many  of  the  measures  by  which  India  has  be- 


80 


INDIA. 


come  subjected  to  British  control,  and  however  pain- 
ful and  galling  is  the  present  state  of  servitude  and 
debasement,  the  country  is,  on  the  whole,  better  gov- 
erned than  for  centuries  before  the  arrival  of  the  first 
English  vessel,  and  the  mass  of  the  people  would  be 
far  from  desiring  a transfer  of  the  reins  of  government 
to  native  rulers,  or  to  any  other  European  power.  We 
may  be  assured  that  the  wish  is  strongly  reciprocated. 
The  pages  of  history  indicate  this  fact,  that  “ what - 
ever  city  or  nation  has , in  the  lapse  of  past  ages , 
held  in  its  hand  the  keys  of  the  Indian  commerce  and 
influence , that  city  or  place  has,  for  the  time,  stood 
forth  in  the  van  of  the  civilized  world , as  the  richest 
and  most  flourishing."  So  long  as  Arabia  enjoyed 
the  full  benefit  of  Indian  commerce,  it  was  far-famed 
as  “Araby  the  blest.”  “Indian  commerce  found  Pal- 
myra composed  of  brick,  and  left  it  more  precious 
than  marble.”  Monopoly  of  the  Indian  trade  enabled 
Tyre,  single-handed,  to  resist,  so  long,  the  mightiest 
assaults  of  the  Macedonian  conqueror.  Direct  trade 
with  India  and  the  East,  speedily  raised  Alexandria 
into  such  pre-eminence,  as  to  eclipse  all  surrounding 
cities.  Through  Moslem  victories  Bagdad  staffed  up 
at  once  the  Rome,  the  Alexandria,  the  Athens  of  the 
East ; and  Ghuznee  was  long  famed  as  Iho  “Celestial 
Bride.”  During  the  century  of  Portuguese  dominion, 
Lisbon  outpeered  all  her  rivals. 

England  knows  full  well  that  she  owes  not  a little 
of  her  present  greatness  to  the  fact  that  among  her 
many  colonics  India  is  one , and  loth  will  she  be  to 


HISTORICAL  SURVEY. 


81 


part  with  that  extensive  and  antique  land.  Aus- 
tralia— Singapore — the  Cape — Helena — New  Zealand 
— Canada.  She  would  part  with  all  before  losing 
India.  It  is  a crown  jewel.  But  I must  pause  at 
this  point. 

The  several  periods  brought  to  notice  in  this  chap- 
ter may  be  thus  characterized.  When  under  the 
Native  Rajahs,  India  seems  to  have  excelled  in  wealth, 
magnificence,  and  literature ; — under  the  Mohamme- 
dan conquerors,  the  land  was  cursed  with  oppression 
and  cruelty,  the  only  road  to  preferment  being  con- 
version to  Islamism ; while  under  the  English  rulers 
it  is  enjoying  general  quietude,  peace  and  prosperity; 
the  people  gradually  rising  to  the  attainment  of  that 
character  which  will  make  them  happy  in  this  life, 
and  blessed  in  the  life  to  come. 

I cannot  better  close  this  chapter  than  by  present- 
ing to  the  reader  the  following  truthful  and  eloquent 
passages  from  a well-known  writer  upon  the  East. 
“It  must  have  been  to  accomplish  some  very  important 
moral  change  in  the  Eastern  world,  that  so  vast  an 
empire  as  is  comprised  in  British  India,  containing 
nearly  an  hundred  and  fifty  millions  of  people,  should 
have  been  placed  under  the  dominion  of  one  of  the 
smallest  portions  of  the  civilized  world,  and  that  at 
the  other  extremity  of  the  globe.  Is  it  not  manifest 
that  in  the  mental  and  moral  improvement  of  this  vast 
empire,  Great  Britain  has  a work  of  benevolence  before 
her,  which,  in  national  glory,  will  eclipse  all  her 
other  achievements,  as  much  as  the  meridian  sun 
4% 


82 


INDIA. 


exceeds  in  splendor  the  morning  star.  Know,  then, 
the  country  of  the  Howards  and  the  Wilberforces,  thy 
high  destiny ! Never  were  such  miseries  to  be  re- 
moved— never  was  such  a mighty  good  put  into  the 
power  of  one  nation — the  raising  of  so  many  spirits 
from  the  darkness  of  error  and  the  wretchedness  of 
sin,  to  the  light  of  truth,  and  the  blessedness  of 
heaven.” 


CHAPTER  IV. 


INHABITANTS  OF  INDIA  CLASSIFIED. 

Population — Native  Hindoos — Mohamedans  (Annual  Festivities') — 
East  Indians — European  Residents,  of  several  grades — Arabs — Par- 
sees — Chinese  and  Jews. 

India,  within  the  limits  before  named,  contains  an 
estimated  population  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  mil- 
lions. This  vast  assemblage  is  divided  into  numerous 
tribes,  differing  widely  from  each  other  in  origin,  ap- 
pearance, habits,  interests,  and  religion.  They  may 
be  arranged  with  sufficient  accuracy,  into  four  classes, 
of  which  the  first  are  Native  Hindoos , to  the  num- 
ber of  about  one  hundred  and  thirty-eight  millions. 
These,  though  widely  diverse  in  language  and  man- 
ners, adhere  to  a similar  system  of  religious  belief, 
and  are  thus  united  in  the  strong  bond  of  sympathy 
and  interest.  Of  this  aboriginal  population,  the 
remaining  pages  of  the  volume  will  speak  in  detail, 
and,  therefore,  no  further  mention  need  be  made  in  this 
place. 

The  second  class  comprises  the  Mohamedans , 
who  number  about  ten  millions.  These  are  the 


84 


INDIA. 


descendants  of  the  early  invaders  of  the  soil,  and 
they  are  not  ignorant  or  forgetful  of  the  fact  that 
their  fathers  once  conquered  and  ruled  the  land. 
The  Mohamedan  is  in  manner , cold  and  repulsive, 
his  countenance  seldom  wearing  a smile,  and  his 
bearing  lofty  and  austere ; in  religion,  most  bigot- 
cdly  attached  to  his  own  modes  of  faith  and  wor- 
ship, and,  in  heart,  at  deep  enmity  with  his  Euro- 
pean conquerors — being  ever  ready  to  take  an  active 
and  resolute  part  in  their  expulsion.  Insurrec- 
tions and  mutinies  have,  with  few  exceptions,  been 
traced  to  Mussulman  craftiness  and  hate.  Mosques, 
with  their  towering  minarets,  where  the  Koran  is 
read,  and  prayers  recited,  are  to  be  met  with  in  all 
the  leading  cities  and  towns  of  the  country.  Wher- 
ever a Mohamedan  be,  or  however  engaged,  he  per- 
forms his  devotions  with  the  most  scrupulous  exact- 
ness, fearlessly  confessing  his  attachment  to  the 
Prophet  and  his  creed.  Many  of  them  are  employed 
as  seamen  on  the  sippll  craft  that  navigate  the  eastern 
seas,  especially  along  the  opposite  coasts  and  to  the 
neighboring  islands  of  Ceylon  and  Singapore.  I have 
often  observed,  and  never  without  deep  emotion,  the 
following  act  of  religious  homage  and  conscious  de- 
pendence, in  these  ever  imperiled  sons  of  the  deep. 
Before  weighing  anchor,  the  captain  stations  himself 
near  the  mast,  and  commences,  in  a loud  tone,  the 
recitation  of  a prayer  to  the  Prophet.  At  brief  inter- 
vals the  whole  crew  respond  in  unison,  '•'Allah,"  and 
at  the  close  of  the  supplication,  they  thrice  repeat  the 


INHABITANTS  OF  INDIA  CLASSIFIED. 


85 


sacred  name.  On  one  of  their  days  of  annual  festiv- 
ity, each  Moorman  masques  himself  in  the  most  per- 
fect manner  possible,  by  painting  his  body  with  colors 
of  various  hue,  decorating  himself  with  most  fantastic 
c-ttire,  and  then  “ en  masse”  perambulating  the  streets 
with  drums  beating,  horns  blowing,  banners  flying, 
presenting  a scene  alike  unique,  grotesque,  ludicrous, 
senseless  and  pitiable.  On  another  day  each  follower 
of  the  Prophet  hires  or  loans  a horse  or  pony,  and  in 
military  array,  parades  the  streets,  much  to  the  amaze- 
ment of  the  gazing  multitude  and  the  amusement  of 
the  foreign  beholder.  A Mohamedan’s  dress  is  more 
European  than  that  of  the  Hindoo,  being  a pair  of 
loose  trowsers  of  silk,  a flowing  gown  of  cotton,  with 
turban  and  shoes.  Their  language  is  Hindostanee, 
though  they  readily  acquire  the  tongue  of  the  people 
among  whom  they  may  chance  to  dwell.  Their  em- 
ployments are  as  clerks  and  accountants,  local  and 
travelling  tradesmen,  soldiers,  seamen,  tailors,  wash- 
ermen and  instructors  of  Europeans,  (their’s  being  the 
language  of  the  army.)  They  are  industrious,  and 
less  addicted  to  gross  and  open  immorality  than  are 
their  heathen  neighbors,  upon  whom  they  look  down 
with  deepest  contempt,  despising  them  for  their  gen- 
eral character  and  conduct,  and  especially  their  wor- 
ship of  idols.  But  few  accessions  have  been  made 
to  Christianity  from  among  the  followers  of  the 
Prophet,  and  but  few  of  their  youth  are  allowed  to 
attend  upon  Missionary  instruction. 

A third  division  includes  a large  and  increasing 


86 


INDIA. 


number,  to  whom  are  given  the  names  of  Indo- 
Britains,  East-Indians,  country-born,  or  more  eupho- 
niously, and,  to  the  persons  concerned,  more  accepta- 
bly, Eurasians.  The  offspring  of  temporary  unions, 
which  gave  them  European  fathers  and  native  mothers, 
they  are  in  general  but  lightly  esteemed  by  those 
above  and  below  them.  The  conduct  of  the  European 
residents  towards  this  class  of  citizens  has,  it  cannot 
be  denied,  been  in  too  many  cases  illiberal  and  highly 
wrong,  especially  as  they,  and  two  or  more  genera- 
tions, in  most  instances,  are  wholly  without  crime 
in  respect  to  their  birth.  There  is  no  excuse  for 
this  wholesale  dislike,  especially  while  among  them 
are  many  persons,  than  whom  community  can  desire 
no  better  members.  A policy  more  enlightened,  lib- 
eral, and  Christian,  has  begun  to  prevail,  and  the 
East-Indian  will  ere  long  occupy  the  place  to  which 
he  appropriately  belongs  and  be  judged  of,  not  accord- 
ing to  his  parentage,  but  by  his  real  and  personal 
merits.  The  great  fault  committed  by  this  class  is 
their  wasteful  expenditure  in  personal  decorations, 
their  mistake  of  the  florid  and  bombastical,  for  the 
simple  and  appropriate  in  language  and  attire.  This 
appears  in  the  names  they  give  to  their  children.  “ I 
believe  a friend  was  adhering  to  truth,  who,  after 
observing,  that  if  you  meet  with  one  Mary,  Elizabeth, 
or  Anne,  you  at  least  encounter  five  Floras,  Theodo- 
sias, Calinas,  and  Clarissas.  <!  Not  long  since,”  says 
a writer,  “ I was  in  a room  where  five  Anglo-Indian 
ladies  assembled,  whose  names  were  Amelia  Wilhel- 


INHABITANTS  OP  INDIA  CLASSIFIED. 


87 


mina  Rose,  Christiana  Aurora  Comfort,  Jemima  Cle- 
ment, Amelia  Theodosia  Clarissa,  and  Augusta  Di- 
ana Noel  Babington.  These  improprieties  are  both  the 
cause  and  effect  of  their  so  long  and  entire  exclusion 
from  European  circles.  The  East-Indians  are  scat- 
tered over  the  Peninsula  to  the  number  of  four  hun- 
dred thousand,  most  of  whom  are  content  with  the 
humble  stations  and  small  incomes  of  clerks  and 
writers  in  government  and  commercial  establishments, 
shopkeepers  and  musicians,  while  a few  are  enterpris- 
ing, wealthy,  and  every  way  worthy  of  confidence  and 
respect.  The  names  of  Messrs.  Van  S.,  C.  and  D.  are 
familiar  to  all  who  have  resided  in  the  city  of  Madras ; 
— philanthropy  and  religion  having  no  more  benevolent 
advocates  than  these  Anglo-Indian  gentlemen. 

A fourth  class  is  formed  of  foreign  residents,  to  the 
number  of  about  fifty  thousand.  Of  these  the  large 
proportion  are  salaried  agents  of  the  British  govern- 
ment, the  rest  being  commission  merchants  or  shop- 
keepers, lawyers,  artizans,  and  Christian  teachers. 
Of  these,  none  but  Missionaries  contemplate  a perma- 
nent residence  in  the  country.  The  Governor-Gen- 
eral remains  so  long  as  the  Ministry  with  which  he  is 
connected  is  in  power,  except  ill  health  or  misdeeds 
require  his  return.  Officers,  civil  and  military,  may 
revisit  their  father-land  on  furlough  at  the  expiration 
of  ten  years,  an  additional  ten  allowing  them  to 
remain  at  home  upon  the  pension  of  their  rank. 
Judges  and  other  high  officials  often  reside  in  the 
country  from  thirty  to  forty  years — their  income  being 


88 


INDIA. 


ample — their  health  but  slightly  impaired, — and  their 
habits  so  Indianized  as  to  render  a return  to  Euro- 
pean customs  undesirable  and  repulsive.  Common 
soldiers  at  the  close  of  twenty  years’  service  may 
return  to  their  western  home,  though  some  among 
them  form  matrimonial  alliances  with  the  daughters 
of  their  countrymen  or  East  Indians,  constituting  a 
community  of  their  own,  and  subsisting  on  their  annual 
stipend,  with  the  addition  of  small  sums  they  may  in 
various  ways  secure.  Among  them  are  a few  respect- 
able and  worthy  persons,  while  the  majority  become 
enslaved  to  intemperance  and  lie  down  in  a dishonored 
and  unlamented  grave.  In  the  ranks  of  the  India 
soldiery  may  at  times  be  found  men  of  high  families, 
classical  education,  brilliant  genius,  and  accomplished 
manners.  Family  feuds,  disappointed  attachments 
and  vicious  acts,  caused  them  in  haste  or  from  seem- 
ing necessity  to  enlist,  and  here  they  are  leading  a 
life  of  toil  and  wretchedness — a sad,  but  self-inflicted 
punishment  for  error  and  sin.  Parents  and  friends  at 
times  trace  their  relatives  to  India,  and  the  Prodigal 
willingly  accepts  from  those  he  left  in  disgust  and 
rage,  the  twenty  pounds  required  for  his  redemption 
from  debasing  and  toilsome  service.  I am  acquainted 
with  editors,  bank  accountants,  teachers,  musicians, 
and  artists,  who  went  to  India  as  common  soldiers, 
and,  through  the  benevolence  of  others,  or  borrowed 
money,  obtained  their  release  from  military  servitude. 

The  time  has  been  when  to  be  connected  with  a house 
of  agency  at  Calcutta,  Madras,  or  Bombay  was  a cer- 


INHABITANTS  OF  INDIA  CLASSIFIED. 


89 


tain  passport  to  a princely  fortune.  But  those  palmy 
days  have  long  gone  by.  Property  is,  it  is  true,  still 
accumulated,  but  with  greater  toil  and  less  speed. 
The  trade  between  India  and  the  west,  furnishes,  of 
course,  much  business  to  the  houses  of  commission ; 
but  there  are  rival  claimants  for  patronage,  and  years 
must  elapse  ere  a sufficient  amount  be  realized  to 
allow  the  senior  partner  to  retire,  and  yield  his 
place  to  a junior  colleague.  Besides  commission  mer- 
chants, there  are  to  be  met  with  in  the  most  import- 
ant cities  of  India,  auctioneers,  artizans  and  shop- 
keepers, who  are  toiling  for  wealth  in  that  misnom- 
ered  land  of  gold  and  gems.  The  children  of  foreign 
residents  are  sent  home  at  the  early  period  of  five  to 
ten  years;  regard  to  health,  habits  and  mental  culture 
rendering  the  change  absolutely  necessary.  The 
instances  in  which  childhood  and  adult  years  have 
been  passed  in  India  with  no  prejudice  to  body,  mind, 
or  morals,  are  “ few  and  far  between.” 

In  addition  to  the  four  general  classes  now  named, 
the  traveller  through  India  meets  with  Arabs,  the 
horse-jockies  of  the  country,  shrewd,  daring  and 
unscrupulous ; with  Parsees,  or  fire  worshipping 
Ghebers,  descended  from  the  original  inhabitants  of 
Persia,  who  devote  themselves  to  merchandise  on  a 
small  scale;  with  Chinese  adventurers,  especially  on 
the  west  and  eastern  frontiers,  who  import  the  fancy 
articles  of  their  ingenious  country,  and  manufacture 
shoes  and  other  wearing  apparel;  and,  at  the  southern 
extremity  of  the  Peninsula,  with  Jews  who  for  centu- 


90 


INDIA. 


ries  have  remained  isolated  and  distinguished  from 
the  heathen  and  Mohamedans  around,  not  “ bowing 
down  to  idols”  but  worshipping  God,  after  the  manner 
indicated  in  the  books  of  Moses  and  the  Prophets. 

These  last  are  divided  into  ancient,  or  Black , and 
modern,  or  White  Jews , whose  origin  and  history  has 
awakened  just,  and  very  deep  interest,  throughout  the 
Christian  world.  The  reader  who  would  further  ac- 
quaint himself  with  the  descendants  of  an  ancient 
and  honored  ancestry,  as  also  with  the  Syrian  Chris- 
tians, who  inhabit  the  same  southern  region,  is  com- 
mended to  the  writings  of  Dr.  Buchanan,  who  visited 
those  communities  in  the  early  part  of  the  present 
century,  and  has  left  on  record  the  results  of  his 
investigation,  in  his  deeply  interesting  “ Researches  in 
Asia” 


CHAPTER  V. 


GOVERNMENT  OF  INDIA. 

The  three  Presidencies — Governor-General — Metropolitan  Bishop — Offi- 
cers, &c.  in  the  four  Departments,  Revenue,  Judicial,  Military,  and 
Ecclesiastical — General  Remarks. 

India  has  been  divided  by  her  British  rulers,  into 
the  three  Presidencies  of  Bengal,  Madras,  and  Bom- 
bay, which  are  located  in  the  north  and  north-east, 
south,  and  west  and  north-west  parts  of  the  Penin- 
sula. These  large  sections  are  sub-divided  into  dis- 
tricts, Zillahs,  villages  and  hamlets.  Each  presi- 
dency is  under  the  guidance  and  control  of  a Grov- 
ernor,  assisted  by  three  members  of  council,  all  of 
whom  receive  their  appointments  from  the  Court 
of  Directors  in  London  — the  governors  of  Madras 
and  Bombay  being  inferior  in  rank  and  authority  to 
the  one  residing  at  Calcutta,  who  is  honored  with  the 
title  of  Governor-G-eneral.  This  officer  supports  a 
state  dignity  scarcely  inferior  to  that  of  an  independ- 
ent sovereign.  The  office  is  sought  for  by  the  highest 
dignitaries  of  the  realm,  as,  in  addition  to  honor  and 
emolument,  the  occupant  is  a Privy  councillor,  and 


92 


INDIA. 


entitled  to  vice-regal  privileges  and  respect.  The 
names  of  Clive,  Hastings,  Wellesley  and  Ellenborough 
occupy  a leading  place  on  the  pages  of  English  politi- 
cal history.  In  respect  to  rank,  the  officer  next  suc- 
ceeding the  Governor-General,  is  the  Metropolitan, 
whose  home  is  also  at  Calcutta.  This  post  has  been 
held  by  the  learned  Middleton,  the  amiable  and 
lamented  Heber,  and  the  thoroughly  protestant  and 
boldly  practical  Wilson. 

The  British  residents  of  a rank  inferior  to  that  of 
those  named,  may  be  arranged  into  four  general 
classes  : — the  revenue — the  judicial — the  military — 
and  the  ecclesiastical. 

The  Revenue  department  includes  those  officers 
who  are  devoted  to  the  general  supervision  of  the  peo- 
ple, with  special  reference  to  the  collection  of  the 
rents.  One  of  these  resides  in  each  district,  under 
the  title  of  Collector,  with  an  Assistant.  His  powei 
is  great,  respecting  all,  European  or  Native,  within 
his  limits;  nothing  of  a public  nature  being  allowed  to 
occur  without  his  knowledge  and  permission.  His 
responsibilities  are  weighty,  his  duties  arduous,  and  his 
better  feelings  often  being  put  to  a severe  test.  The 
British  government  is  virtually  a rack  renting  land- 
lord : — the  Ryotwarre  system , as  it  is  called,  which 
prevails  throughout  most  of  the  country  being  com- 
pared to  a “cider  screw,  while  each  district  is  like  the 
squeezed  apple,  the  collectors  applying  the  extent  of 
their  power  and  then  transferring  the  handle  to  their 
successors.”  The  assessment  is  variable,  being  annu- 


GOVERNMENT  OF  INDIA. 


93 


ally  made,  according  to  an  actual  survey  of  every 
acre  of  the  ground  and  its  measure  of  productiveness. 
The  whole  extent  of  the  Province  is  divided  into  three 
classes  ; the  dry  field , the  irrigated  field , and  the 
irrigated  garden  land:  these  being  again  distin- 
guished by  a subordinate  classification  of  twenty  vari- 
eties in  each  division.  When  the  peasant’s  crop  fails 
or  is  defective,  remissions  of  tax  are  made  ; when  it 
is  unusually  abundant  there  is  an  increased  assess- 
ment. When  the  crop  of  one  inhabitant  of  a village 
fails,  his  neighbors  are  required  to  make  good  the  defi- 
ciency ; and  when  the  crops  of  a whole  village  fail  or 
are  defective,  the  neighboring  ones  ar*e  required  to 
make  up  the  difference  to  the  State.  The  estimated 
proportion  of  the  gross  produce  of  the  soil,  taken  as 
tax  by  the  government,  under  this  system  i $ forty-five 
parts  in  a hundred.  But  this  is  not  all ; for  in  every  vil- 
lage there  are  several  officers  to  each  of  whom  a propor- 
tion must  be  allotted.  There  is  the  Brahmin , or  publio 
priest,  the  Astrologer , who  lets  the  people  know  when 
the  stars  and  seasons  are  in  proper  humor  for  favoring 
the  labors  and  enterprizes  of  the  village ; the  Potail, 
or  Mayor,  the  Clerk , or  register  of  events  and  trans- 
actions, the  Guardsman , the  Schoolmaster , the  Bar- 
ber, Doctor , Musician , fyc.,  each  claiming  his  share, 
which  the  owner  withholds  at  the  peril  of  serious  loss 
in  the  future.  The  respect  in  which  the  oppression 
is  greatest,  is,  that  the  government  is  so  unwilling  or 
unable  to  lose  the  revenue,  and  the  consequent  effort 
made  by  the  Zemindar  or  lessee  to  obtain  the  required 


94 


INDtA. 


amount  from  the  people  under  his  chaige,  be  their 
harvest  what  it  may.  Here  is  demanded  on  the  part  of 
the  revenue  officer,  constant  and  most  watchful  vig- 
ilance; the  effort  being  ever  made  by  the  Zemindar 
and  Rygots  to  convince  him  that  payment  of  the  full 
amount  is  quite  impossible,  and  thus  induce  him  to 
petition  government  for  a reduction  of  assessment. 
If  he  be  a person  of  natural  kindness  of  heart,  the 
appeal  is  hard  to  resist,  while  over  against  this  Sylla 
stands  the  Charybdis  of  Governmental  displeasure. 
The  fact  is  notorious  to  those  much  versed  in  Indian 
affairs,  that  the.  “reputation  and  prospects  of  a col- 
lector depend*  to  a large  extent,  upon  his  realizing  a 
full  revenue  and  that  a recommendation  for  reduc- 
tion in  the  amount  of  assessment  is  considered  in  the 
light  of  a register  of  his  own  inefficiency. 

“ But  let  their  income  fail  them  to  a pound, 

’Ware,  ’ware,  my  friend,  for  this  is  tender  ground. 

Lo!  what  a hubbub  rises  o’er  his  head; 

What  sundry  sharp  and  cutting  things  are  said 
Of  mere  incompetence  and  sheer  neglect, 

And  what,  if  it  recurs,  he  must  expect.” 

These  circumstances  render  the  position  of  a Col- 
lector of  Revenue  onerous,  responsible  and  trying. 
A contest  is  ever  going  on  between  the  wishes  of  those 
between  whom  he  stands  as  umpire  and  his  own  bet- 
ter feelings — his  regard  to  mercy,  truth,  and  faithful- 
ness, and  his  self  interest.  But  the  office  is  one  of 
great  honor,  and  much  emolument,  (the  salary  aver- 
aging $15,000  per  annum)  and  is,  therefore,  notwith- 


GOVERNMENT  OF  INDIA. 


95 


standing  its  toil  and  anxiety,  eagerly  sought  and 
highly  prized. 

The  Judicial  department  comprises  the  several  offi- 
cers who  have  in  charge  the  administration  of  justice. 
Calcutta,  Madras,  and  Bombay,  are  each  the  resi- 
dence of  a Chief  Justice  and  Puisne  Judge — persons 
eminent  for  their  attainments  in  the  legal  profession, 
and  placed,  by  the  amount  of  their  salaries,  above  all 
temptation  of  unfaithfulness  to  the  truth.  "While  Sir 
Wm.  Jones  was  making  deep  research  into  Hindoo 
literature  and  science  he  was  presiding  with  great 
ability  over  the  Metropolitan  Court.  Of  inferior  rank 
to  these  are  the  Session  Judges , which  answer  to  the 
Justices  of  the  State  of  New  York,  who  examine  into 
the  merits,  and  adjudicate  cases,  which  come  before 
them  through  the  Collector  of  the  district,  their 
decisions  going  to  the  Presidency  Court  for  review. 
Each  village  has  its  police,  with  power  to  dispose  of 
minor  offences,  reporting  the  same  to  the  Collector. 
There  is  still  another  court,  intermediate  between  the 
Sessions  and  the  village,  the  judges  of  which  are 
natives,  or  East-Indians,  and  conducted  in  the  lan- 
guage of  the  country.  In  the  chief  cities  there  is  a 
court  of  high  grade,  called  the  Foujde  a dawlit,  and 
answering  to  our  Court  of  Appeals.  Natives  can 
be  tried  at  any  of  these  courts,  Europeans  only  before 
the  Judges  of  their  own  country.  In  the  Supreme 
Courts,  juries  have  the  decision  of  cases,  but  in  the 
Sessions  this  is  left  to  the  Judges,  from  whom  appeals 
can  be  made  to  Calcutta,  and  thence  to  the  “ Queen 


98 


INDIA. 


in  council.”  Every  court  of  importance  has  attached 
to  it  natives,  well  versed  in  the  different  languages  of 
the  country,  and  in  Hindoo  and  Mohamedan  Law. 
The  Sherishtadar,  the  Collector’s  assistant,  is  a 
native  of  rank  and  high  salary.  Integrity  and  truth- 
fulness are  essential  requisites  in  one  holding  this 
appointment,  but  confidence  is  too  often  sadly  mis- 
placed. The  Tahsildar , who  presides  over  several  vil- 
lages, is  entrusted  with  important  duties,  and  main- 
tains considerable  state.  Peons,  or  native  consta- 
bles, are  ever  to  be  met  with,  bearing  their  badge 
of  office,  in  the  form  of  a belt  over  the  right,  and 
under  the  left  shoulder,  and  staff  in  hand  ready  to 
quell  disturbance  and  afford  relief. 

The  Military  department  is  by  far  the  largest  of 
the  four,  though  inferior  in  rank  to  those  named. 
India  was  conquered  by  the  sword,  and  force  is  still 
required  to  keep  it  in  subjection.  The  Indian  army 
is  composed  of  two  general  classes  ; — the  European , 
which  forms  part  of  the  standing  army  of  England, 
but  who  are  sent  to  the  East  for  a term  of  years,  and 
at  the  expense  of  the  E.  India  Company,  the  whole 
number  of  which,  cavalry,  artillery,  infantry,  sappers, 
miners,  and  engineers,  varying  not  far  from  forty 
thousand  rank  and  file  ; and  the  native  Seapoys,  of 
whom  there  are  about  two  hundred  regiments  of  a 
thousand  each.  These  corps  are  officered  by  Eng- 
lishmen, with  native  subordinates  called  Subkadars, 
Jemadars , Harildars , Nai/cs , &o.  That  these  few 
thousand  soldiery  should  bo  able  to  keep  the  millions 


GOVERNMENT  OF  INDIA. 


97 


of  India  in  complete  subjection,  carrying  their  arms 
into  rebellious  territories,  and  neighboring  provinces, 
and  with  uninterrupted  success,  is  a fact  which 
finds  not  its  like  in  the  history  of  any  nation,  present 
or  past.  It  would  appear,  in  looking  at  the  subject 
from  a distance,  that  a conquering  state  could  not 
rely  upon  the  fidelity  of  soldiers  obtained  from  the 
nations  conquered.  Yet  the  native  troops  of  India 
have  shown  that  such  confidence  may  be  placed  with- 
out harm.  On  repeated  occasions  have  the  faithfulness 
and  heroism  of  the  Seapoy  been  put  to  the  severest 
test,  but  never  has  hope  been  disappointed.  The  dis- 
afi'ections  that  occurred  at  Vellore,  Hyderabad,  and 
Bangalore  ■were  occasioned  by  too  great  and  needless 
encroachment  upon  national  usages,  and  urged  on  by 
men  of  aspiring  character  and  ancient  family  who 
aimed  at  a regaining  of  ancestral  dignity  and  renown. 
The  British  Colonies  in  Burmah,  China,  Singapore, 
and  Aden,  are  all  defended  by  native  troops  from  India. 
After  a term  of  service,  the  Seapoy  is  pensioned  by 
the  government,  which  furnishes  an  additional  motive 
to  fidelity.  Not  less  than  half  a million  of  natives 
are  dependent  upon  the  national  treasury. 

India  has  been  territorially  assigned  to  the  Church 
of  England  and  Scotland,  and  a revenue  secured  by 
land  rental,  goes  to  the  support  of  the  Ecclesiastical 
department.  The  Archbishop  resides  at  Calcutta, 
and  subordinate  bishops  at  Madras  and  Bombay,  and 
invested  with  such  official  importance  that  the  Lord 
Padre  Sahib  is  second  only  in  rank  to  the  governors. 
5 


98 


INDIA. 


Chaplains  have  been  settled  in  some  seventy  or  eighty 
places,  among  whom  the  names  of  Henry  Martyn — 
Brown — Thomason — Buchanan — Corrie,  and  Hough, 
are  not  alone  worthy  of  honorable  mention  for  fidelity 
in  ministerial  duty. 

By  means  of  the  four  departments  now  named,  rev- 
enues are  secured  for  the  advantage  of  the  holders  of 
the  East  India  Company  stock — the  rights  of  justice 
are  made  to  be  respected  by  the  community  at  large 
— rebellions  are  quelled,  and  quiet  sustained — while 
the  spiritual  wants  of  the  residents  are  supplied  from 
teachers  of  their  heaven-descended  faith. 

“ The  protection  of  private  property  is  now  generally 
effected  by  a British  administration,  though  cases  of 
personal  hardship  occur ; bodily  suffering  and  barba- 
rian punishments  are  restrained  ; means  for  an  equit- 
able administration  of  justice  have  been  provided ; 
superior  courts  of  appeal  have  been  established ; 
native  chiefs  and  tributary  princes  have  been  com- 
pelled to  submit  to  law,  and  observe  something  like 
equity  in  their  proceedings ; a vigilant  police  for  the 
suppression  of  crime  and  trial  by  jury  have  been 
either  established  or  restored;  the  most  perfect  tol- 
eration of  religious  differences  exists,  and  protection  is 
afforded  to  each  person  in  the  observance  of  the  rites  of 
his  chosen  religion;  peace  reigns  in  districts  formerly 
distracted  and  torn  by  the  contentions  of  despots  ; in- 
dustry is  protected  from  robbery  and  private  wrong, 
while  the  enterprising  and  successful  may  amass  cap- 
ital without  alarm  and  enjoy  it  in  security;  coloniza- 


GOVERNMENT  OF  INDIA. 


99 


tion  by  European  citizens,  and  the  increased  liberty  of 
the  native  and  country-born  population,  the  freedom 
of  the  press,  and  rapid  intercourse  with  Britain  is 
opening  channels  of  instruction  and  giving  an  impetus 
to  knowledge  and  enquiry,  unprecedented  in  the  past 
history  of  India.” 

Another  writer,  himself  too,  an  Englishman,  ex- 
presses himself  very  differently.  A few  lines  from 
his  poem  will  suffice  to  illustrate  his  view  of  the  con- 
duct of  his  countrymen  towards  that  conquered 
people : 

“We’re  always  taking,  and  we  never  give; 

We  care  not  if  they  die  or  if  they  live  ; 

Hard  task-masters  ! beyond  a Pharoah’s  law, 

We  first  withhold,  and  then  we  take  the  straw. 

Yet  look  to  see  the  tale  of  bricks  the  same, 

If  not,  ’t  is  them,  and  not  ourselves  to  blame  : 

For  joy  or  wretchedness,  for  weal  or  woe, 

We’ve  one  sole  sentence,  “ Pay  us  i chat  you  ows.n 

With  no  desire  to  act  the  part  of  an  apologist  for  all 
of  England’s  wrongs,  past  or  present,  towards  India, 
I am  yet  of  the  opinion  that  the  satirist  has  allowed 
himself  a latitude  of  opinion,  and  severity  of  state- 
ment, better  accordant  with  poetic  license,  and  per- 
haps wounded  ambition,  than  sober  truth.  While 
there  is  much  of  duty  left  undone,  I do  not  believe 
that  England  is  as  faithless  to  her  trust  as  this  writer 
would  fain  have  us  believe.  There  is,  however,  ample 
room  for  improvement. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


/ 

PERSONAL  APPEARANCE  AND  DRESS  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 

Figure  and  Physiognomy — Bodily  Structure  and  Strength — Pedestrian 
Agility  and  Endurance — Emblematical  Marks  upon  the  Forehead, 
Neck,  &c., — Dress  of  the  Men,  of  the  Women,  of  the  Children — 
Ornaments;  their  Kind,  Value,  and  Dangers. 

With  differences  of  figure  and  aspect,  arising  from 
varieties  of  climate  and  occupation,  there  is  a family 
likeness  among  the  native  Hindoos,  which  sufficiently 
marks  them  as  one  people.  Their  complexion  is  of 
various  shades,  from  a light  brown  to  a deep  jet — the 
face  oval,  with  a forehead  neither  high  nor  command- 
ing— eyes  soft  and  dull — eyebrows  generally  well- 
formed — nose  and  mouth  of  European  cast — hair 
black,  long,  wiry,  and  not  at  all  inclined  to  curl — with 
a general  expression  soft  and  retiring,  though  accom 
panied  with  a dash  of  cunning,  which  puts  you  on 
your  guard  against  that  unfortunate  hypocrisy  which 
seldom  has  its  concealed  abode  under  a perfectly  inno- 
cent exterior.  Without  the  high  cheek-bone  of  the 
North  American  Indian,  or  the  thick  lips  and  curly 
locks  of  the  African,  or  the  fiery  eye  of  the  Malay,  or 


APPEARANCE  AND  DRESS  OF  THE  HINDOOS.  101 


the  impassioned  look  of  the  Arabian,  the  national  fea- 
tures bear  a close  resemblance  to  those  of  the  Cauca- 
sian race,  of  which  they  are  commonly  considered  a 
branch,  and  from  which  they  differ  chiefly  in  the  size 
and  projection  of  their  ears,  and  in  general  dignity  of 
carriage  and  address,  caused,  to  a large  extent,  by 
their  condition  as  a conquered,  enslaved,  and,  of 
course,  obsequious  people. 

Women  of  the  higher  classes  are  characterized  by 
forms  delicate  and  graceful — hair  fine  and  long — eyes 
dark  and  languishing — with  skins  polished  and  soft. 
No  country  furnishes  a style  of  female  beauty  superior 
to  that  which  is  found  among  the  higher  circles  of 
Hindoo  society.  Whatever  of  attractiveness  the  lower 
classes  may  possess  during  the  early  years  of  life,  is 
effaced  by  uncontrolled  tempers,  menial  pursuits, 
rough  usage,  and  want  of  mental  cultivation. 

In  bodily  form  and  structure  the  Hindoos  are,  as  a 
nation,  of  a much  lighter  frame  than  the  inhabitants 
of  higher  and  invigorating  regions.  Still,  in  this 
respect,  a diversity  exists,  even  in  that  country — the 
mountaineers  of  the  North  being  strong  and  muscu- 
lar, while  the  southerners  are  of  a more  slender  and 
delicate  form.  The  traveller  is  struck  with  the  differ- 
ence between  the  appearance  of  a company  of  India 
seapoys  and  British  grenadiers,  though  the  army  con- 
tains some  of  the  finest  forms  the  country  can  supply. 

Free  use  of  ghee,  and  other  oleaginous  articles  of 
food,  often  produces  corpulency,  (there  deemed  a great 
beauty,)  but  not  a giant  frame.  Palanquin  bearers, 


102 


INDIA. 


Cavardy  and  other  Coolies,  by  a practice  which  begins 
in  childhood,  become  able  to  bear  heavy  burdens,  but 
as  a general  rule,  their  physical  organization  is  incom- 
patible with  great  bodily  strength. 

In  pedestrian  agility , and  power  of  long  endur- 
ance^ many  Hindoos  are  scarcely  behind  the  natives 
of  North  America.  A set  of  bearers  will  carry  a 
palanquin,  heavily  laden,  forty  miles  between  the 
setting  and  rising  of  the  sun,  returning  with  the  same 
the  following  night.  The  groom  always  accompanies 
the  horse,  and  is  seldom  far  behind  when  the  rider 
reaches  the  end  of  his  course.  The  Coolies,  employed 
in  unlading  ships,  will  carry  bags  of  salt  and  rice,  to 
and  from  the  shore  and  store-house,  scarcely  inferior  in 
weight,  to  those  borne  by  London  porters.  Mail  car- 
riers move  at  a regular  speed  of  six  miles  to  the  hour, 
be  the  contents  of  the  leather  bags  upon  their  head 
ponderous  or  light.  The  mass  of  community,  how- 
ever, do  not  excel  in  strength  of  body  and  limb,  but 
are  far  superior  to  Europeans  in  speed  of  foot. 

A custom,  universal  among  the  native  inhabitants 
of  India,  and  one  which  attracts  a foreigner’s  early 
attention,  is  that  of  inscribing  various  marks  upon 
the  forehead , neck,  and  arms,  with  a paste,  made  of 
sandal  wood,  and  cow’s  manure,  moistened  by  water, 
and  rubbed  upon  a stone.  Of  these,  the  simplest  is  a 
small  circle  about  an  inch  in  diameter  impressed  on 
the  middle  of  the  forehead.  Another  mode  is  that  of 
drawing  horizontal  lines  across  the  forehead,  neck, 
&c.,  or  perpendicular  ones  from  the  top  of  the  foro- 


APPEARANCE  AND  DRESS  OF  THE  HINDOOS.  103 

head  to  the  nose.  The  origin  of  this  singular  custom 
is  veiled  in  obscurity,  but  its  present  intent  is  twofold  ; 
it  distinguishes  the  wearer  as  a disciple  of  Brahmin- 
ism,  while  it  indicates  to  which  of  the  two  great  sects 
he  belongs.  The  Vishnuvites  make  the  lines  perpen- 
dicular, and  the  Sivites,  horizontal.  A part  of  the 
religious  observances  of  each  morning  is  to  imprint 
this  emblematical  sign,  (a  box  or  bag  of  the  material 
being  kept  prepared  in  every  dwelling,)  and  to  be  seen 
abroad  without  it,  subjects  the  delinquent  to  the 
reproof  and  persecution  of  his  neighbors  and  towns- 
men. One  of  the  first  and  most  absolute  require- 
ments of  a Christian  convert  is  to  remove  his  u sacred 
ashes,”  and  to  appear  in  public  with  the  least  portion 
of  this  mark  of  the  beast  upon  forehead,  neck  or  arms, 
brings  upon  the  transgressor  the  censure  of  his  reli- 
gious teacher,  and,  if  it  be  repeated,  exclusion  from 
church  communion  and  privileges.  It  is  understood 
by  all  to  be  a declaration  of  attachment  to  Paganism 
in  preference  to  any  other  creed.  Females  put  but  a 
small  quantity  upon  the  forehead,  while  the  fakeers, 
or  devotees,  besmear  their  whole  visible  person  with 
this  whitened  dust. 

The  dress  of  respectable  Hindoos  is  simple,  deco- 
rous, suited  to  the  climate,  and,  when  well  adjust- 
ed, produces  a very  graceful  effect.  The  garments 
worn  by  the  men  consist  of  a loose  piece  of  white 
cotton  cloth,  in  which  there  are  neither  strings,  but- 
tons or  pins,  wound  close  about  the  waist,  and  fall- 
ing below  the  knees,  with  a second,  of  finer  mate- 


104 


INDIA. 


rial,  though  similar  color,  thrown  across  the  shoulder, 
like  a Roman  toga,  and,  except  the  head,  arms,  and 
feet,  covering  the  entire  body.  A native,  when  he 
saw  a picture  of  his  majesty,  G-eorge  the  Third,  in  a 
Roman  habit,  was  heard  to  ask,  “why  he  wore  gar- 
ments like  the  Hindoos,  and  not  like  the  English  ?” 
The  hair  is  usually  cut  or  shaved  close  to  the  scalp, 
except  a small  lock  in  the  rear  of  the  head,  the 
removal  of  which  is  an  act  of  great  turpitude.  The 
majority  of  the  people  leave  the  head  uncovered, 
unless  the  heat  or  cold  constrain  the  person  to  draw 
his  upper  garment  over  it  like  a hood  ; (in  this  respect, 
also,  imitating  the  custom  of  ancient  Rome.)  The 
more  respectable  classes,  especially  they  who  associate 
with  foreigners,  cover  the  head  with  the  turban ; — an 
article  which  consists  of  a strip  of  cotton  cloth,  nar- 
row and  long,  wound,  when  damp,  upon  a block  of 
a required  size  and  shape,  and,  when  dry,  removed 
and  worn  as  a hat.  It  can  be  unwound,  washed,  and 
re-made  when  need  be — its  color,  shape, &c.,  suiting 
the  taste  of  the  wearer.  Before  a Hindoo  puts  on  a 
new  garment,  he  plucks  a few  threads  out  of  it, 
which  he  offers  to  different  divinities,  that  they  may 
be  propitious,  and  that  it  may  wear  well.  The  feet 
are  protected  from  sharp  stones,  by  means  of  the  san- 
dal, or  leather  sole,  with  a strap  above  the  instep,  and 
another  across  the  large  toe,  or  are  encased  in  shoes 
made  with  velvet  “ uppers,”  covered  with  gold  and  sil- 
ver thread,  open  at  the  heel,  and  turned  up  at  the  toe 
in  true  oriental  style.  Stockings  are  seldom  worn, 


APPEARANCE  AND  DRESS  OF  THE  HINDOOS.  105 

never,  indeed,  over  two  thirds  of  the  Peninsula.  Be- 
sides the  expense,  which  could  illy  be  incurred,  and 
the  great  heat,  this  article  of  dress  would  stand  much 
in  the  way  of  a free  and  unrestrained  use  of  those  ser- 
viceable parts  of  the  human  body — the  toes.  We,  in 
this  western  world,  place  a high  estimate  upon  these 
extremities  of  the  frame — indispensable  as  they  are 
deemed  in  walking.  But  to  appreciate  their  exceed- 
ing utility,  it  is  needful  to  go  to  the  East.  They  are 
called  by  the  Hindoos  the  “ feet  fingers.”  In  addition 
to  the  use  made  in  keeping  the  shoe  on  the  foot,  the 
tailor,  if  he  does  not  .thread  his  needle,  twists  his 
thread  by  them,, the  cook  is  aided  by  them  in  cutting 
his  meat ; the  joiner  in  holding  the  board  while  he 
planes  it;  the  driver  wrenches  the  tail  of  the  ox  to 
make  it  move  more  quickly  ; the  pedestrian  picks  up 
whatever  may  have  fallen,  by  the  same  means.  To 
confine  the  toes  within  the  narrow  limits  of  stockings 
or  socks,  were  to  deprive  the  Hindoo  of  a medium  of 
effort  he  can  illy,  dispense  with.  Natives  who  are 
much  in  the  society  of  Europeans,  wear  a long,  loose 
gown,  beneath  the  toga,  which  completely  covers  the 
upper  part  of  the  body,  and  the  arms.  The  orna- 
ments worn  by  Hindoo  gentlemen,  are  confined  to 
rings  upon  the  fingers,  ear-drops,  a band  about  the 
arm,  and,  after  marriage,  a small  band  around  the 
toe.  The  more  abundant,  showy,  and  expensive  dec- 
orations are  left  to  their  “ better  halves.” 

The  females  of  India  have  fewer  articles  of  dress  than 
their  sons  and  brothers,  but  these  are  large,  and  very 
5* 


106 


INDIA. 


graceful.  The  Chalice  consists  of  a long  piece  of  cot- 
ton, muslin  or  silk,  wrapped  round  the  middle,  and 
falling  in  ample  and  elegant  folds  below  the  knees. 
One  end  is  gathered  into  a bunch  in  front,  while  the 
other  crosses  the  breast,  and  is  thrown  over  the  shoul- 
der. Its  length  is  from  seven  to  ten  yards,  and  as  to 
color,  texture,  and  value,  may  vary  from  one  of  plain 
white  cotton,  costing  but  a dollar,  to  one  of  muslin 
or  silk,  valued  at  ten  times  that  amount.  To  this 
garment  is  at  present  very  generally  added  a jacket , 
with  half  sleeves,  which  closely  fits  the  form,  and  cov- 
ers, though  not  conceals,  the  bust.  This  simple  attire 
is  in  wide  contrast  with  that  which  prevailed  in  this 
country  less  than  twenty  years  ago,  when  two  bushel 
sleeves,  and  a head  dress  broad  as  the  umbrella  of  a 
native  prince,  gave  the  belles  of  America,  an  outline, 
which,  if  filled  up  with  sinew  and  bone,  would  have 
made  them,  of  all  created  beings,  the  most  unmeaning 
in  shape,  either  for  use  or  beauty.  I remarked  that 
the  ladies  of  India  appropriated  to  themselves  the 
larger  share  of  decorative  ornaments.  Upon  each 
wrist  are  bracelets  of  silver,  konk-shell,  or  glass, 
called  bangles,  numbering  from  five  to  twenty. 
Pendants  of  gold,  or  less  valuable  material,  are  sus- 
pended from  the  ear  to  the  shoulder,  and  hooks, 
through  the  nose,  reach  to  the  chin.  Bands  of  silver, 
of  much  weight,  encircle  the  arms  and  ancles.  O n 
two  or  more  of  the  toes  is  a silver  ring,  one  of  which 
emits  a tinklkig  sound  when  the  wearer  is  walking 
Around  the  neck  are  hung  strings  of  large  beads,  of 


APPEARANCE  AND  DRESS  OP  THE  HINDOOS.  107 

coral,  cr  glass,  with  collars  set  with  small  gems  and 
precious  stones.  Married  ladies  wear  about  the  neck, 
the  tar/e,  which  is  either  a band  of  gold  richly  chased, 
or  a silk  net-work  entwined  with  silver  cord.  This  is 
put  on  at  the  bridal  ceremony,  and  is  not  removed  till 
the  husband's  death.  The  long  black  hair,  neatly 
combed  and  made  glossy  with  oil,  is  rolled  up  in  a 
tasteful  manner,  and  placed  a little  in  the  rear  of  the 
left  ear.  The  face  is  daily  covered  with  a solution  of 
saffron  in  water,  which  produces  the  effect  (of  course 
not  designedly)  of  concealing  the  lady’s  age.  The 
eye-lashcs  are  extended  by  means  of  a little  paint, 
and  the  teeth  reddened  by  a masticatory  common  in 
the  country.  An  India  lady’s  jewels  are  called  her 
“joys,”  (suntoshums)  and  large  sums  are  annually 
expended  by  husbands  and  fathers  in  their  purchase. 

Children  wear  but  the  slightest  clothing  until  they 
reach  the  fifth  or  sixth  year — though  ofttimes  deco- 
rated with  ornaments,  profuse  and  valuable. 

The  value  of  these  ornaments  tempt  the  cupidity  of 
robbers,  who  mutilate  the  bodies  of  the  sleeping 
females  and  children  to  gain  possession  of  these  cov- 
eted appendages. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

COURTEOUS  CUSTOMS. 

Hindoos  a polite  people — Visit  from  a native — Salaam — Xamaskarum — 
Sashtamgam — Modes  of  addressing  Superiors — Epistles — Materials  of 
writing — Different  styles  of  address,  to  an  inferior,  an  equal,  and  a 
superior — Remark  by  Abbe  Du  Bois. 

In  their  forms  of  address  and  behavior  in  company, 
the  Hindoos  may  be  considered  a polite  nation.  While 
it  cannot  be  denied  that  many  of  their  courteous 
phrases  and  lowly  prostrations,  are  given  as  the  re- 
quirement of  custom,  rather  than  the  language  of  the 
heart,  yet  to  the  eye  and  ear  there  is  much  that  is 
agreeable  and  prepossessing  in  their  conversation  and 
deportment,  especially  before  strangers  and  superiors. 
An  illustration  of  some  of  these  customs  will  place 
the  subject  clearly  before  the  mind  of  the  reader. 

I am  at  my  table,  writing,  when  a native  visitor  is 
announced.  Permission  being  given  him  to  come  in 
— he  slips  off  his  sandals,  leaving  them  on  the  veran- 


COURTEOUS  CUSTOMS. 


109 


dah — removes  his  toga  from  his  shoulders,  binding  it 
around  his  waist — and  entering  the  room,  approaches 
ms,  with  his  body  slightly  bent  forward,  his  arms  out- 
stretched in  front,  and  upon  the  upturned  palms  of 
his  joined  hands,  presents  me  two  or  more  limes,  as  a 
peace  offering.  These  I graciously  receive,  with  my 
right  hand,  and  place  them  upon  the  table,  while  he 
makes  his  salaam,  either  by  raising  his  right  hand  to 
his  forehead,  and  letting  it  fall  to  its  former  position 
at  the  side,  or  bowing  and  touching  my  feet  and  his 
forehead  in  three  rapid  successions,  or  in  bending  still 
lower,  grasping  my  feet  and  placing  his  hand  on  the 
crown  of  his  head.  This  over,  I ask  him  to  take  a 
seat,  which  he  does,  “ pedibus  intortis ,"  on  the  floor! 
I do  not  request  him  to  move  his  hat,  for  that  is  not 
required  by  the  rules  of  Hindoo  etiquette.  In  reply  to 
the  usual  interrogatory,  ‘ Are  you  well  ?'  he  says  : 
‘ By  your  favor,  sir,  I am  well,'  or,  if  he  be  of  a 
serious  disposition,  ‘ By  God's  grace  and  your  favor, 
sir,  I am  well.'  To  avoid  all  unfortunate  impropri- 
eties I ask  no  questions  about  his  vnfc,  but  inquire, 
in  general  terms,  if  the  family  are  ivell,  to  which  a 
similar  reply  is  returned.  As  various  topics  come 
up,  it  is  noticeable  that  he  dissents  from  nothing  I 
advance — expresses  a strong  desire  always  to  have 
my  favor — enters  into  no  argument,  lest  he  seem 
to  intimate  an  equality  with  me  in  mind  and  know- 
ledge— in  a word,  he  makes  the  greatest  effort  to 
increase  my  self-esteem,  while  he  forgets  not  to  put 
in  a good  word  for  himself  and  friends,  and  the  oppo- 


110 


INDIA. 


site  for  his  enemies.  If  at  any  time  he  does  not  quite 
hear  me,  he  leans  forward,  putting  his  hand  upon  his 
mouth , that  his  breath  may  not  incommode  me.  If  a 
superior  in  rank,  European  or  native,  enter,  he  rises, 
makes  his  salaam,  and  resumes  his  lowly  posture. 
After  the  interview  has  been  continued  for  a sufficient 
time,  I have  a very  convenient,  and  not  at  all  ungen* 
teel  mode  of  dispensing  with  his  society,  in  telling 
him,  simply — to  go.  If  he  be  of  a highly  respectable 
class,  and  one  whose  acquaintance  1 desire  to  continue 
— I say,  slightly  rising  from  my  seat,  and  with  a 
salaam-like  movement  of  my  hand,  “ Going , come 
again,"  and  he  at  once  returns  my  salutation, 
and  departs.  So  far  from  being  offended  at  the 
request,  he  has  been  waiting,  it  may  be,  to  receive  it, 
for  without  such  permission , he  cannot  with  propriety 
close  the  interview' . It  is  not  at  all  impossible  that 
the  reader  may  suggest  the  propriety  of  importing  this 
custom  into  our  more  civilized  country,  it  being  very 
convenient,  at  times,  to  say  to  a visitor,  you  have 
staid  long  enough  for  once , just  go  home  and  come 
at  another  time. 

So  much  for  his  appearance  within  doors  ; let  us 
now  observe  him  without.  He  has  replaced  his  san- 
dals, thrown  his  garment  across  his  shoulder,  and  is 
passing  from  the  yard  on  his  way  home.  "We  will 
take  our  umbrella  and  follow  at  such  a distance 
in  the  rear  that  ho  cannot  understand  our  motive, 
while  we  may  observe  his  movements.  He  pays  no 
attention  to  any  female,  not  even  a wife  and  mother, 


COURTEOUS  CUSTOMS. 


Ill 


except  to  ask  a question  or  give  a command.  Did 
you  see  that  movement?  He  put  the  palms  of  his 
hands  together  and  raised  them  far  above  his  head, 
letting  them  fall  again  to  his  side : that  is  called 
Niimdskarum,  and  was  addressed  to  a Brahmin. 
Had  we  been  near  enough,  we  should  have  observed 
the  priest  stretch  out  his  hands  towards  this  passer  by, 
palms  upward,  as  if  bestowing  a blessing.  Now, 
mark,  he  is  passing  a temple; — (observe  his  move- 
ments)— he  stops — removes  his  sandals — gazes  a mo- 
ment at  the  shrine — prostrates  himself  at  full  length, 
so  that  toes,  knees,  hands,  forehead,  nose,  and  chin 
touch  the  ground,  (an  act  of  reverence  called  Sash- 
tamg&m) — rises — crosses  himself — mutters  a few 
prayers — replaces  his  shoes — and  pursues  his  way. 
You  observe  the  great  care  he  takes  not  to  allow  his 
dress  to  touch  a passer  by,  as  defilement  would  follow 
the  unholy  contact.  A carriage  is  coming  towards 
him,  conveying  a wealthy  and  honored  townsman. 
(Mark  his  movements.)  He  stops  at  the  roadside,  slips 
off  his  sandals,  adjusts  his  attire,  and  as  the  carriage 
moves  by,  he  bends  to  the  earth,  carrying  his  hands 
rapidly  from  his  head  to  the  ground,  and  recovering 
his  former  position,  goes  onward  as  before.  At  no 
time  do  you  hear  him  talk  and  laugh  in  a boisterous 
manner — this  is  beneath  his  dignity,  and  foreign  to 
all  rules  of  Hindoo  propriety.  He  pays  high  regard  to 
all  whom  he  deems  superior  in  rank,  and  whose  fa- 
vor it  is  his  interest  to  seek  or  retain,  slightly  noticing 
his  equals,  and  looking  down  with  supercilious  con- 


112 


INDIA. 


tempt  upon  all  females  and  pariars.  He  has  reached 
his  dwelling,  and  there  we  lose  sight  of  him,  for  into 
the  domestic  sanctuary  a stranger  may  not  intrude. 

It  may  not  be  amiss,  before  closing  my  remarks 
upon  Hindoo  politeness,  to  mention  a few  of  theii 
phrases  when  addressing  superiors,  and  benefactors. 
When  a native  of  India  enters  the  presence  of  his 
spiritual  guide,  he  prostrates  himself,  and  laying  hold 
of  his  feet,  looks  up  into  his  face  and  says,  “ You 
are  my  Saviour ;” — to  a benefactor,  “ You  are  my 
father  and  mother — to  one  whom  he  wishes  to 
praise,  “ You  are  religion  incarnate ,”  or,  “ You  arc 
a sea  of  excellent  qualities or,  “ You  are  the  father 
and  mother  of  brahmins  and  cows.'1'1  The  like  com- 
plimentary expressions  are  employed  in  directing  let- 
ters. Thus  a letter  to  a King  would  be  directed, 
“To  the  great,  the  excellent,  the  prosperous,  the  illus- 
trious King  K , the  nourisher  of  multitudes,  the 

fragrance  of  whose  fame  has  spread  throughout  the 
world,  before  whose  glory  the  sun  obscures  its  beams, 
whose  fame  is  as  pure  as  the  queen  of  night,”  cx c. 
To  a Father , thus,  “ To  the  excellent  person  my 
father,  the  author  of  my  existence,  whose  mind  drinks 
the  honey  on  the  water-lily  feet  of  the  Deity,”  &c. 
To  a Mother , thus,  “ To  my  excellent  and  dignified 
mother,  who  feeding,  nourishing  and  comforting  me, 
raised  me  to  manhood,  at  thy  feet  I supplicate,  which 
are  the  water-lilies  on  the  reservoir  of  my  heart,”  &o. 

The  missionary,  little  known  in  his  own  country, 
beyond  a limited  circle  of  relatives  and  neighbors, 


COURTEOUS  CUSTOMS. 


113 


when  in  India,  receives  letters  addressed  to  “ The 
great  and  powerful  and  illustrious  Rajah"— ox  “ To 
the  beneficent  and  glorious  deity  ( Swam //.’*) 

In  external  appearance,  and  construction  of  expres- 
sions, a Hindoo  letter  has  noticeable  features.  The 
material  is  the  palm  leaf,  the  folds  being  about 
eighteen  inches  long,  and  an  inch  in  breadth.  The 
writing  is  executed  with  an  iron  stile,  four  to  six 
inches  long,  and  sharp  pointed  at  the  end.  In  writing 
neither  chair  or  table  is  wanted,  the  leaf  being  sup- 
ported on  the  middle  finger  of  the  left  hand,  and  kept 
steady  by  being  kept  between  the  thumb  and  the  fore- 
finger. The  right  hand  does  not,  as  with  us,  move 
along  the  surface,  but  after  finishing  a few  words,  the 
writer  fixes  the  point  of  the  iron  pen  in  the  last  letter, 
and  pushes  the  leaf  from  the  right  hand  toward  the 
left,  so  as  to  enable  him  to  finish  his  line.  This 
becomes  so  habitual  and  easy  that  one  often  sees  a 
Hindoo  writing  as  he  walks  the  street.  As  this 
species  of  penmanship  is  but  a kind  of  faint  engraving, 
the  strokes  of  which  are  indistinct,  and  almost  invis- 
ible, they  besmear  the  leaf  with  an  ink-like  fluid,  to 
make  the  characters  clearly  legible.  In  respect  to  an 
epistle,  it  is  often  put  upon  a single  leaf,  which,  when 
finished,  they  envelope  in  an  outer  leaf,  upon  which 
they  write  the  address.  When  there  is  occasion  to 
communicate  the  decease  of  a relative,  the  custom  is 
to  singe  the  point  of  the  leaf  upon  which  the  afflict- 
ing news  is  written.  This  has  a like  import  as  the 
black  seal  used  by  us.  When  a superior  writes  to  an 


114 


INDIA. 


inferior,  he  puts  his  own  name  before  that  of  the  per- 
son to  whom  he  writes,  and  the  reverse  when  he  writes 
to  a superior.  That  the  reader  may  have  a view  of 
the  different  modes  of  epistolary  composition  common 
in  the  country,  I have  extracted  three  letters  from  the 
volume  by  the  Abbe  Du  Bois. 

I. 

LETTER  TO  AN  INFERIOR. 

They,  the  Brahmin  Soubaya,  to  him,  Lakshmana, 
who  has  all  good  qualities,  who  is  true  to  his  word, 
who  is  ever  rendering  service  to  his  relations  and 
friends. 

Year  of  Kilaka,  the  fourth  day  of  the  month  Phal- 
guna.  I am  at  Banavara,  in  good  health.  Send  me 
news  of  thine.  As  soon  as  this  letter  shall  have 
reached  thee,  thou  shalt  go  to  the  most  excellent 
Brahmin  Anantaya,  and  prostrating  thyself  at  all  thy 
length  at  his  feet,  thou  wilt  offer  him  my  most  hum- 
ble respects,  and  then,  without  delay,  thou  shalt  pre- 
sent thyself  before  the  Shelta  (the  merchant)  Rangapa, 
and  declare  to  him  that  if  he  shall  now  put  into  thy 
hands  the  three  thousand  Rupees  which  he  owes  me, 
with  interest,  at  twenty-five  per  centum,  I will  forget 
all  that  is  past,  and  the  matter  shall  then  be  at  an 
end.  But  if  on  the  contrary,  he  makes  shifts,  and 
continues  to  defer  the  payment  of  the  money,  tell  him 
that  I am  acquainted  with  a method  of  teaching  him 
that  no  person  shall  safely  break  his  word  with  a 


COURTEOUS  CUSTOMS. 


115 


Brahmin,  such  as  I am.  This  is  all  I have  to  say  to 
thee.  Aseervatham. 


n. 

LETTER  TO  AN  EQUAL. 

To  them,  the  Lord,  to  the  Lord  Ramaya,  who  pos- 
sesses all  the  good  qualities  which  can  render  a man 
esteemed,  who  is  worthy  to  obtain  all  the  favors  which 
the  gods  can  bestow  ; who  is  the  beloved  of  beautiful 
women,  who  is  the  particular  favorite  of  Lakshmi  ; 
who  is  great  as  the  Mount  Meru,  and  who  has  a per- 
fect knowledge  of  the  Yajur  Yeda  : the  Brahmin  Sa- 
bava;  Namaskariim,  (respectful  greeting). 

The  year  Durmati,  the  sixteenth  of  the  month  Phal- 
guna.  I am  at  Balore,  where  I and  all  the  members 
of  my  family  enjoy  good  health.  I shall  learn  with 
great  gladness  that  it  is  the  same  with  you  ; and  I 
trust  you  will  inform  me  particularly  of  all  the  sub- 
jects of  satisfaction  and  contentment  which  you 
experience. 

On  the  twenty-second  of  the  month  above  men- 
tioned, being  a day  in  which  all  good  omens  unite,  w7e 
have  chosen  that  the  marriage  of  my  daughter  Yijaya 
Lakshu  shall  be  celebrated.  I beg  you  will  honor 
the  ceremony  with  your  presence,  and  be  here  before 
that  day  with  all  the  persons  of  your  household,  with- 
out excepting  any.  I expect  you  will  put  yourself  at 
the  head  of  the  ceremony,  and  that  you  will  be  pleased 
to  conduct  it ; and  if  there  is  anything  in  which  I 


116 


INDIA. 


can  be  of  service  to  you,  have  the  goodness  to  let  mo 
know  it : This  is  all  I have  to  apprise  you  of.  Nd- 
maskaram. 

III. 

LETTER  TO  A SUPERIOR. 

To  them,  the  Lord,  to  the  Lord  Brahmin  to  the 
great  Brahmin  Anantaya,  who  are  endowed  with 
every  virtue  and  all  good  qualities  ; who  are  great  as 
Mount  Meru  ; who  possess  a perfect  knowledge  of  the 
four  Yedas  ; who,  by  the  splendor  of  their  good  works, 
shine  like  the  sun  ; whose  renown  pervades  the  four- 
teen worlds.  I,  Kisheraya,  their  humble  servant,  and 
slave,  keeping  my  distance,  with  both  hands  joined, 
my  mouth  closed,  mine  eyes  cist  down,  wait  in  this 
humble  posture,  until  they  shall  vouchsafe  to  cast 
their  eyes  on  him  who  is  nothing  in  their  presence, 
after  obtaining  their  leave,  approaching  them  with  fear 
and  trembling,  and  prostrating  myself  at  my  full 
length  before  the  flowers  of  Nenryhar,  on  the  ground 
where  they  stand  ; and  thus  submissive,  with  respect- 
ful kisses,  will  I address  their  feet  with  this  humble 
supplication. 

The  year  Vikari,  the  twentieth  of  the  month 
Paushya,  I,  humble  servant  and  slave,  whom  your 
excellence  has  deigned  to  regard  as  something,  having 
received  with  both  hands  the  letter  which  you  hum- 
bled yourself  by  writing  tb  me,  after  kissing  it  and 


COURTEOUS  CUSTOMS. 


117 


putting  it  on  my  head,  I afterwards  read  with  the  pro- 
foundest  attention,  and  I will  execute  the  orders  it 
contains  without  departing  from  them  the  breadth  of 
a grain  of  Sesamum.  The  affair  on  which  your  excel- 
lence vouchsafed  to  command  me,  is  in  good  progress, 
and  I hope  that  by  the  efficacy  of  your  benediction, 
it  will  soon  terminate  to  your  entire  satisfaction.  As 
soon  as  that  happens,  I,  your  humble  servant  and 
slave,  shall  not  fail  to  present  myself  (agreeably  to 
the  order  of  your  excellence)  at  the  flowers  of  Nilu- 
phar  of  your  holy  feet.  I now  entreat  your  excellence 
to  impart  to  me  the  commands  and  instructions  neces- 
sary to  enable  me  so  to  demean  myself  as  to  be  agree- 
able to  their  will,  and  that  you  will  clearly  point  out 
to  me  in  what  manner  I may  render  myself  most 
acceptable  to  your  blessed  feet.  For  this,  it  will  suf- 
fice, if  I receive  from  your  bounty  a leaf  of  betel, 
indented  with  your  nail,  in  care  of  some  confidential 
person,  who  can  verbally  explain  the  orders  of  your 
excellency. 

Such  is  my  humble  prayer. 

The  Abbe  observes  that  the  “ style  of  these  letters 
strikes  us  as  extraordinary — being  so  remote  from 
that  in  use  among  us.  But  if  we  attentively,  consider 
the  epistolary  forms  that  still  prevail  in  the  west,  and 
analyze  the  letters  which  Europeans  often  write  to 
their  equals,  generally  concluding  as  an  honor  to  be 
favored  with  admission  in  the  number  of  their  most 
humble  and  most  obedient  servants , it  will  not  be  easy 


118 


INDIA. 


to  determine  which  style  of  the  two  is  the  more  ridicu 
lous  and  puerile.  The  principal  difference,  perhaps 
is,  that  in  the  Hindoo  letters,  the  fulsome  compli 
ments  are  inserted  at  the  beginning , and  in  ours,  a. 
the  end” 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


A HINDOO  AT  HOME. 

Native  dwelling  described — Furniture — Its  apartments,  especially  the 
Room  of  Anger — The  Hindoo  returning  home — Preparations  for 
a meal — Rice  and  curry — Mode  of  eating — Sleeping-room — Diffe- 
rent modes  pertaining  to  different  classes — Price  of  dwelling — 
Evil  Eye,  and  other  superstitious  fears — Flower  gardens — Market — 
Times  of  eating — Topics  of  conversation. 

The  wealth,  taste,  and  rank  of  the  owner  or  occu- 
pant have,  of  course,  to  do  with  the  size,  material,  and 
elegance  of  the  Hindoo  house,  though  not  as  much  as 
with  us.  I will  select,  for  illustration,  the  home  of  a 
native  belonging  to  the  medium  rank  of  society.  His 
house  is  made  of  mud,  hardened  by  the  solar  heat, 
or  of  unburnt  brick,  about  thirty  feet  square,  one 
story  in  height,  covered  with  tiles  placed  upon 
rafters  of  bamboos  or  palmyra  trees,  split  to  the 
necessary  size.  Along  the  entire  front  of  the  building 
is  a verandah  about  four  feet  deep,  sheltered  by  the 
projecting  roof,  while  in  the  wall  are  triangular  in- 
dentations where  lamps  are  placed  when  the  street 
or  building  is  to  be  illuminated.  Entering  the  low 
door,  which  occupies  a central  position,  we  see  on 
either  side  a small  verandah  or  alcove,  formed  of 
baked  clay ; where  the  inmate  receives  visitors,  or 


4 


120  INDIA. 

waits  the  preparation  of  the  meal.  Passing  on,  we 
remark  that  the  centre  of  the  house  is  an  open  court — 
unprotected  from  the  sun  and  rain  by  any  roof — upon 
the  sides  of  which  are  rooms,  small,  and  lighted  bv 
grated  windows,  which  sarve  little  purpose  but  to  make 
“ darkness  more  visible.”  One  of  these  apartments  is 
appropriated  to  the  idol — (the  Roman  “ Penates,”)  and 
the  rest  to  the  various  members  of  the  household. 
The  articles  of  furniture  are  a few  stools — a low 
wooden  bedstead — a loose  mat — and  a box  for  cloth- 
ing, books,  and  ornaments.  In  the  kitchen  may 
be  seen  several  earthen  vessels  (called  in  southern 
India  chatties)  some  for  cooking,  and  others  for  hold- 
ing the  food  when  made  ready — a few  small  brass 
drinking  dishes — an  earthen  barrel  to  contain  the  un- 
hulled rice,  with  a stone  mortar  and  heavy  pounder  to 
prepare  it  for  use — a brass  pedestal  to  which  is  at- 
tached a lamp  of  eastern  style,  and  sometimes  a table 
of  limited  size  and  height — all  of  the  most  simple 
kind.  Some  of  the  nabobs  of  Calcutta  and  Madras, 
“ a la  mode  Anglais ,”  keep  large  pier  glasses,  chairs, 
couches,  pictures,  and  the  like,  but  these  pertain  not 
to  a purely  Hindoo  dwelling,  and  often  contrast  most 
amusingly  with  surrounding  objects.  One  apartment 
in  the  house  of  the  rich  Hindoo  is  appropriated  to  a 
purpose  rather  singular,  and  which,  if  rightly  used, 
might  be  admired,  though,  as  employed  by  them,  of 
questionable  utility.  It  is  called  the  room  of  anger, 
or  the  angry.  When  a wife  is  much  displeased  she 
runs  to  this  room  and  shuts  herself  up,  there  remain- 


A HINDOO  AT  HOME. 


121 


ing  till  her  husband  comes,  to  learn  the  cause  of  her 
displeasure,  and  if  possible,  remove  it.  But  her 
chagrin  most  frequently  arises  from  her  not  having 
the  luxuries  of  eating,  dress,  and  equipage,  which  her 
more  favored  neighbor  enjoys,  and  until  that  is  pro- 
vided for  her,  he  must  expect  to  be  debarred  the 
society  of  his  amiable  spouse.  If  it  were  not  for 
fearing  to  impute  to  the  husbands  of  our  wostern 
continent  less  pliancy  than  their  uncivilized  brethren 
of  the  East  manifest,  the  writer  would  be  disposed  to 
express  a fear,  that  many  wives  of  America  would  be 
allowed  to  remain  in  their  self-imprisonment,  with 
their  demands  ungratified,  until  hunger  and  thought- 
fulness had  appeased  their  irritation.  But  this  by 
the  way. 

We  have  seen  the  Hindoo  at  the  residence  of  a 
foreigner,  our  eye  has  been  upon  him  when  walking 
the  street — though  not  allowed  to  enter  his  dwelling, 
we  may,  through  the  eyes  of  others,  view  him  at  home. 
The  labors  of  the  day  are  over,  and  he  has  returned  to 
partake  of  the  evening  meal  and  enjoy  a night’s  repose. 
His  wife,  during  his  absence,  has  been  preparing  his 
food,  which,  to  a large  extent,  consists  of  a dish  fami- 
liarly called  “ rice  and  curry”  and  may  be  thus 
briefly  described  : In  an  earthen  vessel  a quantity  of 

rice  is  boiled,  while  in  another,  of  smaller  dimensions, 
is  cooked  in  ghee  a chicken,  fish,  or  piece  of  mutton, 
to  which  are  added  from  two  to  four  or  five  spoonfuls 
of  a powder  composed  of  these  among  other  ingredients  : 
ginger,  saffron,  cummin,  coriander,  anniseed,  red  pep- 


122 


INDIA. 


per,  tamarind,  tumeric,  garlic,  made  liquid  in  cocoa- 
nut  milk,  the  amount  of  these  ingredients  depending 
upon  the  palate  and  custom  of  the  person.  The  meal 
being  prepared,  a small  quantity  is  placed  before  the 
idol  to  propitiate  his  favor.  The  wife  then  puts  upon 
the  floor  of  an  interior  room  a brass  plate,  or  what  is 
more  usual,  a large  leaf  (two  or  more  sewed  together, 
if  one  be  not  of  sufficient  size)  upon  which  a goodly 
quantity  of  the  boiled  rice  is  then  piled,  and  above  it 
the  before-named  fragrant  and  delicious  curry.  Having 
brought  a dish  for  her  lord  to  lave  his  hands,  he  takes 
his  lowly  seat  for  the  enjoyment  of  his  repast.  Then 
follows  a brief  prayer — which  foreigners  insinuate 
it  would  be  well  for  Americans  to  follow.  As  there 
were  wanting  table , chair , plate,  or  cloth,  what 
need  of  knife,  fork,  or  spoon  ? The  Hindoo  has  what 
is  far  more  natural  and  convenient — his  fingers ! 
With  these  upon  his  right  hand,  he  mixes  the  in- 
gredients of  his  savory  dish,  and  rolling  a small 
quantity  into  a ball,  tosses  it  dexterously  into  his 
mouth,  great  care  being  taken  lest  any  portion  fall 
back  into  the  plate,  since  that  mishap  would  defile  the 
remaining  mass.  The  reason  of  this  extreme  fas- 
tidiousness is  the  notion  that  the  saliva  is  a very  impure 
secretion.  A Hindoo  who  is  regardful  of  religious 
propriety  never  expectorates  within  doors  (a  custom  to 
be  imported  also)  nor,  if  a rigid  adherent  of  the  rules 
of  caste,  will  ho  touch  a letter  which  has  been  sealed 
by  a wafer  moistened  by  the  tongue. 

If  no  stranger  be  present,  the  women  wait  on  the 


A HINDOO  AT  HOME. 


123 


men,  but  a Hindoo  woman  never  sits  down  to  eat  with 
her  husband — she  and  her  daughters  sit  patiently  by, 
and  then  regale  themselves  upon  what  is  left.  The 
meal  over,  his  thirst  quenched  by  water  again  brought 
to  him,  he  retires  to  his  couch,  there  to  chew  betel, 
entertain  visitors,  and  thus  lounge  the  hours  away 
until  the  time  for  retiring  arrives,  which  is  usually 
from  eight  to  nine  o’clock.  If  the  weather  be  not  too 
warm  he  retires  to  an  inner  apartment,  but  if  very 
sultry  he  chooses  the  verandah,  and  even  the  sandy 
road-side,  where  he  converts  the  dress  he  has  worn 
during  the  day  into  a covering  wherewith  to  shelter 
himself  fiom  dew,  mosquitos,  and  vermin — soon  re- 
lapsing into  a sound  slumber.  A stranger,  when 
entering  a Hindoo  village  at  an  early  hour  of  the  day, 
is  strangely  affected  at  the  spectacle — multitude  of 
sleepers  lying  by  the  roadside,  wrapped  in  their  white 
clothes,  and  presenting  the  appearance  of  so  many 
corpses  dressed  in  the  habiliments  of  the  tomb.  Rising 
at  dawn,  the  Hindoo  goes  to  a neighboring  tank, 
where,  with  religious  care  he  cleanses  his  teeth,  per- 
forms his  sacred  ablutions,  imprints  the  emblems  of 
his  faith  upon  his  forehead,  arm,  and  breast,  visits  the 
idol  for  morning  worship,  returns  home  to  take  a 
repast  from  the  conge  drawn  off  from  the  boiled  rice 
of  yesterday,  and  then  is  prepared  for  the  duties  of 
the  day. 

Such  is  a view  of  the  dwellings  and  domestic  eco- 
nomy of  respectable  Hindoos.  Descending  to  the 
lowest  in  scale  we  see  the  Pariar , whose  home  is  a 


124 


INDIA. 


small  and  wretched  hut,  with  walls  of  mud  and 
covering  of  palmyra  leaves — whose  food  consists  of  a 
few  vegetables  pulled  from  an  adjoining  field,  to 
which  are  added  a few  small  fish  taken  from  a neigh- 
boring tank,  or  the  bones  of  a carcass  which  he  divides 
with  the  carrion  crow  and  the  prowling  jackall. 
Rising  to  the  highest  station,  we  see  the  dwelling  of 
the  rich  and  honored  of  the  land,  large  and  imposing, 

built  of  brick,  and  with  the  top  terraced  to  allow  of 

\ 

the  morning  and  evening  promenade.  "Within,  the 
apartments  arc  of  sufficient  size  for  domestic  purposes, 
religious  pictures  decorating  the  walls ; tables  and 
chairs  indicating  an  acquaintance  with  the  more  taste- 
ful foreigner,  while  the  meal,  though  partaken  of  in 
the  same  lowly  manner,  and  with  the  same  natural 
implements^  is  rendered  more  delicious  by  pickles, 
chitneys,  and  other  condiments  that  tempt  the  appetite 
of  a Hindoo  epicure. 

The  price  of  a moderately-sized  clay  house  (not 
including  the  rent  of  the  ground)  is  about  $15,  and 
the  annual  repairs  not  far  from  $10.  The  repairs  are 
usually  made  just  before  the  fall  rains  set  in,  and  if 
delayed  too  long,  the  destruction  of  the  entire  building 
is  the  inevitable  result. 

There  are  many  customs  respecting  the  locality 
of  Hindoo  dwellings,  and  arrangements  pertaining 
thereto  which  are  worthy  of  notice.  While  the 
building  is  in  process  of  construction,  there  may 
be  seen  near  it  a pole  stuck  into  the  ground,  upon 
which  is  placod  an  earthen  jar,  covered  with  white 


A HINDOO  AT  HOME. 


125 


spots,  having  for  its  design  to  “ keep  off  the  evil  eye ,” 
which  would  otherwise  be  harmful  to  the  builder  or 
owner.  If  a person  meets  with  misfortunes  in  a par- 
ticular house,  he  concludes  that  some  bones  are  buried 
under  it,  and  accordingly  leaves  it  for  another  more 
fortunate  spot.  When  a sum  of  money  has  been 
stolen  from  a dwelling,  and  it  is  quite  certain  that 
some  one  among  its  inmates  is  the  thief,  the  Hindoos, 
in  some  places,  rub  the  thumb  nails  of  all  the  persons 
in  the  house,  imagining  that  the  name  of  the  thief 
will  become  legible  on  the  nail  of  the  offender. 
Scarcely  any  Hindoos  attach  flower  gardens  to  their 
houses — in  that  respect  differing  widely  from  the 
Mohamedans,  before  whose  doors  roses  and  evergreens 
may  be  seen  in  abundance.  The  cause  of  this  con- 
trast I have  never  heard  assigned  ; but  the  fact  arrests 
attention  in  the  streets  of  city  or  village.  The  Hindoo 
rents  his  small  lot — surrounds  it  (except  it  adjoin 
other  dwellings)  with  a mud  wall— constructs  a gate 
with  an  archway  and  earthen  lounge — puts  his  house 
in  the  centre — digs  his  well — rears  his  chickens — and 
if  he  can  obtain  employment  sufficient  to  meet  his 
daily  expenses,  has  but  the  smallest  amount  of  ap- 
parent care  and  trouble.  If  his  house  has  been  paid 
for,  a salary  of  $2  50  per  month  will  amply  suffice  to 
clothe  and  feed  himself,  wife,  and  several  children. 
The  requisites  for  the  table  of  a Hindoo  are  bought  in 
the  market  (bazaar)  and  paid  for  daily,  except  milk, 
sugar,  oil,  &c.,  which  are  brought  to  the  house  by  the 
seller,  who  receives  his  payment  monthly.  These 


126 


INDIA. 


articles,  though  cheap,  do  not  prevent  the  people  from 
being  generally  in  debt — occasioned  by  expensive 
entertainments,  gifts  to  Brahmins  and  relatives,  on 
special  occasions,  marriage  of  children,  purchase  of 
jewelry,  and  the  like  causes  demanded  by  custom  or 
self-gratification.  The  Hindoo  Shastras  direct  that 
Brahmins  shall  eat  at  two  o’clock  in  the  day  and  again 
at  one  in  the  night ; but  this  law  is  at  present  but 
little  heeded,  though  but  two  meals  are  taken  by  the 
people  generally.  The  domestic  conversation  turns 
chiefly  upon  the  business  of  the  family,  the  news  of 
the  village,  religious  ceremonies,  journeys  to  holy 
places,  marriages,  narratives  of  heroines  and  gods, 
with  other  topics  not  peculiar  to  that  country  in  dis-  ' 
tinction  from  regions  more  enlightened  and  Christian. 

So  much  for  the  Hindoo  at  home. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

HINDOO  WATER  CRAFT  AND  SAILORS. 

Author’s  arrival  at  Madras — Reflections — Catamaran — Massuli-boat— 
War  Steamer — Merchantman — Dhony — Easket-boat — Budgerow. 

The  morning  of  March  21st,  18 — , found  the  good 
ship  S.,  after  a passage  of  120  days  from  Boston, 
nearing  the  eastern  shores  of  India.  Upon  her  deck 
stood  the  writer,  with  thirteen  other  passengers, 
gazing  with  no  small  interest  upon  the  land,  which 
was  to  be  their  adopted  home.  The  mind  of  each 
was  too  busy  with  its  own  reflections — too  full  of 
the  future,  to  allow  of  much  conversation.  The  mo- 
ment  long  desired,  had  finally  arrived.  The  hopes 
of  years  were  about  to  be  realized,  but  the  cup 
of  pleasure  was  held  by  a trembling  hand.  A veil 
hung  before  the  future,  not  to  be  penetrated  by 
human  sight,  and  the  bright  angel  of  Hope  was  ac- 
companied by  her  stern  companion,  Fear.  A silence 
of  considerable  continuance  was  at  length  interrupted 
by  the  question,  “ What  is  that  object  upon  the  water 


128 


INDIA. 


in  range  with  the  distant  shore  ?”  While  the  possi- 
bility and  probability  of  its  character  were  under  dis- 
cussion, we  perceived  it  making  towards  us,  which 
served  but  to  increase  interest  and  multiply  conjecture, 
till  one  of  our  number  exclaimed  with  earnestness,  “ If 
must  be  a catamaran .”  “And  what  is  a catama 
ran  ?”  asks  my  reader.  The  word  is  compound,  and 
means  literally  tied  wood.  Several  logs  of  medium 
thickness,  measuring  from  twenty  to  thirty  feet  in 
length,  are  lashed  together  with  strong  ropes,  one  in 
the  centre  projecting  beyond  those  at  the  sides,  and 
forming  a sort  of  prow  or  bowsprit.  Upon  this  most 
primitive  craft  three  or  four  natives  plant  themselves 
in  a kneeling  posture,  and  with  short  paddles,  which 
they  ply  upon  alternate  sides,  venture  far  out  to  sea 
for  the  purposes  of  fishing  in  the  deep  water,  and 
trading  with  the  foreign  vessels  that  anchor  in  the 
roadstead.  When  the  state  of  the  weather  prevents 
the  use  of  all  ordinary  means  of  communication, 
a few  hardy  boatmen  may  be  seen  launching  forth 
their  simple  float,  and  braving  wind  and  waves  to 
keep  up  a connection  between  ship  and  shore.  Such 
was  the  object  upon  which  our  eyes  rested  on  the 
evening  of  that  memorable  day.  Onward  it  advanced, 
now  quite  sunk  beneath  the  waves,  and  presenting 
the  strange  appearance  of  men  treading  the  water 
and  performing  singular  evolutions  in  the  unstable 
element,  anon  rising  high  upon  the  surface;  now  roll- 
ing far  upon  the  side  so  as  to  unseat  all  but  the  most 
skilful  and  experienced,  then  suddenly  righting  to  its 


HINDOO  WATER  CRAFT  AND  SAILORS 


129 


former  position,  despite  our  apprehensions  for  its  safety. 
Our  fears  were  awakened  lest  the  unhappy  boatmen 
should  become  a prey  to  the  sharks  that  infest  those 
waters.  These  cannot  molest  them  while  on  their 
floats,  but  the  danger  is  imminent  if  they  be  sepa- 
rated from  this  feeble  yet  sure  defense.  Even  then 
the  case  is  not  quite  hopeless,  since  the  shark,  from  the 
position  of  its  mouth,  can  only  attack  them  from  below, 
and  a rapid  dive,  if  not  in  very  deep  water,  will  some- 
times save  them. 

All  dangers  escaped,  the  ship  was  reached,  while 
nimbly  sprang  up  the  sides  three  swarthy  sons  of  the 
East,  appropriately  styled  “ children  of  nature,”  for 
they  were  encumbered  with  no  articles  of  dress  be- 
yond the  smallest  cotton  cloth  compatible  with  the 
most  lax  ideas  of  propriety  or  decorum.  “ These  are 
the  Hindoos — these  the  people  among  whom  we  come  to 
dwell  1”  passed  from  the  lips  of  one  and  another  of 
our  company,  as  they  retired  to  the  cabin  to  think  and 
weep.  Immediately  upon  reaching  the  deck,  one  of 
the  native  comers  took  from  the  interior  of  a coni- 
cal-shaped cap,  made  of  palmyra  leaves,  and  worn 
close  upon  the  head,  a printed  document,  which  he 
gave  to  the  captain,  and  which  was  found  to  contain 
directions  as  to  the  place  of  anchorage,  and  rules  to  be 
observed  while  remaining  in  the  roads.  These  were 
sent  by  the  “ Master  Attendant,”  the  head  officer  of 
the  marine  department  in  that  portion  of  the  com- 
pany’s dominions.  After  disposing  of  their  fish,  and 
begging  a few  pice,  or  small  coin,  our  visitors  clambered 
6* 


130 


INDIA. 


over  the  bulwarks,  dropped  upon  their  restless  raft, 
loosed  themselves  from  the  ship,  and  made  for  the 
shore.  Thus  had  we  gained  our  first  sight  of  India — 
of  the  natives — and  of  that  original  and  national 
craft,  the  catamaran.  At  the  setting  of  the  sun  we 
dropped  anchor  ; after  a brief  twilight,  the  darkness 
of  night  closed  around  us,  and  we  retired  to  rest,  that, 
we  might  be  prepared  for  the  excitement  and  fatigue 
of  the  coming  day. 

The  last  night  of  a four  months’  voyage  at  sea  is 
of  short  duration.  It  was  so  with  our  company  ; all 
were  out  of  their  berths  ere  the  sun  cast  its  first  rays 
upon  the  beautful  city  of  Madras.  Leaving  the  cabin, 
we  found  upon  our  vessel’s  deck,  a multitude  of  na- 
tives, with  various  articles  to  sell  and  barter,  among 
which,  were  fresh  bread,  butter,  and  eggs,  with  plan- 
tains and  other  fruits  quite  new  to  our  American  eyes. 
The  places  of  the  “ catamaran  jacks,”  were  filled  by 
another  and  more  dignified  class  of  native  seamen, 
called  massuli  boatmen , so  named  from  the  craft  they 
manned,  of  which  three  or  more  were  lashed  to  our 
vessel’s  side.  These  may  need  a brief  description. 
The  waves  which  come  rushing  up  the  Bay  of  Bengal, 
finding  their  current  impeded  by  the  straitening  shore, 
fret  themselves  against  the  Coromandel  coast,  especi- 
ally in  the  region  of  Madras,  thus  causing  a surf, 
which,  in  the  flow  of  the  sea,  and  in  boisterous  wea- 
ther, is  of  a height  and  power  entirely  irresistible  by 
any  boat  of  Eurooean  build.  Hence  the  mussuli, 
which,  though  inelegant  and  unwieldy  in  appearance, 


HINDOO  WATER  CRAFT  AND  SAILOR3. 


131 


is  the  only  kind  of  vessel  that  can  pass  with  safety 
this  dangerous  barrier.  They  are  usually  from  twenty 
to  twenty-five  feet  long,  six  feet  wide,  and  six  deep, 
stem  and  prow  pointed,  planks  an  inch  thick,  with 
cross  bars  upon  which  the  rowers  sit,  having  for  oars 
long  poles  with  heart-shaped  paddles,  an  extra  one  in 
the  hand  of  the  strong  and  athletic  helmsman,  and 
supplying  the  place  of  a rudder.  Upon  minute  exami- 
nation not  a nail  will  be  discovered,  the  several 
planks  being  lashed  or  sewed  together  with  a cordage 
indigenous  to  the  country,  produced  from  the  filaments 
composing  the  husk  which  covers  the  cocoa-nut,  and 
called  coir  (kire).  Sometimes  it  is  fitted  up  with  a 
board  seat  in  the  stern,  above  which  is  suspended  a 
canvas  awning,  with  brushwood  below,  and  dignified 
with  the  name  of  accommodation  boats  or  packets — 
being  devoted  exclusively  to  the  conveyance  of  pas- 
sengers and  their  light  baggage.  The  twelve  boatmen 
make  themselves  more  comely  by  wearing  a loose 
lacket  and  turban  of  native  cotton.  Several  of  us 
having  joined  in  providing  ourselves  with  one  of  the 
latter  craft,  we  quitted  the  faithful  “ S.”  and  launched 
forth  to  buffet  the  rolling  surges  of  the  Bengal  coast. 
For  a short  distance  we  moved  quietly  and  pleasantly 
along,  the  boatmen  keeping  time  to  a wild  and  dismal 
chant,  which  to  our  ears,  though  strange,  was  not  un- 
pleasant. 

But  this  was  not  long  to  continue.  At  a word  from 
the  helmsman,  each  oar  was  quiet,  while  a swell  of 
the  sea  which  had  gradually  been  advancing  in  our 


132 


INDIA. 


rear  was  allowed  to  pass  under  us,  and  then  the  oars- 
men, with  renewed  strength,  pressed  onward,  that 
they  might  be  out  of  the  way  before  a second  had  time 
to  gather  and  break.  The  next  feat  was  to  pass  in 
safety  this  second  wave,  which  is  usually  much  higher 
and  more  violent  than  the  first.  Onward  it  came, 
swiftly  rolling  towards  us,  rapidly  increasing  in  power, 
but  the  practiced  eye  of  the  steersman  saw  where  it 
was  to  rear  its  fatal  crest,  and  kept  the  boat  in  check 
just  in  time  to  let  it  pass  under  and  spend  itself  ahead. 
At  this  point  they  begun  simultaneously  to  vociferate 
a half  Moslem  exclamation,  “ Ulla-ulla-il  ulla,”  thus 
invoking  the  protection  of  the  patron  prophet.  The 
reader  may  be  assured  that  strong  indeed  must  be  his 
nerves  if  he  do  not  at  this  time  tremble  for  his  frail 
bark  and  its  passengers.  Much,  however,  of  this 
stamping  of  feet,  these  frightened  looks,  and  terrible 
yells,  is  intended  to  awaken  additional  alarm,  and 
thus  secure  a promised  ‘ douceur’  in  case  of  a safe  ar- 
rival at  the  shore  As  we  neared  the  land  the.  surges 
increased  in  violence,  till  the  last  wave  caused  our 
faithful  bark  to  swing  high  upon  the  shelving  beach. 

I had  been  four  months  upon  the  sea,  with  not  an 
island  or  rock  to  relieve  the  eye  in  its  daily  wander- 
ings. I had  passed  over  fifteen  thousand  miles  of 
water — had  doubled  the  Cape,  and  seen  our  largest 
sails  torn  to  ribbons  by  the  storms  that  make  their 
home  in  those  desolate  regions — but  during  this  long 
period,  while  traversing  the  Atlantic  and  Indian 
oceans,  I had  known  no  emotion  of  fear.  That  was 


HINDOO  WATER  CRAFT  AND  SAILORS. 


133 


reserved  for  the  Madras  roadstead,  with  its  towering 
and  dangerous  surf.  But  it  was  passed  in  safety,  not- 
withstanding our  fears,  and  we  stood  upon  the  shores 
of  India,  that  wondrous  and  antique  land — whose  bar- 
baric pearl  and  gold  have  stimulated  the  cupidity  of 
nations  down  the  long  stream  of  time,  and  whose 
strange  vicissitudes  have  furnished  such  ample  matter 
to  adorn  the  moralist’s  and  historian’s  pages.  We  had 
little  inclination,  such  was  the  heat  of  the  sun  and  the 
Babel  sounds  around  us,  to  allow  full  play  to  the  many 
thoughts  suggested  by  the  eveijt  of  arriving  at  the  end 
of  our  long  voyage,  and  reaching  our  new  home  in  the 
East.  Palanquins  were  in  waiting  to  convey  us  to 
the  dwellings  of  the  Rev.  Mr.  Winslow  and  Dr.  Scud- 
der,  who  were  waiting  to  entertain  us. 

Before  leaving  the  beach,  let  us  look  for  a few  mo- 
ments at  the  several  kinds  of  vessels  riding  at  anchor 
in  the  roadstead.  There  is  a war  steamer.  It  belongs 
to  the  Naval  Department  of  the  East  India  Company’s 
forces.  Of  merchantmen  there  is  an  abundance,  each 
from  one  hundred  to  twelve  hundred  tons  burden.  Do 
you  see  that  one  with  tall  slim  masts — of  light  build — 
sitting  with  swan-like  ease  and  grace  upon  the  water  ? 
That  is  the  S.,  which  I have  just  left.  Well  may  her 
commander  and  crew  be  proud  of  her.  It  is  in  refer- 
ence to  such  specimens  of  naval  architecture,  that  an 
English  gentleman,  of  high  standing  in  Madras,  said 
to  me  that  the  finest  and  most  beautiful  vessels  that 
appeared  in  the  road  were  those  from  Boston. 

Do  you  see  those  strange  objects  crowded  together, 


134 


INDIA. 


I 

with  their  unpainted  sides — lateen  sails — low  masts 
— and  square  bows,  the  picture  of  uncouthness  and  in- 
elegance ? These  are  dhonies,  or  native  sloops, 
which  ply  up  and  down  the  coast  with  cargoes  of  rice, 
timber,  and  various  kinds  of  merchandise.  Though, 
like  the  mussuli  boats,  exceedingly  unwieldy  and 
destitute  of  symmetry  and  elegance,  they  are  useful 
and  abundant.  Were  you  here  during  the  prevalence 
of  the  Monsoon,  not  a dhony  would  you  see : these 
barks,  unfitted  to  encounter  wind  and  surge,  are 
then  housed  away  in  some  safe  harbor.  Foreign  ships 
are  not  allowed  during  that  period  to  anchor  in  the 
roadstead,  and  even  the  steamers  make  but  a short 
stay,  and  then  in  the  far  distance  from  the  shore. 
The  mussula  boats  are  undergoing  their  annual  re- 
pair, and  the  catamarans  have  the  coast  to  them- 
selves. 

Having  acquainted  the  reader  with  the  various  kinds 
of  boats  and  vessels  common  in  the  Bay  of  Bengal,  I 
will  now  take  him  to  the  banks  of  the  Cauvery,  one 
of  the  largest  rivers  in  the  Southern  Peninsula,  and 
will  there  show  him  a craft  still  stranger  than  cata- 
maran, mussula  boat,  or  dhony.  It  is  a circular  bas- 
ket, ten  feet  in  diameter,  with  ribs  of  the  strong  and 
pliant  bamboo,  covered  with  buffalo  leather.  I was 
one  of  fourteen  persons  desirous  of  visiting  the  Se- 
ringham  Pagodas  upon  the  opposite  side  of  the  stream, 
and  obliged  to  cross  in  this  way  or  stay  at  home.  Not 
being  willing  to  do  the  latter,  in  we  got— one  after  the 
other — ladies,  gentlemen,  and  boatmen.  The  first 


HINDOO  WATER  CRAFT  AND  SAILORS. 


135 


person  leaned  against  one  side  and  the  second  on  the 
directly  opposite,  to  secure  an  equipoise,  the  third  and 
fourth  occupying  the  same  relative  positions,  till  we 
were  all  safely  aboard,  amid  various  wonderments  at  our 
curious  posture,  and  jocose  remarks  about  the  “ three 
wise  men  of  Gotham,  who  went  to  sea  in  a bowl.”  “ All 
rqgdy?”  asked  the  head  boatman  in  broken  English. 
“ Aye,  aye,  sir,”  answered  one  of  us  who  had  not  lost 
his  sea  tongue.  Off  we  pushed,  and  round  we  went 
again  and  again,  while  one  held  her  breath,  another 
smiled  to  conceal  his  unmanly  fears,  and  a third 
shrieked  with  alarm.  “ No  danger  !”  called  out  our 
captain.  Soon  we  were  out  of  the  whirlpool  and  in 
the  midst  of  the  stream.  On  we  moved  with  our 
bow(?)  at  one  time  north,  again  south,  not  forgetting 
the  other  points  of  compass.  A half-hour  of  pushing 
and  rowing  served  to  bring  us  near  the  opposite  shore, 
where  we  were  whirled  once  and  again,  as  before,  and 
landed  safe  upon  the  beach,  each  declaring  that  a 
boat  basket  was  the  most  unique  conveyance  he  had 
yet  seen  or  tried,  and  that  but  one  thing  more  was 
needed  to  give  interest  to  such  an  excursion,  which 
was,  that  friends  across  the  sea  might  witness  this 
strange  craft,  defying,  as  it  does,  the  poet’s  pen  or 
painter’s  pencil. 

Were  the  reader  passing  from  the  Bay  of  Bengal  to 
Calcutta,  his  attention  would  be  ever  arrested  by  the 
multitude  and  variety  of  water  craft  moving  to  and 
from  that  commercial  metropolis.  In  addition  to  ships 
of  all  sizes  from  the  British  isles,  and  continental 


136 


INDIA. 


neighbors,  and  western  colonies,  and  dhonies  from  the 
various  ports  of  the  south  and  east,  there  would  be 
seen  the  Maldivian  vessels  raised  to  an  immense 
height  above  the  water  by  upper  works  of  split  bam- 
boo, with  lofty  head,  and  stern  immense,  and  crowded 
with  a wild  yet  skilful  and  resolute  crew.  Ben- 
galee and  Chittagong  vessels,  with  immense  rud- 
ders suspended  by  ropes  to  the  side,  and  worked  by 
a helmsman  elevated  high  upward  ; with  other  crafts 
indicating  a nearer  approach  to  European  architecture, 
though  clumsily  and  dangerously  rigged.  If  desirous 
of  continuing  his  progress  farther  into  the  interior,  he 
would  do  well  to  avoid  the  pinnace  and  choose  the 
budgerow ; the  former,  though  safer  and  more  commo- 
dious with  respect  to  its  interior  arrangements,  being 
less  calculated  than  the  latter  to  pass  the  shallows  and 
sand-banks  of  that  ever-shifting  stream.  “ The  budge- 
row, whose  name  is  a native  corruption  of  the  word 
barge,  is  therefore  usually  chosen  by  European  travel- 
lers, to  whom  time  and  expense  are  matters  of  impor- 
tance. Though  to  a certain  extent,  the  term  clumsy 
may  fairly  be  applied  to  this  craft,  its  construction  and 
appearance  are  far  from  inelegant ; with  a little  more 
painting  and  gilding,  a few  silken  sails  and  streamers, 
and  divested  of  the  four-footed  outside  passengers  and 
other  incumbrances  on  the  roof,  it  would  make  a very 
beautiful  object  in  a picture,  and  in  its  present  state 
it  has  the  advantage  of  being  exceedingly  picturesque. 
The  greater  part  of  the  lower  deck  is  occupied  by  a 
range  of  apartments  fitted  up  for  the  accommodation 


HINDOO  WATER  CRAFT  AND  6AILOR9. 


137 


of  the  party  engaging  the  boat ; these  are  generally 
divided  into  a sleeping  and  a sitting  room,  with  an  en- 
closed verandah  in  front,  which  serves  to  keep  off  tho 
sun,  and  to  stow  away  various  articles  of  furniture. 
The  apartments  are  surrounded  on  all  sides  by  Vene- 
tians, which  exclude  the  sun  in  the  daytime,  and  let 
in  the  air  at  night.  In  front  of  the  cabins,  the  deck 
is  of  circumscribed  dimensions,  affording  only  space  for 
the  boatmen,  who,  on  descending  the  river,  facilitate 
the  progress  of  the  vessel,  by  means  of  long  sweeps ; 
the  upper  deck,  therefore,  or  roof,  is  the  chief  resort  of 
the  crew  and  the  servants.  At  the  stern,  the  helms- 
man stands,  perched  aloft,  guiding  a huge  rudder ; the 
goleer,  stationed  at  the  prow,  ascertains  the  depth 
of  the  water  by  means  of  a long  oar ; and  when  the 
wind  will  permit,  two  large  square  sails  are  hoisted, 
with  the  assistance  of  which,  the  lumbering  craft  goes 
rapidly  through  the  water.  As  the  budgerow  is  not 
calculated  for  a heavy  or  cumbrous  freight,  a baggage 
boat  is  necessary  for  the  conveyance  of  the  goods  and 
chattels  of  the  party,  and  for  the  accommodation  of 
those  servants  who  cannot  be  conveniently  retained  on 
board  the  superior  vessel.  A dinghee  or  wherry,  is  a 
very  necessary  adjunct  of  river  navigation,  but  it  is 
not  always  to  be  procured,  and  when  one  of  these  light 
skiffs  cannot  be  attached  to  the  larger  craft,  the  com- 
munication between  the  cook  boat  and  the  budgerow 
is  cut  off;  the  unhappy  passengers  in  the  budgerow, 
after  waiting  in  vain  for  the  smoking  supplies  they 
had  anxiously  desired,  are  compelled  to  be  satisfied 


138 


INDIA. 


with  a less  substantial  meal  of  coffee,  eggs,  and  dried 
fish.  As  few  persons  venture  to  move  after  sunset ; at 
day-break  in  the  morning,  the  vessel  being  pushed  out 
into  the  stream,  spreads  her  sails  like  a wild  swan 
in  her  flight,  or  proceeds  more  leisurely  by  the 
united  exertions  of  sixteen  men  dragging  at  a rope 
fastened  at  the  mast  head.  Toward  the  middle  of  the 
day,  the  boat  becomes  insufferably  hot ; both  sides 
having  received  the  fierce  glare  of  the  burning  sun ; 
the  heat  is  reflected  from  the  water,  which  is  now  too 
dazzling  for  the  eye  to  endure  without  pain  ; the  morn- 
ing breeze  dies  away,  and  it  requires  all  the  patience 
of  a martyr  to  sustain  the  torments  inflicted  by  the 
scorching  atmosphere,  especially  as  the  roofs  of  the 
cabins  are  usually  too  low  to  allow  a punka  to  be 
hung.  As  the  sun  declines,  the  boat  gradually  cools 
to  a more  agreeable  temperature  ; and  when  the  wel- 
come shadows  of  the  woods  descend  upon  the  deck,  it 
is  delightful  to  sit  in  the  open  air  and  watch  the  pro- 
gress of  the  vessel  as  it  nears  the  shore,  to  the  spot  ap- 
pointed as  its  station  for  the  night.  The  moment  the 
budgerow  is  securely  moored,  a very  active  and  ani- 
mated scene  commences  ; the  domestics  whose  services 
are  not  required  on  board,  and  all  the  crew,  immedi- 
ately disembark ; fires  are  kindled  for  the  various 
messes — those  who  are  anxious  for  quiet  and  seclusion, 
light  up  their  faggots  at  a considerable  distance  from 
the  boat.  The  rich  background  of  dark  trees,  the 
blazing  fires,  the  picturesque  groups  assembled  around 
them,  and  the  tranquil  river  below,  its  crystal  surface 


HINDOO  WATER  CRAFT  AND  SAILORS. 


139 


crimson  with  the  red  glow  of  an  Indian  sunset,  or  the 
fleeting  tint  fading  away,  and  leaving  only  the  bright 
broad  river — molten  silver  in  polished  steel — as  the  dark 
shadows  of  the  night  advance,  form  an  evening  land- 
scape always  pleasing  and  varying  with  the  varying 
scenery  of  the  ever-changing  bank.”  Such  is  a budge- 
row  as  it  appears  upon  the  waters  of  the  sacred  Granges, 
conveying  passengers  and  cargo  to  and  from  Calcutta  and 
the  upper  provinces.  Its  place  is  being  partially  sup- 
plied by  small  steamers,  a safer  and  more  expeditious 
conveyance,  though  confined  chiefly  to  Europeans  and 
the  more  wealthy  natives.  These  steam-tugs  are  a 
great  convenience,  for  many  persons  undergo  more 
fatigue,  are  exposed  to  more  serious  casualties,  and 
are  sometimes  longer  in  a voyage  by  native  craft  from 
Calcutta,  to  the  upper  provinces,  than  in  one  from 
Boston  or  London. 


CHAPTER  X. 


HINDOO  LAND  CONVEYANCES. 

Travelling  propensity  of  the  Hindoos — Primitive  mode  of  carrying  a 
child — Cart  and  Bullocks — Canopied  cart — Palanquin — Tonjon — Mis- 
cellaneous vehicles  in  City  and  Town. 

Religious  festivals,  marriage  entertainments,  fune- 
ral ceremonies  and  mercantile  transactions,  furnish 
occasion  for  the  people  of  India  often  to  leave  their 
homes  for  long  and  wearisome  tours  and  pilgrimages. 
When  whole  households  thus  travel  abroad,  the  pa- 
rents, if  very  poor,  have  an  ingenious  method  of  shar- 
ing the  toil  of  carrying  their  helpless  infant.  A cot- 
ton cloth,  several  yards  in  length,  is  spread  upon  tho 
ground,  the  “ wee  thing”  placed  upon  the  inverted 
folds,  while,  with  the  ends  tied  together,  the  whole  is 
slung  across  a bamboo  pole  laid  upon  the  shoulders  of 
father  and  mother,  much  as  two  draymen  carry  a bar- 
rel of  sugar  or  a bag  of  cotton.  In  passing  the  rice 
fields  and  seeing  the  mother  busy  at  her  task  of  trans- 
planting the  tender  shoot,  I have  often  observed  her 
infant  suspended  in  this  manner  from  the  bough  of  n 
neighboring  tree,  thus  removed  above  all  danger  from 


HINDOO  LAND  CONVEYANCES. 


141 


reptiles  and  vermin,  while  the  wind  performed  the  im- 
portant office  of  rocking  the  cradle.  If  pecuniary 
means  allow,  an  ox  trained  for  the  purpose;  or  an  abo- 
riginal pony  is  obtained,  and  on  it  is  placed  the  lug- 
gage, above  which  sits  the  mother,  with  two  or  more 
of  her  youthful  family.  A method  which  is  deemed 
a grade  higher  in  respectability  and  comfort,  is  to  call 
into  use  a common  cart,  in  Southern  India  called  a 
bandy , drawn  by  two  of  the  inferior  class  of  the  small 
but  hardy  bullocks.  These  conveyances  are  very  ser- 
viceable in  conveying  travellers  with  their  baggage 
and  utensils — the  tents  and  stores  of  the  soldiery — 
the  treasure  received  at  the  out-stations  for  transport- 
ation to  the  metropolis — with  the  inland  products  that 
need  to  be  brought  to  the  seaboard  towns  for  exporta- 
tion. When  heavily  laden  they  are  drawn  at  the 
slow  and  wearisome  rate  of  from  fifteen  to  twenty 
miles  per  day. 

Every  Hindoo  village  of  any  importance  has  a 
set  of  officers  to  regulate  and  control  its  internal 
affairs.  The  “ Headman”  of  this  constabulary  force 
maintains  no  little  state  in  respect  to  dwelling, 
dress,  equipage  and  attendants.  His  official  con- 
veyance is  called  a Boicbandy,  and  is  formed  by 
placing  upon  the  axletree  of  a common  bandy  a plat- 
form about  five  feet  square,  covering  which  is  a cush- 
ion with  a pillow  to  recline  upon,  while  to  shield  from 
the  sun  and  rain,  a conical-shaped  canopy  of  cotton 
. cloth  rises  to  the  height  of  four  or  more  feet,  sur- 
mounted by  a gilded  ball,  glittering  in  the  rays  of  the 


142 


INDIA. 


resplendent  sun.  Much  taste  is  displayed  in  the  orna- 
ments by  which  this  vehicle  is  decorated,  the  axletrces 
and  beams  being  painted  of  various  hues,  while  the 
depending  tassels  of  parti-colored  silk  are  graceful  and 
imposing,  if  not  in  all  respects  tasteful  and  elegant. 
These  carriages  are  drawn  by  large  milk-white  bul- 
locks, with  bells  about  their  necks,  several  footmen 
running  by  their  side  and  in  the  rear,  while  a crier 
precedes  the  cavalcade,  blowing  at  intervals  a long 
trumpet,  and  informing  the  people  that  the  “ great 
man”  is  coming,  and  that  they  must  do  him  reverence. 

The  vehicle  in  use  among  the  higher  classes  of  Hin- 
doos, and  almost  wholly  so  among  foreign  residents, 
is  the  palanquin , which,  from  its  importance  claims 
a particular  description. 

Not  long  before  leaving  Madras,  I found  it  neces- 
sary to  visit  the  neighboring  village  of  S.  Having 
sent  to  the  nearest  place  of  rendezvous,  the  maistry, 
or  headman  of  a set  of  bearers,  soon  entered  my  pre- 
sence with  a low  salaam,  when  the  following  colloquy 
passed  between  us  : “ Well,  maistry,  I wish  to  go  to 
S.  Have  you  a neat  palanquin  and  a set  of  good 
booies  (bearers)  all  ready  ?”  “ Yes,  sir — we  can  go  at 
any  moment  the  Reverend  order.”  “ How  far  is  it?” 
“ Four  kathams,”  (anglioe,  forty  miles).  “ How 
many  bearers  will  be  needed  ?”  “ If  the  Reverend 

wishes  to  go  through  in  one  night,  a full  set  of  twelve 
men — a mussalchee,  (torch-bearer)  and  cavardy  cooly. 
At  what  time  does  your  Reverence  want  to  leave  ?” 
“ At  six  o’clock.  Be  here  all  of  you  at  that  hour, 


HINDOO  LAND  CONVEYANCES. 


143 


and  I shall  be  ready.  But  stop  a moment — tell  me 
first  what  you  are  to  charge.”  *•  The  Reverend  knows 
what  the  government  rates  are,  but  for  master's  favor 
(making  a low  salaam,)  wo  will  go  for  one  rupee 
(about  fifty  cents)  apiece  each  way.”  “ Well,  I will 
give  it  if  you  do  well — remember  now,  a good  palan- 
quin and  good  practiced  fellows.”  “ How  could  I do 
otherwise  for  the  Reverend  ?” — with  which  flattering 
expression  he  salaamed  himself  out  of  my  presence, 
and  went  about  making  ready  for  the  excursion.  At 
the  hour  appointed,  the  whole  set  came  gliding  into 
the  yard,  the  empty  palanquin  being  brought  leisurely 
along  by  four  persons,  who  placed  it  before  the  door, 
while  each  in  turn  made  his  obeisance.  “ Well,  mais- 
try,  are  your  men  all  here  ?”  “ The  Reverend  count 

and  see.”  The  whole  twelve  were  then  passed  in  re- 
view. “ The  mussalchee,  where  is  he  ?”  “ There, 

your  Reverence,”  and  I immediately  recognized  this 
important  personage  by  his  long  stick  with  cotton 
cloth  wound  round  one  end,  which,  in  journeying  he 
carries  in  his  left  hand,  and  keeps  saturated  with  oil 
from  a flask  in  his  right.  This  torch-man  is  always 
considered  necessary,  though  the  light  of  the  moon 
may  render  his  flambeau  quite  uncalled  for.  “ And 
the  cavardy  cooly,  where  is  he  ?”  Upon  which  there 
stepped  forward  a short,  thick-set  man,  all  muscle  and 
sinew.  “ Well,  now,  let  us  look  at  your  palanquin.” 
And  had  the  reader  stood  by  my  side  he  would  have 
observed  that  the  singular  conveyance  submitted  to 
his  examination  is  shaped  like  an  oblong  box,  in  length 


144 


INDIA. 


six  feet — in  depth  and  width  four.  A strong  pole  ex- 
tends from  either  end  about  five  feet,  which  is  fasten- 
ed by  means  of  four  rods  to  the  body  of  the  vehicle, 
and  in  case  of  a long  journey  an  additional  rope  at- 
tached to  one  pole  passes  under  to  that  of  the  opposite. 
These  arms,  the  frame-work,  panneling,  &c.  are  made 
of  teak  or  other  pliant  wood,  with  sliding  doors  and 
Venetian  blinds.  Within,  upon  a rattan  bottom,  is 
placed  a mattress  covered  with  chintz  or  morocco, 
which  forms  the  traveller’s  seat  and  bed.  Passing 
from  one  of  the  inner  sides  to  the  opposite,  is  a wide 
leathern  strap,  against  which  he  leans,  while  a small 
pillow  lies  loose  upon  the  cushion,  by  which  his  knees 
can  be  a little  elevated  and  relieved  from  the  tedious- 
ness of  a horizontal  position.  Just  over  the  spot 
where  the  feet  are  to  be  placed,  there  is  a shelf, 
where  books,  medicine,  &c.,  can  be  deposited,  near 
which  is  a watch  pocket,  and  many  other  little 
contrivances  essential  to  one  who  anticipates  a journey 
far  from  home.  The  whole  is  painted  green,  and 
on  the  top  is  a large  cotton  cloth  to  shield  the  occu- 
pant from  the  dust,  and  colored  blue  or  black, 
according  to  the  taste  of  the  owner.  As  my  maistry 
has  brought  a superior  article,  the  reader  will  remark 
that  it  has  a few  extra  conveniences.  There  is  a 
second  top,  raised  about  four  inches  above  the  first, 
thus  admitting  a current  of  air,  and  tending  to  pro- 
duce greater  coolness  and  comfort.  Upon  this  second 
covering  is  a tin  box,  painted  black  and  called  an  im- 
perial, which  forms  a receptacle  for  those  artiolcs  of 


HINDOO  LAND  CONVEYANCES. 


145 


clothing  that  cannot  find  room  in  the  main  body  of  the 
vehicle.  A gurglet  (earthen  bottle)  for  water,  is 
nicely  encased  in  a wicker-work  basket,  and  fastened 
upon  the  end  of  the  pole  next  the  body  of  the  palan- 
quin ; and  in  the  same  position  upon  the  opposite 
sides,  are  bottles  for  oil  and  medicines. 

Such  was  the  conveyance  brought  for  my  night’s 
excursion.  In  the  first  place,  two  square  tin  boxes 
were  filled,  one  with  necessary  clothing,  and  the  other 
with  table  furniture,  cooking  utensils,  “ curry  stuffs,” 
bread,  and  other  et  ceteras.  These  were  given  to  the 
cavardy  cooly,  who  fastened  one  upon  each  end  of  a 
strong  bamboo,  and  having  slung  them  upon  his 
shoulder  started  off  immediately,  that  he  might  be  at 
the  end  of  the  stage  before  my  arrival. 

Now  for  the  palanquin — in  went  one  article  after 
another,  the  poor  bearers  beginning  to  think  that  the 
Reverend’s  money  and  favor  were  to  be  obtained  at 
the  expense  of  no  slight  fatigue. 

But  their  complaints  were  little  noticed.  Just  so 
much  must  go,  and  in  this  way  only.  The  last  article 
being  stowed  away,  the  maistry  was  told  to  call  his 
men  for  a departure.  Slowly  they  rose  from  their 
recumbent  posture  upon  the  verandah  or  sand,  where 
they  had  seized  'a  few  moments  to  refresh  themselves 
in  preparation  for  the  fatiguing  duties  before  them. 
Their  first  act  of  making  ready  was  to  aid  each  other 
in  winding  around  the  body  a long  cotton  cloth,  by 
way  of  imparting  greater  strength  to  the  frame.  Then 

followed  the  taking  of  their  stations,  each  being  sup- 
7 


146 


INDIA. 


plied  with  a small  pad  to  prevent  the  shoulder  being 
injured  by  the  friction  of  the  pole,  while  those  of  a 
shorter  size  were  furnished  with  a second  or  third  to 
bring  the  palanquin  upon  a level.  “ All  ready,  mais- 
try?”  “All  ready,”  was  the  reply — a parting  saluta- 
tion to  the  friends  I was  about  to  leave,  and  in  I 
crept,  when  first  the  rear,  then  the  forward  beams 
were  slowly  placed  upon  the  shoulders  of  my  men,  and 
off  I hastened,  while  the  shout  began  with  which  they 
kept  time  and  directed  their  tread.  To  a griffin 
{alias,  a new-comer),  this  sound  is  rather  frightful, 
and  I have  heard  of  a young  man  who  was  informed 
that  so  soon  as  his  bearers  began  to  make  a noise  he 
must  jump  out  and  run  for  his  life.  He  did  as  he  was 
directed,  not  a little  to  the  surprise  of  the  innocent 
natives  and  amusement  of  his  jocose  friends.  Being 
accustomed  to  these  sounds,  they  neither  alarmed  me 
by  their  strangeness  or  troubled  me  by  their  apparent 
expressions  of  pain — for  I knew  them  to  be  necessary 
to  equality  of  tread  and  the  preservation  of  courage 
and  good  spirits.  At  times  these  responses  have  no 
meaning,  being  a simple  “ he  he,  ho  ho,”  while  again 
they  have  reference  to  the  size  and  weight  of  the  per- 
son they  are  carrying,  of  which  the  following  is  a sig- 
nificant illustration  : 

“ Oh  what  a heavy  bag,  Ho,  ho, 

He  is  an  ample  weight,  “ “ 

Let’s  let  lxis  Palkee  down,  “ “ 

Let’s  set  him  in  the  mud,  “ “ 

No,  but  he’ll  be  angry  then,  “ “ 


HINDOO  LAND  CONVEYANCES. 


147 


Aye,  and  he’ll  beat  us  then,  “ “ 

Then  let  us  hasten  on, 

Jump  along,  jump  along,”  u “ 

If  a lady  bo  the  passenger,  such  expressions  as 
these  may  be  heard  : 

“ She’s  not  heavy,  Putterum  (care) 

Carry  her  softly,  “ 

Nice  little  lady,  “ 

Here’s  a bridge,  “ 

Carry  her  carefully,  “ 

Carry  her  gently,  “ 

Sing  along  cheerily,  “ 

“ Putterum,  Putterum.” 

When  passing  through  the  streets  of  a town,  they 
are  accustomed  to  dignify  the  traveller  with  the  no- 
blest titles. 


“ Here  is  a great  man,  Ho,  ho, 

He  is  a Rajah,  “ “ 

She  is  a Ranee,”  “ u 

for  the  reason  that  their  own  importance  will  be  en- 
hanced by  an  attendance  upon  so  noble  a person. 

When  approaching  home  the  theme  is  changed. 
The  benevolence  of  the  traveller  is  then  the  burden 
of  song.  The  ear  is  saluted  by  complimentary  ex- 
pressions like  these  : 

“ He  is  a charity  man,  Ho,  ho, 

He  loves  to  do  good,  “ “ 

She  is  benevolent,  “ “ 

She  won’t  forget  us,”  “ “ 

the  object  of  which  is  to  remind  the  one  they  are  car- 


148 


INDIA. 


rying,  that  in  case  of  a safe  arrival  at  home,  a little 
extra  pay  will  not  be  at  all  unwelcome. 

As  I passed  beyond  the  city  limits,  the  face  of  the 
country  presented  little  to  interest,  and  my  confined 
position  allowed  but  a glance  at  any  object  as  I 
passed.  To  while  away  time  that  began  to  hang 
heavily,  I availed  myself  of  the  remaining  twilight 
to  read  a book,  brought  for  that  purpose.  This  was 
difficult,  for  the  tread  of  the  bearers,  though  usually 
regular,  caused  a motion  of  the  conveyance  more 
tremulous  than  that  of  a railroad  car.  I succeeded 
tolerably  well,  however,  though  such  a mode  of  test- 
ing the  strength  of  the  eyes  is  contrary  to  the  advice 
of  the  wise  and  prudent 

But  of  all  the  vehicles  in  which  I have  yet  had  the 
fortune  to  be  conveyed,  the  palanquin  is  the  most 
lonely,  and  least  attractive  or  agreeable.  It  is  emi- 
nently useful,  and  here  your  praise  of  it  must  end. 
Carrying  but  one  person,  there  he  must  sit  and  think 
and  speculate,  while  there  is  just  enough  about  him  to 
divert  attention,  and  thus  to  forbid  a very  profitable 
and  connected  train  of  reflection.  Such  being  the 
case,  I was  right  glad  to  perceive  that  it  was  late 
enough  to  conclude  upon  retiring  to  rest.  Having 
accordingly  told  the  men  to  set  me  down,  which 
was  willingly  done,  I removed  the  end  of  the  strap 
behind,  and  arranged  my  pillow  ; then  making  my 
necessary  toilet,  I reclined  at  full  length,  hoping 
for  a quiet  repose  of  a few  hours.  The  bearers 
again  under  way,  I was  visited  by  the  nocturnal  god- 


HINDOO  LAND  CONVEYANCES. 


149 


dess,  though  I could  not  say  with  the  poet  “ Kind 
nature’s  sweet  restorer,  balmy  sleep,"  the  state  I was 
in  being  little  entitled  to  the  appellation  “ sleep,”  and 
still  less  to  that  of  “ balmy.”  Once  I was  aroused  by 
inhaling  an  odor  quite  foreign  to  the  spicy  land  of 
Ind.  A breeze  had  sprung  up,  and  my  torch-man 
had  taken  shelter  under  the  leeward  of  my  palanquin, 
giving  me  an  opportunity  of  quaffing  the  fumes  of 
burning  cotton  and  rancid  oil.  Having  intimated  to 
him,  in  very  decided  terms,  that  he  must  leave  that 
locality,  he  trotted  ahead,  while  I relapsed  into  my 
former  repose,  from  which  I was  again  awakened  by  a 
dream  which  was  “ not  all  a dream,”  to  wit  that  I 
was  again  doubling  the  Cape  of  Storms.  When  a 
little  aroused,  I called  for  information  respecting  the 
very  disagreeable  motion  of  the  conveyance,  when  I was 
told  that  a new  man  had  taken  hold.  I requested  the 
maistry  to  defer  all  experiments  of  apprentices  until 
some  other  person  (or  thing)  was  their  traveller  than 
myself.  My  request  was  heeded,  and  again  all  went 
smoothly  onward. 

After  journeying  a few  miles  further,  the  maistry 
was  at  my  elbow  with  the  intelligence  that  we  were 
near  a river,  the  water  of  which  was  deep,  and  that  we 
might  find  some  difficulty  in  crossing.  • 

Such  interruptions  are  not  uncommon  in  that 
land  of  drought  and  torrent.  That  which  now  pre- 
sents to  the  eye  but  an  extended  waste  of  arid  sand, 
becomes  in  a few  days  the  bed  of  a navigable  stream. 
At  these  times  the  journeyer  does  best  to  trust  himself 


150 


INDIA. 


to  the  judgment  and  experience  of  his  bearers,  instead 
of  himself  directing  what  shall  be  done.  "When  the 
water  is  very  high  and  the  current  strong,  prudence 
dictates  a patient  delay  upon  the  bank  till  the  “ river 
runs  by,”  which  it  sometimes  does  in  a few  hours, 
especially  if  the  monsoon  have  not  fully  set  in.  In  other 
cases  the  course  is  adopted  which  was  pursued  in  the 
present  instance.  The  torch-bearer  went  ahead  into  the 
middle  of  the  stream,  holding  his  flambeau  above  him 
in  one  hand,  while  with  the  other  he  carried  a long 
pole,  cautiously  measuring  the  water’s  depth  just 
before  him.  After  finding  that  the  river  was  fordable, 
he  returned  and  reported  to  the  maistry,  who  directed 
one-half  of  the  men  to  place  the  bottom  of  the  palan- 
quin (cooly  like)  upon  their  heads,  and  the  other 
merely  to  walk  near  their  fellows,  that  they  might  be 
at  hand  in  case  of  danger.  Thus  we  entered  the  river 
cautiously,  slowly,  with  just  enough  of  the  “ ho  ho” 
not  to  let  courage  fail  or  spirits  flag.  Deeper  and 
still  deeper  sunk  the  bearers,  and  nearer  to  my  per- 
son approached  the  rapid  waves.  I looked  ahead, 
and  there  was  the  mussalchee,  his  light  borne  aloft, 
and  his  turbaned  head  just  appearing  above  the 
surfaoe  of  the  water.  I thought  much,  but  said 
nothing.  At  the  moment  in  which  it  seemed  that 
another  step  downward  would  have  brought  tho 
raging  stream  into  my  vehicle,  I felt  a slight  elevation. 
The  danger  was  past,  cheerful  sounds  were  again 
heard  from  the  men,  and  with  buoyant  steps  I was 
carried  safely  to  the  opposite  bank,  hardly  less  pleased 


HINDOO  LAND  CONVEYANCES. 


151 


at  my  arrival  than  when  the  mussuli  boat  landed  me 
on  the  sandy  beach  of  Madras. 

The  bearers  placed  the  palanquin  upon  the  ground, 
to  allow  themselves  a little  rest  after  their  tiresome 
march,  w'hile  the  maistry  made  his  appearance,  in 
their  behalf,  at  my  door  with  a low  salaam,  which  w-as 
answered  by  a commendation  of  their  skill  and  an  in- 
timation that  a more  valuable  expression  of  my  good 
will  was  in  store  for  them.  With  a few  other  inter- 
ruptions, which  I will  not  weary  the  reader  by  narrat- 
ing, we  reached  the  village  of  S.  at  sunrise,  having 
been  twelve  hours  running  forty  miles,  including  the 
delay  in  crossing  the  river.  Reaching  the  bungalow, 
I very  happily  found  it  unoccupied,  and  therefore  had 
the  suite  of  rooms  to  myself.  My  palanquin  was 
brought  within,  so  as  to  be  sheltered  from  sun  and  rain. 
My  bearers  having  received  the  means  of  purchasing  a 
sheep,  and  thus  enjoying  an  extra  dish  of  curry,  were 
dismissed  for  the  day,  with  directions  to  be  at  the  door 
before  sunset.  I threw  myself  upon  a cot — with  one 
or  more  of  which,  and  a table  and  chairs,  these  cara- 
vanseries  are  furnished,  and  seized  a little  rest,  while 
tea,  toast  and  eggs  wrere  in  course  of  preparation  for 
my  breakfast.  So  much  for  a night’s  excursion  in  a 
palanquin,  which  although,  as  before  suggested,  very 
lonely  and  very  distasteful  to  many,  is  of  eminent  uti- 
lity in  a land  where  stage  coaches,  canals  and  rail- 
roads are  unknown. 

The  ton-jon  is  a conveyance  much  used  in  the  cities 
and  large  towns  of  India  for  shopping,  calling,  and 


152 


INDIA. 


evening  airings.  It  resembles  the  palanquin  in  having 
a pole  of  three  and  a half  feet  length  before  and  behind, 
and  in  being  carried  by  bearers.  In  the  form  of  the 
body,  and  in  its  rising  and  falling  top,  it  is  like  the 
chaise,  the  seat  being  only  of  sufficient  size  for  one 
adult.  The  sides  are  left  open,  but  are  provided 
with  extended  brass  wires,  upon  which  are  hung  cur- 
tains of  green  silk  that  may  be  drawn  at  pleasure. 
It  is  light  and  airy — suited  only  for  short  distances, 
as  the  posture  is  upright  instead  of  reclining. 

The  value  of  a palanquin  varies  from  fifty  to  a hun- 
dred dollars ; and  that  of  a ton-jon  from  thirty  to 
seventy-five  dollars,  according  to  their  size  and  ele- 
gance of  finish.  The  wealthy,  and  those  in  high  offi- 
cial station,  retain  a set  of  bearers  for  their  personal 
use — the  expense  for  eight  persons  (enough  for  short 
distances  and  with  no  baggage,)  being  about  $20  per 
month,  housing  and  feeding  themselves.  When  not 
needed  in  carrying  the  vehicle  they  run  upon  errands, 
pull  the  punkah,  assist  the  ayah  in  amusing  the  chil- 
dren, watch  the  premises,  introduce  visitors,  and  the 
like  employments  of  which  the  foreign  resident  has 
sufficient  to  engage  many  attendants. 

In  Calcutta,  Madras  and  Bombay,  almost  every  con- 
ceivable mode  of  conveyance  is  in  use  among  the 
various  classes  of  inhabitants.  Take  your  position 
at  six  o’clock  in  the  evening  (the  hour  for  Indian 
drives,)  at  some  prominent  point  upon  the  thoroughfare 
of  either  of  the  above-named  cities,  and  the  scenes  you 
witness  will  alternately  awaken  your  admiration  and 


HINDOO  LXND  CONVEYANCES. 


153 


excite  a smile.  Here  comes  a carriage  “ Europe- 
built” — well  proportioned  and  highly  th  ugh  tastefully 
ornamented — four  native  troopers  are  riding  ahead  to 
clear  the  way — postillions  are  mounted  upon  magnifi- 
cent Arabian  steeds,  with  other  attendants  running  at 
the  side  with  ornamented  dress  and  glittering  spear. 
Within  is  the  Governor  or  Chief  Justice — high  in  rank 
and  authority  among  the  foreign  residents.  There 
goes  a plain,  substantial  carriage,  drawn  by  a pair  of 
strong  though  not  showy  horses,  also  of  Arabian  ori- 
gin— the  reins  in  the  hands  of  an  English  gentleman, 
who  is  taking  his  family  to  bre'.the  the  invigorating 
sea  air  after  a day’s  confinement  within  his  house  or 
office.  This  again,  is  a civilian  or  one  of  the  higher 
class  of  commission  merchants,  and  his  sallow  counte- 
nance indicates  that  his  constitution  cannot  much 
longer  endure  the  demands  made  upon  it  by  his  daily 
seclusion,  cares  and  fatigue.  There  go  two  young 
men,  boys  almost,  in  military  costume,  upon  animals 
they  can  hardly  manage,  dashing  along  at  a break- 
neck pace,  laughing,  bowing,  and  attracting  not  a lit- 
tle attention  from  passers-by.  These  are  cadets  just 
from  shipboard — graduates  at  Addiscombe,  and  sent 
to  India  to  make  their  fortune.  ,One  of  two  destinies 
is  before  them — either  they  will  find  an  early  grave  in 
that  strange  land,  or,  if  they  pass  unscathed  through 
the  ordeal  of  griffinage,  and  have  time  and  disposition 
to  profit  by  experience,  they  will  become  eminent  and 
useful. 

But  look  again — yonder  approaches  a hackery, 


154 


INDIA. 


drawn  by  a lank  animal,  which  has  seen  all  the  ser- 
vice that  should  be  demanded,  but  is  doomed  to  spend 
its  last  days  in  drawing  those  East  Indians,  or  foreign 
sailors  from  place  to  place — to  see — be  seen — and  en- 
joy their  rude  life. 

What  a beautiful  palanquin  that  is,  coming.  The 
bearers,  how  well  dressed,  and  their  spears  how 
bright  and  gaily  tasseled ! Within  is  a wealthy 
Hindoo,  who  owns  his  millions  of  rupees,  and  lives 
in  Eastern  luxury.  And  that  ton-jon — how  light 
and  airy.  There  is  an  Ayah  and  child — the  mother 
is  in  the  carriage  that  just  went  by.  Standing  at  this 
point,  what  a strange  and  motley  mixture  of  persons 
and  vehicles.  People  of  every  hue,  dress,  and  grade 
and  business — civil,  military  and  commercial — Eng- 
lish, European  and  native — honored,  respected  and 
despised — eminent,  indifferent  and  ignoble — drawn  by 
horses  from  Arabia,  Cape,  Pegu,  Acheen — in  coaches, 
buggies,  drays,  carts — carried  in  palanquins  and  ton- 
jons — all  upon  the  same  general  errand  of  breathing 
the  delicious  sea  breeze,  and  thus  preparing  for  the 
evening’s  repast  and  a night’s  rest. 

In  the  up-country  stations,  the  same  may  be  wit- 
nessed though  on  a smaller  scale. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

HINDOO  LITERATURE. 

Languages  of  India — Antiquity  of  the  Sanscrit — The  Vedas — Shastras 
— Pooranas — Ramayanum,  Analysis  of,  and  Quotation  from  the  Poem 
— Remark  by  Dr.  Duff— Institutes  of  Menu,  and  other  Works  on 
Hindoo  Jurisprudence — Ethics — Extracts  from  the  Cural  and  Owiyar 
— Miscellaneous  Proverbs — Puncha  tantrakathy — Moothory — Nan- 
nery — Nalladiyar — Hindoo  Poetry. 

India  abounds  with  languages,  there  being  not  less 
than  eighteen  in  habitual  use  throughout  the  Peninsula. 
In  the  provinces  which  constitute  Northern  Hindoos - 
tan , we  find  the  Kashmeeree,  and  Khasee  or  Pur- 
buttee  ; — in  Hindoostan  Proper,  are  the  Punjaubee, 
Hindostanee,  Sindee,  Mahrattee,  Kuchee,  Goojratee, 
Runghee,  Bundulkundee,  Moogadkee,  Bengalee,  and 
Bhootiya  ; — in  the  Deccan,  the  Mahrattee,  G-ondee, 
Teloogoo,  Oorya,  and  Canarese ; while  in  Southern 
India,  are  the  Canarese,  Teloogoo,  Malayalim  and 
Tamul,  which  last  is  also  vernacular  among  the  in- 
habitants of  North  Ceylon.  Had  these  languages  a 
common  origin,  if  so,  what  was  it  ? are  questions 


156 


INDIA. 


which  have  engaged  a large  share  of  attention,  from 
men  of  letters  in  England  and  on  the  Continent. 

Adelung,  an  eminent  oriental  scholar,  asserts  with 
much  confidence,  that  “ the  Sanscrit  may  be  con- 
sidered, with  the  exception  of  a few  mountain  dialects, 
as  the  parent  of  all  Indian  languages,  from  the  Indus 
to  the  farthest  part  of  Arracan,  and  from  Cape  Comorin 
to  Chinese  Tartary.”  To  this  opinion  Halhed,  Sir 
William  Jones,  Colebrooke,  Rev.  Dr.  Carey,  and  other 
oriental  scholars  have  expressed  their  assent.  While 
there  is  much  to  favor  such  a sentiment  in  regard  to 
the  languages  of  the  north,  the  proof  is  not  equally 
conclusive  respecting  those  of  the  extreme  south.  It 
is  supposed  by  some  oriental  scholars  that  the  “ Tamul 
is  the  original  source  of  the  Malayalim,  Canarese, 
Teloogoo,  Mahrattee,  and  Oorya,  it  being  known  to 
have  attained  a highly  finished  form  some  time  prior 
to  the  introduction  of  the  Brahminical  system,  though, 
together  with  other  dialects,  having  since  received  a 
large  admixture  of  Sanscrit.” 

But,  though  denying  to  the  Sanscrit  the  undoubted 
right  of  being  the  root  of  which  the  other  Indian  lan- 
guages are  the  branches ; or  the  fountain  of  which 
these  are  the  streams,  most  justly  does  it  claim  the 
homage  of  high  antiquity.  The  Hindoo  gives  to  it  a 
Divine  origin,  and  calls  it  Dcva-Nagari,  the  “ writing 
of  the  Gods.”  This  is  no  matter  of  surprise  when  we 
see  that  it  is  the  depository  of  his  religion,  and  organ 
of  the  national  institutes  ; for  it  is  entirely  natural 
for  a people  like  the  Hindoos,  to  attribute  a celestial 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


157 


character  to  that  which  is  the  medium  of  conveying 
the  Divine  will,  especially  if  it  have  much  of  intrinsic 
excellence  to  command  admiration  and  homage. 

Sir  William  Jones  speaks  of  it  as  “ of  wonderful 
structure,  more  perfect  than  Greek,  more  copious  than 
Latin,  and  moro  exquisitely  perfect  than  either,”  in 
which  high  eulogium  Halhed,  Talboys,  Adelung,  and 
others  fully  concur.  Though  long  since  disused  in 
all  parts  of  the  country,  it  retains  a large  place  in  the 
veneration  of  the  people. 

The  dialects  of  the  various  hill  tribes  are  still,  for 
the  greater  part,  distinct  from  the  others,  and  have  no 
written  character. 

Waiving  farther  remarks  upon  the  Indian  lan- 
guages in  general,  I proceed  to  illustrate  the  subjects 
of  which  they  are  the  honored  vehicle. 

Foremost  in  the  vast  array  of  Indian  literature 
stand  those  ancient,  voluminous,  and  sacred  writings, 
the  Vedas. 

These  are  regarded  as  an  immediate  revelation  from 
heaven,  and  as  containing  all  that  man  needs  to  know 
respecting  the  character  of  God,  and  His  claims  upon 
the  rational  world. 

The  term  is  derived  from  the  Sanscrit  Ved,  (the 
law,)  and  includes  four  classes  of  works,  of  which  the 
first  is  called  the  Rig-- Veda , and  treats  of  the  first 
cause  of  all  beings  and  things,  the  creation  of  matter, 
the  formation  of  the  world,  of  angels  and  the  soul, 
rewards,  punishment,  corruption,  and  sin. 

The  second,  or  Yajur-Veda  contains  instructions  re- 


158 


INDIA. 


specting  religious  exercises,  the  castes,  feasts,  purifi- 
cations, gifts,  building  of  temples,  ceremonies  at  birth, 
marriage,  and  death,  and  of  the  kind  of  animals  re- 
quired in  sacrifice. 

The  third,  or  Sana-Veda,  comprises  hymns  in 
praise  of  the  Supreme  Being,  and  to  the  honor  of  sub- 
ordinate deities. 

The  fourth,  or  Atharvan-Veda  which  treats  of 
mystic  theology  and  metaphysics,  is  supposed  by  some 
to  be  of  less  authority  than  the  preceding  three,  from 
this  circumstance,  among  others,  that  while  they  are 
derived  successively  from  the  fire , air,  and  sun,  this 
last  has  no  such  important  parentage. 

These  four  classes  are  regarded  as  the  fountain  of 
all  true  religion,  and  the  primeval  sources  of  every 
other  species  of  useful  knowledge.  They  are  believed 
by  the  community  at  large  to  have  proceeded  direct 
and  entire  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  Creator  himself, 
and  therefore  as  challenging  the  most  implicit  faith 
and  profoundest  reverence.  When  the  various  portions 
of  the  universe,  the  gods  and  men,  were  issuing  from 
the  different  parts  of  the  body  of  Brahma,  these  holy 
works,  fairly  and  fully  written,  dropped  from  his  four 
mouths.  After  meeting  with  sundry  disasters  by 
falling  into  the  sea  and  like  places  of  danger  from 
which  a miracle  alone  saved  them,  they  were  finally 
placed  in  the  hands  of  Yyasa  and  other  learned  men 
to  methodize  and  arrange,  and  from  them  have  they 
come  to  our  day. 

Let  a single  quotation  illustrate  the  character  of 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


159 


these  works.  It  is  taken  from  the  third  or  Sama- 
Yeda  : — 

“ Possessed  of  innumerable  heads,  innumerable  eyes, 
innumerable  feet — Brahm  fills  the  heavens  and  earth, 
he  is  whatever  was,  whatever  will  be,  his  command 
is  as  the  water  of  life,  he  is  the  source  of  universal 
motion,  he  is  the  light  of  the  moon,  the  sun,  the  fire, 
the  lightning.  The  Veda  is  the  breath  of  his  nostrils, 
the  primary  elements  are  his  sight,  the  agitation  of 
human  affairs  is  his  laughter,  his  sleep  is  the  destruc- 
tion of  the  universe.  In  different  forms  he  cherishes 
the  creatures  ; in  the  form  of  air  he  preserves  them,  in 
the  form  of  water  he  satisfies  them,  in  the  form  of  the 
sun  he  assists  them  in  the  affairs  of  life,  and  in  that 
of  the  moon  he  refreshes  them  in  sleep,  the  progres- 
sion of  time  forms  his  footsteps,  all  the  gods  to  him 
are  as  sparks  of  fire.  To  him  I bow,  I bow.” 

These  sacred  hymns  are  arranged  in  metre,  and 
sung  with  much  taste  and  melody. 

Sir  William  Jones  fixes  the  date  of  the  Vedas  at 
1500  years  before  the  birth  of  Christ,  which  Mr.  Cole- 
brooke  and  others  consider  as  far  too  modern  a period. 
After  long  and  arduous  efforts,  a complete  collection 
of  these  sacred  books  has  been  found  and  now  lies  in 
the  British  Museum ; bound  in  eleven  folio  volumes. 

Parts  of  these  treatises  have  been  translated  into 
the  English  and  Continental  languages,  but  the  ob- 
scurity of  their  style,  the  obsolete  dialect  in  which 
they  are  composed,  their  voluminousness,  and  the 
comparatively  limited  interest  taken  in  the  study  and 


ICO 


INDIA. 


reading  of  such  subjects,  will  probably  prevent  for 
years,  and  perhaps  for  ever,  a full  translation  of  their 
contents. 

Extracts  from  the  Vedas  have  been  made,  and  may 
be  found  in  the  “ Journal  of  the  Asiatic  Society,” 
“Ward’s  View  of  the  Hindoos,”  Colebrooke’s  Essay,” 
and  other  works  on  the  East. 

Next  in  importance  to  the  Vedas  the  various  Shas- 
tras  hold  a place.  Rishes  and  sages  are  their  authors, 
and  their  themes  less  sacred  than  those  of  the  Vedas. 
These  teach  respectively  the  science  of  architecture, 
law  and  logic,  moral  philosophy,  astrology,  and  medi- 
cine. Being  the  great  books  of  Hindoo  science,  they 
are  used  in  schools  and  colleges,  and  present  a for- 
midable array  of  metaphysics,  morals,  and  philosophy, 
“ falsely  so  called.” 

Next  in  order  of  importance  are  the  Pooranas, 
which  are  in  Hindoo  literature  what  the  Vedas  are  in 
theology,  and  the  Shastras  in  science.  They  are  my- 
thological poems  and  of  great  popularity  and  interest 
the  nation  over.  Under  this  title  are  arranged  those 
gigantic  poems  Bhagavata,  a history  of  Vishnu  who 
bore  that  surname,  the  Mnliabharat , an  epic  poem 
of  more  than  100,000  slokas  or  couplets,  the  subject 
of  which  is  the  history  of  a race  of  beings  descended 
from  the  great  Bharata,  who  was  banished  the  city 
Hastinapad,  and  wandered  about  a long  time  in  misery  ; 
but  at  length,  by  the  assistance  of  Krishna,  regained 
his  crown  and  re-enjoyed  prosperity.  It  is  compared 
for  its  beauty,  to  a deep  and  noble  forest,  abounding 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


101 


in  delicious  fruits  and  fragrant  flowers,  shaded  and 
watered  by  perennial  springs. 

Last  named,  but  first  in  public  esteem,  is  the 
Ramayana , the  work  of  the  poet  Yalmiki,  in  the 
introduction  to  which  it  is  said  that,  “ He  who  sings 
and  hears  this  poem  continually,  has  attained  to  the 
highest  state  of  enjoyment,  and  will  finally  be  equal 
to  the  gods.” 

The  great  celebrity  of  this  work,  and  the  complete- 
ness with  which  it  exhibits  the  strength  of  oriental 
genius,  induces  me  to  lay  before  the  reader  an  outline 
of  the  poem,  and  an  extract  from  its  voluminous  pages. 
“ At  different  times,  Bhoodeir  or  the  earth  is  repre- 
sented as  oppressed  with  monsters  and  demons.  Un- 
able any  longer  to  bear  their  enormities,  she  enters 
the  presence  of  Vishnu,  entreats  his  interposition,  and 
receives  his  promise  that  he  will  become  incarnate  and 
destroy  her  enemies.  Hence  the  many  incarnations  of 
that  second  of  the  Triad,  as  fish — tortoise — boar — man- 
lion — and  an  ox.  After  describing  these  six  incarnate 
forms  of  Vishnu,  the  author  proceeds  to  the  seventh 
as  Rama , son  of  Dusarutha,  king  of  Oude.  His  wife  is 
born  a princess,  and  in  process  of  time  they  are  united 
in  marriage.  His  father  Dusarutha  becomes  old  and 
infirm,  and  wishes  Rama  to  take  the  reins  of  govern- 
ment into  his  hands.  Rama  replies,  ‘ It  cannot  be — 
I have  not  been  born  for  such  a worldly  purpose  as 
this.  I must  call  my  wife  Seeta,  along  with  me,  we 
must  reside  like  ascetics  in  the  desert,  and  it  will 
presently  transpire  for  what  purpose  I appear  among 


162 


INDIA. 


men.’  He  does  so.  They  build  a hermitage,  and 
spend  their  time  amongst  the  beasts  of  the  forest. 
The  giant  Ravenna,  king  of  Lunka  in  Ceylon — the 
monster  with  ten  heads,  and  as  many  arms,  and  to 
destroy  whom  it  is  the  design  of  the  incarnation, 
hears  this  intelligence,  and  is  determined,  in  the 
struggle,  to  give  Rama  as  much  trouble  as  he  can. 
Having  the  power  of  changing  his  form,  he  assumes 
that  of  an  ascetic,  and  whilst  Rama  is  absent  from 
the  hermitage,  he  appears  at  the  door,  and  entreats 
Seeta  to  give  him  alms.  When  approaching  to  bestow 
the  bounty  desired,  he  seizes,  carries  her  off,  and  puts 
her  in  prison.  On  returning  to  the  hermitage,  Rama 
cannot  find  his  wife,  sinks  into  a sea  of  grief,  utters 
the  most  piteous  cries,  and  passes  through  those  deep 
emotions  of  sorrow  which  characterize  Eastern  nations. 
To  assist  him  in  his  conflict  with  the  giants,  the 
angels  are  represented  as  becoming  incarnate  in 
monkeys , and  Hunumunta  is  their  leader.  As  the 
latter  is  worshipped  in  every  town  and  almost  every 
village  of  India,  it  is  evident  that  he  is  a deity  of  no 
small  consequence.  Finding  Rama  in  a state  of  de- 
spondency, he  becomes  his  prime  minister,  and  under- 
takes to  visit  Lunka  and  find  out  the  circumstances  of 
Seeta.  He  assumes  the  form  of  a rat,  and  pursues  his 
circuitous  route  through  the  houses  of  the  enemy,  till 
he  discovers  the  prison  where  Seeta  is  confined.  Like 
a faithful  servant  he  delivers  to  her  the  message  of  his 
master,  and  receives  from  Seeta  her  answers  in  return. 
After  having  emerged  from  the  prison,  he  assumes  his 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


163 


proper  form — is  seen  scampering  over  the  walls  and 
houses — and  excites  much  alarm  among  the  giants  in 
Lunka.  Whether  his  visit  was  an  omen  of  good  or 
evil  they  could  not  understand.  At  length  they 
seized  him  as  a prisoner,  and  brought  him  to  the 
court  of  Ravenna  to  be  examined.  As  they  would 
not  give  him  a seat,  but  compelled  him  to  stand, 
he  took  his  tremendous  tail,  and  coiled  it,  cable- 
like, till  it  rose  to  such  a height  as  enabled  him  to 
sit  down  on  an  equality  with  the  throne  of  Ravenna. 
In  reply  to  the  question  put  to  him  by  the  king  re- 
specting his  name,  parentage,  design  in  visiting  Lunka, 
&c.,  he  gave  such  shrewd  and  ingenious  answers,  that 
he  sets  the  whole  court  in  bursts  of  laughter  against 
the  sovereign.  Ravenna  is  frantic  with  rage,  and  asks 
what  is  to  be  done  with  this  monkey  ? Some  proposed 
one  thing,  and  some  another ; but  all  agreed  in  the 
suggestion,  that  he  made  such  a boast  of  his  tail,  that 
it  ought  to  be  set  on  fire.  Accordingly,  all  the  old 
clothes,  the  rags,  and  paper  to  be  found  in  Lunka,  are 
put  in  requisition,  to  make  a flambeau  of  this  tail.  They 
cover  it  with  tar  and  pitch,  and  other  combustibles — 
set  it  on  fire — and  then  liberate  the  prisoner,  that  they 
may  have  a day  of  frolic.  No  sooner  does  Hunumunta 
regain  his  liberty,  than  he  commences  a race — now 
through  the  fields  of  corn,  and  sets  them  on  fire — then 
through  the  farm-yards  and  over  the  hay-ricks,  and 
puts  them  in  a blaze — then  over  the  walls  and  through 
the  houses,  and  kindles  a fire  which  is  not  easily  ex- 
tinguished. Never  did  such  an  incendiary  visit  Lunka 


164 


INDIA. 


before.  To  save  their  city  from  destruction,  the  giants 
now  pursue  him  to  put  out  the  torch  which  they  had 
lighted.  Hunumunta  ascends  the  tower  of  a temple, 
and  hides  himself  in  its  summit ; and  when  he  finds 
it  well  filled  with  giants,  he  throws  it  down  with  vio- 
lence, and  destroys  them  all.  He  makes  his  escape — 
dips  his  tail  in  the  sea — and  returns  to  Rama.  After 
reporting  the  exploits  of  his  embassy,  they  assemble 
an  army  of  monkeys — throw  a bridge  across  the  sea 
(gulf  of  Manaar)  from  the  Continent  to  Ceylon — and 
lay  siege  to  the  fortress  of  Ravenna.  The  war  is  com- 
menced, and  prodigies  of  valor  are  performed  on  both 
sides,  till  Rama  kills  the  monster  Ravenna,  liberates 
his  wife  Seeta,  and  delivers  the  earth  from  the  giants, 
whose  enormities  cause  her  to  groan.”  Such  is  an  out- 
line of  this  famous  epic  ; but  the  poetry,  figures,  and 
illustrations  are  not  to  be  translated.  There  is  no  de- 
scribing the  intense  interest  with  which  the  millions 
listen  to  the  recitation  of  this  Poem  by  the  bards  who 
wander  up  and  down  the  country.  The  first  time  I 
witnessed  this  scene  was  in  the  city  of  Madura,  when 
passing  through  a wide  street,  in  company  with  the 
Rev.  Mr.  Cherry.  There  was  a large  pandal  built  in 
front  of  the  dwelling,  beneath  which  sat  the  reader, 
upon  an  ornamented  mat ; lamps  above,  attendants  at 
his  side,  and  thousands  crowding  the  street  before  him. 
We  stopped  to  listen,  and  though  we  could  understand 
but  little,  yet  the  melody  of  his  voice,  the  distinctness 
of  his  enunciation,  and  the  force  of  his  recitation,  pro- 
duced an  impression,  even  upon  us,  not  to  be  effaced. 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


165 


Add  to  this  an  understanding  of  the  sentiment,  and  an 
appreciation  of  the  style,  and  no  wonder  that  the  mul- 
titude of  half-clad  and  illiterate  Hindoos  sat  entranced 
with  wonder  and  admiration,  while  the  moments  sped 
as  on  eagle’s  wings. 

While,  as  before  remarked,  there  is  no  conveying  to 
those  of  another  nation  and  language  the  beauties 
which  a Hindoo  sees  in  this  Poem,  I shall  venture  to 
insert  a few  lines  as  illustrative  of  its  more  pathetic 
style. 

When  Dusarutha  was  told  by  Rama  that  he  would 
not  gratify  his  wishes  in  the  matter  of  succeeding 
him  upon  the  throne  of  Oude,  but  must  retire  to  a 
forest,  the  old  man  protested  against  his  daughter’s 
accompanying  him.  Under  these  circumstances  she 
addressed  her  husband  in  the  following  most  dutiful 
and  affectionate  manner  : 

Sod  of  the  venerable  parent ! hear, 

’Tis  Seeta  speaks.  Say,  art  thou  not  assur’d 
That  to  each  being  his  allotted  time 
And  portion,  as  his  merit,  are  assign’d, 

And  that  a wife  her  husband’s  portion  shares  ? 

Therefore,  with  thee  this  forest  lot  I claim. 

A woman’s  bliss  is  found,  not  in  the  smile 
Of  father,  mother,  friend,  or  in  herself : 

Her  husband  is  her  only  portion  here, 

Her  heaven  hereafter.  If  thou  indeed, 

Depart  this  day  into  the  forest  drear, 

I will  precede  and  smooth  the  thorny  way. 

0 chide  me  not ; for  where  the  husband  is, 

Within  the  palace,  on  the  stately  car, 


166 


INDIA. 


Or  wandering  in  the  air,  in  every  state, 

The  shadow  of  his  feet  is  her  abode. 

My  mother  and  my  father  having  left, 

I have  no  dwelling-place  distinct  from  tnee. 

F orbid  me  not.  For  as  a gay  recluse, 

On  thee  attending,  happy  shall  I feel, 

Within  this  honey-scented  grove  to  roam, 

For  thou,  e’en  here  can’st  nourish  and  protect ; 

And  therefore  other  friend  I cannot  need. 

A residence  in  heaven,  0 Raghuvu, 

Without  thy  presence  would  no  joy  afford. 

Therefore,  though  rough  the  path,  I must,  I will, 

The  forest  penetrate,  the  wild  abode 
Of  monkeys,  elephants,  and  playful  fawn. 

Pleased  to  embrace  thy  feet,  I will  reside 
In  the  rough  forest,  as  my  father’s  house. 

Void  of  all  other  wish,  supremely  thine, 

Permit  me  this  request — I will  not  grieve — 

I will  not  burden  thee — refuse  me  not, 

But  shouldst  thou,  Raghuvu,  this  prayer  deny, 

Know,  I resolve  on  death — if  torn  from  thee. 

Thus  much  upon  the  Vedas,  Puranas,  and  Shastras. 
Their  characteristics  are  number , antiquity , and  bulk  ; 
upon  the  last  feature  of  which  I shall  quote  the  lan- 
guage of  Dr.  Duff : 

“ The  iEneid  of  Virgil  extends  to  about  twelve  thou- 
sand lines,  the  Iliad  of  Homer  to  double  that  number ; 
but  the  Ramayana  of  Valmiki  rolls  on  to  a hundred 
thousand,  while  the  Mahabharat  of  Vyasa  quadruples 
even  that  sum  ! Many  of  the  other  sacred  books  ex- 
hibit a voluminousness  quite  as  amazing.  The  four 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


167 


Vedas,  when  collected,  form  eleven  huge  octavo  -vo- 
lumes, while  the  Puranas  extend  to  about  two  millions 
of  lines  ! In  one  of  these  it  is  gravely  asserted,  on  di- 
vine authority,  that  originally  the  whole  series  of 
Puranas  alone  consisted  of  one  hundred  kolis,  or  a 
thousand  millions  of  stanzas  } but  as  four  hundred 
thousand  of  these  were  considered  sufficient  for  the 
instruction  of  man,  the  rest  were  reserved  for  the  gods. 
Well  might  Sir  William  Jones  say,  “ Wherever  we 
direct  our  attention  to  Hindoo  literature,  the  notion  of 
infinity  presents  itself;  and  sure  the  longest  life  would 
not  suffice  for  a single  perusal  of  works  that  rise  and 
swell,  protuberant  like  the  Himalayahs,  above  the 
bulkiest  compositions  of  every  land  beyond  the  confines 
of  India.” 

Next  in  order  are  works  on  the  subject  of  Jurispru- 
dence, among  which  the  Institutes  of  Menu  occupy  a 
place  altogether  pre-eminent.  The  author  is  “ known 
in  the  Puranas  as  the  son  of  Brahma  and  one  of  the 
progenitors  of  mankind.”  His  Institutes,  in  twelve 
volumes,  though  inferior  to  the  Vedas  in  antiquity,  are 
held  to  be  equally  sacred  ; and,  owing  to  their  being 
more  closely  united  with  the  business  of  life,  have 
tended  much  to  mould  the  opinions  of  the  Hindoos. 
Sir  William  Jones  places  the  publication  of  these  ordi- 
nances about  880  B.  C.  The  work  has  been  translated 
by  the  great  Orientalist,  and  published  once  and  again 
in  London  and  Calcutta. 

The  Law-books  of  India,  or  Smritee  Shastras,  as 
they  are  called,  are  very  numerous.  In  addition  to 


1G8 


INDIA. 


many  which  have  been  lost,  there  are  now  extant 
seven  works  on  the  duties  of  kings,  thirty  on  inheri- 
tance, seventy-five  relative  to  the  Canon  Laws,  twenty 
on  offerings  to  the  manes  of  ancestors,  and  above 
ninety  on  vows,  oaths,  marriages,  and  various  other 
subjects  pertaining  to  private  welfare  and  the  public 
good.  These  Smritees  contain  eighteen  titles  of  law, 
which  are  declared  to  be  the  “ ground- work  of  all  judi- 
cial procedure  in  this  world.”  I would  close  what 
might  be  illustrated  at  greater  length  respecting  the 
law  books  of  India,  with  the  important  enactment 
that  “ the  preservation  of  the  kingdom  from  thieves, 
or  vigilance  in  punishing  theft,  secures  Paradise  to  the 
magistrate.” 

The  literature  of  the  land  abounds  with  volumes  on 
ethics  and  casuistry , variously  expressed  in  the  lan- 
guage of  poetry,  proverb,  fables,  narrative,  and  didactic 
counsel. 

While  many  of  the  sentiments  contained  in  these 
works  are  greatly  defective,  and  in  some  cases  ruinous 
in  their  practical  tendency,  it  must  be  admitted  that 
very  much  is  true,  and  worthy  of  commendation  and 
practice.  At  the  head  of  this  class  of  authors  stands 
Tiruvullavar,  deemed  an  incarnation  of  wisdom,  to 
vhom  the  Hindoos  are  indebted  for  that  extraordinary 
production,  the  Cural.  Though  more  than  fifteen 
hundred  years  old,  this  rare  collection  of  precepts, 
conveyed  in  the  style  of  unequalled  poetry,  has  lost 
none  of  its  original  favor  among  the  people.  In  one 
hundred  and  thirty-three  chapters  it  treats  of  almost 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


169 


every  variety  of  subjects  pertaining  to  the  relations 
and  duties  of  life,  forming  a text-book  of  indisputable 
authority.  Portions  of  this  work  have  been  translated 
into  English  by  several  oriental  scholars,  from  one  of 
which,  made  by  Mr.  Ellis  of  the  Madras  civil  service, 
I have  selected  the  following  stanzas,  by  which  the 
reader  may  form  an  opinion  of  the  whole  production  : 

As  ranked  in  every  alphabet  the  first, 

The  selfsame  vowel  stands,  so  in  all  worlds 
The  Eternal  God  is  chief. 


Of  virtue  void,  as  is  the  palsied  sense, 

The  head  must  be,  that  bows  not  at  his  feet, 
Whose  eight-fold  attributes  pervade  the  world. 

As  the  hook  rules  the  elephant,  so  he 
In  wisdom  firm  his  earthly  passions  rule 
Who  hopes  to  flourish  in  the  soil  of  heaven. 

No  greater  gain  than  virtue  canst  thou  know, 
Than  virtue  to  forget  no  greater  loss. 


Refer  not  virtue  to  another  day  ; 
Receive  her  now,  and  at  thy  dying  hour 
She’ll  prove  thy  never-dying  friend. 


Know  that  is  virtue  which  each  ought  to  do, 
What  each  should  shun  is  vice. 

8 


170 


INDIA. 


If  love  and  virtue  be  thy  constant  guests 
Domestic  life  is  blest,  and  finds  in  these 
Its  object  and  reward. 

Before  their  scornful  foes 

Bold  as  a lion  those  dare  never  walk, 

Whose  fame  is  sullied  by  their  wives’  base  deeds. 

Of  all  the  world  calls  good,  no  good  exists 
Like  that  which  wise  and  virtuous  offspring  give 
I know  no  greater  good. 

Sweet  is  the  pipe,  and  sweet  the  lute 'they  say, 

They  who  have  never  heard  their  children’s  tongues 
In  infant  prattle  lisp. 

What  bolt  can  love  restrain  ? What  veil  conceal ; 
One  tear-drop  in  the  eye  of  those  thou  lovest, 

Will  draw  a flood  from  thine. 

To  honor  guests  with  hospitable  rite, 

Domestic  life  with  all  its  various  joys 
To  man  was  given. 

Though  courtesy  rejoice  the  heart,  yet  words 
Of  kindness  which  dress  the  face  in  smiles 
Will  more  avail. 

Discourteous  speech  when  courteous  may  be  used, 

Is  like  the  sickly  appetite  which  culls 
Fruit  immature,  leaving  the  ripe  untouched. 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


171 


Small  as  a grain  of  millet 

Though  it  be,  large  as  the  towering  palm 

A benefit  to  grateful  eyes  appears. 

Though  every  virtue  by  his  hand  expire 
Yet  may  he  live  ; but  by  the  stroke  he  dies, 

When  murdered  gratitude  before  him  falls. 

That  virtue  which  in  all  relations  holds 
Unchangeable  its  nature,  that  alone 
Deserves  the  name  of  justice. 

It  is  the  glory  of  the  just  to  stand, 

Like  the  adjusted  balance,  duly  poised 
Nor  swerve  to  either  side. 

Though  unrestrained  all  else,  restrain  thy  tongue, 

F or  those  degraded  by  licentious  speech 
Will  rue  their  tongues’  offence. 

The  wound  may  heal,  though  from  a burning  brand, 
And  be  forgotten,  but  the  wound  ne’er  heals 
A burning  tongue  inflicts. 

As  vehicles  for  the  conveyance  of  ethical  precepts, 
proverbs  are  very  popular  among  the  people  of  India, 
and  form  an  important  part  of  the  national  literature. 
Before  me  is  a volume  containing  nearly  two  thou- 
sand of  these  concise  and  pithy  sentences,  many  of 
them  having  their  origin  in  the  wisdom  of  remote  an- 
tiquity, but  retaining  a place  in  daily  usage  the  country 


172 


INDIA. 


over.  From  this  volume  I have  selected  the  following, 
as  illustrative  of  the  class  : 

If  taken  to  excess  even  nectar  is  poison. 

The  crow  imitating  the  gait  of  the  swan,  lost  even  its  own. 
Ambrosia  at  the  tip  of  the  tongue,  hut  poison  at  the  root. 
To  the  timorous,  the  atmosphere  is  filled  with  demons. 

If  distant,  even  enemies  are  friends. 

Is  it  difficult  for  one  to  swin  a tank , who  has  swam  a river  ? 
When  the  elephant  is  given,  shall  a dispute  ensue  about  the 
goad  ? 

Does  the  hand  that  has  caressed  the  elephant,  caress  the 
sheep  ? 

It  will  happen  in  its  time — it  will  go  in  its  time. 

Is  the  fold  to  be  placed  where  the  sheep  may  wish  ? 

Though  you  go  a begging,  go  decently  attired. 

If  on  entering  you  are  obliged  to  swim,  how  will  you  reach 
the  opposite  shore  ? 

Bullets  do  not  fly  in  your  battles. 

Though  a little  bird  soar  high,  will  it  become  a kite  ? 

Is  he  a friend  who  helps  not  in  adversity  ? 

Your  friendship  is  sincere,  it  is  true — yet  do  not  put  your 
hand  in  my  sack. 

Are  all  men,  men  ? or  are  all  stones,  rubies  ? 

Are  we  not  to  milk  when  there  is  a cow  ? 

No  one  knows  all  things,  and  no  one  but  knows  something. 
Is  it  necessary  to  add  acid  to  the  lemon  ? 

The  flower  which  is  out  of  reach  is  dedicated  to  God. 

No  matter  what  becomes  of  others’  affairs,  attend  to  your 


own 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


173 


Though  a man  may  remove  to  the  distance  of  fifty  miles, 
his  sin  is  still  with  him. 

If  one  only  knows  the  matter  it  is  a secret,  if  two  it  is 
public. 

Learn  even  to  thieve,  but  forget  it. 

What  the  eye  has  seen,  the  hand  may  do. 

If  the  ass  be  beaten  with  a bundle  of  sugar-cane,  will  he 
thereby  taste  its  sweetness  ? 

Time  passes  away,  but  sayings  remain. 

Winnow  while  there  is  wind,  and  turn  the  mill  while  there 
is  sugar-cane. 

Of  what  use  can  the  news  of  the  country  be  to  a frog  in  a 
well  ? 

Even  the  monkey  thinks  its  own  youDg  precious  as  gold. 

A guilty  breast  is  always  agitated. 

Will  the  barking  dog  catch  game  ? 

When  faults  are  scrutinized,  relationships  cease. 

It  is  easier  to  procure  eight  oxen,  than  to  find  one  that  has 
strayed. 

Infatuation  precedes  destruction. 

They  who  give,  have  all  things ; those  who  withhold,  have 
nothing. 

Truth  will  conquer,  but  falsehood  will  kill. 

Even  a small  rush  may  be  of  use  as  a tooth-pick. 

Taxes  and  gruel  will  continually  grow  thicker. 

The  effect  of  moral  action  will  terminate  on  the  actor. 

A demon  will  laugh  at  a destructive  thought. 

The  fellow  walks  on  foot,  but  his  words  are  in  a palankeen. 

The  deeds  of  a bad  man  will  burn  himself. 

He  is  most  eloquent,  when  none  is  found  to  dispute. 


174 


INDIA 


A swan  in  his  own,  and  a crow  in  a foreign  country. 

While  we  meditate  one  thing,  God  determines  another. 
Marry  the  daughter  on  knowing  the  mother. 

Friction  removes  not  the  scent  of  the  sandal  wood. 

Favors  silence  the  tongue. 

To  roast  a crab,  and  set  a fox  to  guard  it. 

A dog  is  courageous — in  his  own  kennel. 

Will  there  he  smoke  where  there  is  no  fire  ? 

To  destroy  an  enemy  make  friendship  with  him. 

His  rank  entitles  him  to  a palankeen,  hut  he  has  no  strength 
to  enter  it. 

First  at  the  feast,  and  last  at  the  battle  field. 

Insanity  has  left  me — bring  the  rice  pounder,  that  I may 
gird  myself. 

Did  ever  any  one  become  poor  by  giving  alms  ? 

Desert  not  old  friends  for  new  ones. 

Will  the  young  of  the  tiger  be  without  claws  ? 

Taciturnity  makes  no  blunders. 

Forbearance  is  stronger  than  the  ocean. 

Even  the  blind  may  shoot — if  a mountain  be  the  target.  ' 

A prudent  youth  is  better  than  an  old  fool. 

When  a dog  harks  against  a mountain,  which  is  injured, 
the  dog,  or  the  mountain  ? 

Stumbling  is  the  excuse  of  a lame  horse. 

Can  he  that  prospers  not  by  truth,  succeed  by  lies  ? 

There  is  no  flower  that  insects  will  not  visit. 

The  greatest  enmity  is  preferable  to  uncertain  friendship. 
The  dam  must  be  made  before  the  flood  comes. 

No  one  was  ever  ruined  by  speaking  the  truth. 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


175 


Under  the  general  head  of  ethical  literature  we  find 
several  fabulous  icorks , in  which  the  adventures  and 
discourses  of  animals  are  narrated  with  a view  to  the 
entertainment  and  instruction  of  the  people.  By  far 
the  most  popular  of  this  class  is  a volume  entitled  the 
Panchatantrakathi/,  being  a systematic  arrangement 
of  fables,  or  apologues,  arranged  after  the  style  of 
iEsop,  and  found  in  all  the  languages  of  the  country. 
The  plan  of  the  work  is  briefly  this  : in  the  city  of 
Patilaputra,  Sudarsana,  the  reigning  king,  had  three 
adult  sons,  who  seemed  to  vie  with  each  other  in 
coarseness  of  disposition  and  manners.  The  good  prince, 
in  great  affliction,  having  convened  his  council,  ad- 
dressed them  thus  : “ What  benefit  is  there  in  children 
who  are  neither  learned  nor  virtuous  ? or  of  what  use 
is  the  feeding  of  the  buffalo  that  never  gives  milk  ? 
An  unbecoming  son  is  a discomfort  to  the  family. 
Youth,  wealth,  authority,  and  ignorance,  are  each  of 
them  a source  of  ruin  ; and  what  will  be  the  wretch- 
edness of  him  in  whom  all  these  four  are  united  ? Is 
there  a man  to  be  found  who  will  be  able  to  regenerate 
my  sons,  who  are  born  to  have  merely  a name,  and 
wander  in  the  paths  of  error  ?” 

The  Brahmin  Somajanma  at  once  arose  and  offered 
his  services  to  the  king,  being  willing  to  undertake 
the  reformation  of  the  princes,  and  that  within  a few 
months.  The  offer  was  joyfully  accepted,  and  the 
wayward  youth  put  under  his  care.  The  Brahmin, 
with  great  patience  and  toil,  succeeded  at  length  in 
his  enterprise,  and  subdued  the  habits  of  his  royal 


176 


INDIA. 


pupils  ; and  all  through  the  medium  of  five  principal 
fables,  each  embracing  a greater  number  of  subordi- 
nate ones.  These  fables  compose  the  Pancha-tantra , 
or  five  points  of  industry.  They  are  five  romances, 
which  are  entitled  instructive,  although  their  morality 
is  not  very  sound  ; sometimes  conducing  to  what  is 
evil,  rather  than  teaching  the  means  of  avoiding  it. 
The  first  story  explains  how  dexterous  knaves  contrive 
to  sow  divisions  between  best  friends.  The  second 
teaches  the  advantage  of  true  friends,  and  how  they 
should  be  selected.  The  third  explains  how  one  is  to 
destroy  an  adversary  by  artifice,  when  he  cannot  do 
it  by  force.  The  fourth  shows  how  a man  loses  his 
property  by  misconduct,  and  the  fifth  exhibits  the  bad 
effects  of  thoughtlessness  and  precipitate  decision. 
These  narratives  are  so  constructed  as  that  one  fable, 
before  it  is  completed,  gives  rise  to  another,  and  that 
onward,  to  the  close.  It  is  impossible  to  determine  the 
age  of  these  fables,  no  authentic  document  of  their  era 
being  extant.  The  Hindoos  rank  them  among  their 
oldest  productions ; and  the  estimation  in  which  they 
are  held  throughout  the  country  is  a proof  of  their  an- 
tiquity. Their  resemblance  to  the  fables  of  HJsop  is 
very  close  and  striking,  but  whether  either  was  debtor 
to  the  other,  is  a question  involved  in  the  deepest  ob- 
scurity. Originally  composed  in  verse,  they  have  been 
translated  into  the  language  of  every  part  of  the  Pen- 
insula ; and  as  a text-book  in  the  daily  schools  of  the 
land,  exert  a great  influence  in  moulding  the  senti- 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


177 


ments,  and  thus  forming  the  character  of  Hindoo 
youth. 

From  a large  class  of  proverbs  with  which  these 
tales  abound,  the  following  are  appropriate  specimens  : 

Courage  is  tried  in  war,  integrity  in  tlie  payment  of  debt 
and  interest,  the  faithfulness  of  a wife  in  poverty,  and  friend- 
ship in  distress. 

He  who  in  your  presence  speaks  kindly,  but  in  your  absence 
seeks  to  injure,  must  be  rejected  like  a bowl  of  poison  covered 
with  milk. 

It  can  never  he  safe  to  unite  with  an  enemy  ; water,  though 
heated,  will  still  extinguish  fire. 

A wise  man  will  never  be  the  leader  of  a party  ; for  if  the 
affairs  of  the  party  be  successful,  all  will  be  equally  sharers, 
and  if  unsuccessful,  the  leader  will  alone  be  disgraced. 

He  who  removes  another  from  danger,  and  he  who  removes 
terror  from  the  mind,  are  the  greatest  of  friends. 

The  truly  great  are  calm  in  danger,  merciful  in  prosperity, 
eloquent  in  the  assembly,  courageous  in  war,  and  anxious  for 
fame. 

Little  things  should  not  be  despised  ; many  straws  united 
may  bind  an  elephant. 

He  who  seeks  the  company  of  the  wise,  shall  himself  be- 
come wise ; even  glass  inserted  in  gold  partakes  of  its  color. 

Truth,  contentment,  patience  and  mercy,  belong  to  great 
minds. 

Happiness  consists  in  the  absence  of  anxiety. 

A gift  bestowed  with  kind  expressions,  knowledge  without 
pride,  and  power  united  to  clemency,  are  rare  but  excellent. 

Every  one  looking  downwards  becomes  impressed  with  the 

8* 


178 


INDIA. 


idea  of  his  own  greatness  ; but  looking  upwards  feels  his  own 
littleness. 

A wise  hearer  is  not  affected  by  the  speaker,  but  by  the 
oration. 

The  deceitful  have  no  friends. 

It  is  the  essence  of  riches  to  corrupt  the  heart. 

It  was  through  these  and  like  media,  that  the  Hin- 
doo sages  conveyed  instruction  to  their  pupils  and 
readers  respecting  the  manifold  duties  of  life.  While 
their  thousands  of  pages  contain  much  that  is  true 
and  admirable,  the  value  of  their  teachings  is  often 
impaired,  and  in  some  cases  neutralized,  by  the  ab- 
sence of  a proper  motive  of  moral  conduct,  the  edifice 
being  based  on  selfishness.  This,  however,  is  certain, 
that  a habit  of  regarding  the  excellent  counsel  given 
respecting  truth,  integrity,  benevolence,  and  virtue, 
would  quite  change  the  face  of  India  society. 

I have  also  before  me  a small  volume  containing 
“ Extracts  from  the  writings  of  Tamul  Moralists,” 
compiled  and  published  by  a civilian  of  Madras, 
for  the  use  of  schools.  From  the  first,  entitled  Moo- 
thoory,  let  two  illustrations  be  drawn.  “ Consider 
not  the  smallness  of  a man’s  body  : the  sea  is  vast  and 
all  its  water  bad,  while  the  little  spring  is  pure  and 
tasteful.”  “ Imagine  not  that  the  brethren  of  your 
household  will  be,  of  course,  your  protectors  ; disease 
born  with  you  will  destroy  you,  while  the  medicine  in 
the  far  off  and  lofty  mountain  will  be  your  cure  and  life.” 

From  the  “ Nannzsi.”  “ An  affectionate  wife  and 


HINDOO  LITERATURE. 


179 


her  lord  should  perform  their  domestic  duties  without 
disagreement,  even  as  both  the  eyes  look  at  the  same 
object.”  “ The  worthy  will  rejoice  at  the  approach  of 
the  good,  and  grieve  at  the  sight  of  the  wicked  : on 
the  approach  of  the  south  wind,  the  sweet  mango-tree 
will  put  forth  its  tender  leaves,  but  it  will  be  troubled 
at  the  coming  of  the  whirlwind. 

From  the  “ Nulvurle .”  “ If  people  are  ready  to  be 

liberal,  like  a milch  cow  giving  out  fresh  milk,  all  the 
world  will  be  their  near  relatives.” 

From  the  “ NetMndrevZrluiktim.”  “ The  world  are 
led  according  to  the  taste  of  the  warrior  king. 
What  else  does  the  boat  that  is  borne  along  the  river 
current  ?”  “A  man  who,  without  malice,  takes  up 
and  dwells  upon  the  faults  of  others  only  to  excite 
laughter,  is  like  a man  who  would  kill  his  neighbor 
that  he  might  see  his  body  quiver  in  death.” 

Others  might  be  added  from  Naladiyar , &c.,  but 
these, must  suffice. 

The  Hindoo  mind  has  ever  been  distinguished  for 
brilliancy  rather  than  depth  and  strength  ; hence  they 
have  devoted  more  time  to  literature  than  science,  and 
very  much  to  poetry.  The  Abbe  Du  Bois  remarks  : 

“ There  is  no  country  on  earth  where  poetry  was  more 
in  vogue  than  it  was  in  former  times  in  India.  It 
seemed  impossible  for  them  to  write  but  in  verse. 
They  have  not  a single  ancient  book  that  is  written 
in  prose  ; not  even  the  books  on  medicine,  grammar, 
and  the  like  matter-of-fact  themes.  All  Hindoo  books 
not  in  verse  are  modern  ; at  least  it  is  so  in  regard  to 


180 


INDIA. 


the  Tamul,  Teloogoo,  and  Canarese,  and  so  far  as  I 
can  learn,  the  country  over.” 

Hindoo  poetry,  as  we  might  infer  from  the  intellec- 
tual and  moral  state  of  the  nation,  abounds  in  the  most 
extravagant  metaphors,  and  often  very  licentious 
images.  x\s  to  the  former  feature,  let  a few  instances 
suffice  : 

“ Your  glory  so  far  exceeds  the  splendor  of  the  sun, 
that  his  services  are  no  longer  necessary.”  “ Thou 
art  the  greatest  of  plunderers.  Other  thieves  purloin 
property  which  is  worthless  : thou  stealest  the  heart. 
They  plunder  in  the  night : thou  in  the  day.”  “ That 
person  has  discharged  his  arrow  with  such  force,  that 
thought  cannot  pursue  it.”  “ If  there  had  been  no 
spots  on  the  moon,  his  face  might,  perhaps,  have  borne 
a comparison  with  thine.” 

A leading  defect  in  their  poems  is,  that  the  descrip- 
tions are  too  long  and  too  minute.  When  describing 
a beautiful  woman,  they  are  never  contented  with 
drawing  her  likeness  at  a single  stroke,  as  a European 
would  do,  but  the  writer  must  particularize  the  beauty 
of  her  eyes,  forehead,  nose,  cheeks,  and  expatiate  upon 
the  color  of  her  skin  and  her  many  ornaments.  Not  a 
part  of  her  visible  frame  will  escape  his  scrutiny  and 
recital ; each  will  be  represented  in  finished  detail 
often  with  great  power  of  expression,  but  frequentlj 
much  to  the  weariness  of  the  reader. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

SCIENCE  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 

The  Hindoos  not  a barbarous  People — Arithmetic — Geometry — Algebra 
—Trigonometry  — Astronomy  — Geography — Chronology — Natural 
Philosophy — Chemistry — Mineralogy  — Botany — Geology — Doctors 
— Medical  Institutions  at  Calcutta — Polytechnic  Institutions — Law- 
yers— Present  state  of  Learning  in  the  land. 

Those  of  my  readers  who  have  been  accustomed  to 
regard  the  Hindoos  as  a semi-barbarous,  illiterate 
people  will  have  read,  with  some  surprise,  the  state- 
ments and  extracts  of  the  preceding  chapter.  Were 
more  needful  to  correct  this  erroneous  impression,  the 
necessity  would  be  fully  supplied  by  an  illustration  of 
the  past  and  present  character  of  science  in  that  land. 
The  limits  assigned  to  this  volume  require  brevity 
upon  these  topics,  though  it  is  intended  to  say  enough 
to  justify  an  assigning  to  the  natives  of  India  a high 
rank  in  the  world  of  letters. 

In  all  the  sciences  which  contribute  towards  extend- 
ing our  knowledge  of  nature  in  mathematics,  mecha- 
nics, and  astronomy,  arithmetic  is  of  elementary  use. 


182 


INDIA. 


In  whatever  country,  then,  we  find  that  such  attention 
has  been  paid  to  the  improvement  of  arithmetic  as  to 
lender  its  operations  easy  and  correct,  we  may  pre- 
sume that  the  sciences  depending  upon  it  have  attained 
a proportional  degree  of  perfection.  Such  improvement 
we  find  in  India.  While  among  the  Greeks  and 
Romans,  the  only  method  used  for  the  notation  of 
numbers  was  by  the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  which  ne- 
cessarily rendered  arithmetical  calculation  extremely 
tedious  and  onerous,  the  Hindoos  had,  from  time  im- 
memorial, employed  for  the  same  purpose,  the  ten 
ciphers  or  figures,  and  by  means  of  them  performed 
every  operation  in  arithmetic  with  the  greatest  facility 
and  expedition.  The  Arabians,  not  long  after  their 
settlement  in  Spain,  introduced  this  mode  of  notation 
into  Europe,  and  were  candid  enough  to  acknowledge 
that  they  had  derived  the  knowledge  of  it  from  the 
Hindoos.”  Arithmetic  is  one  of  the  few  studies  pur- 
sued in  all  the  schools  of  the  land.  It  is  almost 
wholly  mental , the  operations  being  performed  with 
extraordinary  facility  and  correctness.  It  is  interest- 
ing to  observe  a palanquin-maistry,  for  example, 
replying  to  your  question,  “ how  much  he  will  ask  to 
carry  you  to  a distant  place  ?”  so  many  bearers — so 
many  miles — so  much  for  extras,  &c. — he  thinks,  his 
lips  move — a figure  is  noted  upon  the  ground — again  he 
thinks,  and  with  less  time  than  I have  taken  to  write 
this  sentence,  he  tells  you  the  amount,  and  if  his  data 
be  correct,  you  will  find  nothing  wrong  in  the  result. 


SCIENCE  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


183 


The  Hindoos  are,  as  a nation,  very  correct  account- 
ants. 

About  the  year  1150,  of  the  Christian  era,  a learned 
sage  of  India  wrote  a work,  whioh,  in  . honor  of  his 
daughter,  he  called  Lilavati.  This  volume  contained 
treatises  on  arithmetic  and  geometry , and  begins  thus  : 
“ Having  bowed  to  the  Deity  (Ganesa),  whose  head  is 
like  an  elephant,  whose  feet  are  adored  by  gods, 
who,  when  called  to  mind,  restores  his  votaries  from 
embarrassment,  and  bestows  happiness  on  his  wor- 
shippers, I propound  this  easy  process  of  computation, 
delightful  by  its  elegance,  perspicuous  with  words,  con- 
cise, soft,  and  correct,  and  pleasing  to  the  learned.” 
The  rules  are  then  given  in  verse,  and  the  language, 
when  most  technical,  is  often  highly  figurative.  The 
geometrical  part  of  this  work  contains  the  celebrated 
proposition  that  the  square  of  the  hypothenuse  of  a 
right-angled  triangle  is  equal  to  the  squares  on  the 
sides  containing  the  triangle.  And  among  other 
propositions  the  one  which  discovers  the  area  of  a trian- 
gle when  the  three  sides  are  known.  Geometry  is  not 
at  present  pursued  in  the  common  schools,  and  is  but 
little  understood  among  the  most  erudite  of  the  land. 

The  author  of  Lilavati  wrote  *a  learned  system 
on  algebra,  which  had  great  repute,  and  was 
translated  into  various  eastern  languages,  and  finally 
in  the  year  1813,  into  the  English.  Another  Hindoo 
work  on  algebra,  had  for  its  author  Arya  Bhatta,  who 
lived  in  or  before  the  fifth  century  of  the  Christian 
era,  and  was  almost  as  ancient  as  the  Greek  alge- 


184 


INDIA. 


braist,  Diophantus,  though  the  Hindoo  treats  the 
science  with  a completeness  far  beyond  the  Grecian ; 
especially  such  points  as  the  resolution  of  equa- 
tions containing  several  unknown  quantities,  resolv- 
ing indeterminate  equations  of  at  least  the  first  de- 
gree, &c.  Upon  the  question,  “ was  the  science  of 
algebra  known  long  before,  and  by  what  degrees  of 
improvement  did  it  advance,  until  the  time  of  Arya 
Bhatta  ?”  there  is  a division  of  opinion,  the  late  Pro- 
fessor Playfair  contending  that  the  science  had  a com- 
mencement prior  to  both  Grecian  and  Hindoo,  while 
Delambre  and  others  give  to  these  sages  the  credit 
of  originating  it.  “ It  appears,”  says  a modern 
writer,  “ from  the  Hindoo  treatises  on  algebra,  that 
they  understood  well  the  arithmetic  of  surd  roots,  the 
resolution  of  equations  of  the  second  degree,  a general 
solution  of  indeterminate  problems  of  the  first  degree, 
and  a method  of  deriving  a multitude  of  answers  to 
problems  of  the  second  degree,  when  one  solution  was 
discovered  by  trial — which  was  as  near  an  approach  to 
a general  solution  as  was  made  until  the  time  of  La- 
grange. They  had  not  only  applied  algebra  both  to  as- 
tronomy and  geometry,  but  conversely  applied  geometry 
to  the  demonstration  of  algebraic  rules.”  The  ripe 
scholar  and  learned  orientalist,  Colebrooke  has  insti- 
tuted a comparison  between  the  Hindoo  and  Grecian 
algebraist,  and  finds  reason  to  conclude  that,  in  several 
most  important  respects,  the  latter  is  very  far  behind 
the  former. 

Trigonometry  was  also  studied  at  a very  early 


SCIENCE  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


185 


period,  as  appears  from  the  Surya  Siddhanta,  which 
contains  a very  rational  view  of  this  system. 

From  motives  of  curiosity,  usefulness,  and  religion, 
the  heavenly  bodies  have  secured  the  interested  and 
earnest  attention  of  the  thoughtful  in  all  ages  and 
nations.  The  most  ancient  and  universal  of  all 
sciences  is  astronomy.  The  history  of  its  rise  in  any 
country  can  never  be  absolutely  determined,  since  it 
goes  back  far  beyond  all  recorded  annals,  and  is  lost 
in  the  darkness  of  antiquity.  The  Brahmin  tells  you, 
with  all  gravity,  that  this  science  was  first  made 
known  to  the  people  of  his  land,  in  a volume  called 
the  Surya  Siddhanta , a divine  revelation,  received 
2,164,899  years  ago.  The  learned  Bailly  was  willing 
to  allow  that  Hindoo  astronomy  had  its  origin  more 
than  3000  years  before  Christ.  Little  was  known  of 
the  state  of  this  science  in  India  until  after  the  incur- 
sions by  the  Mohamedans.  But  during  the  last 
half  century,  much  attention  has  been  given  to  the 
subject  by  several  English  and  French  philosophers. 
It  is  impossible,  in  a work  of  this  kind,  to  present  a 
complete  view  of  a subject  so  large,  subtle,  and  scien- 
tific as  this.  With  a few  observations  I must  com- 
mend the  reader  to  the  History  of  British  India,  vol. 
iii.  Chapter  13,  Ward’s  Yiew,  &c.,  Part  iii.  sect. 
35,  and  the  appendix  of  “ Robertson’s  History,  Par. 
Y.  The  latter  writer  says : “It  may  be  consid- 
ered as  the  general  result  of  all  the  inquiries,  rea- 
sonings, and  calculations,  with  respect  to  Hindoo  as- 
tronomy, which  have  hitherto  been  made  public,  that 


186 


INDIA. 


the  motion  of  the  heavenly  bodies,  and  more  particu- 
larly their  position  at  the  four  epochs  of  21st  March, 
A.  D.  638,  10th  March,  A.  D.  1491,  A.  D.  1569,  and 
one  which  extends  back  far  before  the  Christian  era,  of 
which  tables  have  with  great  labor  been  obtained,  are 
ascertained  with  much  accuracy  ; and  that  many  of  the 
elements  of  their  calculations,  especially  for  remote 
ages,  are  verified  by  an  astonishing  coincidence  with 
the  tables  of  the  modern -astronomy  of  Europe,  when 
improved  by  the  latest  and  most  nice  deductions  from 
the  theory  of  gravitation.  The  Brahmins,  who  annually 
circulate  a kind  of  almanac  containing  astronomical 
predictions  of  the  more  remarkable  phenomena  in  the 
heavens — such  as  the  new  and  full  moons,  eclipses  of 
the  sun  and  moon — are  in  possession  of  certain  methods 
of  calculation,  which,  upon  examination,  are  found  to 
involve  in  them  a very  extensive  system  of  astronomical 
knowledge.  But  though  skilled  in  the  use  of  the 
rules  contained  in  his  treatise,  the  Brahmin  has  no  ac- 
quaintance with  the  mode  of  their  structure.  Seated 
on  the  ground  with  his  shells  before  him,  he  repeats 
the  enigmatical  verses  which  are  to  guide  his  calcula- 
tion, and  from  his  little  tablet  of  palm-leaves  takes  out 
the  numbers  that  are  to  be  employed  in  it,  obtaining 
the  result  with  great  certainty  and  expedition.”  These 
tables  have,  as  their  threefold  use,  to  compute  the 
places  of  the  sun  and  moon — to  calculate  the  localities  of 
the  planets — and  determine  the  positions  of  eclipses.  It 
may  be  known  to  the  reader  that,  according  to»thc 
Vedas,  the  eclipses  are  occasioned  by  attacks  upon  the 


SCIENCE  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


187 


sun  and  moon  by  the  monster  Rahoo,  because  of  a 
grudge  he  has  against  those  orbs.  It  will  not  do  for  the 
Hindoo  astronomer  to  declare  that  sentiment  false,  for 
it  is  found  in  a sacred  book.  He  therefore  avoids  the 
difficulty  by  saying,  that  “ certain'  things  might  have 
been  so  formerly,  and  may  be  so  still  ; but  for  astro- 
nomical purposes , astronomical  rules  must  be  used.” 
And  as  to  the  teaching  of  the  Shastras,  that  the  earth 
is  supported  upon  the  heads  of  monsters,  &c.,  these  are 
explained  to  mean  the  moon’s  nodes  and  latitude;  and 
thus  an  unity  is  preserved  between  the  deductions  of 
Science  and  the  instructions  of  Revelation. 

There  are  several  points  of  oneness  between  the  as- 
tronomical systems  of  the  eastern  and  western  conti- 
nents. Both  have  distinguished  that  portion  of  the 
heavens  in  which  the  motions  of  the  sun,  moon,  and 
planets  are  performed  from  the  rest  of  the  celestial 
sphere.  There  is  an  almost  perfect  identity  between 
them  in  the  number  and  names  of  the  zodiacal  signs. 
In  both  systems  time  is  divided  into  periods  of  seven 
days  (the  Hindoos  reckoning  our  Friday  as  their  first 
day),  and  the  ecliptic  is  divided  into  three  hundred  and 
sixty  degrees.  With  these  general  remarks  I must 
leave  the  interesting  subject  of  Hindoo  astronomy,  ex- 
cept it  be  to  say  that  astrology,  a false  branch  of  the 
noble  science,  is  studied  with  much  earnestness,  great 
use  being  made  of  it  for  purposes  of  superstition — the 
“star”  under  which  an  event  occurred,  having  much 
to- do  with  its  successful  or  adverse  progress  and  com- 
pletion. 


188 


INDIA. 


A few  sentences  must  suffice  upon  the  science  of 
Geography.  “ As  nothing  but  actual  observation 
could  make  the  Hindoos  acquainted  with  the  surface, 
contents,  and  dimensions  of  the  globe,  and  as  their  laws 
and  institutions  discourage  the  disposition  to  travel,  as 
well  as  the  translation  and  perusal  of  the  enquiries  of 
other  nations,  they  have  therefore,  in  this  department 
of  knowledge,  completely  failed.”  According  to  the 
Puranas,  “ The  earth  is  circular  and  flat,  like  the  flower 
of  the  water-lily,  in  which  the  petals  project  toward 
each  other.  Its  circumference  is  4,000,000,000  miles. 
In  the  centre  is  Mount  Soomeroo,  ascending  in  height 
600,000  miles  ; at  the  base  128,000  in  circumference ; 
and  256,000  wide  at  the  top.  On  this  mountain  are 
three  peaks  formed  of  gold,  pearls  and  precious  stones, 
where  Vishnu,  Siva,  Indru,  Ugnee,  Yumu,  and  other 
deities,  reside.  The  clouds  ascend  to  about  one-third 
of  its  height,  while  at  its  base  are  the  mountains 
Munduru,  Sundhu-madunu,  Vipoolu,  and  Sooparshwu ; 
on  each  of  which  grows  a tree  8,800  miles  high.  On 
each  side  of  the  mountain  are  several  countries,  divided 
by  ranges  of  mountains,  the  furthermost  of  which  is 
bounded  by  the  salt  sea.  Beyond  this  sea  are  six  other 
seas — the  sea  of  sugar-cane  juice,  of  spirituous  liquors, 
of  clarified  butter,  of  curds,  of  milk,  and  of  sweet  water, 
each  surrounding  a separate  continent ; beyond  all 
which,  is  a country  of  gold  as  large  as  the  rest  of  the 
earth  ; then  a circular  chain  of  mountains  ; and  then 
the  land  of  darkness,  or  hell.  Gunga,  proceeding  from 
the  foot  of  Vishnu,  fell  on  Soomeroo  ; from  thence  on 


SCIENCE  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


189 


Mount  Vishkhumbu  ; and  thence  on  the  head  of  Meha- 
Deou  ; and  thence  divided  into  four  large  streams  of 
great  sanctity.  If  any  one,  though  overwhelmed  with 
sin,  hear  the  name  of  Gunga  (Ganges),  or  desire,  be- 
hold, and  touch  this  goddess,  or  bathe  in  her  stream, 
taste  of  her  waters,  pronounce  her  name,  call  her  to 
recollection,  or  extol  her  merits,  ho  instantly  becomes 
holy,  and  ascends  to  tho  heavens  of  the  gods.  When 
the  sun,  in  its  annual  course,  continues  for  six  months 
in  the  northern  hemisphere,  the  gods  on  Mount  Soomeroo 
enjoy  its  rays,  of  which  they  are  deprived  when  it 
passes  to  the  southern  hemisphere  ; hence  the  doctrine 
that  one  year  of  mortals  is  equivalent  to  a night  and 
day  of  the  gods.  In  the  centre  of  the  globe  is  Patalu, 
■where  the  darkness  is  dispelled  by  the  splendor  which 
issues  from  the  pearly  heads  of  the  hydras.  There  the 
Usoorus  and  hydras  remain  ; there  the  daughters  of  the 
hydras,  of  exquisite  beauty,  sport  'with  each  other  ; 
and  there  reside  the  immortals,  enjoying  the  splendor 
of  their  own  forms,  brilliant  as  gold.’’  The  reader 
rightly  judges  that  this  description  has  little  to  com- 
mend it  beyond  the  ingenuity  of  its  imaginative  author. 

The  system  of  Hindoo  Chronology  has,  from  differ- 
ent causes,  excited  much  attention  in  the  literary 
world.  The  Mdha  Yoog , or  great  divine  day,  through 
which  mankind  are  now  passing,  consists  of  four 
human  ages,  the  last  and  worst  of  which  is  now  re- 
volving. These  ages,  of  unequal  and  continually  de- 
creasing length,  are  the 


190 


INDIA. 


Satya  Yoog,  which  lasted 
Teeta  Yoog 
Dwapar  Yoog 

Kal6  Yoog,  which  is  to  last 


1.728.000  years. 

1.296.000  ” 

864.000  ” 

432.000  ” 


Of  the  dark  era  in  which  we  live,  only  about  five 
thousand  years  have  already  passed.  Of  the  Satyayoog, 
the  golden  age  of  innocence,  there  remains  only  a dim 
and  pleasing  tradition,  the  great  flood  said  to  have 
occurred,  at  its  close,  swept  away  all  its  memorials. 
This  vast  sum  of  years  has  been  eagerly  seized  upon 
by  the  opponents  of  the  Bible  as  an  argument  against 
the  Mosaic  records.  But  the  power  of  this  deistical  ar- 
gument is  broken  by  the  fact,  that  but  thirty-six  kings 
are  alleged  to  have  reigned  during  the  second,  and 
forty-seven  during  the  third  period  ; and  as  seventeen, 
or  some  say  twenty  years,  is  the  average  reign  in  a 
long  series  of  kings,  the  Hindoo  dynasties  will  not 
pass  beyond  our  established  chronology.  The  com- 
mencement of  the  Kal6  Yoog  does  not  materially  differ 
from  the  Mosaic  date  of  the  creation. 

As  to  natural  philosophy,  chemistry,  mineralogy, 
botany,  geology,  and  like  departments  of  knowledge, 
there  is  no  evidence  on  record  of  their  having  been 
pursued  by  the  Hindoos  as  separate  sciences.  They, 
undoubtedly,  engaged  considerable  attention,  but  no 
treatises  upon  these  subjects  are  extant,  so  far  as  my 
information  goes. 

India  abounds  with  Doctors , or  to  speak  with  more 
truth,  with  empirics  and  quacks  since  we  have  the 


SCIENCE  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


191 


authority  of  Sir  Wm.  Jones,  for  saying,  that  “ physio 
appears  in  that  country  to  have  been,  from  time  im- 
memorial, as  we  see  it  practised  at  this  day  by 
Hindoos  and  Mohamedans,  a mere  empirical  history 
of  diseases  and  their  remedies.”  The  Shastras  having 
affirmed,  that,  in  the  human  body,  there  were  cer- 
tain defined  elements,  the  student  inferred  from 
thence  that  all  diseases  were  owing  to  the  diminution 
or  increase  of  these  essential  ingredients ; and  to 
reduce  these  elements  when  superabundant,  and  in- 
crease them  when  wanting,  he  had  recourse  to  a series 
of  medicines  obtained  from  the  bark,  wood,  roots, 
fruit,  or  flowers,  of  different  plants  or  trees,  or  from  a 
course  of  regimen  supposed  to  be  suited  to  the  circum- 
stances of  the  patient.  Fevers  they  starve  away  by 
keeping  the  patient  fasting  from  one  to  ten  and  even 
twenty  days.  They  never  bleed  a patient,  for  the  life 
is  in  the  blood.  Inoculation  for  the  small  pox  has 
long  been  customary  in  India,  the  virus  being  intro- 
duced just  above  the  wrist.  The  Hindoo  depends, 
however,  as  much  upon  charms,  and  prayers  for 
restoration  to  health,  as  upon  medicines.  The  phy- 
sician expects  to  receive  his  fee  before  prescrib- 
ing, which  varies,  according  to  the  ability  of  the 
patient,  from  a few  pence  to  hundreds  of  dollars. 
While  Hindoo  practitioners  decry  the  European  ‘ Fa- 
culty,’ they  allow  their  superiority  as  surgeons , and 
borrow  from  them  much  knowledge  respecting  the 
stopping  of  bleeding,  and  setting  of  limbs.  It  is  well 
for  the  poor  Hindoos  that  the  simplicity  of  their  diet 


192 


INDIA. 


gives  their  blood  uncommon  purity,  so  that  their 
wounds  recover  with  wonderful  expedition,  otherwise 
the  sufferings  they  would  receive  from  the  unskilful 
hand  of  the  Hindoo  surgeon  could  not  be  borne.  The 
happiness  of  any  community  being  so  greatly  depen- 
dent upon  the  character  of  its  medical  advisers,  every 
philanthropist  finds  it  a cause  of  gratitude  and  joy 
that  Medical  Colleges  have  been  established  under  the 
direction  of  the  English  government  at  Calcutta, 
Madras,  and  Bombay.  To  each  of  these  institutions 
are  attached  professors  of  high  attainment,  and  native 
prejudice  has  so  far  yielded,  that  there  is  no  lack  of 
pupils,  who  are  pursuing  their  studies  with  great  dili- 
gence and  zeal,  and  who  will  thus,  ere  long,  supply 
India  with  sound  medical  assistance.  I would  here 
remark  that  extensive  hospitals  have  been  established 
in  all  the  large  cities  and  towns  of  the  country,  which 
are  presided  over  by  an  European  physician,  with 
several  Eurasian  and  native  assistants.  Polytechnic 
institutions , in  which  lectures  on  the  sciences,  espe- 
cially chemistry,  with  modern  discoveries  in  steam, 
galvanism,  electricity,  &c.,  have  been  established,  and 
have  thus  far  been  attended  with  good  results.  When 
the  foreigner  tells  a Hindoo  that  news  can  be  trans- 
mitted a thousand  miles  a moment,  the  astonished 
listener  professes  to  believe  the  statement,  because 
“His  Honor,”  or  “the  Reverend”  says  so,  but  he 
would  much  like  to  see  it  done. 

If  truth  and  justice  do  not  triumph  in  India,  it  is 
not  for  want  of  Lawyers,  any  more  than  sickness  and 


SCIENCE  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


193 


suffering  are  caused  by  lack  of  doctors.  An  injured 
person  may,  at  any  moment,  obtain  the  services  of  one 
who  is,  by  profession,  learned  in  the  law,  and  who 
promises  to  secure  for  him  his  rights  of  property,  char- 
acter and  peace.  If  he  be  disappointed  it  is  no  more 
than  falls  to  the  lot  of  multitudes  in  this  land,  who 
trust  to  the  like  “ uncertainty.”  But  few  natives  are 
wealthy  enough  to  retain  an  English  barrister  ; most 
cases,  therefore,  are  entrusted  to  a class  of  persons 
called  Vakeels,  who  are  little  superior  in  knowledge 
and  principles  to  the  pettifoggers  of  an  English  or 
American  court. 

It  is  believed  that  no  thoughtful  reader  of  the  pre- 
ceding pages  will  deny  to  the  Hindoos  of  former  times 
the  praise  of  much  intellectual  cultivation.  “ The 
variety  of  subjects  upon  which  they  wrote,  prove  that 
almost  every  science  was  cultivated  among  them,  while 
the  contents  of  their  philosophical  and  law  books  indi- 
cate the  depth  of  wisdom  possessed  by  their  authors 
compared  with  the  writings  of  any  nation  flourishing 
at  that  time.  In  these  respects  the  deterioration  has 
been  great  and  general  throughout  the  country.  The 
decay  of  Hindoo  learning  may  be  dated  from  the  Mo- 
liamedan  conquest.  The  heaviest  blow  struck  was 
when  Madura,  eminent  as  the  seat  of  a University 
famed  the  country  over,  became  a prey  to  the  ravages 
of  the  bigoted  and  unsparing  conquerors.  Up  to  that 
time,  such  was  the  celebrity  of  that  city,  in  a literary 
and  religious  point  of  view,  that  multitudes  congregated 
here  annually  from  the  most  remote  parts  of  the  penin- 

9 


194 


INDIA. 


sula  for  instruction  in  science  ; and  here,  too,  Mr.  Bell 
obtained  an  acquaintance  with  that  mode  of  instruction 
which  he  carried  to  Europe,  and  immortalized  his 
name.  But  as  elevated  as  was  the  height,  so  deep 
has  been  the  fall  of  national  science  in  that  country. 
A few  Brahmins  at  Benares,  and  in  connection  with 
native  colleges,  read  parts  of  the  Shastras,  Smirtees, 
Vedas,  &c.,  and  venture  to  publish  editions  of  the  same, 
with  explanations.  But  no  original  works  of  note  have 
appeared  during  the  last  century.  In  the  library  of  a 
learned  Hindoo  may  be  found  one  of  the  grammars,  a 
dictionary,  five  or  six  volumes  of  poetry,  a few  law 
books,  a popular  work  on  astronomy,  portions  of  the 
Puranas,  a few  abridgments  on  the  common  religious 
rites  and  ceremonies.  The  Hindoo  youth  possesses 
a capacity  for  study  and  erudition  by  no  means  inferior 
to  the  young  of  other  lands,  but  so  soon  as  the  elements 
of  knowledge  are  acquired,  he  is  removed  from  school 
to  assist  in  supporting  his  family,  and  there  his  educa- 
tion closes.  Hence  the  want  of  intelligence  among 
the  mass  of  the  people,  the  necessity  being  urgent  for 
those  institutions  of  learning  with  which  the  benevolence 
of  Christendom  is  furnishing  that  land  ; — institutions 
which,  while  seeking  as  their  ultimate  and  important 
end  to  sanctify  the  heart,  arc  intended  to  enlighten  the 
national  mind  upon  the  works  and  ways  of  the  Divine 
Creator. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

ARTS  AND  OCCUPATIONS  OF  INDIA. 

Introductory  Remark  — Agriculture  — Modes  of  Cultivation  — Native 
Plow,  Harrow  and  Threshing  Machines — Cultivation  of  Rice,  Wheat, 
Barley,  Indigo,  Opium,  Sugar,  and  Tobacco— Fabrics — Native  Loom — 
Glass — Potter — Carpenter — Blacksmith  — Goldsmith — Shoemaker — 
Brassfounder — Barber — Confectioner — Florist — Shopman — Washer- 
man— Oilman — Milkman — Fisherman — Distiller — Palanquin  Bearer 
— Difficulty  of  introducing  Modem  Implements — Public  Buildings — 
Descriptions  of  Temples  at  Elephanta,  Seringham,  and  Madura — 
Droogs — Reflections  upon  beholding  these  Ruins. 

One  cannot  live  long  among  the  Hindoos  without 
observing  the  vast  discrepancy  between  the  results  of 
their  industrial  occupations  and  the  means  by  which 
they  are  accomplished.  In  many  departments  of  art 
India  knows  no  superior,  the  world  over,  and  yet  the 
machinery  employed  is  of  the  most  simple  and  primi- 
tive kind  ; such,  indeed,  as  no  European  artisan  would 
use  in  forming  the  rudest  structure  or  the  coarsest 
fabric.  By  w’ay  of  illustration,  the  reader’s  attention 
is  requested  to  a review  of  the  leading  occupations 
and  implements  of  the  country.  Agriculture  stands 


196 


INDIA. 


foremost  among  the  pursuits  of  native  Hindoos.  Two 
modes  of  cultivation  are  practiced,  wet  and  dry,  the 
former  being  devoted  principally  to  rice  and  indigo,  the 
land  requiring  to  be  watered  by  means  of  tanks  with 
their  strong,  high  embankments,  and  wells  from  twenty 
to  three  hundred  feet  deep,  while  upon  the  dry  lands 
are  the  sugar  cane,  barley,  wheat,  and  various  ofher 
grains,  fruits,  and  vegetables.  The  plough  used  by 
the  farmer  consists  of  two  rude  sticks,  or  one  if  suffi- 
ciently crooked,  with  an  iron  spike  at  the  end,  as  a 
share  which  the  ploughman  guides  with  one  hand, 
while  he  uses  the  other  in  directing  the  movements  of 
the  cattle  ; thus  making  a rut  or  scratch  in  the  field 
similar  to  the  movement  just  beneath  the  soil  of  a 
strong  finger.  Entering  a village  at  an  early  hour  of 
the  day,  you  will  see  the  farmer  going  to  his  toil, 
bearing  upon  his  shoulder  yoke  and  plough,  which  ho 
steadies  with  one  hand,  while  with  the  other  he  holds 
the  rope-reins  fastened  to  his  tiny  bullocks.  The  sow- 
ing is  as  clumsy  as  the  ploughing.  The  common 
drill-machine  has  three  pieces  of  sticks,  that  make 
scratches  about  an  inch  and  a half  in  depth,  and  the 
seeds  drop  into  the  scratches  through  three  hollow  bits 
of  bamboo,  that  are  immediately  behind  the  scratching 
sticks.  These  bamboos  are  united  to  one  rude  vessel 
at  the  top,  containing  the  seeds.  The  larger  seeds 
are  sown  by  means  of  a bamboo  fastened  to  the  drill 
by  a string,  and  having  a little  cup  upon  the  end.  A 
woman  attends  to  this  bamboo,  holding  directly  over 
any  one  of  the  three  scratches,  into  which  she  wishes 


ARTS  AND  OCCUPATIONS  OF  INDIA 


197 


the  seed  to  fall  with  one  hand,  and  dropping  the  seed 
into  the  cup  with  the  other.  The  covering-  plough 
follows,  which  is  a horizontal  stick  drawn  along  by 
two  bullocks,  and  by  being  pressed  against  the  ground, 
covers  the  seed  with  mould.  The  operation  of  sowing 
requires  the  attention  of  four  persons  and  the  labor  of 
four  bullocks.  The  business  of  the  harrow  is  performed 
by  an  instrument  like  a ladder,  on  which  the  husband- 
man stands,  while  rough  bushes  attached  to  it  assist 
smoothing  the  ground.  Instead  of  threshing  ma- 
chines, the  rice  is  beaten  out  of  the  husk,  the  pulse 
trodden  out  by  the  cattle,  and  the  small  grain  threshed 
with  a staff.  These  implements  are  the  same  that 
have  been  in  use  throughout  the  land,  from  time  im- 
memorial. Good  rice  lands  in  Bengal  yield  about 
forty  bushels  per  acre,  and  in  Mysore  about  forty-five  ; 
fifteen  bushels  of  produce  to  one  of  seed  being  consid- 
ered a fair  return.  In  the  rich  districts  among  the 
Ghauts,  there  are  often  two  crops  a year,  and  at  times 
three.  In  Guzerat,  Malwa,  and  Allahabad,  wheat  is 
sown,  which  yields  about  fifty  bushels  per  acre.  In  the 
hilly  districts  of  the  north  barley  is  the  bread-grain. 
India  is  famed  for  its  indigo , which  grows  wild  in  the 
neighborhood  of  the  Ganges  and  Jumna,  but  largely 
cultivated  throughout  Hindoostan  Proper.  Opium  is 
the  product  of  Bengal,  Bahar,  Allahabad,  and  Malwa, 
yielding  from  thirty  to  forty  pounds  to  an  acre  of  pop- 
pies. Sugar  is  very  abundant  in  the  Circars,  and 
with  due  encouragement  might  furnish  the  market 
of  all  Europe.  Tobacco , of  excellent  flavor,  grows 


198 


INDIA. 


throughout  the  midland  districts.  Did  my  limits 
allow  a complete  exhibition  of  the  mode  of  cultivating 
and  gathering  and  perfecting  these  products,  a like 
simplicity  would  appear  in  the  system  pursued,  and 
implements  used  as  before  named.  The  same  holds 
in  respect  to  the  productions  of  the  loom.  What 
fabrics  more  durable  and  beautiful,  too,  than  the  Arnee 
and  Decca  muslins,  Malabar  checks,  Bengal  chintz, 
with  the  silks  of  Burdwar,  carpets  of  Ellore,  flannels 
of  Patra,  the  calicoes  of  Coromandel,  the  embroideries 
of  Delhi,  and  shawls  of  the  North  and  North-west. 
When  examining  the  irregular  texture,  and  fineness  of 
thread  and  beauty  of  color,  I have  hardly  known  which 
was  predominant,  admiration  of  their  superior  excel- 
lence, or  wonder  at  the  places  and  modes  of  their  for- 
mation. The  weavers  reside  in  villages,  and  when  the 
article  they  make  is  in  demand,  a busy  scene  arrests 
the  attention  of  the  traveller.  Man,  woman,  and 
child  are  all  employed  in  one  way  or  another.  And 
all  in  the  open  air , except  silk  weaving,  which  is 
done  in  a cellar  or  low  basement  like  room.  The 
loom  is  rude  enough,  consisting  of  four  forked 
sticks  set  in  the  ground, — two  pieces  across  these 
sticks,  to  which  the  ends  of  the  web  are  attached,  for 
the  warp  is  not  rolled  on  a beam,  as  with  us.  The 
hiddles  are  but  sticks  and  strings,  which  are  fastened 
to  the  tree  which  shelters  the  weaver,  and  he  gets  a 
foot  into  each  of  the  two  loops  at  the  bottom,  and 
with  this  contrivance,  upon  which  an  European  could 
not  manufacture  the  coarsest  canvas,  the  Hindoo  per- 


ART3  AND  OCCUPATIONS  OF  INDIA. 


199 


fects  his  delicate  and  beautiful  texture.  Bleaching, 
coloring,  &c.,  are  all  done  in  the  same  simple  but  per- 
fect manner.  G/ass  is  mado  in  the  Mysore  district, 
but  soft  and  opaque,  being  principally  used  for  rings 
and  bracelets.  Pottery  is  rude  and  coarse,  though 
abundant,  a necessity  being  found  in  the  fact  that  al- 
most all  the  idols  and  cooking  utensils  are  made  from 
clay.  The  Hindoo  carpenter  knows  no  other  tools  than 
the  plane,  chisel,  wimble,  a hammer  and  hatchet.  The 
earth  his  shop-board,  his  foot  the  hold-fast  ; but  he  will 
“turn  out”  an  article  which  (in  all  respects  but  bril- 
liancy of  finish)  will  bear  a comparison  with  the  like 
productions  in  any  English  or  American  city.  The 
blacksmith  sets  up  his  forge  before  the  house  of  the 
person  who  calls  him,  and  with  the  clay  oven  at  hand, 
makes  a wall,  before  which  he  places  his  hearth,  and 
behind  which  are  two  leather  bellows,  kept  in  motion 
by  his  attendant  apprentice  ; his  anvil  a stone,  and 
his  apparatus  a pair  of  pincers,  hammer,  mallet,  and 
file.  Here  he  makes  to  order  bill-hooks,  spade,  hoe, 
weeding-knife,  ploughshare,  nails,  locks,  keys,  &c., 
as  may  be  needed.  The  goldsmith  also  carries  his 
shop  with  him.  His  furnace  is  an  earthen  pot — an 
iron  pipe  his  bellows — while  his  crucible  is  made  upon 
the  spot,  and  thrown  aside  when  no  longer  needed. 
Who  would  suppose,  when  admiring  the  “ Trichinopoly 
watch-chains,”  with  the  gold  and  silver  ornaments  of 
Yizagapatam,  that  the  utensils  employed  in  their 
manufacture  are  thus  simple  and  rude.  The  females 
of  India  being  excessively  fond  of  ornaments,  the 


200 


INDIA. 


workers  in  the  precious  metals  have  constant  and  pro- 
fitable employment.  The  shoemakers,  though  very 
important  members  of  community,  are  esteemed  among 
the  lowest  in  the  land.  In  social  position  they  are  be- 
low the  Soodras,  and  are  employed  as  executioners  of 
criminals,  and  for  carrying  away  dead  bodies.  A knife 
and  awl  are  their  tools.  The  leather  is  made  after  the 
shoes  are  ordered,  and  the  article  is  cheap  and  inferior. 
To  these  may  be  added  brass-founders , shell  ornament 
makers,  barbers,  who  may  be  seen  at  the  road-side, 
shaving  the  head,  shaving  or  plucking  the  beard.  Con- 
fectioners, with  the  hundred  different  sweet  meats, 
principally  composed  of  sugar,  molasses,  flowers  and 
spices,  of  which  all  natives,  adult  and  young,  are  ex- 
cessively fond.  Sellers  of forcers,  who  prepare  wreaths 
for  the  bride  and  groom,  with  the  other  appendages  to 
a marriage  procession.  Shop-keepers  of  various  grades. 
Washermen,  who  make  sad  havoc  of  the  clothes  put 
in  their  charge  by  beating  them  upon  a flat  board  or 
stone  till  cleansed,  and  then  pounding  with  a mallet 
till  made  smooth  and  fit  for  use.  Bankers,  or  money- 
changers, who  are  ever  ready  to  accommodate  you 
with  funds  at  10  to  40  per  cent,  interest.  Oilmen, 
who  furnish  an  excellent  article  pressed  from  the  co- 
coanut  shell  and  castor  bean,  either  of  which  emits  a 
clear,  strong,  and  steady  light,  with  no  unpleasant 
odor.  Milkmen,  who  will,  if  well  watched,  bring  to 
you  for  a reasonable  sum  this  needful  accompaniment 
of  an  evening’s  meal,  and  of  a character  superior  to  any 
just  anticipations  upon  seeing  the  poor  condition  in 


ART3  AND  OCCUPATIONS  OF  INDIA. 


201 


which  the  animals  are  kept  by  their  owners.  Fisher- 
men, a hardy,  industrious,  but  illiterate  class  of  per- 
sons, who  find  a ready  market  for  an  article  of  food 
which  but  few,  even  among  the  most  religious  Hin- 
doos, need  reject.  Distillers,  who  make  arrack  from 
rice,  molasses,  water,  and  spices  ; and  a species  of  rum, 
made  from  the  bark  of  several  trees  steeped  in  water  ; 
and,  finally,  Palanquin-bearers , a laborious  and  useful 
class,  referred  to  in  a preceding  chapter. 

Such  are  some  of  the  trades  and  occupations  of 
native  Hindoos,  with  the  implements  of  their  in- 
dustry. “But  why,”  asks  my  reader,  “do  not  for- 
eigners introduce  the  machines  and  implements  of 
the  western  continent  ?”  To  a limited  extent  this 
has  been  done  ; but  it  is  a precept  of  that  land  most 
faithfully  heeded,  that  “ ancient  custom  is  irreversible 
law.”  The  English  officer  who  had  in  charge  the  dis- 
trict of  Madura  during  my  residence  in  that  city,  im- 
ported from  England  several  ploughs  and  hoes,  with  an 
admirable  loom  for  weaving  cotton.  “ To  please  His 
Honor,”  the  complaisant  farmer  used  the  plough  for  a 
little  time,  but  soon  found  a plausible  pretext  for  re- 
turning to  the  time-honored  scratcher  ; while  the  other 
implements  met  a no  more  fortunate  reception.  We 
made  every  effort  to  induce  the  woman  who  swept  our 
rooms  to  use  the  brooms  we  carried  from  this  country, 
instead  of  the  bunch  of  grass  tied  in  a brush-like  form, 
which  was  to  the  highest  extent  wearisome  : but,  no, 
custom  prevented.  The  same  obstacle  opposes  all  ad- 
vances in  cotton  cultivation,  and  like  improvements. 
9* 


202 


INDIA. 


“ Our  fathers  did  so,  and  so  will  we,”  say  the  people 
all  the  country  over.  The  native  Hindoos  excel  as 
copyists.  Their  painters  will  give  the  most  faithful 
representations  of  any  object  that  is  set  before  them  ; 
their  craftsmen  will  build  a carriage  or  construct  a 
piece  of  furniture  the  fac  similie  of  any  given  model ; 
and  their  tailors  never  fail  in  making  a garment 
precisely  according  to  the  pattern.  They  excel  in 
this  species  of  accurate  imitation  rather  than  in  origin- 
ating any  new  device  or  unattempted  contrivance. 
In  this  connection  may  be  introduced  a few  remarks 
respecting  the  public  buildings  of  India.  These  are  of 
two  kinds,  those  consecrated  to  the  offices  of  religion, 
and  fortresses  built  for  the  security  of  the  country. 
To  the  former  are  given  the  general  names  of  tem- 
ples and  pagodas , and  indicate  by  their  vast  dimen- 
sions and  high  degrees  of  finish,  a state  of  public 
sentiment,  as  well  as  skill  and  energy,  which  belonged 
to  a race  scarcely  within  the  range  of  known  his- 
tory. Let  three  suffice  by  way  of  illustration.  The 
pagoda,  in  the  island  of  Elephanta,  near  Bombay,  has 
been  hewn  by  the  hands  of  man  out  of  a solid  rock, 
about  half  way  up  a high  mountain,  and  formed  into  a 
spacious  area  nearly  one  hundred  and  twenty  feet 
square.  In  order  to  support  the  roof  and  the  weight 
of  the  mountain  that  lies  above  it,  a number  of  massy 
pillars  have  been  cut  out  of  the  same  rock,  at  such 
regular  distances  as  on  the  first  entrance  presents  an 
appearance  of  great  beauty  and  strength.  Much  of  the 
inside  is  oovered  with  human  figures  in  high  relief,  of 


ARTS  AND  OCCUPATIONS  OF  INDIA. 


203 


gigantio  size  as  well  as  singular  forms,  and  distin- 
guished by  a variety  of  symbols  representing,  it  is  pro- 
bable, the  attributes  of  the  deities  whom  they  worship- 
ped, or  the  actions  of  the  heroes  whom  they  admired. 
In  the  Isle  of  Salsette,  still  nearer  Bombay,  are  exca- 
vations in  a similar  style,  hardly  inferior  in  magnifi- 
cence, and  destined  for  the  same  religious  purposes. 
The  first  pagoda  I visited  was  that  on  the  island  of 
Seringham,  near  the  city  of  Trichinopoly,  and  my 
memory  still  retains  a vivid  impression  of  its  vastness 
and  magnificence.  It  is  composed  of  seven  square  en- 
closures, one  within  another,  the  walls  of  which  are 
twenty-five  feet  high  and  four  thick.  These  enclosures 
are  three  hundred  and  fifty  feet  distant  from  one  ano- 
ther, and  each  has  four  large  gates  with  a high  tower, 
which  are  placed  one  in  the  middle  of  each  side  of  the 
enclosure,  and  opposite  to  the  four  cardinal  points. 
The  outward  wall  is  nearly  four  miles  in  circumfer- 
ence, and  its  gateway  to  the  south  is  ornamented  with 
pillars,  several  of  which  are  single  stones  thirty-three 
feet  long,  and  nearly  five  feet  in  diameter ; and  those 
which  form  the  roof  are  still  larger.  In  the  inmost  en- 
closure is  the  chapel,  which  vies  with  Benares  and 
Ramisseran  for  sanctity  and  efficacious  power  to  bless 
the  unnumbered  pilgrims  who  flock  to  it  from  the  re- 
motest distances  to  secure  absolution  and  heaven.  Few 
places  in  India  have  obtained  greater  or  more  permanent 
celebrity  than  the  city  of  Madura.  In  this  connection 
I name  the  single  feature  of  a large  edifice  (called  a 
choultry)  built  by  Trimal  Naig,  an  ancient  king  of 


204 


INDIA. 


great  wealth  and  power.  This  building  is  in  the  form 
of  a parallelogram,  three  hundred  and  twelve  feet 
in  length,  by  one  hundred  and  twenty-five  in  breadth. 
It  consists  of  one  vast  hall,  the  ceiling  of  which  is 
supported  by  six  rows  of  columns  twenty-five  feet 
high,  most  of  which  are  formed  of  single  stones,  and 
the  whole  composed  of  hard,  grey  granite.  On  the 
second  pillar  to  the  right  of  the  spectator  as  he  enters, 
is  the  figure  of  the  founder  of  this  gorgeous  struc- 
ture, in  a group  with  six  of  his  wives,  one  of 
whom  has  a large  gash  below  the  hip  on  the  left 
side,  the  result  of  a blow  by  her  royal  lord,  because 
she  told  him  tauntingly  that  the  edifice  was  far 
inferior  in  splendor  to  her  father’s  stables.  Beyond 
this  column  are  other  statues,  commemorative  of  re- 
markable events  in  the  respective  reigns  of  his  ances- 
tors. The  same  prince  erected  a palace  but  a short 
distance  from  this  choultry,  which  the  present  ruins 
show  to  have  been  a noble  structure.  Rising  from  the 
immense  plains  of  India  are  eminences  and  rocks,-  of 
which  the  natives  early  took  possession,  and  fortifying 
them  with  works  of  various  kinds,  rendered  them  al- 
most impregnable  stations.  Of  these  fortresses,  or 
droog-s,  several  still  remain  near  the  city  of  Benares 
and  in  the  Deccan,  which  must  have  been  constructed 
in  very  remote  times,  and  repelled  almost  any  amount 
of  force  which  could  have  been  brought  to  bear  against 
them.  India  abounds  with  the  magnificent  remains  of 
temples,  palaces,  pagodas,  forts,  mausoleums,  and 
walls,  which  indicate  the  past  existence  in  that  land  of  a 


ARTS  AND  OCCUPATIONS  OF  INDIA. 


205 


wealth,  power,  ingenuity,  religious  zeal,  and  enterprise, 
which  forms  a sad  contrast  with  what  now  appears  in 
the  sentiments  and  feelings  of  the  nation.  The  person 
who  would  have  his  heart  filled  with  strong,  delighted, 
sorrowing,  and  wondrous  emotions,  let  him  go  to 
Delhi,  to  Benares,  to  Mysore,  to  Madura,  and  he  will 
return  satisfied  so  far  as  feeling  is  concerned,  but  still 
perplexed  with  questions  to  which  no  replies  have  been 
returned,  and  which  will  remain  forever  veiled  in  the 
darkness  of  remote  antiquity. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

POPULAR  AMUSEMENTS  OF  INDIA. 

Hindoos  not  fond  of  work— Card-playing — Backgammon — Dominoes 
— Checkers  — Chess  — Quoits — Marbles — Cock-fighting — Dancing — 
Story-telling;  Tale  of  the  three  deaf  men — Theatrical  Exhibitions 
— Hunting— Gymnastics  and  Jugglery,  illustrated  by  descriptions  of 
wondrous  feats — Remarks. 

“ Labor  ipse  voluptas ,”  conveys  a sentiment  with 
which  the  Hindoo  has  no  practical  sympathy.  When 
he  works,  it  is  from  necessity,  not  choice — to  satisfy  a 
demand,  not  to  gratify  an  inclination.  In  place  of  the 
motto,  “ labor  is  itself  pleasant,”  he  would  substitute 
this,  “ work  when  you  must,  be  idle  when  you  can , 
eat,  drink,  and  be  merry.”  My  reader  may  suggest  that 
this  is  human  nature  the  world  over.  Grant  it,  but 
in  regions  within  the  tropics  the  instinct  is  less  easy 
of  resistance  than  in  our  more  vigorous  clime,  while 
with  greater  simplicity  of  dress  and  diet  the  necessity 
is  not  so  urgent  for  laborious  exertion  of  mind  and  body. 
The  Brahmins,  not  in  government  offices,  do  little  after 
completing  their  daily  routine  of  ceremonies  than  re- 


POPULAR  AMUSEMENTS  OF  INDIA. 


207 


cline,  talk,  and  while  away  the  weary  hours  in  modes 
more  pleasing  than  profitable.  Upon  the  afternoon 
they  may  be  seen  upon  the  front  verandahs  of  their 
dwellings,  the  picture  of  contentment,  self-satisfaction, 
and  indolence.  If  one  member  of  a Hindoo  family  se- 
cure a situation  which  yields  a salary  sufficient  to  main- 
tain the  household,  even  the  husband,  son,  or  brother, 
deem  it  in  no  way  unbecoming  to  look  to  that  source 
for  their  daily  subsistence.  It  is  in  reference  to  cus- 
toms such  as  prevail  throughout  India  that  the  saying 
of  the  wise  man  holds  true  : — “ If  riches  increase,  they 
increase  who  eat  them.”  To  these  remarks  there  are 
honorable  exceptions — but  such  is  the  habit  of  the 
nation. 

To  be  wholly  unemployed  is  wretchedness,  therefore 
the  Hindoo  relieves  this  ennui  by  attendance  upon 
religious  festivals,  the  number  of  which  is  great 
and  the  parade  attractive  and  imposing — presence  at 
marriage  ceremonies,  with  their  showy  and  brilliant 
accompaniments — and  participating  in  or  witnessing 
amusements,  shows,  sports,  which  are  by  turns 
mirthful,  tragic,  and  deeply  exciting.  Many  of  these 
find  their  counterparts  in  our  own  country,  while 
others  are  adapted  to  Eastern  taste  and  habits. 
Hours  are  wasted  at  the  card-table , with  the  com- 
mon yet  sad  results  of  property,  character,  and  peace, 
sacrificed  at  the  shrine  of  this  ensnaring  game.  Back- 
gammon is  attractive  to  many,  together  with  the  less 
intellectual  dominoes  and  checkers.  Chess  is  reserved 


208 


INDIA. 


for  the  few  who  are  willing  and  disposed  to  think  long 
and  intently.  By  the  highway  may  be  seen  youth  and 
adults  playing  at  quoits  and  marbles , with  much  skill 
and  earnestness.  Cock-fighting  is  confined  to  the  Mo- 
hamedans  or  lower  class  of  Hindoos,  and  is/ pursued 
with  all  the  refinements  of  cruelty  common  to  that 
heartless  sport. 

Dancing  is  restricted  to  the  females,  and  of 
these  to  a class  among  whom  virtue  and  mo- 
desty have  no  abode.  The  movements  of  the  Hin- 
doo “ dancing  girl,”  whether  before  the  idol  or  in  the 
presence  of  nobility  and  wealth,  are  wholly  free  from 
those  vehement  pirouettes,  extravagant  contortions 
of  limb,  dizzy  gyrations,  and  pedal  dexterity,  which 
made  the  name  of  Fanny  Ellsler,  Europe  and  America 
famed.  The  Nautch  girl  advances  gracefully  before 
her  audience,  her  arms  moving  in  unison  with  her  tiny 
naked  feet,  with  little  variety  but  much  grace,  and  with 
an  expressiveness  of  motion  both  understood  by,  and 
gratifying  to  those  who  sympathize  with  the  actress  in 
moral  sentiments,  though  suggestive  of  sorrow  and 
disgust  to  one  of  high  and  pure  emotions.  The  orna- 
ments worn  by  these  dancers  are  often  of  great  ele- 
gance and  high  value.  The  throat  is  encircled  with 
several  necklaces,  sornelimes  composed  of  pearls,  and 
often  of  gold  richly  chased.  A large  jewel  hangs  from 
the  right  nostril,  suspended  by  a plain  gold  ring.  On 
the  forehead,  between  the  eye-brows,  an  ornament  is 
worn,  which  has,  no  doubt,  given  rise  to  the  sevigne, 
gracing  of  late  the  European  belle.  Their  symmetry 


POPULAR  AMUSEMENTS  OF  INDIA. 


209 


of  form,  modesty  and  elegance  of  attire,  gracefulness 
of  attitude  and  motion,  contrast  most  sadly  with  their 
habitual  habits  and  feelings.  The  most  abandoned  of 
their  sex,  captives  to  licentiousness,  you  can  in  no 
way  more  directly  insult  a Hindoo  female  than  by 
calling  her  a dancing-  girl.  On  this  account  India 
Nautches  are  decreasing  in  popularity,  and  will  do  so 
in  proportion  to  the  progress  of  high-toned  morality 
among  the  European  residents.  The  time  has  gone 
by  when  a civilian  or  military  officer  would  take 
his  wife  and  daughter  to  these  entertainments,  and 
yet  the  dances,  generally  speaking,  are  much  more 
decent,  than  those  encouraged  in  the  theatres  of 
Europe,  which  young  and  innocent  girls  are  permitted 
to  behold  and  applaud  without  a blush. 

Story-telling  and  hearing  consume  a great  deal  of 
a Hindoo’s  time.  Some  of  these  tales  are  accounts  of 
marvels  performed  by  deities  and  heroes,  while  others 
are  entirely  fictitious.  By  way  of  illustrating  the  lat- 
ter class,  I will  insert  a “ Tale  of  Four  Deaf  Men 

“ A deaf  shepherd  was  one  day  tending  his  flock, 
near  his  own  village  ; and  though  it  was  almost  noon, 
his  wife  had  not  yet  brought  him  his  breakfast.  He 
was  afraid  to  leave  his  sheep  to  go  in  quest  of  it,  lest 
some  accident  should  befall  them.  But  his  hunger 
could  not  be  appeased  ; and  upon  looking  around,  he 
spied  a Talaiyari,  or  village  hind,  who  had  come  to 
cut  grass  for  his  cow,  near  a neighboring  spring.  He 
went  to  call  him,  though  very  reluctantly,  because  he 
knew  that  though  those  servants  of  the  village  are  set 


210 


INDIA. 


as  watchmen  to  prevent  theft,  yet  they  are  great 
thieves  themselves.  He  hailed  him,  however,  and 
requested  him  just  to  give  an  eye  to  his  flock  during 
the  short  time  he  should  be  absent,  and  that  he  would 
not  forget  him  when  he  returned  from  breakfast.  But 
the  man  was  as  deaf  as  himself ; and  mistaking  his 
intentions,  he  angrily  asked  the  shepherd,  “ What 
right  have  you  to  take  this  grass  which  I have  had  the 
trouble  to  cut  ? Is  my  cow  to  starve  that  your  sheep 
may  fatten  ? Go  about  thy  business  and  let  me  alone.” 
The  deaf  shepherd  observed  the  repulsive  gesture  of 
the  hind,  which  he  took  for  a signal  of  acquiescence, 
and  therefore  briskly  ran  towards  the  village,  fully 
determined  to  give  his  wife  a good  lesson  for  her 
neglect.  But,  when  he  approached  his  house,  he  saw 
her  before  the  door,  rolling  in  the  pains  of  a violent 
colic.  Her  sad  condition,  and  the  necessity  he  was 
under  to  provide  breakfast  for  himself,  detained  the 
shepherd  longer  than  he  wished ; while  the  small 
confidence  he  had  in  the  person  with  whom  he  left  the 
sheep,  accelerated  his  return.  Overjoyed  to  see  his 
flock  peaceably  feeding  near  the  spot  where  he  left 
them,  he  counted  them  over  ; and  finding  there  was 
not  a single  sheep  missing,  ‘ He  is  an  honest  fellow,’ 
quoth  he,  ‘ this  Talaiyari,  the  very  jewel  of  his  race  ! 
I promised  him  a reward,  and  he  shall  have  it.’  Thero 
was  a lame  beast  in  the  flock,  well  enough  in  other 
respects,  which  he  hoisted  on  his  shoulders  and  car- 
ried to  the  place  where  the  hind  was,  and  courteously 
offered  him  the  mutton,  saying,  ‘ You  have  taken 


POPULAR  AMUSEMENTS  OF  INDIA. 


211 


great  care  of  my  sheep  during  my  absence.  Take 
this  one  for  your  trouble,’  ‘ I,’  says  the  deaf  hind, 

‘ I break  your  sheep's  leg  ! I’ll  be  hanged  if  ever  I 
went  near  your  sheep  since  you  have  been  gone,  or 
stirred  from  the  place  where  I now  am.’  ‘ Yes,’ 
says  the  shepherd,  ‘ it  is  good  and  fat  mutton , and 
will  be  a treat  to  you,  your  family,  and  friends.’ 

1 Have  I not  told  thee,’  replied  the  Talaiyari  in  rage, 

1 that  I never  rvent  near  thy  sheep  ; and  yet  thou 
wilt  accuse  me  of  breaking  that  one’s  leg.  Get  about 
thy  business,  or  1 will  give  thee  a beating.’  And  by  his 
gestures  he  seemed  determined  to  put  his  threat  into 
execution.  The  astonished  shepherd  got  into  a passion 
also,  and  assumed  a posture  of  defiance.  They  were 
just  proceeding  to  blows,  when  a man  on  horseback 
came  up.  To  him  they  both  appealed  to  decide  the 
dispute  between  them  ; and  the  shepherd  laying  hold 
of  the  bridle,  requested  the  horseman  to  alight  just 
for  a moment,  and  to  settle  the  difference  between 
him  and  the  beggarly  Talaiyari.  * I have  offered 
him  a present  of  a sheep,’  said  he,  ‘ because  I 
thought  that  he  had  done  me  a service  ; and,  in  re- 
quital, he  will  knock  me  down.’  The  villager  was 
at  the  same  time  preferring  his  complaint,  that  the 
shepherd  would  accuse  him  of  breaking  the  leg  of  his 
sheep,  when  he  had  never  been  near  his  flock.  The 
horseman,  to  whom  they  had  both  appealed,  happened 
to  be  as  deaf  as  they  ; and  did  not  understand  a word 
that  either  of  them  said.  But  seeing  them  both  ad- 
dressing him  with  vehemence,  he  made  a sign  to 


212 


INDIA. 


them  to  listen  to  him,  and  then  frankly  told  them  that 
he  confessed  that  the  horse  he  rode  was  not  his  own. 
‘ It  was  a stray  animal  that  I found  on  the  road,’  quoth 
he,  ‘ and  being  at  a loss,  I mounted  him  for  the  sake 
of  expedition.  If  he  be  yours  take  him.  If  not,  pray 
let  me  proceed,  as  I am  really  in  great  haste.’  The 
shepherd  and  the  hind,  each  imagining  that  the  horse- 
man had  decided  in  favor  of  the  other,  became  more 
violent  than  ever  ; both  accusing  the  umpire  of  par- 
tiality. At  this  crisis  there  happened  to  come  an  aged 
Brahmin.  Instantly  they  all  crowded  around  him — 
shepherd,  Talaiyari,  and  horseman — each  claiming  his 
interposition,  and  a decision  in  his  favor.  All  spoke 
together,  every  one  telling  his  own  tale.  But  the 
Brahmin  had  lost  his  hearing  also.  ‘ I know,’  said 
he,  ‘ that  you  want  to  compel  me  to  return  to  her 
(meaning  his  wife),  but  do  you  know  her  character  ? 
In  all  the  legions  of  evil  ones  I defy  you  to  find  one 
that  is  her  equal  in  wickedness.  Since  the  time 
I first  bought  her,  she  has  made  me  commit  more  sin 
than  it  will  be  in  my  power  to  expiate  in  thirty  gene- 
rations. I am  going  on  a pilgrimage  to  Kasi  (Benares), 
where  I will  wash  myself  from  the  innumerable 
crimes  I have  been  led  into,  from  the  hour  on  which 
I had  the  misfortune  to  make  her  my  wife.  Then  will 
I wear  out  the  rest  of  my  days  on  alms  in  a strango 
land.’  While  they  were  all  venting  their  exclamations 
ivithout  hearing  a ivord,  the  horse-stealer  perceived 
some  people  advancing  toward  them  with  great  speed. 


POPULAR  AMUSEMENTS  OF  INDIA. 


213 


Fearing  that  they  might  be  the  owners  of  the  beast, 
he  dismounted  and  took  to  his  heels.  The  shepherd 
seeing  it  was  growing  late,  went  to  look  after  his  flock, 
pouring  out  imprecations,  as  he  trudged  along,  against 
all  arbitrators,  and  bitterly  complaining  that  all  justice 
had  departed  from  the  earth.  Then  he  bethought 
himself  of  a snake  that  had  crossed  his  path  in  the 
morning,  as  he  came  out  of  the  sheep-fold,  and  which 
might  account  for  the  troubles  he  had  that  day  ex- 
perienced. The  Talaiyari  returned  to  his  load  of  grass ; 
and  finding  the  lame  sheep  there,  he  took  it  on  his 
shoulders,  to  punish  the  shepherd  for  the  vexation  he 
had  given  him,  and  the  aged  Brahmin  pursued  his  way  to 
a choultry  not  far  off.  A quiet  night  and  sound  sleep 
soothed  his  anger  in  part,  and  early  in  the  morning, 
several  Brahmins,  his  neighbors  and  relations,  who  had 
traced  him  out,  persuaded  him  to  return  home,  pro- 
mising to  engage  his  wife  to  be  more  obedient  and  less 
quarrelsome  in  future.” 

With  stories  like  these,  the  memory  of  the  Hindoo 
is  full,  and  it  requires  but  a brief  residence  in  the 
country  to  observe  the  use  made  of  them,  in  relieving 
the  tedium  of  long  journeys  by  night,  and  unem- 
ployed hours  on  the  verandahs  of  their  dwellings. 

Theatrical  exhibitions  are  common  throughout  the 
country,  especially  during  the  four  months  when  the 
deeds  of  Krishna,  Rama,  Siva,  and  Doorga  are  to  be 
recalled  and  celebrated.  These  entertainments  occur 
at  night,  and  are  often  continued  until  near  morning, 


214 


INDIA, 


the  spectators  being  affected  with  grief  and  joy  to  as 
great  a degree  as  those  who  behold  the  tragedies  and 
comedies  of  the  European  stage.  Many  of  these 
scenes  having  reference  to  alleged  and  recorded  events 
in  the  life  of  the  lascivious  Krishna,  produce  a very 
deleterious  effect  upon  the  morals  of  the  spectators — 
especially  the  young,  to  whom  the  drama  proves  a 
curse  and  ruin. 

Tiger  and  elephant  hunting  once  engaged  a large 
share  of  public  attention.  After  much  and  long  pre- 
paration, the  nabob  would  sally  forth  with  the  retinue 
of  a thousand  strong,  to  attack  the  noble  tenants  of 
the  jungle  and  forest.  He  was  not  unfrequently  at- 
tended by  the  European  resident,  from  whom  a voyage 
across  the  sea  had  not  taken  a love  for  the  chase. 
But  those  scenes  belong  to  the  past,  hunting  being 
confined  to  the  northern  districts  and  conducted  upon 
a limited  scale  and  with  diminished  zeal. 

The  Hindoos  delight  in  the  marvellous , as  appears 
from  their  fondness  for  such  tales  as  that  before  named, 
and  others  akin  to  the  “ Arabian  Nights.”  On  this 
account  it  is  not  surprising  that  the  country  should 
have  become  famed  for  its  gymnastics  and  jugglery. 
Both  are  carried  to  a perfection  that  defies  all  com- 
petition. The  eye  must  witness  their  feats  of  agility 
and  cunning  ere  the  mind  can  really  believe  them 
possible.  I am  aware  that  this  is  a trite  topic,  and 
yet  some  of  my  readers  may  not  have  in  their 
memories  the  precise  methods  in  which  the  Hindoos 
show  their  skill,  and  for  their  benefit  I will  name  a 


POPULAR  AMUSEMENTS  OF  INDIA. 


215 


few  instances,  some  of  which  have  come  under  my 
own  observation,  and  all  are  authentic.  The  jugglers 
and  gymnastic  performers  journey  in  companies,  carry- 
ing their  poles,  ropes,  baskets,  jars,  &c.,  with  them, 
and  perforin  wherever  they  can  secure  profitable  spec- 
tators. You  are  sitting  on  the  verandah,  and  a com- 
pany enters  the  yard.  If  you  do  not  bid  them  away 
they  will  begin  something  in  this  manner  : A woman 
takes  a bamboo  twenty  feet  high,  places  it  upright  on 
a flat  stone,  and  then,  without  any  support,  climbs  to 
the  top  with  surprising  activity.  Having  done  this, 
she  stands  upon  one  leg  on  the  point  of  the  bamboo, 
balancing  it  all  the  while.  Around  her  waist  she  has 
a girdle  to  which  is  fastened  an  iron  socket ; — spring- 
ing from  her  upright  position  on  the  bamboo,  she 
throws  herself  horizontally  forward  with  such  exact 
precision,  that  the  top  of  the  pole  enters  the  socket  of 
the  iron  zone,  and  in  this  position  she  spins  herself 
with  a velocity  that  makes  you  giddy  to  look  at ; the 
bamboo  appearing  all  the  while  as  if  it  were  supported 
by  some  supernatural  agency.  She  turns  her  legs 
backward  till  the  heels  touch  her  shoulders,  and 
grasping  the  ankles  in  her  hands,  continues  her  rota- 
tion so  rapidly  as  to  appear  like  a revolving  ball. 
Then  sliding  down  the  pole  she  balances  it  on  her 
chin,  then  upon  her  nose,  and  finally,  projects  it  a dis- 
tance from  her  without  the  application  of  her  hands. 

This  over — a man  comes  forward,  places  his  head 
downward,  with  his  heels  in  the  air,  raises  his  arms  and 
crosses  them  upon  his  breast,  balancing  himself  all  the 


216 


INDIA. 


while  upon  his  head.  A cup  which  he  projects  upward, 
containing  sixteen  balls  is  now  placed  in  his  hands ; 
keeping  the  whole  sixteen  in  constant  motion,  crossing 
them,  and  causing  them  to  describe  all  kinds  of  figures, 
and  not  allowing  one  of  them  to  reach  the  ground.  A 
small  man  then  climbs  up  his  body,  and  stands  upon 
the  inverted  feet  of  the  performer.  A second  cup, 
containing  sixteen  balls,  is  handed  to  him,  who  com- 
mences throwing  them  until  the  thirty-two  are  in  mo- 
tion. The  whole  being  caught  in  the  cups,  the  upper 
man  jumps  to  the  ground,  and  the  other  as  nimbly 
springs  to  his  feet. 

Such  feats  being  over,  a performer  comes  near  you, 
spreads  a cloth  upon  the  ground  about  the  size  of  a 
sheet.  After  lying  still  for  some  time,  it  seems  to 
move  upward,  and  upon  being  removed  you  see  several 
pine-apples  growing  under  it,  which  the  performer 
presents  to  you  as  proof  that  they  are  the  genuine 
article.  I have  witnessed  this  trick  many  times,  and 
yet  it  is  to  me  wholly  inexplicable. 

Does  the  reader  “ see  through”  that,  well  here  is 
one.  A man  takes  a large  earthen  vessel,  with  a 
capacious  mouth,  fills  it  with  water,  and  turns  it 
upside  down,  when  all  the  water  flows  out.  The 
moment,  however,  it  is  turned  mouth  upwards,  it  is 
full  again.  He  allows  you  to  take  it.  You  do  so.  You 
examine  it.  By  his  permission  you  break  it  in  pieces, 
and  yet  you  are  no  wiser  than  before. 

Here  is  another  : A basket  is  produced,  under  which 
is  put  a lean  Pariah  dog ; after  the  lapse  of  a minute 


POPULAR  AMUSEMENTS  OF  INDIA. 


217 


the  basket  is  removed  and  she  appears  with  a litter  of 
seven  puppies.  These  are  again  covered,  and  upon  rais- 
ing the  magic  basket  a goat  is  presented  to  view.  Then 
comes  a pig,  in  the  full  vigor  of  existence,  and  when 
covered  a little  time  it  is  presented  with  its  throat  cut, 
and  again  it  is  restored  to  life. 

But  here  comes  what  children  call  u hocus  pocus.” 
A man  takes  a small  bag  full  of  brass  balls,  which  he 
throws  one  by  one  into  the  air  to  the  number  of  thirty- 
five.  None  of  them  appear  to  return.  After  a little 
pause,  and  a significant,  guttural  call,  they  are  seen 
to  fall  one  by  one  until  the  whole  of  them  are  replaced 
in  the  bag. 

But  I must  not  continue  these  illustrations  farther, 
for  1 am  occupying  space  which  might  be  devoted  to 
more  practical  topics.  I might  allude  to  the  snake 
catchers  and  charmers,  and  other  feats  of  legerde- 
main, but  these  must  suffice.  As  to  the  reality 
of  such  performances  there  is  no  room  to  doubt,  as  to 
the  explanation,  I can  but  refer  the  reader  to  the  per- 
formers themselves. 

Such  are  some  of  the  amusements  by  which  the 
Hindoo  beguiles  the  weary  hours,  and  gratifies  his 
taste  for  the  mirthful,  tragic,  and  marvellous.  Accus- 
tomed as  they  are  to  deeds  of  mystery,  the  argument 
in  favor  of  the  Christian  system  drawn  from  miracles 
is  almost  powerless  upon  their  minds.  Over  against 
one  miracle  upon  the  Gospel  record,  multitudes  are 
contained  in  their  sacred  books,  and  performed  before 
their  eyes.  Their  judgment  may  tell  them  that  it  is 


218 


INDIA. 


jugglery,  and  so  say  they  may  have  been  those  of  the 
Founder  of  Christianity.  To  pluck  up  mountains  and 
hurl  them  to  and  fro  at  will — to  cut  off  parts  of  the 
moon,  and  cast  them  to  the  earth — to  fish  up  sacred 
books  from  the  bottom  of  the  sea — these  are  but 
a few  among  the  deeds  of  the  Hindoo  deities,  and 
what  more  of  miracle  can  any  religion  allege.  This 
objection  against  the  special  divinity  of  Christianity 
is  often  and  skilfully  used  by  the  Brahmin,  to  parry 
the  blow  aimed  against  his  favorite  creed,  and  to  gain 
for  the  system  he  teaches  a stronger  hold  upon  the 
faith  of  its  credulous  and  attached  devotees. 


CHAPTER  XV. 


MUSIC  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 

Remarks  on  the  universal  prevalence  of  Music — Antiquity  of  Hindoo 
Song — Remarkable  statements  by  Sir  William  .Tones — ;l  No  account- 
ing for  tastes7’ — Hindoo  Gamut — Extract  from  Abbe  Du  Bois — 
Names  of  musical  instruments — Style  illustrated  by  Stanzas  from  the 
Poem  of  Arumuga  Tambiran,  sung  at  his  baptism — Two  verses 
written  in  English  by  a Convert  at  Calcutta — Authors  of  “ Spiritual 
Songs”  in  Southern  India. 

The  practice  of  music  is  universal.  There  appears 
no  nation  upon  the  lace  of  the  earth  to  whom  it  is  not 
familiar.  It  is,  so  to  speak,  the  vernacular  idiom  of 
nature,  and  may  be  considered  to  be  coeval  with  crea- 
tion.” India,  in  its  past  and  present  attachment  to 
song,  illustrates  the  truth  of  these  well-advised  re- 
marks. Music  accompanies  all  Hindoo  festivals,  all 
their  processions  whether  solemn  or  gay,  many  of  their 
religious  ceremonies,  and  is  almost  daily  resorted  to 
the  country  over,  as  an  evening  recreation  of  the 
social  circle.  And  so  has  it  been  from  the  earliest 
period,  for,  as  another  has  eloquently  said,  “ When  the 


220 


INDIA. 


war  songs  of  the  Germans  in  the  time  of  Tacitus,  were 
pealed  from  hill  to  hill,  like  the  cry  of  the  Scottish 
gathering,  or  echoed  through  the  dark  tracts  of  their 
primeval  forests,  over  which,  perhaps,  the  waters  of 
the  deluge  had  poured  their  devastation,  the  Yina  of 
the  Hindoos  was  heard  among  the  palm-groves  of  the 
East,  tuned  to  scientific  measures,  and  sharing  with 
the  nightingale  the  admiration  of  man.” 

The  celebrated  Orientalist,  Sir  "William  Jones,  in  an 
article  on  Hindoo  music,  uses  this  language. 

“ A learned  native  told  me  that  he  had  frequently 
seen  the  most  venomous  and  malignant  snakes  leave 
their  holes  upon  hearing  tunes  on  a flute,  which  gave 
them  peculiar  delight.  And  an  intelligent  Persian, 
who  repeated  his  story  again  and  again,  and  permitted 
me  to  write  it  down  from  his  own  lips  declared  that  he 
had  more  than  once  been  present  when  a celebrated 
lutanist,  surnamed  Bulbul,  was  playing  to  a large 
company,  in  a grove  near  Shiraz,  when  he  distinctly 
saw  the  nightingales  trying  to  vie  with  the  musician, 
sometimes  warbling  on  the  trees,  sometimes  fluttering 
from  branch  to  branch,  as  if  they  wished  to  approach 
the  instrument  whence  the  melody  proceeded  ; and  at 
length  dropping  on  the  ground  in  a kind  of  ecstaoy, 
from  which  they  were  soon  raised  by  a change  of 
mode.” 

I feci  no  disposition  to  question  the  truth  of  these 
statements  or  to  derogate  ought  from  the  fame  of 
Hindoo  musicians — but  if  these  things  were  as  Sir 
William  and  others  tell  us,  the  Hindoos  have  indeed 


MUSIC  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


221 


“ Fallen  from  their  high  estate.” 

It  is  true  that  the  natives  of  that  country  will  allow 
the  superiority  of  foreigners  in  almost  all  respects 
except  in  musical  skill — it  is  true  that,  as  I have 
mysolf  observed,  if  upon  the  esplanade  at  Madras,  the 
Governor’s  band  is  discoursing  its  finest  strains  at  ono 
end  of  the  field,  and  half-dozen  tom-tom  and  cymbal 
beaters  are  performing  on  the  other  end,  the  natives 
will  flock  to  the  latter  with  expressions  of  surprise 
that  any  musical  ear  could  not  perceive  the  superiority 
of  India  over  England — but  it  is  hard  to  make  the 
foreigner  hear  in  the  clash  and  clangor  of  Hindoo 
trumpets,  cymbals,  and  drum,  ought  but  noise,  “et 
pnrterea  nihil.”  Were  the  reader  to  be  where  the 
writer  has  often  found  himself — in  a village  bungalow 
— trying  to  get  a little  rest  after  a day’s  toil,  he  will  wish 
that  the  tom-tom  and  horn  were  anywhere  else  than 
within  his  hearing — so  discordant,  harsh,  unmelodious. 

I shall  be  doing  the  Hindoos  injustice  if  the  impression 
be  left  upon  the  reader’s  mind  that  the  music  of  India 
is  performed,  even  at  this  time,  without  skill.  The 
gamut  has  been  known  among  them  from  the  earliest 
time,  and  the  Abbe  Du  Bois  thinks  that  it  has  been 
borrowed  from  them  by  other  nations  who  now  use  it. 
“ It  is  but  in  modern  times,”  he  says,  “ that  it  has 
been  introduced  into  Europe  by  the  Benedictine  monk, 
Guido  Aretino,  who  adapted  it  to  the  seven  signs, 
ut,  re,  mi,  fa,  sol , la,  sa,  which  are  the  first  syllables 
of  some  words  contained  in  the  first  6trophe  of  the 


222 


INDIA. 


Latin  hymn  composed  in  honor  of  John  the  Baptist, 
which  runs  thus  : — 

1 2 
“ Ut  queant  laxis  resonare  fibris 

3 4 

Mira  gestorura  famuli  tuorum 

6 6 

Solve  polluti  labii  reatum 

7 

Sancte  Joanes.” 

The  Gamut  of  the  Hindoo  is  the  same  as  ours,  be- 
ing composed  of  the  same  number  of  notes  and 
arranged  the  same  way. 

What  renders  the  music  of  India  so  unwelcome  to 
a cultivated  ear,  is  the  limited  number  of  their  tunes, 
and  therefore  constant  reiteration  of  the  same  notes,  and 
the  small  variety  of  their  instruments  together  with  the 
imperfect  manner  in  which  they  are  played.  Dr.  Ward 
of  Serampore  mentions  about  forty  kinds  of  instru- 
ments, of  which  twelve  are  different  species  of  drums , 
four  of  tabors,  four  of  violins,  with  the  cymbal,  reed, 
horn,  hautboy,  flute,  SfC.  The  most  common  article, 
and  one  that  is  dinging  in  your  ear  wherever  you  go 
is  the  tom-tom — which  is  nothing  more  than  a half- 
tanned  sheepskin,  drawn,  when  damp,  over  a wido 
mouthed  earthen  or  iron  vessel  from  six  to  twenty  or 
more  inches  across,  and  when  dry  beaten  with  a stick 
or  leathern  thong.  This  is  often  accompanied  by  a 
pair  of  sharp-sounding  cymbals.  A funeral  procession 
is  preceded  by  two  persons,  blowing  each  a long  horn 
which  emits  a doleful  and  prolonged  note  of  a dis- 
tinctive, and  at  times  very  plaintive  and  sorrowing 


MUSIC  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


223 


character.  There  are  horns  also  at  marriage  festivities, 
but  of  different  shape  and  note.  Scattered  over  the 
country,  are  pensioned  or  dismissed  band-men,  for- 
merly attached  to  European  corps  who  are  not  unfre- 
quently  present  at  funerals,  and  amid  the  clangor 
of  cymbal  and  horn,  you  distinguish  the  notes  of  the 
“Dead  March  in  Saul,”  upon  the  drum  and  fife.  A 
strange  medley  which  provokes  a smile  though  in  the 
presence  of  death. 

Every  pagoda  of  any  note,  has  a band  of  musicians  ; 
who  are  obliged  to  attend  at  the  temple  twice  every 
day,  to  make  it  ring  with  their  discordant  sounds  and 
inharmonious  airs.  A portion  of  the  musicians  execute 
the  vocal  part,  and  sing  hymns  in  honor  of  the  gods. 

The  singing  of  native  Hindoos  is  much  in  the  style 
of  a chant — with  prolongation  of  the  sound  at  the  end 
of  each  line.  I am  desirous  of  illust.ating  this  topic  of 
Hindoo  songs,  but  find  a difficulty  in  selecting  a piece 
entirely  appropriate.  I have  concluded,  however,  to 
insert  parts  of  a poem  which  was  written  by  a re- 
ligious mendicant,  when  renouncing  Hindooism  and 
embracing  Christianity.  He  sang  it  at  his  baptism.  It 
describes  in  detail,  the  means  he  had  successfully  used 
to  secure  pardon  and  heaven. 

1.  High  places  ascending,  sitting  painfully  cross-legged 

* as  a Yogee  and  meditating  . . . Enough,  enough. 

Now  the  majestic  Jesus  who  came  to 

save  me  . . . . . Behold  ye,  behold  ye- 


224 


INDIA. 


2.  The  sacred  Sadi,  with  entangled  hair  Rut,- 

tracham,  necklaces  and  beads  . . Enough,  enough, 

Now — Jesus  who  delivers  me  from  trusting 
in  such  things  ....  Behold  ye,  behold  ye, 

3.  Dressing  in  yellow  robes  and  rubbing  ashes  on 

the  body  ......  Enough,  enough. 

Now — the  Lord  Jesus  who  saw  me  and 
saved  me  .....  Behold  ye,  behold  ye. 

4.  Bathing  in  holy-waters  and  visiting  Siva 

temples  ......  Enough,  enough. 

Now — Jesus,  the  God  of  gods  who 
sought  me  and  saved  me  . . Behold  ye,  behold  ye. 

5.  Wandering  to  holy  places  and  bowing  to 

images  ......  Enough,  enough. 

Now — the  Divine  Jesus  who  discovered 
and  saved  me  . . . . Behold  ye,  behold  ye. 

6.  Of  feast  days  and  following  idol 

cars  ......  Enough,  enough. 

Now — Jesus  the  Lord  of  worlds  who  pow- 
erfully saves  me  . . . . Behold  ye,  behold  ye. 

7.  Wearied  with  long  pilgrimages  to  Casi, 

fainting  and  forlorn  ....  Enough,  enough. 
Now  the  excellent  Jesus  who  gov- 
erns me  by  his  grace  . . . Behold  ye,  behold  ye. 

8.  Carefully  performing  prayers,  rites,  and 

sacrifices  ......  Enough,  enough. 

Now — the  salvation  of  the  loving  Jesus, 
to  which  He  has  called  us  . . . Behold  ye,  behold  ye* 


MUSIC  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


225 


9.  Gathering  sacred  flowers,  and  plucking  ears  of 

the  Vilvum  to  perform  idol 

worship  ......  Enough,  enough. 

Now — the  sweet  salvation  of  the 
Supreme  Jesus  ....  Behold  ye,  behold  yo 

10.  Dropping  holy  oil  into  the  sacred  fire  ; 

then  whispering  senseless  mantras  into 
the  ears  of  deluded  disciples  . . Enough,  enough. 

Now — to  the  pure  baptism  of  Jesus 

who  fills  all  ....  Come  ye,  come  ye. 

1 1 . Cymbals,  brass  plates,  and  bells  sound- 

ing in  every  street  ....  Enough,  enough. 
Now — to  the  prayers  and  praises  of  the 
God  Jesus  . . . . Come  ye,  come  ye, 

12.  Dancing  before  idols,  hands  clapping, 

and  prostrations  . . . . Enough,  enough. 

Now  the  rightly  instituted  worship  of 
the  High  Priest  Jesus  . . . Come  ye,  come  ye. 

13.  Adorning  with  garlands,  heathen  vest- 

ments and  necklaces  . . . Enough,  enough. 

Now — to  the  high  praises  of  the 
heavenly  Jesus  <.  Come  ye,  come  ye. 

14.  Wearing  the  Branim  string  and 

saying  daily  mantras  ....  Enough,  enough. 
Now — to  the  holy  sacrament  of 
the  spotless  Jesus  . 

10* 


. Come  ye,  come  ye. 


226 


INDIA 


15.  Studying  the  Vethams  and  Shastras 
to  obtain  salvation  . 


. Enough,  enough. 


Now — to  the  true  Gospel  of  the 
exalted  Jesus  . 


. Come  ye,  come  ye. 


16.  To  leave  wordly,  lying,  heathen-  . 
ism  ...... 

Now — to  the  doctrine  taught 
by  God’s  ministers  . 


Come  ye,  come  ye. 


. Strive  ye,  strive  ye. 


The  reader  may  gather  from  these  stanzas  some  im- 
pression as  to  the  manner  in  which  the  Poem  is 
constructed.  It  was  sung  in  a slow  tone,  with  a 
dwelling  upon  the  chorus  “Enough,  enough. — Come 
ye,  come  ye.” 

The  native  style  of  singing  is  not  retained  in  places 
of  Christian  worship — hymns  having  been  written  to 
the  tunes  common  with  us,  as  “ Old  Hundred,” 
“ Mear,”  “ St.  Thomas,”  and  the  like.  That  the  Hin- 
doo can  adapt  himself  by  practice  to  the  European 
stanza  is  evident  from  many  examples  that  might  be 
given.  Here  is  one  which  was  written  by  a Hindoo, 
a proficient  in  English,  and  sung  at  his  baptism. 

“ Long  sunk  in  superstition’s  night,  by  sin  and  Satan  driven, 

I saw  not,  cared  not,  for  the  light  which  leads  the  blind  to  heaven. 

I sat  in  darkness,  reason’s  eye  was  shut,  was  closed  in  me, 

I hastened  to  eternity,  o’er  error’s  dreadful  sea. 

But  now,  at  length,  thy  grace,  O Lord,  bids  all  around  me  shine, 

I drink  thy^weet,  thy  precious  word,  I kneel  before  thy  shrine. 

I’ve  broke  affection’s  tenderest  lies,  for  my  dear  Saviour’s  sake, 

All,  all,  I love  beneath  the  skies,  Lord,  I for  thee  forsake.” 


MUSIC  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


227 


The  reader  will  rightly  conclude  that  the  writer  of 
those  verses  could  easily  compose  hymns  to  our  metre. 

The  Tamil  churches  of  Southern  India  arc  much 
indebted  to  the  late  Mr.  Rhenius  and  to  my  esteemed 
friends,  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Spaulding  and  Hutchings, 
with  contributions  from  the  lamented  Lawrence  and 
others  for  the  “ spiritual  songs”  sung  in  missionary 
chapels. 

A hymn-book,  used  by  the  Canarese  Christians  of 
the  Mysore  district,  lies  before  me,  chiefly  from  tho 
pen  of  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Rice  and  Campbell,  of  tho 
London  Missionary  Society. 

The  German  missionaries  have  always  taken  a 
leading  part  in  this  department  of  Christian  literature. 

This  is  as  much  as  my  limits  will  allow  me  to  say 
on  the  music  of  the  Hindoos. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 


PECULIAR  CEREMONIES. 

Two  circumstances  that  impart  impoitance  to  the  birth  of  a Hindoo — 
Hindoo  names,  whence  derived,  and  the  ceremony  of  giving  them — 
Hindoo  Marriages — Courtship — Desirable  qualities  in  a Wife — Kooleen 
Brahmins — Death — Exclamations  of  a Mother  over  a Dead  Child 
— Strange  Comforters — Nuisances  on  the  Ganges — Burning  of  Bodies 
— Singular  custom  in  the  Northern  Districts — Parsee  mode  with  their 
Dead — Mohamedan  Cemeteries — Also  Roman  Catholic — Graves  of 
Foreigners — Superiority  of  the  Gospel  over  Brahminism  in  the  Dying 
Hour. 

Connected  with  the  birth,  naming,  marriage,  and 
death  of  a Hindoo,  there  are  ceremonies  of  a distinc- 
tive character,  with  which  the  reader  may  find  an  in- 
terest in  becoming  acquainted. 

There  are  two  circumstances  which  impart  peculiar 
interest  to  the  natal  hour,  of  which  the  first  is  the 
position  of  the  heavenly  bodies  at  the  time  the  event 
occurs.  Respectable  Hindoos  keep  an  astrologer  in 
waiting,  who,  so  soon  as  informed  of  the  birth  of  the 
infant,  “ casts  its  nativity,  and  opens  the  roll  of  its 
fate.”  Having  drawn  up  a paper  minutely  describing 
what  of  weal  or  woe  is  to  befall  the  young  stranger 


PECULIAR  CEREMONIES. 


229 


during  his  present,  and  sometime  his  future  life,  he 
hands  the  same  to  the  father,  who  deposits  it  in  his 
house  for  reference  when  good  or  ill  happens  to  his 
child.  These  family  records  are  often  of  real  value  in 
the  settlement  of  legal  questions.  The  sex  of  the  in- 
fant is  the  second  feature  of  interest,  and  one  that 
awakens  no  little  anxiety  in  the  mind  of  a native  Hin- 
doo. As  the  male  members  of  a family  can  alone  per- 
form the  funeral  rites  of  a parent,  the  birth  of  a son 
awakens  far  different  emotions  than  than  that  of  a 
daughter  ; the  one  being  an  occasion  for  chagrin  and 
sorrow,  the  other  of  gratitude  and  delight.  When  the 
father  first  goes  to  see  the  child,  if  a rich  man,  he  puts 
a silver  coin  in  its  hand,  as  do  other  wealthy  relatives. 
The  Hindoo  mother,  both  before  and  after  confinement, 
is  treated  with  the  highest  consideration  by  her 
family,  she  and  the  infant  being  supplied  with  every- 
thing which  will  conduce  to  their  comfort  and  health. 

When  the  child  is  a few  days  old,  the  parents 
give  to  it  a name ; generally  that  of  a deity , for 
the  alleged  reason,  that  “ the  repetition  of  the  names 
of  the  gods  is  meritorious,  and  operates  like  fire  in 
consuming  sin.”  The  names  of  the  lads  under  my 
instruction  were  often  such  as  these,  Krishnun, 
Rama,  Narraiyanun,  G-opalu,  and  the  like,  all  the 
appellatives  of  celestials  ; while  others  were  honored 
with  the  titles  of  Pareya  Swamy  (great  god),  Chinna 
Swamy  (little  god),  Chinna  Tumbe  (little  brother),  &c. 
Females  are  named  after  the  goddesses ; as  Kal6, 
Doorga,  Lukshmee,  Gunga  ; as  also  titles  descriptive 


230 


INDIA. 


of  some  prominent  excellence,  as,  the  “ Beloved  of 
Vishnu,”  the  “ Water-lily,”  and  the  “ Beautiful.” 
Some  parents  give  an  unpleasant  name  to  a child  born 
after  repeated  bereavements,  as  Dookhee  (sorrowful), 
Haranu  (the  lost)  ; the  reason  they  assign  for  which 
is,  that  the  former  were  such  pleasant  children,  and 
had  such  sweet  names,  that  they  died  through  the 
envy  of  others.  The  Hindoo  stands  in  constant  awe  of 
the  bad  passions  of  those  around  him.  If  a rich  man 
become  poor,  the  exclamation  is  at  once  heard,  “ See 
how  sharp  men’s  teeth  are  ! He  is  ruined  entirely  be- 
cause men  could  not  bear  to  see  his  happiness.”  That 
the  family  descent  or  place  of  birth  may  be  remembered, 
it  is  common  for  a Hindoo  child  to  annex  the  name  of 
father  and  residence  to  his  own.  Thus,  Moothor  Har- 
uppina,  the  son  of  Pareyaswamy,  Narrayanun,  the  child 
of  Madras.  “ Some  Hindoos  place  two  lamps  on  two 
names  beginning  with  the  same  letter,  and  choose  that 
over  which  the  lamp  burns  most  fiercely.  The  name 
of  the  stellar  mansion  under  which  the  child  was  born, 
is  often  added  to  its  common  name.”  The  ceremony 
of  naming  is  brief  and  simple.  The  parents  being 
seated  on  the  ground,  the  mother  having  the  infant  in 
her  arms,  the  officiating  Brahmin  hands  to  the  father  a 
plate  of  raw  rice,  upon  which  he  writes  the  name  of 
the  child,  and  the  name  of  the  ruling  star  at  its  birth. 
The  former  is  pronounced  three  times,  and  the  cere- 
mony closes  with  an  offering  to  the  god  of  the  dwelling, 
together  with  a dinner  and  fee  to  the  priest.  Greater 
or  less  degrees  of  eclat  attend  this  occasion,  according 


PECULIAR  CEREMONIES. 


231 


to  the  wealth  and  importance  of  the  family.  The  name 
of  the  son  and  the  daughter  (though  married)  remains 
unchanged  through  life. 

As  it  is  intended  to  give,  in  the  following  chapter,  a 
full  description  of  a Hindoo  wedding,  the  statements 
now  to  be  made  will  concern  only  native  marriages  in 
general.  A learned  work  on  civil  and  canon  law  men- 
tions eight  kinds  of  marriage,  1.  When  the  girl  is  given 
to  a Brahmin  without  reward  ; 2.  When  she  is  pre- 
sented as  a gift,  at  the  close  of  a sacrifice  ; 3.  WTien 
two  cows  are  received  by  the  father  in  exchange  for  a 
bride  ; 4.  WThen  the  girl  is  given  at  the  request  of  a 
Brahmin  ; 5.  When  money  is  received  in  exchange 
for  a bride  ; 6.  When  a marriage  takes  place  by  mutual 
consent ; 7.  WTicn  a bride  is  taken  in  war ; and  8. 
When  a girl  is  taken  by  craft.  A Hindoo,  except  he 
be  grown  up,  as  in  a second  marriage,  never  chooses 
his  own  wife.  Two  parents,  with  a view  to  the  junc- 
tion of  their  estates  or  honors,  determine  upon  a union 
of  son  and  daughter,  while  both  are  but  infants.  The 
espousals  take  place  while  the  parties  are  but  children, 
frequently  before  either  has  reached  the  sixth  year, 
when  the  affianced  youth  are  taken  to  their  parents’ 
home,  little  aware  of  the  bearing  which  the  gaudy 
scene  through  which  they  have  been  conducted  is  to 
have  upon  their  earthly  peace.  If  there  be  no  special 
reason  for  another  course,  the  parent  employs  a person, 
called  a Grhutuku,  to  find  a suitable  boy  or  girl  for  his 
child.  “ Many  of  these  men  are  notorious  flatterers 
and  liars,  and  in  making  matrimonial  alliances  endea- 


232 


INDIA 


vor  to  impose  in  the  grossest  manner  upon  the  parents 
on  both  sides.  If  the  qualities  of  a girl  are  to  be  com- 
mended, she  is  declared  to  be  beautiful  as  the  full 
moon,  of  a fine  figure,  sweet  speech,  has  excellent 
hair,  walks  gracefully,  can  cook,  fetch  water,”  &c.  In 
this  way  persons  are  united  in  wedlock  with  the 
greatest  possible  difference  of  disposition  and  habit ; 
and,  as  a consequence,  happiness  is  sought  for  else- 
where than  at  home,  and  the  hours  they  are  compelled 
to  pass  together  are  filled  with  recriminating  words  and 
acts.  The  pressure  of  this  evil  is  greater  upon  the  wife 
than  the  husband,  for  if  she  die,  the  survivor  can 
marry  again,  and  usually  does  within  a few  months 
after  the  decease  of  his  spouse  ; while  she  must  occupy 
that  most  unhappy  of  all  positions,  Hindoo  widowhood  ; 
or  must  allow  herself  to  be  burned  with  his  lifeless 
corpse.  If  the  young  man  be  of  an  age,  and  in  cir- 
cumstances to  make  personal  choice  of  a wife,  he  must 
have  an  eye  to  these,  among  other  commendable 
qualities,  “ She  must  not  be  of  a family  where  the 
prescribed  acts  of  religion  have  been  omitted — or  a 
family  in  which  there  have  been  no  sons — or  a family 
in  which  the  Veda  is  not  read — or  a family  that  has 
been  subject  to  disagreeable  ailments  of  any  kind. 
Her  form  must  be,  so  far  as  possible,  without  defect — 
she  must  have  an  agreeable  name — she  must  walk 
gracefully,  like  a young  elephant — her  teeth  must  be 
moderate  in  size  and  quantity — her  lips  must  be  like 
the  leaves  of  a mango  tree — and  her  voice  like  the 
sound  of  a cuckoo  /”  As  to  mental  and  moral  qualities, 


PECULIAR  CEREMONIES. 


233 


they  are  not  deemed  of  sufficient  importance  to  deserve 
a place  in  fhis  catalogue  of  desirable  qualities  in  a 
bride.  As  her  only  duties  arc  to  cook  food — clean  the 
house — and  take  care  of  the  children,  it  matters  little 
to  a Hindoo  whether  his  wife  is  amiable  or  morose, 
wise  or  ignorant,  engaging  or  repulsive.  Subserviency 
to  the  inclinations  of  the  stronger  sex  is  her  supreme 
duty.  Divorce  is  unknown  among  the  natives  of  India. 
Marriages  once  solemnized  can  never  be  dissolved 
among  persons  of  a reputable  caste,  particularly  among 
Brahmins.  A Hindoo  may  reject  his  wife  on  account 
of  her  incontinenoy,  but  he  is  obliged  to  support  her  as 
long  as  she  lives,  and  wearing  the  tahli  (an  ornament 
answering  to  the  marriage  ring)  marks  her  as  a 
wife.  Polygamy  is  not  usual  in  that  country. 
“ Where  persons  live  with  several  females,  but  one  is 
considered  a lawful  wife,  and  her  children  alone  legiti- 
mate. The  law  excludes  the  offspring  of  the  others 
from  any  share  in  their  father’s  property,  if  he  die 
without  a will”  (Du  Bois).  There  is  in  the  northern 
district  a class  of  Brahmins  with  whom  a matrimonial 
alliance  is  considered  so  desirable,  that  multitudes  of 
females  are  willing  to  attach  themselves  to  one  of  them, 
though  at  the  risk  of  being  left  a hopeless  widow,  and 
with  children  to  provide  for  by  laborious  and  unwearied 
exertion.  A writer  before  quoted  mentions  the  names 
of  five  of  these  Kooleen  Brahmins , who  had  in  all  three 
hundred  and  twenty-one  wives,  and  two  hundred  and 
sixty  children  ! It  often  occurs  in  these  cases  that  a 
parent  does  not  know  his  own  sons  and  daughters. 


234 


INDIA 


Death  comes  to  the  Hindoo  with  all  its  natural  repul- 
sion and  dismay,  unrelieved  by  any  of  the  consolatory 
reflections  by  which  the  gospel  of  Christ  assuages  the 
sorrows  of  the  fatal  hour.  If  the  Hindoo  die  with  calm- 
ness, it  is  often  as  the  effect  of  narcotic  drugs  by  which 
mistaken  kindness  would  enable  him  to  sleep  away  his 
being,  or  the  yielding  to  an  omnipotent  necessity,  and 
not  a cheerful  submission  to  an  all-wise  decree.  Re- 
signation, such  as  the  Christian  feels  in  sorrow’s  darkest 
hour,  is  foreign  to  the  creed  as  it  is  a stranger  to  the 
heart,  of  an  idolatrous  Hindoo.  Hence,  when  a friend 
dies,  the  mourner  uses  language  of  reproof  to  us  most 
strange  and  repulsive.  Instead  of  raising  his  weeping 
eye  upward,  with  the  language  of  the  patriarch,  “ The 
Lord  gave,  the  Lord  hath  taken  away,  blessed  be  the 
name  of  the  Lord,”  he  turns  to  the  lifeless  form  with 
words  of  upbraiding  and  censure.  “ Why,”  exclaims 
the  weeping  widow,  “ why,  oh  my  husband,  hast  thou 
forsaken  me  ? What  did  I do  to  drive  you  hence  ? 
Was  I not  a faithful  wife  ? Was  I not  attentive  to  all 
your  household  affairs,  cooking  your  food,  taking  caro 
of  your  children,  defending  your  character  ? Oh,  why, 
why  did  you  desert  me  thus  cruelly,  my  departed  one!” 
This  she  does  with  her  hair  dishevelled,  dress  carelessly 
thrown  on,  and  beating  her  breast  with  her  palms,  as  if 
she  would  drive  the  very  breath  from  her  frame. 
A mother  overwhelmed  with  grief  for  the  death  of  her 
child,  will  express  herself  thus : 

“ Ah  ! my  child  ! where  is  he  gone  ? My  child  ! 

My  child  ! 


PECULIAR  CEREMONIES. 


235 


My  golden  image,  who  has  taken  ? 

My  child  ! 
My  child  ! 

He  played  around  like  a golden  top. 

My  child  ! 
My  child  ! 

Like  his  face  I never  saw. 

My  child  ! 
My  child  ! 

Let  fire  devour  the  envious  eye. 

My  child  ! 
My  child  ! 

It  ever  was  calling,  Mother,  mother. 

My  child  ! 
My  child  !” 

It  often  occurs  that  after  lamenting  in  this  manner 
for  some  time,  a female  comes,  and  putting  the  end  of 
her  garment  on  the  mouth  of  the  mother,  tries  to  com- 
fort her  by  such  strange  arguments  as  these : “ Why 
do  you  weep?  why  destroy  your  health  ? If  the  child 
had  been  designed  to  be  yours,  it  would  not  have  died. 
This  is  the  fruit  of  children  ; they  come  to  give  us  sor- 
row. Perhaps  in  a former  birth  you  stole  somebody's 
child,  and  noio  your  own  is  gone.  You  set  the  highest 
value  upon  him,  and  therefore  you  weep  ; but  if  he  had 
been  worth  any  anything,  he  would  not  have  left  you. 
Go,  go  into  your  house,  and  comfort  those  that  are 
left.  He  was  not  your  son . but  an  enemy  sent  to 
bring  sorrow  upon  you.  Why  weep  longer  for  him  !” 
Passionate  exclamations  of  a similar  kind  to  these 
fall  upon  your  ear  almost  daily,  as  you  move  through 
the  streets  of  a Hindoo  city  or  village.  They  are  con- 
fined almost  exclusively  to  the  female  mourners  and 
the  mourning  women  (hirelings  called  in  to  keep  up 
the  lamentation  when  the  strength  of  the  real  mourner 


236 


INDIA. 


is  exhausted.)  If  the  person  reside  sufficiently  near 
the  Granges,  the  dying  one  is  carried  to  that  sacred 
stream,  that  by  breathing  his  last  upon  its  bank,  and 
then  being  immersed  beneath  its  flood,  he  may  secure 
remission  and  heaven.  The  multitudes  committed  to 
that  stream  are  sources  of  great  annoyance  to  the  ships 
at  anchor  in  the  river,  across  whose  bows  and  hawsers 
they  are  daily  entangled  ; and  still  greater  nuisances 
are  they  to  the  residents  on  the  banks,  who  often  re- 
tain among  their  servants  one  whose  sole  office  is  to 
thrust  into  the  stream  any  dead  body  which  may  float 
ashore.  The  Hindoos  usually  burn  the  dead,  which  is 
attended  with  a variety  of  ceremonies  very  tedious  and 
childish.  I have  stood  for  an  hour  observing  these 
ablutions  with  water  and  oil,  offerings  of  butter,  honey, 
sugar,  money,  &c.,  genuflections  and  prayer,  until  my 
patience  was  exhausted,  and  my  curiosity  gratified  to 
satiety.  The  rich  mingle  sandal  wood  with  the  other 
fuel  of  the  pile,  and  even  the  poor  strive  to  put  in  a 
little.  This  cremation,  with  the  attendant  ceremonies, 
is  considered  by  the  great  mass  of  religious  Hindoos  as 
necessary  to  happiness  after  death.  A few,  here,  and 
there,  follow  the  example  of  Europeans  and  Mohamed- 
ans  in  burying  the  dead.  In  some  of  the  mountainous 
districts  the  inhabitants  have  a singular  mode  of  dis- 
posing of  a corpse.  They  first  carefully  wash  the  body, 
and  after  having  prepared  it  for  the  principal  process 
by  a variety  of  ceremonies,  they  cast  it  into  a huge 
mortar,  where  they  reduce  it,  bones  and  all,  to  a thick 
pulp,  which  is  rolled  up  into  small  balls.  These  are 


PECULIAR  CEREMONIES. 


237 


taken  to  a spot  consecrated  for  this  particular  purpose, 
and  strewed  upon  the  ground,  when  they  are  instantly 
devoured  by  kites,  which  always  hover  about  these 
places  of  interment  in  great  numbers.  The  Parsees,  on 
the  Malabar  coast,  have  a mode  of  burial  hardly  less 
peculiar  than  the  one  just  named.  A circular  uncov- 
ered building  is  erected,  sometimes  from  fifty  to  sixty 
feet  in  diameter,  and  thirty  feet  high.  It  is  built  up 
within,  leaving  a parapet  about  one  and  a half  yards 
high,  the  interim  space  sloping  with  a gentle  convexity 
to  the  centre,  where  there  is  a well  five  yards  broad. 
Immediately  around  this  well  are  grooves,  in  which 
the  bodies  of  the  dead  are  deposited,  and  left  exposed 
to  the  vultures.  As  soon  as  those  voracious  birds  have 
stripped  the  bones,  the  surviving  relatives  return  to  the 
cemetery,  and  cast  them  into  a well,  whence  they  are 
removed  at  certain  periods  by  means  of  subterranean 
passages,  and  flung  into  the  sea.  The  Mohamedans 
have  large  cemeteries  in  which  they  bury  their  dead, 
erecting  a neat  mound  of  clay,  or  more  durable  mate- 
rial, over  each  grave,  with  a triangular  indentation  in 
it  for  a small  lamp,  which  is  often  kept  burning  during 
a long  succession  of  years.  Near  the  city  of  Madras  is 
a Mussulman  burying-ground,  several  miles  in  cir- 
cumference, which  presents  a very  attractive  appear- 
ance at  night  from  the  light  of  numberless  small 
lamps  scattered  over  the  extended  plain.  A similar 
care  of  their  dead  is  taken  by  the  Roman  Catholics  in 
India  as  elsewhere,  decking  them  with  flowers,  and 
erecting  a cross  at  the  head. 


238 


INDIA. 


The  country  is  covered  with  white  marble  slabs, 
sometimes  in  thick  clusters  (as  in  the  cemeteries  of 
large  towns),  again,  isolated  at  the  roadside,  in  the  field 
near  the  choultry,  in  the  village,  denoting  the  resting- 
place  of  an  English  officer,  or  wife,  or  child,  or  a 
missionary  who  had  suddenly  fallen  a victim  to  that 
insalubrious  climate,  or  bowed  before  the  fearful 
pestilence, 

While  foreign  hands  their  lonely  graves  adorned, 

By  strangers  honored  and  by  strangers  mourned.” 

No  thoughtful  person  can  once  listen  to  the  hopeless 
lamentation  of  the  Hindoo  when  the  fatal  foe  enters 
his  dwelling ; — can  once  see  the  weeping  eyes,  and 
dishevelled  locks,  frantic  beatings,  and  hear  tho 
heart-piercing  outcries  attendant  upon  that  event, 
without  turning  with  gratitude  and  joy  to  that 
Gospel  which  has  brought  “ life  and  immortality 
to  light which  enables  its  disciple  to  say  in  view  of 
his  own  departure  “ Oh,  death,  where  is  thy  sting — 
for  me  to  die  is  gain,  I long  to  depart  and  be  with 
Christ,”  and  constrains  the  mourner  to  part  with  the 
heart’s  best  beloved,  knowing  that  “ he  is  not  lost,  but 
gone  before.” 

We  are  told  that  a Hindoo  of  a reflecting  turn  of 
mind,  lay  on  his  death-bed.  As  he  saw  himself 
about  to  plunge  into  the  boundless  unknown,  he 
cried  out,  “ What  will  become  of  me  ?”  “ Oh,” 

said  a Brahmin  who  stood  by,  “you  will  inhabit 
another  body.”  “ And  whero,”  said  he,  “ shall  I go 


PECULIAR  CEREMONIES. 


239 


then?”  “ Into  another,”  was  the  reply.  “And  where 
then  ?”  “ Into  another,  and  another,  and  thus  on 

through  millions  of  years.”  Darting  across  this  wholo 
period,  as  though  it  were  but  an  instant,  he  cried, 
“ And  where  shall  I go  then  ?”  But  paganism  could 
not  answer ; and  he  died  with  the  inquiry  on  his  lips, 
“ where  shall  I go  then  ?” 

Header,  have  you  in  your  hand  the  Gospel  of  the 
Son  of  God  ? Be  grateful  for  its  possession  and  so  follow 
its  precepts  and  imbibe  its  spirit — that  when  the  sum- 
mons reach  your  ears,  “ This  night  thy  soul  shall  bo 
required  of  thee,”  you  can  say  with  heart-felt  grati- 
tude and  joy,  “ welcome  death — welcome  heaven” — or 
when  called  to  mourn  the  departure  of  a beloved 
friend,  yen.  can  repeat  those  words  of  delightful  resig- 
nation— 

1 Unveil  thy  bosom — faithful  tomb 
Take  this  new  treasure  to  thy  trust, 

And  give  these  sacred  relics  room 
To  slumber  in  the  silent  dust.” 


CHAPTER  XVII. 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 

Importance  of  Female  influence — Facts  illustrating  the  relative  position 
of  women  in  India : (1)  Grief  at  their  birth ; (2)  Subjection  exacted; 
(3)  Not  to  mention  their  husband’s  name ; (4)  Not  to  speak  of  her 
husband’s  excellencies;  (5)  Not  to  be  seen  walking  with  him ; (6*, 
Not  to  take  food  with  him  ; (7)  Is  not  inquired  after  by  guests ; and 
(8)  Is  not  taught  even  the  rudiments  of  knowledge — Remarks  by  a 
Hindoo  writer — Life  and  self-immolation  of  Hollee  Lutchema — Sup- 
pression of  Sutteeism — Lord  William  Bentinck — Appeal. 


It  were  difficult  to  name  a triter  theme  than  that  of 
female  influence.  What  mothers,  and  sisters,  and 
wives,  have  it  in  their  power  to  accomplish,  and  what 
they  do  actually  effect  in  the  formation  of  national 
character,  is  one  of  the  leading  topics  of  the  day. 
This  is  as  it  should  be.  “ There  are  general  laws 
which  affect  the  whole  community  ; there  is  a common 
source  from  which  every  running  stream  is  supplied  ; 
there  is  a river,  the  streams  whereof  pervade  and 
moisten  the  whole  social  soil.”  That  primary  and  all- 
pervading  principle,  that  common  source  of  power, 
that  ever-flowing  fountain  of  good  or  ill,  is  female 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 


241 


character  and  influence.  The  philanthropist  and 
Christian  will  deem  a volume  on  India  very  defective 
that  makes  not  distinct  and  somewhat  extended  men- 
tion of  the  relative  position  of  the  females  of  that  land. 
The  subject  is  one  upon  which  a volume  might  bo 
written,  while  I am  limited  to  a few  pages  only.  My 
plan  will  be  to  state  in  paragraph  form  several  facts 
respecting  the  relative  attitude,  social  and  public,  of 
this  part  of  Hindoo  society,  closing  with  a’ biographical 
illustration. 

1.  The  birth  of  a daughter,  in  comparison  with  that 
of  a son,  is  a domestic  calamity.  Her  mother  has  to 
endure  ten  extra  days  purification.  No  rejoicing  at- 
tends her  natal  hour,  as  does  that  of  her  brother,  and  she 
shares  not  the  blessing  which  is  invoked  from  the 
Divine  Benefactor  for  his  prosperity  and  happiness.  An 
English  gentleman  at  Bombay  was  called  upon  by  an 
intelligent  native,  who  came,  as  he  himself  expressed 
it,  to  oondole  with  him  that  the  little  stranger  that 
had  just  joined  the  family  circle  was  a daughter  in- 
stead of  a son. 

2.  The  supreme  duty  of  a Hindoo  female  is  obe- 
dience. It  is  a popular  sentiment  the  country  over, 
that  a “ womqn  can  never  be  independent.”  Says  an 
ethical  writer  of  elevated  standing,  “ In  childhood  a 
female  is  to  be  subject  to  her  father — in  adult  years  to 
her  husband — in  old  age  to  her  sons.”  We  have 
before  seen  that  she  is  to  exercise  no  volition  in  the 
important  matter  of  marriage,  and  so  it  is  to  be  with 
her  through  life. 


242 


INDIA. 


3.  A Hindoo  wife  is  never,  under  any  circumstances, 
to  mention  the  vLame  of  her  husband.  “ He” — “ The 
Master” — “ Swamy,”  &c.,  are  titles  she  uses  when 
speaking  of,  or  to  her  lord.  In  no  way  can  one  of  the 
sex  annoy  another  more  intensely  and  bitterly,  than  by 
charging  her  with  having  mentioned  her  husband’s 
name.  It  is  a crime  not  easily  forgiven. 

4.  When  in  the  presence  of  others,  it  is  not  for  a 
Hindoo  wife*to  be  talking  about  her  partner,  either  by 
way  of  censure  or  commendation. 

5.  A Hindoo  and  his  wife  should  never  be  seen 
walking  together  in  the  streets,  or  exchanging  expres- 
sions of  affection  in  the  presence  of  others.  The  sight 
of  European  ladies  walking  arm  in  arm  with  their 
husbands,  strikes  a native  of  India  with  surprise  and 
disgust. 

6.  The  female  members  of  a family  never  take  their 
food  in  company  with  the  more  honored  sex.  They 
sit  patiently  by  while  father,  husband,  brother,  are 
eating,  and  then  relieve  their  hunger  with  what  re- 
mains. There  is  no  “family  table,”  around  which 
all  the  household,  adult  and  young,  meet  to  enjoy  the 
blessings  of  Divine  Providence. 

7.  A guest  never  inquires  after  the  health  of  the 
wife  of  his  host.  If  absent,  she  is  not  asked  for  ; if 
she  enters,  no  salutations  greet  her ; if  present,  she  is 
unnoticed.  The  more  respectable  the  family  for 
wealth  and  rank,  the  more  rigid  is  the  observance  of 
this  rule. 

8.  Hindoo  females  are  allowed  to  remain  in  profound 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 


243 


ignorance  of  all  literature  and  science.  India  abounds 
with  schools  for  boys,  but  none  for  girls.  It  is  a 
popular  adage  that  if  a woman  learn  to  read,  she  will 
become  a widow  ! This  may  have  been  invented  to 
deter  her  from  so  doing,  as  she  would  avoid  what 
might  by  any  possibility  lead  to  that  deepest  evil — 
widowhood.  Another  and  the  real  reason  for  this 
prohibition  is,  that  they  may  feel’  their  inferiority 
and  be  kept  more  easily  in  subjection  Pitiful, 
indeed,  is  the  sight  of  persons,  beautiful  in  figure, 
graceful  and  engaging  in  attitude  and  move- 
ment, yet  so  profoundly  ignorant  as  not  to  under- 
stand the  first  letter  of  the  alphabet,  and  unable  to 
converse  upon  any  subjects  but  those  of  the  most 
physical  and  commonplace  character.  The  Shastras 
themselves  declare  that  a woman  has  nothing  to  do 
with  the  text  of  the  vedas  : all  her  duties  being  com- 
prised in  pleasing  her  husband  and  cherishing  her 
children.  A few  (like  Ovviyar,  sister  of  Tiruvaluvar, 
author  of  the  Cural),  have  arisen  above  this  national 
prejudice  and  become  quite  eminent  in  the  world  of 
letters,  but  the  instances  are  very  few. 

9.  The  directions  and  statements  of  the  sacred 
books  of  India  cannot  but  exeit  a destructive  effect 
upon  her  in  respect  to  all  attempts  at  mental  and 
moral  elevation.  They  are  such  as  these  : “A  woman 
•is  not  allowed  to  go  out  of  the  i.ouse  without  consent 
of  her  husband  ; nor  to  laugh  without  a veil  over  her 
face  ; nor  to  stand  at  the  door  ; nor  to  look  out  at  the 
window.  She  is  like  a heifer  on  the  plain,  that  still 


244 


INDIA. 


longs  for  fresh  grass.  Infidelity,  violence,  deceit, 
envy,  and  viciousness  are  all  her’s.  She  was  made 
for  servitude  to  her  husband.  She  has  no  fitness  for 
his  equal  companionship.”  These  are  indices  of  the 
native  mind  upon  the  social  position  of  the  female 
sex. 

From  all  these  circumstances  arises  the  state  of 
female  society,  so  well  described  by  a native  Hindoo 
in  a late  prize  essay  : “ The  Hindoo  mother  is  in- 

capable of  conferring  on  her  children,  in  any  measure, 
the  blessings  of  education,  and  never  dreams  of  train- 
ing them  up  in  ‘ the  way  they  should  go.’  As  to 
exercising  a salutary  influence  and  discipline  over 
them — her  own  ideas  of  moral  responsibility  being 
vague — she  expresses  no  solicitude  about  their  actions 
being  governed  by  principles  ; and  since  scarcely  any 
of  those  crimes  to  which  humanity  is  most  prone,  are 
held  disreputable  in  Hindoo  society,  she  seldom  feels 
anxious  to  guard  them  against  leading  impure  lives. 
She  allows  them  to  strengthen  and  grow  up  in  im- 
moral habits  (such  as  lying,  obscene  language,  and 
the  like),  and  can  form  no  idea  of  subjecting  them  to 
a course  of  moral  restraint.  Nor  are  her  children  only 
passively  suffered  to  grow  wild  in  a moral  and  intel- 
lectual point  of  view,  but  they  are  actually  taught 
things  which  their  tutors  would  afterwards  have  them 
unlearn.  She  scruples  not  to  avail  herself  of  false 
promises  and  threats  in  the  management  of  them;  and 
is  not  very  cautious  in  avoiding  the  use  of  indelicate 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 


245 


language  in  their  hearing.”  Such  is  the  pioture 
drawn  by  a Hindoo’s  pen.  The  writer,  a person 
of  high  caste — one  well-instructed  in  the  books  of 
his  nation,  and  well-advised  as  to  the  opinions  he 
uttered. 

I will  now  invite  the  reader’s  attention  to  an  abridged 
sketch  of  female  character,  drawn  by  an  eloquent 
writer — Dr.  J.  Massie — himself,  for  several  years,  a 
missionary  at  Bangalore 

Hollee  Lutchema  was  the  daughter  of  parents  com- 
paratively affluent.  Her  infancy  was  succeeded  by  a 
few  short  years  of  ripening  childhood,  which  rapidly 
glided  away  ; and,  during  which,  all  the  education 
she  received,  was  limited  by  the  pitiable  circle  of 
childish  amusements  and  domestic  duties.  She  was 
taught  to  speak,  to  wash  her  teeth,  to  bind  on  her 
cloth,  to  walk  gracefully,  to  ornament  the  entrance  of 
the  dwelling; — an  embellishment,  in  which  great  pride 
is  felt,  and  which  is  performed  according  to  various 
heathen  devices  designed  on  the  earth  with  conse- 
crated powder,  skilfully  dropped  through  the  fingers. 
It  was  a period  of  undisturbed  mental  gloom ; no 
means  were  used  to  inspire  her  with  a love  of  knowl- 
edge— no  plans  were  followed  to  expand  her  mind. 
If  she  had  few  sorrows  to  endure,  or  sufferings  to  re- 
member, she  had,  also,  few  pleasures  to  anticipate, 
and  few  hopes  to  cherish.  Over  her  future  years  hung 
a cloud  of  mingled  and  obscure  uncertainty ; nor  was 
there  any  friendly  hand  to  lift  the  veil  or  shed  a light 
upon  her  path.  Once  she  heard  some  communings 


246 


INDIA. 


and  negotiations  about  marriage ; but  the  matter  was 
altogether  unintelligible  to  her,  and  the  personal  feel- 
ing, she  could  experience  at  the  moment,  was  so  un- 
interesting, that  she  had  no  anxiety  to  know  her 
destined  bridegroom,  or  be  introduced  to  his  family 
and  friends.  Her  time  passed  heedlessly  over,  and  as 
the  period  drew  near  when  a woman’s  feelings  and 
predilections  took  possession  of  her  bosom,  she  learned 
that  her  hand  had  been  bestowed,  and  her  affections 
bartered  for  a piece  of  gold.  The  ceremony  of  mar- 
riage, in  the  preliminary  stage,  was  now  performed, 
and  the  alliance  ratified  by  the  accustomed  rites ; she 
was  presented,  but  not  yet  rendered  up  to  him,  who 
was  to  be  vested  with  the  dominion  of  her  person, 
and  entitled  to  her  homage  and  subjection.  There 
had  been  no  exercise  of  choice  on  either  part,  nor  mu- 
tual affection — designed  to  be  a slave,  she  had  not 
been  wooed  as  the  object  of  a tender  attachment. 
She  remained  now  as  the  betrothed  wife,  in  her  father’s 
house,  and  in  subjection  to  her  parents,  till  con- 
venience or  caprice  led  to  a consummation  of  the 
domestic  union. 

Youthful  and  pleasing,  with  certain  undefined  ideas 
of  marriage,  but  no  relative  sympathy  and  reciprocal 
confidence,  she  was  conducted  through  the  pageantry 
and  ceremonial  of  the  festive  day.  Many  and  tire- 
some were  the  ceremonies  observed  at  her  espousal. 
While  her  bridegroom  was  being  received,  by  her 
father,  with  all  the  rites  of  hospitality,  three  vessels 
of  water  were  emptied  on  her  head,  and  accompanied 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 


247 


by  prayers,  usual  to  the  occasion,  but  too  indelicate 
for  insertion  here;  their  hands  then,  having  been 
rubbed  by  an  auspicious  drug,  were  placed,  hers  in  his, 
and  bound,  by  a matron,  with  sacred  grass,  amidst  the 
sounds  of  cheerful  music.  The  attendant  priests  were 
directed  by  her  father  to  utter  their  acclamations, 
while  he  poured  water  from  a vessel,  containing  fra- 
grant grasses,  upon  the  hands  of  the  united  pair ; and 
pronouncing  their  names,  as  well  as  his  own,  he  ap- 
pealed to  “God  the  Existent,”  and  said,  “ I give  unto 
thee  this  damsel,  adorned  with  jewels,  and  protected 
by  the  Lord  of  creatures  to  which  the  bridegroom 
replied,  “ Well  be  it.”  The  father  of  Hollee  here  pre- 
sented Soobarao  with  a piece  of  gold,  a text  from  the 
Yeda  was  recited,  and  the  affianced  parties  walked 
forth,  while  the  bridegroom  addressed  to  her  the  first 
expressions  of  their  intercourse, — “ May  the  regents 
of  space,  may  air,  the  sun,  and  fire,  dispel  that  anxi- 
ety which  thou  feelest  in  thy  mind,  and  turn  thy 
heart  to  me.  Be  gentle  in  thy  aspect,  and  loy- 
al to  thy  husband — be  fortunate  in  cattle,  am- 
iable in  thy  mind,  and  beautiful  in  thy  person — be 
mother  of  valiant  sons — be  fond  of  delights — be 
cheerful,  and  bring  prosperity  to  us  and  ours.” 
The  skirts  of  her  mantle  were  knotted  together  with 
his  by  her  father,  who  enjoined  them  to  “ be  insepara- 
bly united  in  matters  of  duty,  wealth,  and  love.” 
Fatiguing  and  trivial  were  the  many  subsequent 
ceremonies  Sacrificial  fires  were  lighted  up,  jars  of 
purifying  water  were  arranged,  handsful  of  rice  were 


248 


INDIA. 


prepared,  and  many  formalities  of  expression  were 
recited,  while  the  bride  was  clothed  with  a new  waist- 
cloth  and  scarf ; oblations  of  clarified  butter  were 
made  to  the  fire,  the  moon,  and  the  world,  during 
which  the  bride  was  first  made  to  stand,  and  then  to 
sit  upon  a mat  prepared  for  the  purpose.  A stone 
being  placed  before  her,  she,  with  her  hands  joined  in 
a hollow  form  was  made  to  tread  upon  it  with  the 
toes  of  her  right  foot,  during  this  address  of  the  bride- 
groom, “ Ascend  this  stone — be  firm  like  this  stone — 
distress  my  foe,  and  be  not  subservient  to  my  enemy.” 
The  rice,  which  had  been  previously  consecrated,  was 
now  repeatedly  placed  in  her  hands  and  mixed  with 
butter ; and  she  according  to  direction  opened  her 
hands  allowing  it  to  fall  into  the  fire.  Now  followed 
the  most  emphatic  symbol  of  the  ceremony — being 
conducted  to  the  bridegroom,  he  directed  her  to  step 
successively  into  seven  circles,  while  seven  texts  were 
repeated,  and  the  moment  in  which  the  seventh  circle 
was  trod  upon,  was  declared  the  consummation  of  the 
nuptial  bond,  which  was  now  complete  and  irrevocable. 
A friend  holding  one  of  the  jars  of  water,  approached 
them,  and  poured  the  contents  upon  him  and  her ; 
again  were  their  hands  joined  and  sanctioned  by  sacred 
texts.  Such  a marriage  verily  required  the  prescrip- 
tions of  a ritual  and  the  spiritual  directions  of  a priest. 
Surely  if  oblations  and  the  precise  observance  of  pre- 
scribed ceremonies  could  have  insured  happiness  and 
prosperity,  Hollee  Lutchema  might  have  looked  for- 


WON  AN  IN  INDIA. 


249 


ward  to  many  days  of  uninterrupted  enjoyment  and 
peace  ; but  alas  ! how  vain  and  delusive. 

The  natural  reserve  and  restraint  of  her  temper  un- 
der circumstances  so  novel,  at  first  perceptible  in  her 
intercourse  with  him  who  had  taken  her  into  such  in- 
timate relationship,  gradually  subsided  ; freedom  of 
manner  toward  him,  however,  could  never  be  accom- 
panied with  mutual  confidence.  She  had  not  been 
trained  to  be  an  intelligent  associate,  and  he  had  not 
sought  an  helper  and  equal  who  would  accompany  him 
in  the  ways  of  wisdom,  and  cheer  him  in  affliction. 
The  playfulness  of  sprightly  youth,  and  the  soft  sweet- 
ness of  so  young  a female,  were  soon  abated,  familiarity, 
characterized  by  their  intercourse,  speedily  rendered 
unattractive  her  blandest  smile.  Caprice,  selfishness, 
and  an  undue  estimate,  either  of  the  female  character, 
or  of  the  circumstances  under  which  Hollee  had  been 
tutored,  the  low  standard  fixed  for  woman’s  attractions 
or  merits,  and  the  example  which  had  been  exhibited 
in  his  father’s  house,  conspired,  along  with  occasional 
disappointments,  to  subvert  any  youthful  affection 
which  had  primarily  been  excited  under  auspices  such 
as  we  have  described.  Unaccustomed  to  rule  her  own 
spirit,  or  to  seek  the  enlargement  of  her  own  mind,  the 
first  interview  had  showed  her  to  the  most  advantage, 
and  there  remained  no  hidden  excellences  to  be  devel- 
oped— no  resources  of  enjoyment  which  had  not  at  the 
first  moment  been  presented.  Ill-informed  himself,  her 
husband  had  not  calculated  on  unseen  defects,  or  the 
partial  exhibition  which  a mere  exterior  would  furnish 
11* 


250 


INDIA. 


amidst  the  peculiar  circumstances  of  their  first  ac- 
quaintance. He  soon  became  discontented,  irritable, 
and  violent ; his  requests  were  uttered  with  authority, 
and  his  commands  were  enforced  with  the  severity  of 
exaction.  Speedily  the  connexion  became  one  of  bitter 
rule  and  reluctant  subjection  ; while  the  untoward 
captive  could  ill- brook  the  lordly  despotism  which 
governed  her  as  a slave.  Yet  there  were  moments  in 
which  the  iron  yoke  relaxed,  and  when  the  silken 
cords  of  love  were  felt ; when  woman’s  power  held 
captive  the  imperious  tyrant ; the  bond  of  natural  af- 
fection and  the  sympathies  of  our  better  nature  pre- 
vailing, realized  to  them  the  sweets  of  domestic  union. 
Such  were,  however,  like  angel  visits,  few  and  far  be- 
tween. Years  rolled  on,  the  freshness  of  youth  de- 
cayed, the  cares  of  a family  accumulated  upon  them, 
and  became  a burden  more  to  the  mother  than  to  her 
professed  companion.  There  had  been  in  her  a natural 
ardor  and  a genial  kindness  of  disposition,  which,  had 
they  been  cherished  by  education  and  religion,  might 
have  expanded  into  the  fair  fruits  of  a generous,  bene- 
volent, and  useful  character.  She  often  had  felt  a 
clinging  to  him  as  the  stay  of  her  youth  ; and  even  in 
the  hours  of  discord  would  the  yearnings  of  her  heart 
be  toward  him  who  should  have  proved  the  kindred 
associate  of  her  riper  years.  She  had  no  knowledge  of 
anything  for  which  she  should  live  better  than  her 
husband  and  her  personal  enjoyment ; but  death  waits 
not  our  pleasure  and  convenience.  His  pale  face  in- 
vades the  dwelling  of  the  Hindoo  with  even  more  hasty 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 


251 


steps  and  appalling  look  than  where  a better  religion 
prevails.  Hollee’s  husband  was  visited  with  sickness, 
which,  despite  her  earnest  prayers  and  the  skill  of  tho 
village  doctor,  made  fearful  inroads  on  his  strength. 
She  attended  him  with  incessant  care — wept  and  made 
supplication  to  her  gods — but  all  in  vain  ; for  when 
least  prepared  fcfr  the  event,  he  expired  ! It  required 
at  that  moment  but  little  external  excitement  or  per- 
suasion to  awaken  a wish  that  she  had  died  with  him. 
She  knew  the  dreary  widowhood  before  her — no  re- 
sources had  she  to  sustain  her  agonized  mind — no  friend 
to  say  to  her,  Live  ! She  looked  on  the  right  hand,  and 
the  priest  was  standing  to  direct  her  to  the  only  refuge 
he  deemed  accessible — the  holy  funeral  pile  ! She 
looked  to  the  left,  and  there  those  who  superstitiously 
imagined  they  might  share  in  the  benefit  of  her  immo- 
lation and  the  honor  of  her  sacrifice,  or  otherwise  be 
burdened  by  her  maintenance,  were  waiting,  nay 
pressing  forward  to  urge  her  adoption  of  the  priestly 
counsel.  She  looked  forward,  but  gloom  impenetrable 
hung  over  her  path.  She  cast  her  eyes  upward,  but 
the  heavens  were  sackcloth,  and  the  sun  blood.  She 
turned  within,  and  here  bewildered  with  agitation,  over- 
whelmed with  grief,  flesh  and  heart  failed  her,  and  in  her 
paroxysm  of  sorrow  she  embraced  the  purpose,  and  ut- 
tered the  irrevocable  vow  of  immolation.  Now  the 
priest  thanked  Nurraian  ; the  relatives  expressed  their 
joyful  gratitude  ; aud  the  means  of  sustaining  her  re- 
solution, of  lulling  her  fears,  and  strengthening  her  at- 
tachment to  the  deceased,  were  lavishly  employed.  Her 


children  were  removed  from  her  sight,  stupifving  drugs 
were  abundantly  administered,  her  body  was  perfumed, 
her  hair  saturated  with  oil,  her  head  covered  with  san- 
dal dust,  garlands  of  flowers  were  presented  as  her 
ornaments,  and  she  was  hailed  a favorite  of  the  gods  ! 

A crier  was  employed  to  announce  her  pious  resolution, 

« 

and  the  time  of  the  sacrifice.  The  intelligence  was 
sent  to  me,  with  a solicitation  from  a friend  that  I 
would  attend.  It  was  an  hour  and  a half  before  sun- 
set when  we  reached  the  place  of  ungodly  sacrifice. 
The  husband  was  covered  with  clothes,  and  laid  upon 
a bier  made  from  unpeeled^branches  of  trees,  and  with- 
out ornament.  It  had  been  carried  thither  on  the 
shoulders  of  men,  and  placed  in  a circle  formed  by  the 
officiating  priests,  the  victim,  the  near  relatives  and 
kindred,  and  such  as  were  approaching  to  obtain  the 
last  benediction  of  Hollee.  She  was  attired  in  a sal- 
mon-colored cloth,  and  her  skin  was  deeply  tinged  with 
saffron.  She  was  bent  forward,  as  if  laboring  under 
an  oppressive  burden  ; or  rather,  as  if  inward  anxiety 
and  anguish  had  bowed  her  down  ; yet  she  seemed  to 
smile.  It  was  the  smile  of  sorrow — the  expression  ol 
a heart  which  had  conquered  nature  and  burst  the 
bonds  of  life  itself.  A red  line  was  drawn  from  the 
root  of  her  hair  to  tho  ridge  of  her  nose  ; it  seemed  to 
me  the  mark  of  suicide.  Beside  her  were  bunches  of 
flowers,  clothes,  cocoanuts,  pounded  spices  and  money, 
which  she  distributed  to  the  female  friends  who  camo 
soliciting  her  favors.  She  was  attended  by  two  Brah- 
mins, one  of  whom  held  an  olla  book,  from  which  he 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 


253 


read  sentences  for  her  direction  and  comfort,  at  times 
assisted  by  his  associate.  While  the  poor  woman  and 
priest  were  thus  engaged,  others  were  employed  in 
preparing  the  pile,  which  was  constructed  of  dried 
wood  in  the  shape  of  an  oblong  square,  upon  which 
were  heaped  combustible  faggots  to  the  height  of  four 
feet  from  the  base.  A stout  branch  of  a tree  was  fixed 
in  the  earth  at  each  corner,  which  suspended  a canopy 
of  heavy  boughs  at  about  three  feet  elevation.  After 
the  corpse  was  placed  upon  the  pile,  Hollee  was  led 
around  it  by  a priest,  and  then  walked  twice  around  it 
alone  ; kneeling  by  the  right  side  a few  seconds,  and 
then  mounted  and  lay  down  to  the  left  of  the  deceased. 
Deliberately  she  composed  herself ; her  infant  child 
was  placed  in  her  arms  for  a moment  and  embraced  ; 
she  saluted  her  mother,  and  called  her  sister  to 
whom  she  delivered  her  jewels  ; then  having  loosened 
her  garments,  she  drew  her  cloth  over  her  head  and 
laid  herself  down  beside  her  husband  with  such  calm- 
ness as  if  it  had  been  but  for  a night’s  repose.  They 
then  covered  her  with  straw,  and  poured  oil  and 
melted  butter  over  all  parts  of  the  pile,  the  extremities 
of  which  were  now  lighted  by  the  eldest  male  relative 
of  the  family.  The  straw  fanned  by  the  wind  was  at 
first  suffered  only  to  roll  thick  volumes  of  smoke  over 
her,  and  then  the  suspended  canopy,  cut  down  by  the 
attending  officers,  fell  upon  her  with  its  heavy  crushing 
weight  ! The  poor  woman  had  hitherto  remained 
silent,  but  when  the  flames  had  reached  her  she 
shrieked  and  screamed  for  help  with  piteous  and  heart- 


254 


INDIA. 


rending  exclamations.  The  Brahmin  assured  the 
people  that  she  was  now  in  communion  with  her  god , 
while  the  forlorn  mother,  overwhelmed  with  grief, 
was  rolling  herself,  tearing  her  hair,  beating  her 
breast,  and  leaping  with  frantic  bursts  of  passion, 
striving  to  throw  herself  on  the  altar  of  her  daughter’s 
sacrifice  and  destruction.  The  scene  was  closed  by  the 
fierceness  of  the  flame,  which  drove  the  bystanders  to 
a distance,  and  forced  even  the  priests  to  retire,  while 
the  victim  was  yet  uttering  the  moan  of  helpless  suf- 
fering. Thus  was  offered  upon  the  altar  of  that  san- 
guinary superstition  the  infatuated  Hollee  Lutchema.” 
Such  scenes  as  this,  but  ofttimes  far  more  sickening 
in  their  detail,  have  been  enacted  throughout  India 
from  a period  that  goes  back  into  the  unknown  past. 
While  the  subject  of  its  suppression  by  British  autho- 
rity was  under  discussion,  and  means  were  being  taken 
to  arouse  the  public  mind  of  England  to  the  character 
of  the  custom,  steps  were  pursued  to  ascertain,  with 
all  possible  precision,  the  number  of  annual  immola- 
tions. From  official  returns  for  the  year  1818,  it  ap- 
pears that  eight  hundred  were  thus  sacrificed  during 
that  year  alone  ; making,  with  the  addition  of  the 
other  two  Presidencies,  and  the  vast  Punjaub,  which 
was  not  then  under  British  rule,  at  least  three  thou- 
sand ! It  was  not  till  Lord  William  Bentinck  ascended 
the  vice-regal  throne  of  India,  that  the  mandate  was 
issued  against  these  scenes  of  suicide  and  murder. 

“ Yes,  child  of  Brahma,  then  was  mercy  nigh, 

To  wash  the  stain  of  blood’s  eternal  die  ; 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 


255 


Peace  did  descend  to  triumph  and  to  save, 

When  noble  Bentinck  crossed  the  Indian  wave.” 

And  yet,  though  the  instances  are  far  less  numerous 
and  the  exhibitions  less  public  than  they  once  were,  it 
is  known  that  the  funeral  pile  still  sends  up  its  lurid 
flame,  and  the  trembling  wife  still  submits  to  its  fatal 
torture  in  many  parts  of  the  country.  And  so  will 
they  till  the  Sacred  Scriptures  come  in  to  supplant 
the  Vedas  in  their  teaching  and  spirit.  And  who 
would  not  pray  for  the  coming  of  that  time  ? Reader, 
will  you  ? And  to  your  prayers  will  you  add  your 
endeavors  to  put  them  in  possession  of  that  volume 
which  says,  “ Leave  thy  fatherless  children  and  I will 
protect  them,  and  let  thy  widows  trust  in  me.” 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

HINDOO  CASTE. 

Definition  of  Caste — Four-fold  division — Origin  and  duties  of  Brahmins, 
Kshatiras,  Veishas,  and  Soodras — Pariars — Six  facts  illustrating  the 
evil  influence  of  Caste  upon  its  adherents — Its  anti-social  and  anti- 
benevolent  character — A barrier  to  the  progress  of  Christian  truth — 
A convert  at  Calcutta — Apology  by  Abbe  Du  Bois — Early  Views  of 
Swartz,  Bishop  Heber.  &c. — Action  of  Bishop  Wilson  and  Modern 
Missionaries — Caste  doomed,  and  what  is  now  expected  of  all  converts 
to  Christianity. 


The  word  caste  is  a Portuguese  term,  which  has 
been  adopted  to  denote  the  different  divisions  of  Hin- 
doo Society.  These  are  four  in  number — Brahmins , 
Kshatiras,  Veishas,  and  Sooclras,  with  various  sub- 
divisions under  each  general  class.  A brief  explana- 
tion of  each  order,  with  a few  remarks  and  facts 
illustrative  of  the  whole  subject,  is  all  that  can  now 
be  given. 

At  the  time  the  Vedas  dropped  from  the  mouth  of 
the  exalted  Brahma,  there  were  produced  from  the 
same  facial  orifice,  the  Brahmins  ; indicating  thereby 


HINDOO  CASTE. 


257 


that  their  position  in  community  was  to  be  preeminent 
in  sacredness  and  honor,  and  that  their  duties  were  to 
concern  religious  doctrine  and  ceremony.  The  Smritees 
assign  to  Brahmins  the  offering  of  sacrifices;  the  offices 
of  the  priesthood  ; the  study  of  the  Vedas  ; explaining 
the  Shastras  ; giving  alms ; and  receiving  presents. 
Such  is  their  exalted  position,  that  to  injure  a Brahmin, 
was  the  last  of  pardonable  offences.  Whatever  part 
of  the  body  was  used  in  harming  one  of  the  privileged 
class,  that  part  was,  at  once,  to  be  removed  ; while  to 
do  a beneficent  act  to  this  deified  personage,  would 
atone  for  almost  every  sin,  and  secure  the  highest 
commendation  and  merit.  Such  was  their  exalted 
position,  that  the  Peishwa,  at  the  head  of  the  Mah- 
ratta  confederacy,  who  held  the  most  commanding 
station  of  any  Indian  sovereign,  was  long  excluded 
from  eating  at  table  with  any  Brahmin  of  high  caste. 
Their  peculiarity  of  dress  is  the  poita , cr  sacred 
string,  which  all  of  this  class  wear  over  one  shoulder 
and  under  the  opposite  arm,  and  which  none  but  the 
hands  of  the  “ twice  horn ” are  allowed  to  touch. 

There  has  been  a wonderful  lowering  of  Brahmini- 
cal  pride  and  dignity  since  the  conquest  of  the  coun- 
try by  Europeans.  While  thousands  are  attached  to 
the  temples,  and  subsist  upon  the  revenues  of  ecclesi- 
astical lands,  others  are  employed  in  courts  of  justice, 
as  pundits  to  foreigners  in  the  acquisition  of  the  lan- 
guage, as  merchants,  accountants,  and  even  as  farmers 
and  soldiers.  But,  still,  as  a class,  they  stand,  by 
universal  acknowledgment,  first  in  Hindoo  society. 


258 


INDIA. 


From  the  arm  of  Brahma  sprang  the  Kshatiras, 
who  were  created  to  “ protect  the  earth,  the  cattle, 
and  Brahmins.”  Kings,  governors,  all  to  whom  are 
entrusted  civil  and  military  affairs,  belong  to  this 
class. 

Then  followed  the  Veislias , who  were  produced  from 
the  thighs  of  the  Supreme,  and  have,  as  their  as- 
signed vocation,  to  provide  the  necessaries  of  life  by 
agriculture  and  traffic.  They  are  the  farmers  and  mer- 
chants of  the  land. 

While  last  of  the  four,  are  the  Soodras,  the  off- 
spring of  the  feet  of  Deity,  as  denoting  the  servile 
pursuits  to  which  they  are  to  devote  themselves. 

In  addition  to  these,  there  are  the  Pariars,  who  are 
esteemed  the  “ outcasts  of  society,  the  refuse  of  man- 
kind,— the  men  of  infamy  and  degradation — persons 
with  whom  the  least  of  any  of  the'  preceding  castes 
will  have  no  intercourse,  being  consigned  to  igno- 
miny and  subjection  forever.” 

“ Is  caste  a civil  or  religious  institution  ?”  Both,  I 
answer;  but  eminently  the  latter.  The  distinctions  it 
establishes  are  of  Divine  decree,  and  subjects  of  sacred 
record.  Its  effects  upon  all  social  relations  are  imme- 
diate and  direct,  but  without  the  religious  element  it 
could  not  have  retained  its  vitality  so  long,  and  pro- 
duced such  results  as  we  now  witness. 

In  the  place  of  farther  didactic  statement,  I will  pre- 
sent the  reader  with  several  facts  and  occurrences  by 
which  he  may  judge  of  the  strong  hold  this  system 


HINDOO  CASTE. 


259 


has  upon  the  Hindoos,  and  the  inhuman  results  with 
which  it  is  often  attended. 

I.  “ I once  happened  to  be  present  when  a sepoy 
of  high  caste,  falling  down  in  a faint,  the  military 
surgeon  ordered  one  of  the  Pariah  attendants  of  the 
hospital  to  throw  some  water  upon  him,  in  consequence 
of  which,  none  of  his  class  would  associate  with  him, 
because  he  had  forfeited  the  privileges  of  his  clanship. 
The  result  was  that,  soon  after,  he  put  the  muzzle  to 
his  head,  and  blew  out  his  brains.” 

II.  “ I once  saw  a high  caste  Hindoo  dash  an  earth- 
en jar  of  milk  upon  the  ground,  and  break  it  to  atoms, 
merely  because  the  shadoio  of  a Pariah  had  fallen 
upon  it  as  he  passed .” 

III.  “As  I entered  the  dwelling,  I saw,  lying  upon 
the  centre  of  the  floor,  a man  of  middle  age,  appa- 
rently near  his  end,  while  at  a little  distance  was  his 
wife,  much  in  the  same  state.  A little  girl  was  kneel- 
ing at  their  side,  asking,  in  an  earnest,  bitter  tone, 
for  rice.  I called  to  a servant,  who  had  accompanied 
me,  to  bring  a basket  of  provisions,  which  I opened 
before  the  child,  when  the  unhappy  father,  turning  his 
eye  upon  me  with  a look  of  horror,  threw  out  his  arms 
like  a maniac,  seized  the  famishing  creature,  dragged 
it  from  the  polluted  food,  and  fell  back  dead.” 

IY.  “ Shortly  after  our  arrival  at  Bangalore,  the  roof 
of  our  house  was  under  repair ; and  one  of  the  brick- 
layers fell  from  a great  height,  and  was  much  injured. 
To  relieve  the  sufferer,  we  called  upon  the  workmen, 
standing  near,  to  run  to  the  well  and  bring  some 


260 


INDIA. 


water.  Not  one  of  them  would  stir  ; for,  said  they, 
that  man  is  not  of  our  caste , and  we  are  not  allowed 
to  give  him  water.” 

V.  A Kshratiya,  whose  son  had  rejected  caste,  sought 
an  asylum  at  that  son’s  house,  just  before  death;  yet 
so  strong  were  the  prejudices  of  caste,  that  the  old 
man  would  not  eat  from  the  hands  of  his  own  son, 
but  crawled,  on  his  hands  and  knees,  to  the  house  of 
a neighbor,  and  received  food  from  entire  strangers, 
rather  than  from  his  own  child,  though,  then,  on  the 
brink  of  eternity. 

YI.  Several  buildings  were  on  fire  in  Madras,  and 
which  threatened  a general  conflagration  of  the  city. 
There  were  several  wells  near  at  hand,  but  the  Brah- 
mins forbade  the  use  of  the  water,  lest  a person  of 
lower  caste  than  themselves,  should  approach,  and  thus 
pollute  them. 

These  instances  might  be  greatly  multiplied,  but 
they  are  sufficient  for  the  purpose  now  in  hand.  They 
illustrate  the  dissocial,  selfish,  and  unmerciful  charac- 
ter of  this  institution.  Some  have  supposed  that  the 
system  is  productive  of  benefit,  as  it  respects  mechan- 
ical operations  ; because  an  employment  descends  from 
father  to  son,  through  successive  generations ; but  ex- 
perience disproves  this  theory.  The  fabrics  and  orna- 
ments of  India  are,  many  of  them,  very  beautiful,  and 
justly  admired  ; but  there  have  been  no  improvements 
for  centuries  past.  There  is  no  invention,  no  discovery, 
no  progress  in  workmanship  throughout  that  country, 
as  in  lands  where  no  such  system  exists.  Caste 


HINDOO  CASTE. 


2G1 

is  a foe  to  all  generous  and  noble  feeling.  It  binds, 
in  chains  of  adamant,  a large  portion  of  every  com- 
munity, saying  to  them  : “ You  proceeded  from  the 
feet  of  Brahma ; you  are  created  for  servitude.”  Tt 
limits  the  social  circle  to  a comparatively  few  persons, 
to  the  careful  exclusion  of  all  the  rest,  however  worthy 
in  character  and  commendable  in  deportment.  A 
Brahmin  would  sooner  see  a Soodra  die  than  give  him 
food,  if,  in  so  doing,  he  must  touch  the  body  or  clothes 
of  the  debased  one.  It  is  said  that  a company  of  the 
professed  teachers  of  right  and  duty  will  stand  upon 
the  river’s  bank,  and  see  a boat  load  of  Pariars  go  to 
the  bottom,  rather  than  use  any  personal  effort  to  save 
them  from  death.  And  how  ungodlike,  unchristian, 
too ! The  Bible  directs  that  we  “ do  to  others  as  we 
would  have  them  do  to  us and  commends  the  Sa- 
maritan, who  bound  up  the  bleeding  sufferer,  while  it 
condemns  the  Levite,  who,  (Brahmin  like,)  would  let 
him  die  of  his  wounds.  Caste  has  done  more  than 
aught  else  to  make  India  what,  it  is,  a land  of  limited 
attainments,  selfish  propensities,  and  grovelling  aims. 

“If  a Brahmin  break  caste,  can  he  regain  it?”  Not 
generally,  but  it  has  been  done.  After  the  establish- 
ment of  the  English  power  in  Bengal,  the  caste  of  a 
Brahmin  was  destroyed  by  an  European,  who  forced 
into  his  mouth,  flesh,  spirits,  &c.  After  remaining 
three  years  an  outcast,  great  efforts  were  made,  at  an 
expense  of  80,000  rupees,  ($40,000,)  to  regain  his 
rank,  but  in  vain.  After  a time,  an  expense  of  two 
lacs  more,  ($100,000,)  were  incurred,  when  he  was 


262 


INDIA. 


restored  to  his  friends.  About  the  year  1802,  a per- 
son, in  Calcutta,  expended  in  feasting  and  presents  to 
Brahmins,  50,000  rupees,  ($25,000,)  to  obtain  his  lost 
rank.  Other  methods  have  of  late  been  discovered, 
but  the  lapsed  ones  never  become  what  they  formerly 
were  in  public  estimation,  sanctity  and  honor.  The 
stain,  though  not  so  visible  as  before  these  gifts  and 
atonements,  is  not  wholly  washed  out.  “ In  some 
parts  of  the  country,  the  inhabitants  do  things  with 
impunity,  which  in  other  sections  would  cause  the 
loss  of  caste.  In  the  upper  provinces,  the  regula- 
tions regarding  eating,  are  far  less  regarded  than 
in  Bengal ; while  other  features  are  guarded  with 
greater  anxiety.” 

It  will  occur  to  my  reader  that  caste  presents  a 
formidable  barrier  to  the  progress  and  triumph  of 
Christianity  in  India.  It  does  so ; one  of  the  most 
formidable  that  can  be  named  or  conceived.  It  pre- 
vents the  Christian  teacher  from  gaining  that  free 
and  familiar  intercourse  with  the  people,  so  important 
in  securing  for  the  truth  deliberate  examination,  and 
an  impartial-judgment.  All  foreigners  are  considered 
as  belonging  to  the  lowest  class,  and  are,  therefore,  for- 
bidden that  social  intercourse  at  the  table  and  in  the 
family,  which  furnishes  so  favorable  an  occasion  for 
giving  a personal  direction  to  his  public  instructions. 
The  state  of  heart  produced  by  this  institution  is  un- 
favorable to  the  reception  of  Bible  doctrine  and  spirit. 
When  a Hindoo  enters  a place  of  worship,  his  first  ob- 
ject is  to  secure  a seat  where  he  shall  be  sure  of  avoid- 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 


2G3 


ing  a contact  with  persons  of  a lower  grade  than  him- 
self. He  is  solicitous,  in  the  extreme,  to  allow  no  part 
of  his  dress  to  touch  that  of  one  descended  from  less 
honored  parentage.  How  opposed  is  such  a disposition 
to  that  humble  and  contrite  spirit  with  which  the  Most 
High  delights  to  dwell  ! 

It  presents  a formidable  barrier  in  the  way  of  con- 
fessing the  name  of  Christ  and  becoming  his  disciple. 
To  “ lose  caste''  is,  to  the  native  of  India,  one  of  the 
most  dreaded  of  evils.  It  is  renunciation  of  friend- 
ships, intimate  and  long  existent,  of  honors  enjoyed 
through  a succession  of  years,  and,  until  lately,  an 
entire  of  the  paternal  estate  and  inherited  wealth.  A 
person  may  be  wicked,  profane,  devoid  of  every  good 
principle,  and  an  abandoned  profligate,  and  yet,  as  a 
Hindoo,  may  enjoy  all  the  privileges  of  his  caste;  but 
the  moment  he  violates  any  of  its  rules  by  eating 
with  one  of  another  class,  by  journeying  to  a distant 
country  to  extend  his  observation  of  men  and  things, 
by  dealing  in  articles  which  the  Shastras  prohibit,  by 
examining  into  the  claims  of  another  system  of  religious 
belief  than  his  own  and  then  espousing  it — that  mo- 
ment he  exposes  himself  to  the  most  dreadful  denuncia- 
tions. “ Tso  persons  can  receive  the  miscreant  into  their 
houses,  or  hold  any  intercourse  with  him  ; every  one 
agrees  to  cover  him  with  ridicule,  contempt  and  dis- 
dain ; to  be  seen  with  him  would  be  deemed  a crime 
worthy  of  reprehension  ; the  woman  to  whom  he  was 
betrothed  would  not  be  allowed  to  marry  him  ; all  de- 
nounce him  as  the  veriest  vagabond,  and  his  parents 


264 


INDIA. 


and  friends  must  be  the  first  to  disown  him,  and 
shower  curses  on  his  head.”  The  barrier  this  opposes 
to  an  examination  of  the  truth,  and,  above  all,  to 
its  espousal,  will  occur  to  every  reader.  If  a Hindoo 
be  convinced  that  the  Bible  is  Heaven-descended, 
he  must  become  a martyr  the  same  hour  he  becomes 
a public  and  declared  believer.  He  must  literally 
“ forsake  all,”  to  become  a Christian.  While  this 
has,  no  doubt,  kept  back  many  from  making  a pro- 
fession of  faith  and  attachment,  who  would  otherwise 
have  become  formalists  and  hypocrites,  it  has  deterred 
others  who  are  sincere  inquirers  after  truth  from  pur- 
suing their  investigations,  and,  farther  still,  from  obey- 
ing the  decisions  of  their  judgment,  and  convictions 
of  conscience.  A single  case  must  suffice,  by  way 
of  illustration  : — “Naraputsingh,  a convert  in  Bengal, 
during  the  days  of  his  heathenism,  lived  like  a nabob, 
with  his  train  of  servants,  and  splendor  of  oriental 
equipage.  But  the  moment  he  submitted  to  the  ordi- 
nance of  baptism,  and  embraced  the  truth,  his  rela- 
tives seized  upon  his  property,  to  the  amount  of 
$40,000,  since  which  time  he  has  been  laboring  for 
the  support  of  himself  and  family,  at  $5  per  month. 
The  Abbe  Dubois  has  a long  chapter  in  advocacy  of 
this  system,  as  that  by  which  India  kept  up  her 
head  when  all  Europe  was  plunged  in  barbarism,  pre- 
served and  extended  the  arts,  the  sciences  and  civili- 
zation;” but  the  farther  my  observation  extended, 
when  a resident  of  that  country,  and  the  more  I have 
learned,  through  the  remarks  and  pages  of  others,  the 


WOMAN  IN  INDIA. 


265 


more  deeply  I am  convinced  that  it  is  an  evil,  with 
scarcely  a feature  to  relieve  its  bitterness — with 
hardly  a ray  to  cheer  its  darkness.  For  a time,  it  was 
to  an  extent  allowed  in  the  Christian  churches,  from 
the  impression  of  its  social  character,  and  therefore 
beyond  the  pale  of  direct  ecclesiastical  direction.  The 
eminent  Swartz  and  his  colleagues,  and  the  amiable 
Heber,  were  so  disposed  to  regard  and  treat  it.  But 
when  we  see  one  communicant  refusing  the  sacra- 
mental cup  because  it  had  touched  the  lips  of  one  of 
lower  birth — or  a Christian  catechist  declining  to  call 
upon  a fellow  disciple,  only  because  of  his  less  honored 
origin — or  a professed  follower  of  Christ  absenting 
himself  from  a “love  feast,”  only  because  the  food 
may  have  been  prepared  by  the  same  person  who 
served  his  own  religious  teacher,  it  is  surely  quite 
time  for  the  Church  to  interfere,  and  say,  with  kind- 
ness, yet  decision,  these  things  ought  not,  cannot  so 
remain — this  is  not  the  spirit  of  the  Grospel,  and  must 
be  eschewed  by  all  who  “name  the  name  of  Christ.” 
And  such  is  the  present  decision  and  action.  The 
Bishop  of  Calcutta,  Dr.  "Wilson,  has  spoken  boldly, 
and  with  authority — some  may  say,  with  a little  too 
much  severity — and  yet  other  churches  are  coming 
round  to  his  views.  As  a system,  it  will  henceforth 
find  no  favor  with  the  promoters  of  Christianity  in 
that  land.  He  who  would  become  a Christian  must 
renounce  caste  heartily  and  practically.  Not  that  he 
will  be  compelled  to  intermarry  with  those  of  lower 

social  grades,  or  be  upon  terms  of  familiar  intercourse 

12 


266 


INDIA. 


with  Soodras  and  Pariars — but  he  will  not  regard 
himself  as  by  right  of  birth  their  superior  in  moral 
excellence,  or  entitled  by  a divine  decree  to  immuni- 
ties and  prerogatives  which  they  are  forever  denied. 
He  must  be  willing  to  say,  with  conscious  honesty, 
Ye  are  my  brethren — all. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

RELIGION  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 

Design  of  the  Chapter — Brahm — Brahma — Vishnu — Siva — Ganesa — 
Supramunman — Doorga — Kalee — Latchmi — Sarasvati  — Munmuthan 
— Indru — Soory  u — Kartikeya — r avuna — V uroona  — Ynmu  — Weak- 
ness of  them  all — Immorality — Character  of  the  worshippers — What 
can  elevate  India—  Appeal  to  the  Reeder. 

It  is  intended,  in  the  present  chapter,  to  present  the 
reader  with  a brief  view  of  Hindooism,  as  a system  of 
revealed  religion.  India  has  its  sacred  Vedas  and 
Shastras,  which  claim  to  communicate  all  that  need 
be  known  regarding  the  character  of  the  Supreme,  with 
the  modes  of  performing  acceptable  worship,  and  of 
securing  the  divine  blessing.  These  ancient  and  vo- 
luminous records  teach  the  existence  of  one  universal 
Spirit,  the  fount  and  origin  of  all  other  beings,  ani- 
mate or  inanimate,  material  or  immaterial.  To  this 
supreme  Divinity  is  given  the  incommunicable  name 
of  Brahm  ; a noun  in  the  neuter  gender,  as  indicating 
the  negative  mode  of  his  existence,  and  to  be  distin- 
guished from  Brahvia,  the  distinctive  title  of  the  first 


268 


INDIA. 


in  the  Hindoo  Triad.  Of  this  great,  self-existent,  in- 
dependent, and  eternal  One,  we  are  told  in  the  Shas- 
tras  that  he  resides  in  perpetual  silence,  takes  no 
interest  in  the  affairs  of  the  universe,  finding  his  hap- 
piness in  undisturbed  repose.  They  add,  that  though 
all  spirit  and  without  form,  he  is  devoid  of  qualities, 
without  will,  without  consciousness  of  his  own  exist- 
ence, immersed  in  an  abyss  of  unrelieved  darkness  and 
gloom.  He  is  one,  say  they,  not  genetically,  as  pos- 
sessed of  a divine  nature  ; not  hypostaticaf/y , as  simple 
and  uncompounded  ; not  numerically , as  the  only  ac- 
tual deity,  but  the  sole  entity,  whether  created  or  un- 
created. “ His  oneness  is  so  absolute,  that  it  not  only 
excludes  the  possibility  of  any  other  god,  co-ordinate 
and  subordinate,  but  excludes  the  possibility  of  aught 
else,  human  or  angelic,  material  or  immaterial.”  He 
is  thus,  as  one  well  says,  an  “ infinite  negative — an 
infinite  nothing .”  This  is  the  supreme  deity  of  that 
land,  mysterious,  unapproachable,  indescribable — in 
truth,  unintelligible;  and  whom  deists  and  infidels  have 
boastfully  referred  to  as  the  counterpart  of  Jehovah  ; 
but  from  whom,  by  the  absence  of  all  moral  qualities, 
all  supervision  of  human  affairs,  all  intelligent  and 
worthy  attributes,  he  is  placed  at  a remove  immeasur- 
able, infinite.  The  Hindoos  are  not  atheists  in  the 
sense  of  a chance  creation  of  all  beings  and  things. 
Their  system  is  rather,  in  its  original  state,  refined  and 
sublimated  Pantheism , all  visible  things  being  but 
manifestations  of  his  essence.  With  a verbal  change, 
wo  may  adopt  the  poet’s  couplet : 


RELIGION  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


269 


“ All  are  but  parts  of  this  mysterious  whole, 

Whose  body  nature  is,  and  Brahm  the  soul.” 

The  authors  of  the  Hindoo  system,  like  the  Grecian 
philosophers,  found  a difficulty  in  conceiving  how  pure 
spirit  could  exert,  any  energy,  and  especially  an  energy 
sufficient  to  form  a world.  When,  therefore,  the  su- 
preme Brahm  willed  to  create  the  world,  he  drew  forth 
from  himself  three  hypostases,  to  which  were  given 
the  names  of  Brahma,  Vishnu,  and  Siva.  These  con- 
stitute the  celebrated  Hindoo  Triad,  of  whom  the 
sacred  books  declare  that  “ They  were  originally  united 
in  one  essence  and  from  one  essence  were  derived,  and 
that  the  great  One  became  distinctly  known  as  three 
gods,  being  one  person  and  three  gods.”  It  may  in- 
terest the  reader  to  have  a fuller  acquaintance  with 
the  history  of  these  divine  personages. 

BRAHMA. 

This  deity  is  usually  represented  as  a man  with  four 
faces,  riding  on  a swan,  and  holding  in  one  of  his  four 
hands  a portion  of  the  Vedas  ; in  the  second,  a pot  of 
water  ; while  the  third  is  raised  upward  to  indicate 
protection  ; and  the  fourth  declined  downward,  as  be- 
stowing a gift.  He  is  variously  styled  the  “ self-ex- 
istent” (falsely  though,  for  he  sprang  from  Brahm),  the 
“ great  father,”  the  t!  lord  of  creatures,”  and,  more 
appropriately,  the  “ creator.”  He  is  reputed  to  have 
had  originally  five  heads,  having  lost  one  for  a reason 
upon  which  his  biographers  are  divided  in  opinion. 
That  given  in  the  Skanda  Purana  is  as  follows  : “ The 


270 


INDIA. 


linga  (or  sacred  symbol)  of  Siva  fell  by  tbe  curse  of  a 
Rishi  from  heaven,  and  increased  in  such  height  that 
it  filled  heaven  and  hell.  In  order  to  see  it,  Brahma, 
Vishnu,  and  the  other  gods  assembled,  and  in  the 
midst  of  their  wonder  they  called  out,  “ Who  can  reach 
to  its  extremity  ?”  Vishnu  descended  to  hell,  and 
Brahma  went  upwards  ; but  neither  search  proved 
successful.  Brahma,  under  the  influence  of  shame, 
hired  the  cow  kama  and  the  tree  ketaku  as  false  wit- 
nesses, and  asserted  three  times  that  he  had  seen  the 
end.  The  gods,  knowing  the  falsehood  of  his  declara- 
tion, deprived  him  by  their  curse  of  all  worship,  and 
Siva  cut  off  one  of  his  heads.”  Be  the  cause  what  it 
may,  there  is  but  one  temple  to  his  honor  erected  in 
the  land,  and  he  receives  less  direct*  reverence  than 
almost  any  of  the  celestials. 

VISHNU. 

This  second  of  the  Triinurti,  or  Triad,  appears  as  a 
blue  man,  riding  on  a skate,  and  holding  in  his  four 
hands  a war-club,  conch  shell,  a weapon  called  chakra, 
and  a water-lily.  He  has  other  names,  as  Narayana, 
Prumahl,  &c.,  and  is  worshipped  as  the  Pervader,  or 
the  personification  of  the  preserving  principle.  Tho 
Puranas  mention  ten  avatars,  descents,  or  incarnations 
of  this  god,  of  which  nine  are  these,  a fish,  a tortoise , 
a boar , a man-monster , a dwarf  a giant,  Rama  (hero 
of  Ramayanam),  Krshna,  Budha,  and  the  tenth,  which 
is  still  expected,  a lohite  horse.  On  each  visit  wonders 
were  performed,  which  we  cannot  even  allude  to  for 


RELIGION  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


271 


want  of  room.  His  moral  (?)  character  appears  from 
this  incident..  When  the  sea  was  churned  to  recover 
the  ambrosia  (Mount  Mandra  being  the  churning  stick, 
a five-headed  snake,  Yaysooke,  the  rope,  and  the  de- 
mons called  Asuras  the  workmen),  Akabai  and 
Lakshmi,  two  maiden  sisters,  arose  at  the  same  time. 
Yishnu  perceiving  Lakshmi  to  be  the  more  beautiful, 
wished  to  marry  her  ; but  not  being  able  to  accomplish 
tho  object  until  the  elder  was  disposed  of,  he  deceived 
the  Rishi  TJddakala  as  to  Akabai’s  beauty  and  excel- 
lences, which  induced  him  to  marry  her,  while  he  es- 
poused the  woman  of  his  choice.  The  followers  of  this 
divinity  form  one  of  the  twofold  divisions  of  Hindoo 
society — tKe  Yishnuvites. 


SIVA. 

This  destroyer  of  mankind  is  seen  as  a silver  colored 
man,  with  five  heads  and  eight  hands,  in  six  of  which 
are  severally  a skull,  a deer,  fire,  an  axe,  a rosary,  and 
and  an  elephant  rod,  while  the  seventh  is  open  in  the 
attitude  of  blessing,  and  the  last  of  protecting.  He 
has  a third  eye  in  his  forehead,  with  perpendicular  cor- 
ners, ear-rings  of  snakes,  and  a collar  of  skulls.  At 
the  end  of  each  series  of  the  four  yoogas,  Siva  drowns, 
and  then  remodels  the  earth  ; his  name  being  more 
properly  the  ncw-modeller,  or  reproducer.  One  form 
in  which  this  deity  is  worshipped  is  as  the  Imgum, 
which  the  classical  reader  will  understand  when  I say 
that  it  resembles  the  phalli  of  the  G-reeks.  It  is  ex- 
posed to  public  view  the  country  over.  Siva  has  a vast 


272 


INDIA. 


number  of  worshippers,  some  of  whom  deem  him  supe- 
rior to  Brahma  himself.  One  of  his  consorts  is  the 
sanguinary  Kalee,  another  is  the  more  pacific  Doorga, 
of  both  of  whom  we  shall  speak  before  concluding  the 
chapter.  The  disciples  of  this  deity  are  entitled  Sivites. 

This  triad  has  given  birth  to  a great  number  of  ad- 
ditional deities,  some  of  whom  are  held  in  scarcely 
less  reverence  than  the  original.  Of  these  three  hun- 
dred and  thirty  millions  of  divinities,  I will  notice 
but  a few  of  the  more  prominent. 

Ganesa  is  the  elder  son  of  Siva  and  Parvuti.  With 
his  elephant  face,  big  belly,  and  four  hands,  he  pre- 
sents a strange  and  repulsive  appearance.  But  for  all 
this,  no  deity  is  more  often  named  than  He.  Being 
esteemed  the  work-perfecter,  or,  one  who  can  place 
and  remove  obstacles,  he  is  always  invoked  at  the 
commencement  of  any  undertaking  or  enterprise.  Be- 
fore a journey,  writing  a letter,  studying  a book, 
and  the  like,  Ganesa  is  upon  the  lips  of  the  traveller 
or  student.  This  eminent  position  was  given  to  him 
as  a compensation  for  the  strange  head  he  wears,  which 
was  put  upon  his  shoulders  when  he  lost  his  own,  in 
infancy,  by  a look  of  the  celestial  Shunee. 

Subramunman,  the  Hindoo  Mars,  &c.,  special 
guardian  of  the  Brahminical  order,  is  represented 
with  six  faces,  twelve  arms,  riding  on  a peacock, 
and  holding  in  his  hands  severally  a bow,  an  arrow,  a 
conch,  a circle,  a sword,  a rope,  a trident,  a diamond- 
weapon,  fire,  a dart,  a crescent-shaped  weapon,  and  a 
drum.  He  is  specially  worshipped  at  Secandar  Mali, 


RELIGION  OF  THE  HINDOOS.  273 

near  Madura,  Trichendoor,  Pyney,  Tirueragaram,  and 
all  the  hill  country. 

Doorga , who  combines  the  characteristics  of  Miner- 
va, Pallas,  and  Juno,  is  one  of  the  wives  of  Siva.  Her 
original  name  was  Parvuti,  but,  having,  by  a display 
of  extraordinary  valor,  defeated  a giant  named  Doorga, 
she  was  thenceforth  dignified  with  the  name  of  her 
conquered  foe.  This  monster  is  supposed  by  some  to 
be  a personification  of  Vice,  and  Doorga,  of  Virtue ; 
while  the  struggle  typified  the  action  and  reaction  of 
good  and  evil  in  the  world.  The  festival  in  honor  of 
this  goddess,  celebrated  in  the  month  of  September, 
has  no  superior  for  magnificence  of  entertainment  and 
imposing  appearance  in  the  country.  At  the  celebra 
tion  of  one  festival,  a wealthy  Hindoo  has  beeu 
known  to  give  80,000  lbs.  of  sweetmeats,  80,000  lba. 
of  sugar,  1,000  suits  of  cloth  garments,  1,000  suits  of 
silk,  1,000  offerings  of  rice,  plantains  and  other 
fruits.  In  the  single  city  of  Calcutta,  it  is  sup- 
posed that  half  a million  pounds  sterling  are  annual- 
ly expended  on  the  Doorga  festival  alone. 

Kalee,  another  of  Siva’s  wives,  is  the  Moloch  of  the 
land.  Her  appearance  indicates  her  character.  She 
is  represented  as  standing  with  one  foot  upon  the 
chest  of  her  husband,  Siva,  whom  she  has  thrown 
down  in  a fit  of  anger  ; her  tongue,  dyed  with  blood, 
is  protruding  from  her  mouth ; she  is  adorned  with 
skulls,  and  the  hands  of  her  slain  enemies  are  sus- 
pended from  her  girdle.  The  blood  of  a tiger  delights 
her  for  ten  years  ; — of  a human  being  for  one  thou- 
12* 


274 


INDIA. 


sand  years.  If  any  of  her  worshippers  draw  the  blood 
from  his  own  person,  and  offer  it  her,  she  will  be  in 
raptures  of  joy  ; but  if  he  cut  out  a piece  of  flesh  for 
a burnt-offering,  her  delight  is  beyond  bounds.  But, 
though  thus  sanguinary  and  malevolent,  Kal6e  is  one 
of  the  favorite  deities  among  the  Hindoos.  The 
Swinging  Festival  and  other  observances,  to  be  al- 
luded to  in  detail  hereafter,  are  in  her  honor — being 
designed  to  avert  her  wrath,  or  secure  her  blessing. 
She  is  the  especial  friend  of  thieves  and  murderers, 
who  invoke  her  blessing  before  entering  upon  their 
deeds  of  violence  and  death. 

Latclimi , the  goddess  of  fortune,  is  the  wife  of  Vish- 
nu, before  alluded  to.  Painted  yellow,  she  sits  upon 
an  expanded  water-lily,  holding  in  two  hands  the 
lotus,  while  the  others  are  employed  in  protecting  and 
blessing.  She  is  worshipped  in  a manner  the  opposite 
of  the  fiendish  Kalee. 

Sarasvati , patroness  of  learning  and  music,  is  wife 
of  Brahma.  Dressed  in  white  raiment,  with  a gar- 
land of  diamonds,  she  holds  in  her  four  hands  a part 
of  the  Vedas,  a string  of  crystals,  a musical  instru- 
ment ; while,  with  the  fourth,  she  seems  to  be  illus- 
trating some  problem.  She  is  the  peaceable  Minerva 
of  Greece  and  Rome,  inventress  of  the  fine  and  use- 
ful arts.  Festivals  in  her  honor  are  largely  attende  l 
by  those  especially  who  need  her  peculiar  blessings. 

Munmulhan  is  the  Indian  cupid  ; the  “ beautiful 
son  of  Brahma,  who  bears  the  five  flowery  arrows  which 
inflame  with  love  the  inhabitants  of  the  three  worlds.” 


RELIGION  OF  THE  HINDOOS. 


275 


He  is  represented,  allegorically,  as  conveyed  by  females 
so  united  as  to  form  the  body  of  an  elephant — thus  ex- 
pressing the  illusion  which  he  causes — and  as  having 
his  quiver  at  his  back,  and  in  his  hand  his  bow  of  sugar- 
cane, with  a string  composed  of  honey  bees,  and  arrows 
of  flowers. 

To  these  may  be  added  Indru,  king  of  heaven,  with 
his  thousand  eyes,  a thunderbolt  in  his  right  hand,  and 
bow  in  his  left  ; Sooryu,  with  his  red  face  and  three 
eyes,  and  four  arms,  whose  followers  never  eat  till  they 
have  seen  the  sun,  and  fast  if  he  be  obscured  by  clouds  ; 
Pavuna,  god  of  the  winds  and  messenger  of  the  celes- 
tials , Vuroona , god  of  the  waters ; Yumu,  judge  of 
the  dead,  who  sends  to  hell  or  heaven  as  the  case  de- 
mands ; and  scores  of  others  with  whose  names,  duties, 
and  characters  I will  not  weary  my  reader.  While  I 
have  attempted  to  be  brief,  it  was  demanded  by  my 
subject  that  I make  a somewhat  complete  mention  of 
leading  persons  in  the  pantheon. 

Two  features  in  the  character  of  this  entire  class  of 
celestials  arrest  attention  ; their  limited  physical  and 
mental  faculties,  together  with  the  entire  absence  of 
all  moral  qualities.  In  illustration  of  the  first  point,  look 
at  Brahma.  He  is  said  at  one  time  to  have  performed 
a long  course  of  ascetic  devotions  to  secure  a desired 
object,  and  after  all  failed  of  success  ; whereupon  he 
he  sat  down  and  wept  from  very  chagrin  and  sorrow. 
As  to  morality,  there  is  not  the  first  element  of  truth, 
modesty,  or  goodness  in  one  of  them.  See  Brahma  in 
in  a fit.  of  intoxication  attempting  the  virtue  of  his  own 


276 


INDIA. 


daughter,  and  Yishnu  telling  a palpable  falsehood  to 
secure  his  favorite  object,  and  Siva  worshipped  under 
an  emblem  too  immodest  to  be  named,  and  Krishna 
sporting  with  milkmaids  in  a state  of  shameless  nudity. 

I pause  at  this  point,  and  ask  my  reader  to  form  his 
own  judgment  as  to  what  must  be  the  religious  insti- 
tutions acceptable  to  such  beings,  and  what  the  state 
of  morals  in  a land  of  such  divine  personages.  The 
characteristic  features  of  the  Gospel  system  are  holiness 
and  mercy , because  these  are  the  leading  attributes  in 
the  Being  adored.  “ Be  ye  holy,  for  I am  holy." 
“ Love  one  another,  for  God  is  love"  “ Be  ye  mer- 
ciful, even  as  your  Father  in  heaven  is  merciful." 
View  the  gods  of  India,  false  to  their  word,  thievish 
licentious,  ambitious,  murderous,  all  indeed  that  is 
repellant,  malignant,  and  vile,  (their  own  writers  being 
judges.)  is  it  surprising  that  there  is  perjury,  and  in- 
justice, and  wickedness  the  land  over  ? Ah  no  ! The 
people  are  bad,  many  of  them  very  bad  ; but  they  do. 
not  and  cannot  equal  their  own  gods  in  wickedness. 
Their  deities  must  be  changed  ere  their  moral  condition 
can  be  materially  and  generally  improved.  The  Bible 
must  supplant  the  narratives  of  their  false  divinities; 
their  temples,  covered  now  with  sculptures  and  paint- 
ings which  crimson  the  face  of  modesty  even  to  glanco 
at,  must  be  demolished  ; the  vile  lingam  must  be  lev- 
elled to  the  ground  ; the  festivals,  in  which  are  re-en- 
acted shameless  events  in  the  lives  of  Krishna,  and 
others  like  him,  must  be  abolished  ; the  scenes  now 
passing  before  the  eyes  of  that  nation,  sanctioned  by 


RELIGION  OF  THE  HINDOOS 


277 


divine  example,  must  cease.  Then  will  India  rise  from 
her  deep  moral  depression. 

Reader,  is  not  this  a desirable  result  ? "While  pe- 
rusing these  pages,  has  not  the  thought  occurred,  “ Oh, 
that  they  knew  what  I do  of  the  true  God  ?”  It  is  a 
generous  emotion,  becoming  you  as  a philanthropist 
and  Christian.  Stifle  it  not,  but  resolve  that  if  the 
Hindoos  remain  longer  in  the  bonds  of  ignorance,  the 
fault  shall  not  be  yours. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


HIND00TSM  IN  PRACTICE. 

Facts  indicating  the  Religious  tendency  of  the  Hindoos — Car  Drawing- 
Sailing — Hook  Swinging— Passing  through  the  Fire — Other  and  like 
Observances — Quotation  from  Bishop  Heber  respecting  the  Moral 
Character  of  the  Hindoos. 

Having  treated  of  Hindooism  in  theory,  and  as 
taught  in  the  sacred  Shastras,  the  reader’s  attention  is 
now  requested  to  this  religious  system  as  acted  out  by 
its  disciples.  The  native  of  India  does  not  consider 
it  enough  simply  to  express  his  assent  to  certain  dog- 
mas, and  with  that  be  satisfied  ; but  to  a verbal  con- 
fession of  Brahma  and  his  faith,  is  added  a consecration, 
personal,  self-sacrificing,  and  fearless,  to  his  will  and 
claims.  A thoughtful  traveller  in  that  country  will  be 
ever  ready  to  exclaim,  with  one  of  old,  “ I see  that  ye 
are  very  religious .”  When  the  Hindoo  appears  in 
public,  he  carries  upon  his  forehead  and  arms  the  sym- 
bols of  his  faith  ; when  he  passes  a temple  or  a religjous 
teacher,  expressions  of  reverence  are  seldom  forgotten  ; 
the  ceremonial  of  the  morning  is  scrupulously  prac- 
ticed ; and  he  omits  no  part  of  the  long  and  ever-recur- 


F Mwh+lln  hth 


SHED  DEL  OR 


W Xas 3 au  Si 


HOOK  SWINGING 


HINDOOISM  IN  PRACTICE. 


279 


ring  routine  of  observances.  This  is  a religion  of  ac- 
tion, and  not  a class  of  sentiments  lying  concealed  and 
dormant  in  the  soul.  Every  town  and  village  has  its 
sacred  edifice,  within  which  is  an  image  of  the  patron 
deity  whose  worship  claims  the  attention  of  one  or 
more  of  the  priesthood.  It  is  proverbial  among  the 
Hindoos  that  a “ man  should  not  live  where  there  is 
no  temple .”  The  erection  of  these  consecrated  build- 
ings, and  their  endowment  with  a suitable  revenue,  is 
one  of  the  most  honorable  and  meritorious  ways  in 
which  the  rich  can  expend  their  wealth.  Where  pri- 
vate munificence  fails,  the  object  is  attained  at  public 
expense.  The  temples  at  Benares,  Juggernaut,  Ma- 
dura, Guserat,  Ramperarn,  Seringham,  &c.,  are  pre- 
sided over  by  thousands  of  priests,  with  other  attend- 
ants in  like  proportion.  In  addition  to  these  massive 
and  extensive  religious  establishments,  edifices  smaller, 
but  durable,  are  seen  in  places  remote  from  all  human 
habitations — on  the  banks  of  rivers — in  the  middle  of 
streams — on  the  summit  of  lofty  mountains — and  be- 
neath the  wide-spread  banyan.  Connected  with  these 
are  annual  and  more  frequent  festivals,  which  collect 
their  thousands  and  tens  of  thousands  from  places  near 
and  far  remote.  Three  classes  of  persons  are  in  at- 
tendance upon  every  temple  of  any  note,  and  whose 
presence  is  essential  to  a complete  performance  of  all 
its  ceremonial — the  Brahmins  or  priests,  who  alone 
have  the  knowledge  and  authority  to  conduct  the  mi- 
nute and  tedious  ritual — the  dancing  women , who  in 
public  chant  the  praises  of  the  deity,  but  are  in  private 


280 


INDIA. 


the  courtezans  of  the  Brahmins — and  the  musicians , 
with  tomtom,  horn,  and  cymbal.  The  traveller  cannot 
remain  long  in  a place  without  learning  something  of 
the  religion  of  the  people.  If  he  be  near  a temple,  the 
sound  of  the  bell  tells  him  that  the  Brahmin  is  within 
the  sanctuary,  engaged  in  sacred  duties  demanded  by 
his  deity — his  sleep  is  disturbed  by  harshly  sonorous 
instruments,  indicating  the  progress  of  some  ceremony 
of  religious  worship — and  as  he  leaves  the  village,  he 
meets  a company  bearing  offerings  of  plantains,  rice, 
and  flowers,  as  expressions  of  gratitude  to  the  presiding 
divinity  of  the  neighborhood.  When  the  appointed 
day  is  at  hand,  preparations  are  made  for  the  annual 
car  drawing , while  thousands  are  seen  flocking  to  the 
festive  spot.  During  the  year  the  car  has  stood  near 
the  temple,  and  sheltered  from  the  weather  by  a 
thatched  roof.  This  is  removed — necessary  repairs  are 
made — four  long  and  heavy  cables  are  brought  out  and 
attached  to  the  cumbrous  vehicle — garlands  of  flowers 
and  tinselled  ornaments  are  so  suspended  from  the 
frame-work  as  to  attract  much  notice  and  admiration. 
As  evening  approaches,  the  image  is  brought  from  its 
sacred  enclosure  and  placed  upon  the  vehicle,  where 
also  stand  several  priests  paying  it  due  attention  and 
reverence,  while  the  streets  are  thronged  with  persons 
of  both  sexes  and  all  ages  anxiously  waiting  the  ap- 
pointed hour.  The  time  having  arrived,  the  cables 
are  seized  by  thousands  of  zealous  hands,  while  to  the 
sound  of  music,  accompanied  by  shouts  of  enthusiastic 
zeal,  the  massive  and  gaudy  structure  is  drawn  through 


HINDOOISM  IN  PRACTICE. 


281 


the  principal  streets  and  returned  to  its  place  of  abode, 
there  to  remain  during  another  twelvemonth.  'When 
the  excursion  is  on  the  water,  a raft  is  made,  upon  which 
is  erected  a canopy  light  and  gorgeous.  With  great 
pomp  the  image  is  removed  from  his  temple  abode, 
borne  on  a decorated  palanquin  to  the  water-side,  while 
the  huge  rope  is  carried  ashore,  which  is  seized  by  the 
vast  concourse  of  worshippers,  who  draw  the  craft  oucc 
and  again  around  the  tank  to  the  sound  of  music,  and 
with  joyful  acclamations.  These  both  occur  at  night, 
and  their  attractiveness  is  much  increased  by  the 
lamps  and  flambeaux,  which  may  be  numbered  by  thou- 
sands. The  number  of  Hindoo  festivals,  including  the 
monthly  observances  of  the  sun’s  passing  from  one  side  of 
the  zodiac  to  another,  is  one  hundred,  and  forty-five.  Of 
these  ten  are  monthly,  and  twenty-five  are  anniver- 
saries. Were  these  observances  to  go  no  farther  than 
giving  the  image  a drive  or  sail  for  a midnight  airing, 
or  in  assembling  at  the  temple  and  celebrating  with 
music  and  recitation  their  favored  deity,  or  making 
costly  presents  to  the  Brahmins, or  forming  clay  images 
of  Grunputtee,  or  spending  the  night  in  festivity  and 
games  of  chance  in  honor  of  Lukshumee,  or  illumi- 
nating temple  and  street  in  honor  of  Siva  ; — it  can  be 
alone  said  that  they  are  puerile,  childish,  and  that  they 
consume  a large  amount  of  time  which  might  be  far 
more  profitably  spent  otherwise.  But  it  is  not  so.  The 
most  popular  religious  observances  are  positively  harm- 
ful, being  destructive  to  morals,  or  domestic  peace  and 
personal  comfort.  The  character  of  the  goddess  Kalee 


282 


INDIA. 


has  been  alluded  to  in  the  preceding  chapter,  and  it 
was  suggested,  as  a natural  inference,  that  the  wor- 
ship required  by  such  a being  must  be  sanguinary  and 
woful.  Such  we  find  to  be  the  case.  Soon  after 
reaching  Madras  I had  an  opportunity  of  witnessing, 
for  the  first  time,  the  much-famed  Sheddel , or  hook- 
swinging festival.  I was  residing  upon  the  sea  shore 
near  the  spot  where  the  cruel  festivity  was  to  occur. 
At  mid-day  the  multitude  began  to  assemble,  and  before 
five  o’clock  the  crowd  could  not  have  been  less  than 
five  thousand  persons  of  both  sexes,  and  all  ages  and 
conditions  of  life.  A beam  about  forty  feet  in  height 
had  been  erected,  across  the  top  of  which  was  placed  a 
transverse  pole  of  smaller  size,  to  each  end  of  which 
was  tied  a rope,  the  end  of  one  of  which  trailed  upon 
the  ground  ; while  to  the  shorter  one  was  attached  two 
iron  hooks,  strong,  pounded  smooth,  and  sharp-pointed. 
The  devotees  who  were  to  exhibit  their  devotion  to 
their  faith,  were  retained  in  an  adjoining  temple  until 
the  fitting  hour  arrived.  One  of  them  was  then  led 
out,  preceded  by  Brahmins  and  musicians  and  friends. 
He  approached  the  upright  pole — lay  upon  his  face 
while  the  hooks  were  thrust  under  the  flesh  on  either 
side  of  the  vertebrae,  just  below  the  shoulder  blade, 
and  then,  the  other  ropes  being  well  manned,  he  was 
hoisted  up  in  mid-air,  and  swung  round  and  round  to 
the  number  of  ten  to  thirty  times,  according  as  strength 
allowed  or  the  vow  made  necessary.  Twenty  or  more 
went  through  this  ceremony  that  afternoon,  many  of 
whom,  by  way  of  manifesting  their  indifference  of  pain, 


HINDOOISM  IN  PRACTICE.  28‘< 

scattered  flowers  and  fruit,  beat  a tomtom,  and  smoked 
a cigar.  Being  sceptical  as  to  the  statement  that  the 
hook  went  into  the  flesh,  and  was  supported  by  it  alone, 
unaided  by  any  exterior  bandage,  I went  near  enough 
to  convince  myself  that  such  was  the  fact,  and  that 
no  deception  was  practiced.  The  muscles  are  strong, 
and  accidents  from  falling  seldom  occur. 

On  another  occasion  1 walked  out  at  evening,  with 
my  esteemed  friend  and  colleague,  Rev.  Mr.  Hutch- 
ings, to  witness  the  ceremonial  of  passing-  through 
the  fire.  A plat  of  ground,  several  hundred  yards  in 
circumference,  had  been  marked  out,  the  soil  removed, 
to  the  depth  of  several  inches,  and  the  surface  covered 
with  a kind  of  fuel,  which,  when  ignited,  emits  an  in- 
tense heat.  Thousands  were  on  the  spot  when  we  ar- 
rived, and,  though  the  crowd  gave  way  for  us,  the 
heat  alone  compelled  us  to  keep  at  a considerable  dis- 
tance, and  to  cover  our  faces  with  our  hands  for  the 
sake  of  protection  and  comfort.  When  the  flame  had 
subsided,  and  naught  was  left  but  burning  coals,  from 
ten  to  twenty  persons,  men  and  females,  with  no 
covering  to  their  feet,  and  but  a slight  dress  about 
their  loins,  walked  deliberately  from  one  side  of  this 
burning  surface  to  another.  One  of  the  women  car- 
ried her  child  with  her,  as  she  passed  over,  much  to 
the  admiration  and  astonishment  of  the  gaping  multi- 
tude, but  more  to  our  pity  for  the  deluded  votaries  of 
such  a system  of  faith  and  worship. 

When  the  annual  festival  of  drawing  the  car  occurs 
at  Madura,  the  multitude  crowding  the  city  during 


284 


INDIA, 


the  week  of  its  continuance,  cannot  usually  be  less 
than  forty  thousand  strangers.  Then  may  be  seen 
devotees  swinging  between  trees,  with  ropes  attached 
to  the  shoulder  and  feet,  above  a fire  enkindled  on 
the  ground  below, — lying  upon  the  earth  with  coals 
at  the  head,  feet,  and  on  either  side — walking  the 
streets  with  iron  spikes  thrust  through  the  tongue  and 
cheek — wearing  a gridiron-shaped  encumbrance  upon 
the  shoulder,  the  head  being  thrust  through  the 
grating — and  like  acts  of  superstitious  and  sanguinary 
devotion,  especially  to  the  goddess  Kalee. 

Groing  to  the  Groomsoor  country,  lying  in  the  north- 
ern part  of  the  Madras  Presidency,  we  find  the  peo- 
ple accustomed  from  time  immemorial  to  flay  alive 
innocent  children,  to  avert  the  anger  or  secure  the 
favor  of  the  earth-goddess — she  who  rules  the  order 
of  the  seasons,  sends  the  periodical  rain,  gives  fecun- 
dity to  the  soil,  and  health  or  sickness  to  the  people. 
I will  not,  need  not,  go  farther  into  this  fearful  and 
deplorable  detail. 

“ But  how  cruel  the  people  must  be — how  inhu- 
man ! ” says  my  reader.  Not  so,  by  nature.  The 
Hindoos  are  characterized  by  mildness  rather  than 
ferocity.  Their  religion  has  made  them  what  they 
are — a religion  false  in  its  teachings — dishonorable  to 
that  Holy  and  Merciful  One  whose  will  it  professes  to 
proclaim — destructive  of  personal  happiness  and  do- 
mestic peace — and  with  no  hope  to  its  deluded  votaries. 

As  to  the  effects  of  Hindooism  upon  the  national 
character,  the  visible  results  of  which  it  has  been  the 


UINDOOISM  IN  PRACTICE. 


285 


producing  cause,  I could  enlarge  at  much  length, 
especially  in  the  recording  of  facts  which  came  under 
my  personal  observation  while  in  that  country.  But 
my  limits  forbid  this  lengthened  detail,  and,  besides, 
the  topio  is  one  with  which  the  reader  is  familiar.  I 
will  therefore  express  my  thoughts  through  the  fol- 
lowing paragraphs  from  the  pen  of  the  lamented  He- 
ber.  I quote  from  his  pages  more  readily  on  two  ac- 
counts— his  high  position  for  learning  and  accurate 
observation,  and  his  exceeding  amiability,  which  lead 
him  to  view  the  Hindoos  with  a degree  of  charity  and 
kindliness  which  stopped  this  side  of,  rather  than  ex- 
ceeded the  truth.  These  are  the  Bishop’s  words:  But 
of  all  idolatries  which  I have  ever  read  or  heard 
of,  the  religion  of  the  Hindoos,  in  which  I had  taken 
some  pains  to  inform  myself,  really  appears  to  me 
the  worst,  both  in  the  degrading  notions  which 
it  gives  of  the  Deity ; in  the  endless  round  of  its  bur- 
densome ceremonies,  which  occupy  the  time  and  dis- 
tract the  thoughts,  without  either  instructing  or  inter- 
esting its  votaries ; in  the  filthy  acts  of  uncleanness 
and  cruelty,  not  only  permitted  but  enjoined,  and  in- 
separably interwoven  with  those  ceremonies ; in  the 
system  of  castes — a system  which  tends,  more  than 
anything  else  the  Devil  has  yet  invented,  to  destroy 
the  feelings  of  general  benevolence,  and  to  make  nine- 
tenths  of  mankind  the  hopeless  slaves  of  the  remain- 
der ; and,  in  the  total  absence  of  any  popular  system 
of  morals,  or  any  single  lesson  which  the  people  at 
»arge  ever  hear,  to  live  virtuously  and  do  gdod  to  each 


286 


INDIA. 


other.  I do  not  say,  indeed,  that  there  are  not  some 
scattered  lessons  of  this  kind  to  be  found  in  their  an- 
cient books ; but  those  books  are  neither  accessible  to 
the  people  at  large,  nor  are  these  last  permitted  to 
read  them  ; and,  in  general,  all  the  sins  that  a Soodra 
is  taught  to  fear,  are,  killing  a cow,  offending  a Brah- 
min, or  neglecting  one  of  the  many  frivolous  rites  by 
which  their  deities  are  supposed  to  be  conciliated. 
Accordingly,  though  the  general  sobriety  of  the  Hin- 
doos (a  virtue  which  they  possess  in  common  with 
most  inhabitants  of  warm  climates)  affords  a very 
great  facility  to  the  maintenance  of  public  order  and 
decorum,  I really  never  have  met  with  a race  of  men 
whose  standard  of  morality  is  so  low,  who  feel  so  little 
apparent  shame  on  being  detected  in  a falsehood,  or  so 
little  interest  in  the  sufferings  of  a neighbor,  not 
being  of  their  own  caste  or  family ; whose  ordinary 
and  familiar  conversation  is  so  licentious,  or,  in  the 
wilder  and  more  lawless  districts,  who  shed  blood 
with  so  little  repugnance.  The  good  qualities  which 
there  are  among  them,  are,  in  no  instance  that  lam 
aware  of,  connected  with,  or  arising  out  of,  their  re- 
ligion ; since  it  is  in  no  instance  to  good  deeds  or  vir- 
tuous habits  in  life  that  the  future  rewards  in  which 
they  believe  are  promised.  Their  bravery,  their  fidel- 
ity to  their  employers,  their  temperance,  and,  wherever 
they  are  found,  their  humanity  and  gentleness  of  dis- 
position, appear  to  arise  exclusively  from  a natural, 
happy  temperament,  from  an  honorable  pride  in  their 


HIND001SM  IN  PRACTICE. 


287 


own  renown  and  the  renown  of  their  ancestors,  and 
from  the  goodness  of  God,  who  seems  unwilling  that 
His  image  should  be  entirely  effaced,  even  in  the 
midst  of  the  grossest  error. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA. 

Harmony  between  these  means — First  Agency,  Preaching  ; to  Stated 
Congregations,  in  the  Highways,  at  the  Mission-House  and  at  Tayats, 
with  Trials  of  Body,  Mind  and  Heart — Second  Agency,  Bible  and 
Tract  Distribution — Its  Necessity  and  Success — Third  Agency,  Edu- 
cation, (1)  Day  Charity  Schools,  (2)  Boarding  Schools,  (3)  Literary 
Seminaries,  (4)  Theological  Academies,  and  (5)  English  Schools — 
Concluding  Remarks. 

That  system  of  Christian  benevolence  which  passes 
under  the  name  of  the  “ Foreign  Missionary  Enter- 
prise,”  has  for  its  leading  object  the  conversion  of  the 
unevangelized  nations  to  the  faith  and  worship  of  Jesus 
Christ.  In  the  prosecution  of  this  merciful  scheme,  a 
variety  of  means  has  been  devised,  each  of  which, 
though  distinct  in  its  mode  of  operation,  unites  with 
all  the  rest  in  promoting  the  desired  result.  In  this 
respect,  the  system  find  its  counterpart  in  the  human 
frame — the  head,  the  trunk,  the  limbs,  have  each  their 
particular  function  in  the  physical  economy,  but  all 
aim  at  one  and  the  same  object,  and  the  “eye  cannot 
say  unto  the  hand,  I have  no  need  of  thee,  nor  again 


MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA.  289 

the  head  to  the  feet,  I have  no  need  of  you.”  In  like 
manner,  though  a variety  of  means  have  been  put  in 
operation  for  bringing  the  Gospel  to  bear  upon  the 
minds  and  hearts  of  the  heathen,  they  should  be  re- 
garded not  as  antagonists  and  rivals,  but  as  friends 
and  allies,  enrolled  in  a common  cause,  and  leagued 
against  a common  foe.  With  these  remarks,  I ask  the 
reader’s  attention  to  the  three-fold  agency  now  em- 
ployed for  bringing  Scripture  truth  before  the  Hindoos. 

Preaching,  or  the  announcement,  by  the  living 
voice,  of  the  doctrines  and  duties  of  the  Gospel,  is  the 
most  efficient  instrumentality  as  yet  instituted  for 
promoting  the  conversion  of  mankind  to  the  religion 
of  Christ.  Missionaries  allow  no  plans  of  benefiting 
the  heathen  to  take  the  precedence  of  this  oral  com- 
munication of  divine  truth.  There  are,  however, 
various  ways  of  preaching,  the  employment  of  which 
must  be  regulated  by  the  capabilities  of  the  mission- 
ary, (especially  his  acquaintance  with  the  native  lan- 
guage,) and  the  circumstances  in  which  he  may  be 
placed.  The  first  of  these  is  the  delivery  of  prepared 
discourses  to  stated  congregations.  There  are,  con- 
nected with  all  mission  stations  in  Southern  India, 
churches  or  chapels,  where  the  Gospel  is  preached, 
usually  twice  on  the  Sabbath,  and  once  or  oftener 
during  the  week.  The  Sabbath-morning  audiences 
vary  in  size  from  one  hundred  and  fifty  to  three  hun- 
dred persons  of  both  sexes.  If  these  assemblies  differ 
from  those  in  Christian  lands,  in  being  smaller  and 
more  heterogeneous,  the  contrast  is  still  greater  in  the 
13 


290 


INDIA. 


style  of  address  needful  to  arrest  their  attention,  and 
carry  conviction  to  the  heart.  Simplicity  of  arrange- 
ment and  expression,  parabolical  or  historical  illustra- 
tions, and  earnest  appeals  to  the  conscience,  charac- 
terize the  discourses  of  those  who  are  most  successful 
in  gaining  for  the  truth  an  attentive  ear.  Missionaries 
are  in  danger  of  rising  superior  to  their  simple-minded 
auditors,  in  the  terms  they  employ,  and  in  the  con- 
struction of  their  sentences.  Their  style  has  often 
too  much  of  the  staidness  and  artificiality  of  Johnson, 
and  too  little  of  the  simplicity  of  Addison  and  Swift. 
To  obviate  this  serious  evil,  recourse  is  had  to  the 
practice  of  ascertaining  by  a question , (usually  ad- 
dressed to  one  or  more  of  the  older  lads,)  whether  the 
argument  used,  and  the  illustration  employed,  convey 
the  intended  idea,  and  are  appreciated  and  felt.  I 
have  heard  it  objected  to  that  this  catechetical  mode 
detracts  from  the  dignity  of  the  pulpit ; but  I cannot 
but  think  that  this  objection  indicates  a mind  more 
awake  to  an  observance  of  the  graces  and  elegancies 
of  the  pulpit,  than  a heart  alive  with  zeal  to  do  good. 

Another  department  of  preaching  is  that  of  address- 
ing mixed  audiences  in  the  highways,  the  markets, 
and  other  places  of  public  resort.  Of  all  kinds  of  mis- 
sionary labor,  this  makes  the  largest  draughts  upon 
the  body,  mind,  and  heart.  The  exertion  of  using 
fhe  voice  in  the  open  air,  and  in  a strange  and  foreign 
language,  makes  unusual  calls  upon  the  missionary’s 
strength,  while  we  cannot  overlook  his  almost  oertain 
exposure  to  personal  violence.  The  presence  of  a 


MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA.  291 


Christian  government  renders  this  last-named  a less 
formidable  evil  in  India  than  in  many  other  lands, 
especially  those  under  Mahomedan  rule,  and  yet,  in- 
stances still  occur,  where  the  bitter  enmity  of  the  hea- 
then to  the  truths  of  the  Gospel  displays  itself  in  acts 
of  outrage  and  violence  upon  whoever  dares  to  become 
their  public  advocate. 

The  trials  of  spirit  are  scarcely  less  numerous  than 
those  of  a physical  nature.  Two  qualifications  are  in- 
dispensable in  one  who  would  proclaim  the  gospel  suc- 
cessfully in  the  places  of  public  concourse — quickness 
of  thought  and  command  of  temper. 

The  objections  urged  against  Christianity  are  of  such 
a character,  that  a missionary  would  be  not  a little 
ashamed  if  conscious  of  an  inability  to  return  satisfac- 
tory replies  ; and  yet  these  may  be  presented  in  a form 
so  novel,  and  urged  with  a manner  so  confident  and 
earnest,  that  he  is  often  quite  at  a loss  what  to  say  ; 
and  the  reader  can  well  imagine  the  use  that  his  op- 
ponent (if  a shrewd  and  wily  Brahmin)  will  make  of 
his  momentary  hesitancy  in  turning  against  him  the 
sneer  and  laugh  of  ridicule.  Ci  Do  you  believe  the 
words  of  your  Saviour  ?”  inquired  a Brahmin,  as  a 
missionary  was  addressing  an  assembled  audience. 
Upon  hearing  an  affirmative  reply,  he  continued,  “ Je- 
sus said,  ‘ if  any  man  take  away  thy  coat,  let  him  have 
thy  cloak  also  you  are  well  dressed  and  I half  naked, 
pray  give  me  your  garments.  He  also  said,  ‘ Whoso- 
ever shall  smite  thee  on  thy  right  cheek,  turn  to  him 
the  other  also  suppose  I give  you  a blow  on  the  face, 


292 


INDIA. 


will  you  act  in  obedience  to  this  command  ?”  Before 
the  missionary  had  time  to  answer,  there  was  general 
laughter  and  interruption.  "When  a reply  can  be  given 
something  in  the  style  of  the  question  asked,  the  effect 
is  often  very  good.  As  one  of  the  first  missionaries  in 
Bengal  was  preaching  in  a street  of  Calcutta,  a baboo 
passing  by  cast  a contemptuous  glance  at  him  and 
said,  “ You,  padres,  are  just  like  the  hypocrites  of 
whom  your  Jesus  said,  ‘ They  love  to  pray  standing  in 
the  synagogues  and  in  the  corners  of  the  streets,  that 
they  may  be  seen  of  men.’  ” “ Yes  my  friend,”  replied 

the  missionary,  “ but  with  this  difference,  they  did  it 
that  they  might  be  praised,  and  we  are  scoffed  at  and 
despised  for  it.” 

A missionary  in  Bengal  being  asked  by  a philoso- 
phical Brahmin,  “ What  do  you  preach  here  ?”  replied, 
“ We  teach  the  knowledge  of  the  true  God.”  “ Who 
is  he  ? I am  God,”  said  the  Hindoo.  “ 1 thought,” 
said  the  missionary  afterwards,  “ that  it  would  be  an 
easy  matter  to  confute  him,  but  I soon  discovered  my 
mistake.”  “ This  is  very  extraordinary,”  said  I,  “ are 
you  then  almighty  ?”  “ No,”  he  replied,  “ if  I had 

created  the  sun  I should  be  almighty,  but  I have  not.” 
“ How  can  you  pretend  to  be  God  if  you  are  not  al- 
mighty ?”  “ This  question  shows  your  ignorance,” 

said  he ; “ What  do  you  see  here  ?”  pointing  to  the 
Ganges.  “ Water.”  “ And  what  is  in  this  vessel  ?” 
at  the  same  time  pouring  out  a little  into  a cup. 
“ This  is  water  likewise.”  “ What  is  the  difference 
between  this  water  and  that  of  the  Ganges  ?”  “ There 


MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA.  293 


is  none.”  “ Oh,  I see  a great  difference  : that  water 
carries  ships,  this  does  not.  God  is  almighty ; I am 
only  a part  of  the  god-head,  and  therefore  I am  not 
almighty  ; and  yet  I am  God  just  as  these  drops  in  the 
cup  are  real  water.”  “ According  to  your  representa- 
tion God  is  divided  into  many  thousand  portions  ; one 
is  in  me,  and  another  is  in  you.”  “Oh,”  said  the 
Brahmin,  “ this  remark  is  owing  to  your  ignorance  : 
how  many  suns  do  you  see  in  the  sky  ?”  “ Only  one.” 

“ But  if  you  fill  a thousand  vessels  with  water,  what 
do  you  see  in  each  ?”  “ The  image  of  the  sun.” 

“ But  if  you  see  the  image  of  the  sun  in  so  many  ves- 
sels, does  it  prove  that  there  are  a thousand  suns  in 
the  firmament  ? No  ! there  is  only  one  sun,  but  it  is 
reflected  a thousand  times  in  the  water.  So  likewise 
there  is  but  one  God,  but  his  image  and  brightness  are 
reflected  in  every  human  being.”  The  missionary,  in- 
stead of  stopping  to  point  out  the  falsity  of  the  com- 
parison, preferred  trying  to  touch  his  conscience. 
“ God,”  he  continued,  “ is  holy,  are  you  holy  ?”  “ I 

am  not ; I am  doing  many  things  that  are  wrong,  and 
that  I know  to  be  wrong.”  “ How,  then,  can  you  say 
that  you  are  God  ?”  “ Oh,  I see,”  said  the  former, 

“ that  you  need  a little  more  intellect  to  be  put  into 
your  head  before  you  can  argue  with  us.  God  is  fire  ; 
fire  is  the  purest  element  in  the  creation ; but  if  you  throw 
dirt  upon  it,  a bad  odor  will  arise  ; it  is  not  the  fault 
of  the  fire,  but  of  that  which  is  cast  upon  it.  Thus 
God  in  me  is  perfectly  pure,  but  He  is  surrounded  by 
matter.  He  does  not  desire  sin  ; He  hates  it ; but  it 


294 


INDIA. 


arises  from  matter.”  In  this  way  the  conversation  con- 
tinued long,  but  at  the  end  the  missionary  found  that 
he  had  made  but  little  progress  in  convincing  his  oppo- 
nent. Many  a person  who  can  fill  a pulpit  in  America 
or  England  with  respectability  and  credit,  would  un- 
doubtedly break  down  if  called  to  make  an  attempt 
among  the  Hindoos  ; and  this  not  for  want  of  mental 
strength  or  furniture,  but  from  the  peculiar  manner  in 
which  objections  are  presented,  and  the  confidence 
with  which  they  are  uttered.  Readiness  in  appre- 
hending the  point  of  an  opponent’s  arguments,  and  tact 
in  returning  a brief  but  satisfactory  reply,  are  of  far 
more  value  in  such  circumstances  than  depth  of  mind 
or  extent  of  scientific  acquirement.  Quickness  con- 
quers where  research  loses  the  day. 

Large  calls  are  also  made  upon  the  better  feelings  of 
the  heart , especially  patience  and  forbearance.  The 
missionary  hears  his  motives  impugned  in  a manner 
very  painful  to  one  of  honorable  purpose,  and  conscious 
of  sincere  integrity  and  benevolence.  Said  a mission- 
ary to  a Hindoo  : “ What  do  you  think  is  the  reason 
why  we  leave  our  native  country,  come  to  your  vil- 
lages, establish  schools,  and  expend  so  much  in  the 
education  of  your  children  ?”  One  replied,  “ You  expect 
by  this  good  deed  the  more  certainly  to  reach  heaven,” 
while  another  answered,  “ Oh,  it  is  your  nature,  just 
as  it  is  the  nature  of  the  jackal  to  prowl  abroad  at  night 
stealing  fowls  and  geese.”  How  often  have  I been 
compelled  to  hear  the  name  of  the  blessed  Redeeme 
blasphemed,  and  his  most  gracious  acts  misconstrued 


MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA.  295 


and  vilified  in  a manner  tending  to  awaken  feelings 
akin  to  those  of  the  too  zealous  disciple  when  he  said, 
“ Shall  we  not  call  down  fire  from  heaven  and  consume 
them  !”  But  his  thoughts  and  feelings,  though  bitter 
to  agony,  the  missionary  must  not  express,  except  in 
the  language  of  pity  and  compassion  ; for  to  get  his 
opponent  irritated  and  vexed,  is  the  Hindoo  disputant’s 
most  earnest  endeavor.  This  done,  and  he  leaves  the 
field  with  the  triumphant  exclamation,  “ The  padre  is 
angry — is  angry,  and  the  day  is  won  !” 

Conversation  with  visitors  at  the  mission  house  and, 
at  Zayals  comes  under  the  general  head  of  preaching. 
A missionary  keeps  open  doors.  His  dwelling  is  a place 
of  public  resort,  and  he  denies  admittance  to  the  per- 
son who  calls  to  see  him  at  the  peril  of  withholding 
instruction  and  advice  from  one  to  whom  he  may  be  a 
guide  to  the  heavenly  world.  Zayats , or  small  build- 

ings in  frequented  parts  of  the  city  or  village,  where 
the  missionary  spends  a part  of  each  day  in  conversa- 
tion with  visitors,  and  in  tract  distribution,  are  less 
common  in  India  than  in  Burmah,  their  place  being 
supplied  by  the  rooms  in  which  the  day  schools  are 
held. 

The  topic  of  preaching  may  be  closed  by  the  published 
opinion  of  the  Rev.  Mr.  Buyers,  of  the  Benares  Mission. 
“ It  has  been  a sad  mistake  to  suppose  that  inferior 
preaching  talents  may  do  for  the  missionary  work.  The 
contrary  is  the  fact.  Eloquence  of  a far  higher  and 
more  varied  order  is  required  than  that  which  will  do 
in  an  English  pulpit,  where  the  preacher,  from  having 


296 


INDIA. 


to  walk  in  a beaten  track,  may  acquit  himself,  so  far 
as  ordinary  ministrations  are  concerned,  without  pro- 
fessing any  considerable  oratorical  powers.  The  fact 
that  a man  has  to  divest  Christian  doctrines  of  all 
technical  words  and  phrases,  and  give  it  in  new  forms 
and  combinations,  is  surely  sufficient  to  show  that 
preaching  to  the  Heathen  requires  the  exercise  of  no 
ordinary  powers.  He  has  not  only  to  strike  out  a 
new  and  untrodden  path,  but  has  to  arrange  the  whole 
tenor  of  his  preaching  so  as  to  bring  Christianity  to 
bear  on  the  extermination  of  systems  of  error  quite  new 
to  himself,  and  to  modes  of  speaking  in  which  he  has 
been  educated.  To  speak  well  and  efficiently  with  such 
difficulties  in  the  way,  he  must  be  a man  of  ready 
eloquence,  as  well  as  a philosophical  linguist,  capable 
of  moulding  and  bending  figures  of  speech  required  for 
conveying  to  the  minds  of  his  hearers  new  trains  of 
thought  and  doctrines  unheard  of  before  ; and  all  at 
the  spur  of  the  moment,  and  amid  acute  and  watchful 
adversaries,  who  will  be  glad  to  take  advantage  of 
every  weak  point,  and  turn  it  against  him.” 

II. 

The  preparation  and  distribution  of  the  sacred 
Scriptures  and  religious  tracts  and  books  is  the 
second  agency  for  propagating  Christianity  in  India. 
The  occasions  are  many  in  which  an  oral  communica- 
tion of  divine  truth  is  impossible.  Ignorance  of  the 
native  language,  the  prejudices  of  the  people,  and  a 
variety  of  other  obstacles,  may  prevent  personal  in- 


MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA.  29? 


struction  ; and  were  there  no  other  agency  than  that 
of  the  living  voice,  many  of  the  people  must  remain  in 
ignorance  of  Him  who  is  “ the  way,  the  truth,  and  the 
life.”  But  the  various  organizations  formed  for  pre- 
paring and  publishing  Bibles  and  religious  tracts  come 
in  to  supply  this  desideratum  ; and  such  has  been  their 
practical  utility,  that  they  have  long  been  deemed  an 
essential  part  of  the  great  system  of  foreign  missionary 
effort.  All  the  considerations  that  render  them  a 
means  of  usefulness  in  Christian  lands,  are  greatly 
magnified  in  importance  when  carried  to  a Pagan 
country.  Connected  with  each  of  the  larger  mission- 
ary stations  is  a printing  establishment,  from  which 
the  shelves  of  the  missionaries  are  supplied  with  these 
silent,  but  eloquent  and  effective  teachers  of  revealed 
truth,  which  can  go  into  towns  and  villages  to  which 
the  living  preacher  is  denied  an  entrance,  removing 
prejudices  and  preparing  the  way  for  his  future  instruc- 
tions, or  deepening  impressions  that  his  previous  visits 
have  already  made. 

Did  my  limits  allow,  I might  detain  the  reader  with 
a narrative  of  facts  illustrative  of  the  position,  that 
while  the  oral  communication  of  divine  truth  is  wor- 
thy of  the  first  place  in  the  interest  and  effort  of  the 
Church,  this  of  Bible  and  tract  distribution  cannot 
be  neglected  without  serious  harm  to  the  cause  of 
truth.  To  the  friends  of  the  American  Bible  and  Tract 
Societies,  I say  with  all  earnestness,  Sustain  with  un- 
diminished, and,  if  possible,  enlarged  liberality,  the 
foreign  departments  of  your  blessed  institutions.  You 
13* 


INDIA. 


<i98 

cannot  give  beyond  the  extent  of  profitable  appropria- 
tion, and  the  character  of  your  directing  agents  abroad 
is  a proof  that  a judicious  and  honest  use  will  be  made 
of  the  funds  committed  to  their  care. 

in. 

The  third  and  last  of  the  agencies  in  use  for  advanc- 
ing the  Gospel  throughout  India,  is  Education.  There 
are  five  distinct  classes  of  institutions  which  have  for 
their  object  the  inculcating  of  Bible  doctrine  and  pre- 
cept. Of  these  the  first  is  that  of 

Day  Charity  Schools. 

There  is  no  lack  in  India  of  primary  schools  for  the 
instruction  of  the  young.  Cities  and  towns  are  full  of 
them.  You  can  scarcely  pass  the  length  of  any  street 
without  seeing  the  verandah  of  one  or  more  houses 
filled  with  youth  from  the  ages  of  five  to  twelve,  who 
are  being  instructed  in  the  elements  of  Hindoo  litera- 
ture and  science,  especially  in  reading,  arithmetic,  and 
ethical  proverbs  selected  from  the  writings  of  their 
sages.  The  teachers  are  of  course  all  heathen,  and  the 
instruction  they  impart  tends  directly  and  by  design  to 
form  their  pupils  to  the  opinions  and  practices  of  idol- 
atry. To  rescue  one  of  these  institutions  from  such  an 
influence,  and,  while  it  remains  the  same  in  the  place 
of  its  location,  with  the  same  master  at  its  head,  the 
same  youth  in  attendance,  to  remove  the  heathen  text- 
books and  place  the  Biblo  in  their  stead,  is  a most  de- 
sirable object  to  secure.  It  is  purifying  the  foun- 


MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA.  299 


tain,  that  its  varied  streams  may  be  healthful  and 
invigorating  rather  than  deadly  and  noisome.  Excep- 
tion is  taken  to  the  system,  by  some,  on  the  ground 
that  it  leads  to  the  employment  of  heathen  masters, 
who  will,  it  is  urged,  use  all  possible  means  to  neu- 
tralize the  benefit  that  might  be  derived  from  the  study 
of  the  revealed  volume.  In  reply  to  this  objection, 
which  is  not  without  weight,  it  is  urged  that.  Christian 
teachers  cannot  be  obtained  in  sufficient  numbers  to 
meet  the  exigencies  of  the  case  ; and  that  if  they  could 
be  found  and  sent  to  the  villages,  the  heathen  master 
would  not  yield  his  post  to  a stranger  ; and  the  conse- 
quence would  be  a Christian  school  set  up  in  opposition 
to  the  heathen,  with  the  advantage  to  the  latter  of 
having  the  first  occupancy  of  the  place,  and  the  preju- 
dices of  the  parents  in  favor  of  that  which  strengthens 
the  power  of  their  own  religion.  In  military  tactics  it 
is  deemed  more  desirable  to  seize  the  enemy’s  fort  and 
turn  the  guns  against  its  former  occupants,  than  to 
erect  a new  battery  over  against  the  old  one. 

But  that  the  reader  may  see  clearly  the  nature  and 
amount  of  Christian  instruction  imparted  in  these  in- 
stitutions, I will  state,  with  all  brevity,  the  course  of 
instruction  pursued  in  the  schools  of  which  I had  the 
charge  while  a resident  of  Madras  and,  formerly,  of 
the  city  of  Madura.  Each  school  was  divided  into  four 
classes,  to  each  of  which  were  allotted  the  following 
monthly  studies : 

1st  class — A Scripture  text  for  each  day,  the  whole 
to  be  recited,  seriatim,  at  the  Sabbath  morning  ser- 


300 


INDIA. 


vice,  and  at  the  monthly  examinations — two  pages  of 
a catechism  of  Christian  doctrine  and  duty  ; the  replies 
being  given  in  the  language  of  the  Bible — ten  pages 
of  an  elementary  Church  History — five  stanzas  of  a 
Tamil  dictionary  in  running  rhyme. 

2nd  class — A daily  text,  as  in  the  first  class — two 
pages  of  a catechism  of  Scripture  precepts — a chapter 
in  a reading  book,  narrative  and  arithmetic. 

3d  class — One  page  of  an  elementary  catechism — 
reading — spelling — and  arithmetic. 

4th  class — Primary  catechism  and  alphabet. 

On  the  last  day  of  the  month  all  the  scholars  are 
assembled,  and  a careful  examination  takes  place,  in 
the  presence  of  the  native  assistant,  upon  all  the  lessons 
pursued.  This  examination  is  conducted  by  the  mis- 
sionary, and  that,  too,  with  great  strictness,  as  pay- 
ment, to  the  master , is  graduated  by  the  proficiency 
made  by  his  pupils  in  each  study. 

In  addition  to  these  lessons,  the  following  require- 
ments are  made.  First — Masters  and  monitors,  and, 
at  least,  two-thirds  of  the  pupils  must  be  at  religious 
services  on  Sabbath  morning,  and  at  the  Sabbath  school 
an  hour  previous.  Second — All  the  pupils  of  the  1st 
and  2nd  classes  meet  at  the  house  of  the  missionary 
an  hour  of  each  Tuesday  morning,  to  read  the  Bible 
and  receive  instruction.  Third — Masters  and  moni- 
tors assemble  on  Tuesday  afternoon  at  the  church, 
where  one  hour  is  devoted  to  the  lessons  of  the  month, 
and  the  second  to  a lecture.  Fourth — The  missionary 
visits  each  school  at  least  twice  a month,  where  he 


MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA.  301 


hears  the  youth  read,  and  then  addresses  them  and  the 
audiences  that  are  naturally  attracted  to  the  spot. 
Fifth — The  native  assistant,  bearing  the  name  of  su- 
perintendent, visits  one  of  the  schools  daily,  to  see 
that  masters  and  scholars  are  in  their  places,  and  to 
preach  and  distribute  Bibles  and  tracts. 

From  this  view  the  reader  will  perceive  that  great 
indeed  must  be  the  effort  required  to  neutralize  all  the 
benefits  that,  with  the  Divine  blessing,  must  necessa- 
rily attend  so  great  an  amount  of  effort  expended  in 
their  instruction.  Immortal  truth  has  gained  a lodg- 
ment in  the  minds  of  a multitude  of  intelligent  beings, 
and  it  cannot  be  dislodged  by  the  most  strenuous  ef- 
forts of  the  emissaries  of  evil.  It  is  by  these  schools 
more  than  by  any  other  means,  that  an  extensive 
change  is  taking  place  in  the  popular  mind  of  India. 
Said  an  eminent  missionary  in  Bengal,  “ Every  youth 
who  leaves  our  schools,  does  it  with  the  law  of  Christ 
written  upon  his  conscience,  and  a belief  in  the  truth 
of  Christ,  deep-seated  in  his  convictions  ; a remark, 
this,  which  will  be  responded  to  by  Christian  teachers, 
the  country  over. 

The  most  serious  objection  urged  against  these  pri- 
mary schools  is,  that,  though  impressions  favorable  to 
Christianity  may  be,  and  often  are,  made  upon  the 
minds  of  the  youth  while  they  are  in  the  school-room, 
there  is  a danger  of  their  obliteration  when  he  returns 
to  his  home,  and  mingles  with  his  heathen  relatives 
and  friends.  He  there  witnesses  idolatrous  ceremonies 
of  the  most  imposing  kind,  and  in  them  he  is  urged 


302 


INDIA. 


to  take  a part ; and  refuses  at  the  peril  of  parental 
displeasure  and  punishment.  The  removal  of  this 
difficulty  gave  rise  to 

Boarding  Schools, 

The  second  class  of  educational  institutions  to  which 
I would  invite  the  reader’s  attention.  Here  the 
youth  is  removed  quite  away  from  his  idolatrous 
connexions,  with  all  their  anti-Christian  rites  and 
ceremonies,  language,  and  influence,  and  is  brought 
under  the  direct  and  ever-urgent  pressure  of  Gospel 
truth.  From  week  to  week,  and  month  to  month, 
he  breathes  a Christian  atmosphere,  with  nothing 
to  neutralize  its  healthful  qualities,  or  diminish  its 
power  to  invigorate  and  strengthen  the  better  feel- 
ings of  the  heart.  The  youth  are  under  the  con- 
stant care  and  watchful  eye  of  the  missionary,  and 
are  forbidden  to  visit  their  heathen  friends,  except 
at  distant  intervals,  ancfr  then  but  for  a short  period. 
One  such  institution  is,  when  possible,  established  -in 
connection  with  every  missionary  station  ; and  they 
have  proved  themselves  the  nurseries  of  the  Church. 

The  expense  of  sustaining  them  is  of  course 
greater  than  that  of  Day  Schools.  The  latter  can 
never  be  superseded  by  the  former,  for,  even  if  there 
were  a sufficiency  of  funds,  very  many  parents  would 
not  allow  the  attendance  of  their  children  at  a Board- 
ing School,  who  would  permit  them  to  become  mem- 
bers of  a Day  School. 

In  a mission  where  there  are  several  Boarding 


MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA.  303 


Schools  for  boys,  there  is  one  that  takes  the  prece- 
dence of  all  the  rest,  and  is  termed 

The  Seminary. 

A selection  is  made  from  among  the  most  hopeful  of 
the  youth  in  the  boarding  schools,  and  these  are  placed 
under  the  instruction  of  a missionary  who  is  qualified 
to  carry  them  into  the  higher  branches  of  learning. 
One  of  the  oldest  of  these  institutions  is  at  Batticotta, 
Ceylon.  It  has  been  in  operation  for  thirty  years, 
during  most  of  the  time  under  Messrs.  Poor  and  Hoi- 
sington  ; and,  so  far  as  literary  and  scientific  advan- 
taees  are  concerned,  is  second  to  no  other  in  India. 
The  one  in  Madura  under  Mr.  Tracy  is  of  more  recent 
establishment,  but  is  in  a prosperous  state.  They  are 
in  many  respects  like  our  colleges,  though  on  a less 
extensive  scale,  especially  as  to  the  number  of  teachers. 
They  need  no  fuller  mention,  as  all  the  advantages 
that  belong  to  boarding  schools  pertain  to  these  in  an 
eminent  degree. 

Theological  Academies. 

The  remark  has  been  made  by  an  eminent  mission- 
ary, and  may  be  received  with  little  or  no  allowance, 
that  “ the  grand  desideratum  in  the  present  system  of 
India  missions,  is  the  want  of  a really  superior  and 
thoroughly  efficient  native  agency — a race  of  native 
laborers  endowed  with  the  graces  of  Grod’s  Spirit,  in 
happy  and  harmonious  conjunction  with  the  highest 
qualifications  which  the  united  wisdom,  learning,  and 
piety  of  the  Christian  Church  can  bestow.” 


304 


INDIA. 


Institutions  of  a kind  calculated  to  prepare  a class 
of  men  thus  qualified,  are  being  established  in  various 
parts  of  Southern  India.  One  of  this  character  has 
existedfor  several  years  at  Bangalore,  and  is  under  the 
able  superintendence  and  instruction  of  my  valued 
friend,  the  Rev.  Mr.  Crisp  of  the  London  Missionary 
Society.  There  is  no  institution  specially  devoted  to 
the  object  of  preparing  young  men  for  the  ministry  in 
connection  with  either  branch  of  the  American  Mis- 
sion in  Southern  India,  their  place  being  in  part  sup- 
plied by  lectures  and  theological  reading  in  the  Semi- 
nary. 

There  is  throughout  India  an  extensive  and  increas- 
ing desire  to  acquire  the  English  language.  To  meet 
this  prevalent  wish,  another  class  of  institutions  has  of 
late  years  come  into  very  general  establishment,  popu- 
larly styled, 


1 English  Schools. 

Missionaries  finding  the  desire  so  urgent  to  acquire 
the  language  of  the  West,  and  seeing  that  many  would 
decline  attending  upon  their  instructions  at  any  other 
time  or  place,  have  availed  themselves  of  it,  and  have 
established  these  schools,  in  which  no  less  of  Chris- 
tianity is  taught  than  in  boarding  schools  ; while  t hat 
instruction  is  afforded  which  will  prepare  the  pupils  for  of- 
fices under  government.  While  in  the  city  of  Madura, 
I had  under  my  charge,  in  addition  to  a circle  of  day 
schools  and  a boarding  school  for  girls,  an  English 


MEANS  FOR  ADVANCING  CHRISTIANITY  IN  INDIA.  305 

school.  It  contained  more  than  one  hundred  youth, 
one  half  of  whom  were  Brahmins. 

I have  thus  brought  to  the  reader’s  notice  three  dis- 
tinct methods  of  extending  the  Gospel  in  India — 
preaching  from  the  pulpit,  in  the  highways,  and  at  the 
mission-house  and  Zayat — distribution  of  Bibles  and 
tracts , personally  and  through  the  medium  of  native 
assistants — and  education  in  day  and  boarding  schools, 
seminaries,  theological  institutions,  and  English 
schools.  Here  is  an  array  of  means  calculated  to  effect 
wonders  for  the  spiritual  regeneration  of  that  erring 
land.  And  so  they  will,  if  there  be  power  in  truth  and 
reality  in  the  Divine  promises.  The  enemy  may  be 
subtle  and  malignant,  the  fortress  strong  and  high- 
walled,  but  the  beleaguering  army  have  justice  and 
heaven  on  their  side,  and  they  will  prevail  ! It  needs 
but  that  the  friends  of  Christian  truth  allow  no  retro- 
grade movement  in  either  of  these  five-fold  respects, 
but  that  each  besieger  be  kept  supplied  with  the  ne- 
cessary means  of  attack  at  every  weak  and  assailable 
point ; and  though  there  may  be  much  delay,  long 
trial  of  patience  and  faith,  with  occasions  when  further 
effort  seems  fruitless  and  vain,  yet  not  more  certainly 
did  the  proud  wall  of  Jericho  fall  before  the  armies  of 
Israel,  than  the  ramparts  of  Hindooism  shall  be  levelled 
to  the  ground,  and  Christ  shall  rule  throughout  that 
idolatrous  and  now  wretched  land. 


CHAPTER  XXII 


LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 


Quotations  from  the  Abbe  Du  Bois,  with  Remarks  in  Opposition — Con- 
siderations favorable  to  the  Cause  of  Christian  Truth  in  India — (1) 
Change  in  Governmental  Policy;  (2)  Disconnection  of  Government 
from  Hindoo  Festivals  and  Superstitious  Ceremonies ; (3)  Improved 
Character  of  Foreign  Residents;  (4)  Posture  of  the  Native  Mind  to- 
wards the  Religion  of  Christ;  -(5)  The  existence  in  India  of  a Chris- 
tian Church  with  many  thousand  Members;  (6)  The  array  of  Organ- 
ized Means  for  Propagating  the  Troth;  and  (7)  The  Practical  Inter- 
est of  all  Christendom  in  the  Prospects  of  the  Hindoos — Certain  Offsets 
to  these  Encouragements — Summing  up  of  the  whole  subject. 

Early  in  the  present  century  the  Abbe  Du  Bois,  an 
eminent  missionary  of  the  Papal  Church,  returned  from 
India  to  Europe,  and  communicated  to  his  countrymen 
the  following  mature  opinion  : “ The  experience  I have 
gained  through  a familiar  intercourse  with  the  Hindoos 
of  all  castes  for  twenty-five  years,  has  made  me  thor- 
oughly acquainted  with  the  insuperable  obstacles  that 
Christianity  will  ever  have  to  encounter  there  ; and  it 
is  my  decided  opinion  that  the  people  of  that  land  are 
lying  under  an  everlasting  anathema,  have  forever 


LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA.  307 

rendered  themselves  unworthy  of  the  Divine  favor, 
have  been  utterly  forsaken  by  God,  and  given  over  for- 
ever to  a reprobate  mind  on  account  of  the  peculiar 
wickedness  of  their  worship,  so  that  there  is  no  possi- 
bility of  converting  them  to  any  sect  of  Christianity.” 
The  reader  may  be  assured  that  I am  no  convert  to  the 
Abb6’s  disheartening  conclusion.  I was  in  India  less 
than  one  half  of  the  time  that  missionary  was,  but 
while  there  I travelled  much — acquainted  myself  by 
personal  observation  with  the  means  mentioned  in  the 
previous  chapter  for  promoting  the  advancement  of 
Christian  truth — observed  the  results  as  thus  far  at- 
tained— conversed  with  English  officers,  civil  and 
military,  who  had  long  resided  in  the  country,  and 
visited  its  most  distant  provinces — heard  the  opinions 
of  the  learned  Brahmins  and  other  intelligent  natives 
— and  would  record  it  as  an  opinion,  deliberately  formed, 
that  there  are  considerations  which,  if  contemplated 
with  due  and  impartial  attention,  must  convince  the 
most  hesitating  observer  that  if  there  be  much  in  the 
present  state  of  Christianity  in  India  to  cause  depres- 
sion and  sorrow,  there  is  far  more  to  awaken  devoutT 
gratitude  and  joyful  hope. 

The  first  of  several  considerations  which  I would 
submit  to  the  reader’s  attention,  respects  the  change 
which  has  taken  place  in  the  views  and  action  of  the 
British  Government.  Says  an  English  writer : “ Never, 
in  its  introduction  to  a country,  has  the  missionary 
enterprize  met  with  greater  difficulties  than  in  India. 
As  though  it  were  not  enough  that  we  had  fifteen  thou- 


308 


INDIA. 


sand  miles  of  ocean  to  traverse,  and  then  contend  with 
an  insalubrious  climate  and  a strange  language ; or 
that  the  heathen  in  their  attachment  to  caste  and 
other  superstitions,  or  that  our  own  countrymen  in 
their  infidelity  and  prejudice  against  the  Gospel,  or 
that  the  powers  of  darkness  and  spiritual  wickedness 
in  high  places  were  against  us ; the  government , in 
its  policy  and  in  its  laws,  were  in  direct  hostility  to 
our  entrance  into  the  field.  It  was  impossible  to  go  in 
a ship  from  Britain,  bound  to  any  of  our  Indian  Pre- 
sidencies. Dr.  Bogue,  Mr.  Ewing,  and  other  noble- 
minded  and  benevolent  men,  were  interdicted  from 
leaving  our  native  country  at  all.  Those  who  were 
not  put  under  the  ban,  and  whose  zeal  and  intrepidity 
led  them  to  brave  every  obstacle,  had  to  find  their  way 
to  Holland  or  to  America,  that  from  thence  they  might 
embark,  and,  peradventure,  be  smuggled  like  contra- 
band goods  upon  the  shores  of  Hindoostan.  Tho  Bap- 
tist missionaries  Carey  and  Thomas,  on  their  arrival  at 
Calcutta,  were  not  suffered  to  remain  on  British 
ground,  and  were  obliged  to  take  refuge  in  Serampore, 
a Danish  settlement.  Messrs.  Judson,  Newell,  and  Hall, 
from  America,  whose  names  are  embalmed  in  the 
memory  of  the  churches,  were  driven  from  Christian 
protection,  and  were  exposed  to  a long  night  of  trial, 
privation,  and  suffering.”  But  a policy  so  baseless  in 
its  assumed  necessity — so  selfish,  inconsistent,  and 
wicked — could  not  stand  the  scrutinizing  gaze  and 
eloquent  denunciation  of  tho  worthy  in  England.  When 
the  charter  of  the  East  India  Company  was  to  be  re- 


LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA.  309 

newed  in  the  year  1813,  William  Wilberforce,  tho 
friend  of  man  and  justice,  appeared  as  the  advocate  of 
liberty  and  truth  ; and  by  the  power  of  unanswerable 
arguments,  established  facts,  and  manly  eloquence, 
caused  the  introduction  of  that  clause  in  virtue  of 
which  missionaries  were  permitted  to  enter  the  country 
at  any  point — to  range  throughout  the  length  and 
breadth  of  the  empire,  propagating  the  Gospel  in  what- 
ever ways  were  not  inconsistent  with  the  peace  of  the 
country  and  the  majesty  of  Government.  This  change 
of  policy  has  been  progressing  to  the  present  time  ; so 
that  if  these  questions  were  addressed  to  the  Councils 
of  Bengal,  Madras,  and  Bombay — “ Have  the  efforts 
of  foreign  missionaries  contributed  to  the  stability  of 
the  English  Government  and  to  the  happiness  of  the 
people  ? and  ought  their  longer  continuance  to  be 
sanctioned  and  encouraged  ? ” — who  can  doubt  that 
the  reply  would  be  an  earnest  and  emphatic  affirm- 
ative. Not  only  are  Christian  teachers  of  all  na- 
tions and  creeds  allowed  full  liberty  to  travel, 
speak,  and  act  as  they  please,  but  each  of  the 
branches  of  government  has  afforded  assistance,  by 
pecuniary  donations,  and  otherwise,  to  institutions  in 
which  Christianity  is  faithfully  taught,  and  Hin- 
dooism  boldly  assailed, — while  the  highest  func- 
tionaries preside  at  examinations  of  missionary  semi- 
naries, and  aid  in  furthering  efforts  to  evangelize 
the  people.  This  is  an  encouraging  feature  of  the 
subject,  and  we  should  be  sadly  wanting  in  becoming 
feelings,  if  we  withheld  the  voice  of  grateful  praise 


310 


INDIA. 


to  Him  who  has  the  hearts  of  rulers  in  His  hand,  con- 
straining them,  as  in  this  case,  to  extend  to  His  cause 
their  protecting  and  fostering  care. 

The  past  and  present  position  of  the  British  Govern- 
ment respecting  the  public  parades  of  Hindoo  wor- 
ship, the  pilgrim  tax , and  the  property  of  temples 
and  pagodas , is  a second  feature  to  be  illustrated- 
Until  lately,  the  Hindoos  have  not  only  been  protected 
in  the  performance  of  their  religious  ceremonies,  but 
open  and  most  important  encouragement  has  been  af- 
forded by  their  Christian  rulers.  The  principal  tem- 
ples at  the  various  great  places  of  resort  were  taken 
under  the  paternal  care  of  Government,  and  European 
officials  had  the  entire  direction  of  pecuniary  receipts 
and  disbursements.  At  the  place  of  concourse  fences 
were  erected  to  prevent  intruders,  and  those  without 
a pass,  from  descending  to  the  sacred  stream,  or  from 
entering  into  the  holy  edifice,  none  could  obtain  ad- 
mission without  a government  ticket  paid  for  accord- 
ing to  the  rank  of  the  applicant,  and  all  means  were 
used  to  render  the  festival  profitable  as  possible  to  .the 
public  treasury.  This  was  the  case  at  Juggernaut, 
Gaya,  and  Allahabad  in  the  north,  and  Trinomale, 
Conjeveram  and  Seringham  on  the  south.  On  certain 
occasions  the  English  regiment  was  called  out,  who, 
by  their  splendid  equipage,  music,  and  salutes,  gave 
eclat  to  the  idolatrous  festivity.  At  other  times,  an 
officer  of  government,  with  much  parade,  presented  to 
the  officiating  Brahmins  a costly  shaivl  with  which  to 
decorate  the  image.  Surprise  has  been  well  expressed 


LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA.  311 


that  the  Indian  government  could  induce  a large  body 
of  educated  English  gentlemen  so  far  to  forget  them- 
selves as  to  perform  the  contemptible  part  of  puppets 
in  the  procession  of  such  images  as  Vishnu  and  other 
Hindoo  deities.  But  so  it  was,  and  not  till  within  a 
few  years  were  the  folly  and  wickedness  of  sucli  a 
course  made  to  be  generally  seen  and  felt.  The  agita- 
tion of  the  subject  began  with  a few  Christian  officers^ 
who  were  led  to  consider  the  relation  they  sustained  to 
their  heathen  neighbors,  and  the  meaning  of  the  in- 
junction “ avoid  even  the  appearance  of  evil.”  A con- 
sideration of  the  responsibility  hereby  involved,  com- 
pelled them  to  the  conclusion  that  they  could  not, 
as  conscientious  men,  lend  the  sanction  of  their  pres- 
ence to  the  exalting  of  a senseless  image  into  an 
equality  with  the  “ High  and  Holy  One  who  inhabiteth 
eternity.”  “ If,”  was  their  language  to  those  who 
gave  them  their  appointments,  “ if  the  alternative  be 
attendance  at  Heathen  festivals  or  resignation  of  our 
commissions,  duty  to  God  requires  the  latter , and  we 
are  ready  to  meet  the  issue .”  Government  being  at 
that  time  wholly  indisposed  to  yield  the  point,  several 
resignations  were  sent  in,  among  which  was  that  of 
Sir  Peregrine  Maitland,  commander-in-chief  of  the 
Madras  Presidency,  who  withdrew  from  an  honorable 
post,  yielding  an  income  of  £15,000  per  year,  rather 
than  give  the  weight  of  his  influence  to  a system  so 
glaringly  unchristian  and  dishonorable  to  his  Re- 
deemer as  this.  Such  instances  of  decision  and  self- 
sacrifice,  with  crowded  petitions  from  all  parts  of  the 


312 


INDIA. 


country,  excited  inquiry  in  England,  and  led  to  the 
agitation  of  the  subject  there,  until  after  long  debates 
in  the  Court  of  Directors,  and  pauses,  which  the  Hon. 
Mr.  Poynder  allowed  to  be  but  brief,  the  resolution  was 
passed  directing  a discontinuance  of  all  such  attendance 
and  salutes  as  were  made  matter  of  just  complaint  on 
the  part  of  the  Christian  officers  and  soldiers  of  the  In- 
dian army.  Long  delays  occurred  in  carrying  into  full 
effect  the  will  of  the  Directors,  especially  throughout 
the  Madras  Presidency.  But  it  has,  finally,  to  a large 
extent  been  accomplished.  If  governmental  officers 
attend  upon  public  festivals  it  is  but  to  prevent  a dis- 
turbance of  public  tranquillity.  The  pilgrim  tax  is  no 
longer,  or  to  but  a trifling  extent,  collected,  and  the 
Brahmins  are  left,  in  most  cases,  to  look  after  their 
own  pecuniary  affairs,  excepting  in  cases  where  the 
government  is  the  appointed  and  irreieasible  guardian. 

The  days  of  ignorance  and  indifference  upon  this 
subject  have  gone  by  never  to  return  ; and  the  senti- 
ment has  taken  a strong  hold  upon  the  public  mind  of 
England,  that  it  is  inconsistent  and  foolish  to  send-  to 
India  bishops,  chaplains,  and  missionaries — vain  to  es- 
tablish schools  and  circulate  Bibles — so  long  as  a public 
sanction  is  given  to  the  system  which  these  means 
were  designed  to  overthrow  ; while  to  send  over  the 
land  pilgrim-hunters,  to  applaud  the  fame  and  sanctity 
of  the  shrines,  and  thus  stimulate  the  ignorant  multi- 
tude on  to  the  gate  of  superstition,  that  the  public  rev- 
enue may  bo  benefited  by  the  iniquitous  traffic,  is,  in 
the  extreme,  unchristian,  wicked  and  cruel.  All  these 


LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA.  313 

are  signs  of  the  times  favorable  to  the  advancement  of 
truth  and  goodness  in  that  benighted  and  sin-enslaved 
land. 

The  past  and  present  character  of  European  resu 
dents  presents  a point  worthy  of  attention.  The  Hon. 
Mr.  Shore,  an  eminent  Bengal  Judge,  in  his  published 
“ Notes  on  Indian  Affairs,”  uses  this  strong  language  : 
“ The  habits  of  the  English  in  this  country,  till  within 
the  last  twenty  years,  were,  as  far  as  religion  is  con- 
cerned, far  below  those  of  the  heathen  by  whom  they 
were  surrounded.  These  at  least,  paid  attention  to 
their  own  forms  and  ceremonies,  but  the  English  ap- 
pear to  have  considered  themselves  at  liberty  to  throw 
aside  all  consideration  upon  the  subject.  They  lived 
‘ without  God  in  the  world,  ’ as  if  there  were  neither  a 
heaven  nor  a hell.”  An  old  merchant  said  to  the  mis- 
sionary Schwartz,  “ Do  all  Englishmen  speak  like  you?” 
The  reply  was,  “All  Europeans  are  not.  true  Christians, 
but  there  are  many  who  believe  and  practice  the  faith 
I commend  and  preach.”  “ You  astonish  me,”  said 
the  native,  “ for  from  what  we  daily  observe,  we  cannot 
but  think  the  Europeans  to  be,  with  few  exceptions, 
self-interested,  incontinent,  proud,  full  of  contempt 
against  us  Hindoos,  and  even  against  their  own  reli- 
gion.” But  how  gratifying  the  change  which  has  oc- 
curred and  is  still  in  progress.  Many  Europeans  who 
now  go  to  India,  either  carry  their  piety  with  them 
ivithout  leaving  it  at  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  ; or  if, 
unhappily,  they  reach  its  shores  without  this  needful 
blessing,  they  secure  it  through  an  attendance  upon 
. 14 


314 


INDIA. 


the  Christian  sanctuaries  which  are  scattered  through- 
out the  country.  In  the  days  of  Henry  Martyn,  the 
chaplains  of  the  East  India  Company  were,  as  a body, 
“ blind  leaders  of  the  blind,”  “ hirelings  who  cared  not 
for  the  sheep  but  now,  it  were  difficult  to  find  in 
Christendom  more  conscientious  and  faithful  ministers 
of  divine  truth  than  are  to  be  met  with  in  India.  For 
an  officer  or  soldier  of  the  Indian  army,  or  for  a civilian 
of  any  age  and  rank  to  act  the  Christian,  is  no  longer  a 
reproach  and  disgrace,  but  rather  a passport  to  respec- 
tability and  public  favor.  The  bearing  of  all  this  upon 
the  advancement  of  Christianity  in  that  land,  is  both 
negatively  and  positively  beneficial  : negatively , for 
one  argument  against  our  faith  is  thus  wrested  from 
the  Hindoo  priesthood,  viz.,  that  it  exerts  no  salutary 
influence  upon  its  disciples  ; and  positively , for  tho 
teachers  of  the  Gospel  now  enjoy  the  sympathy,  influ- 
ence, and  pecuniary  contributions  of  their  fellow-be- 
lievers. Let  a few  facts  illustrate  this  last  point.  In 
the  year  1844  a leading  citizen  of  Madras  offered  the 
sum  of  $25,000  for  the  establishment  of  a Christian 
Institution  in  opposition  to  the  Government  University, 
which  excluded  the  Bible,  on  condition  that  the  publio 
would  subscribe  a like  sum.  At  the  head  of  the  list 
was  placed  the  name  of  the  Governor  of  Madras,  the 
Marquis  of  Tweedale,  who  subscribed  $5,000,  followed 
by  a long  array  of  names  from  all  classes  in  society, 
until,  after  the  lapse  of  a few  months,  the  whole  sum 
was  raised.  When  the  missionaries  of  the  Church  of 
Scotland  joined  their  seceding  brethren,  their  friends  in 


LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA.  315 


the  Madras  Presidency  rallied  at  once  to  their  aid,  and 
have  met  their  entire  expenses,  with  the  purchase  of 
premises  and  buildings,  to  the  sum  of  not  less  than 
$50,000.  The  two  neat  and  commodious  chapels  of 
the  American  Mission  at  Madras,  were  erected  without 
any  drafts  upon  the  Home  Treasury,  and  mainly 
through  the  efforts  of  my  worthy  friend  and  colleague, 
the  Rev.  Mr.  Winslow.  Some  branches  of  missionary 
operations  in  India  are  carried  on  wholly  through  con- 
tributions from  the  foreign  residents.  Some  officers 
expend  a large  part  of  their  incomes  in  the  publication 
and  distribution  of  tracts,  and  sustaining  schools  : 
others  give  a salary  to  a Christian  catechist,  who  visits 
their  family,  reads  to  the  servants,  and  instructs  them 
in  the  doctrines  and  duties  of  Christianity.  Without 
wishing  to  conceal  the  fact  that  there  is  very  much  of 
irreligion  still  remaining  among  the  foreigners  of  India 
— much  that  is  immoral,  and  vicious,  and  destructive 
— yet  with  all  that  need  be  subtracted  of  irreligion  and 
vice,  there  remains  much,  very  much,  in  the  state  and 
prospects  of  Anglo-Indian  society  there  which  calls  for 
devout  gratitude  and  joyful  hope. 

The  popular  sentiment  is  evidently,  though  it  may 
be  slowly,  turning  against  Hindooism,  and  in  favor 
of  Christianity.  There  are  traditions  and  prophecies 
current  among  the  people,  and  recorded  in  the  sacred 
books  of  the  land,  that  the  time  is  coming  when  the 
Brahminical  religion  is  to  be  supplanted  by  one  from 
the  western  world.  The  tenth  avatar  of  Yishnu,  a 
man  on  a white  horse,  is  supposed  by  some  to  typify 


316 


INDIA. 


that  advent.  Be  that  as  it  may,  the  belief  in  that  oc- 
currence is  common  the  country  over.  Multitudes  are 
at  the  present  hour  thoroughly  convinced  that  Chris- 
tianity has  truth  upon  its  side,  and  are  deterred  from 
acting  up  to  their  convictions  only  because  they  can- 
not make  up  their  minds  to  bear  the  sacrifices  which 
such  a profession  must  involve.  These  persons,  like 
the  “ Ruler  of  the  Jews”  visit  the  missionary  “ by 
night,”  state  their  convictions  and  those  of  their  friends, 
and  inquire  of  him  what  they  shall  do.  “We  know,” 
say  they,  “ that  we  are  in  the  wrong.  You  are  the 
true  worshippers,  and  we  trust  that  our  children  will 
be  of  your  faith ; but  how  can  we  change  now  ?”  One 
of  this  class,  a wealthy  Brahmin  of  Benares,  but  a few 
years  ago  called  upon  a missionary,  bringing  with  him 
his  youthful  son.  “ This  child,”  he  said,  “ I now  give 
to  you,  and  with  him  here  are  rupees  10,000  ($5,000) 
for  his  support.  Take  him,  bring  him  up  a Christian. 
I am  too  old  to  alter  my  faith,  but  I desire  my  child 
to  be  a follower  of  Christ.”  While  this  is  a peculiar 
case  in  respect  to  the  pecuniary  donation,  yet  instances 
of  a like  kind  are  of  increasingly  frequent  occurrence. 

The  people  are  changing  their  opinions  and  conduct 
towards  their  priests.  In  former  times  to  regard  a 
Brahmin  with  other  than  feelings  of  reverential  awe, 
was  deemed  one  of  the  highest  of  crimes.  No  matter 
what  their  character  and  principles — what  the  number 
of  their  lies,  adulteries,  and  other  vicious  acts — they 
were  regarded  as  the  best  and  holiest  of  men.  Their 
smile  was  better  than  the  approbation  of  heaven — their 


LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA.  317 

anathema  worse  than  the  prospect  of  hell.  But  now, 
although  the  Brahmins  still  ocoupy  the  first  place  in 
Hindoo  society — though  to  them,  as  priests,  are  en- 
trusted duties  of  great  importance  and  solemnity — they 
by  no  means  enjoy  the  high  honors  and  special  pre- 
rogatives with  which  they  were  once  favored.  Theii 
crimes  are  spoken  of  with  the  greatest  freedom,  and 
their  threatenings  command  but  little  attention,  and 
less  alarm.  If  upon  any  part  of  the  antique  structure 
of  Hindooism  there  be  inscribed  with  special  truth 
“ Ichabod ,”  it  is  upon  the  institution  of  the  Brahmini- 
cal  priesthood  ! 

The  strength  or  weakness  of  religious  zeal  in  any 
country  may  be  with  much  correctness  judged  of  by 
the  condition  of  its  edifices  for  worship.  Apply  this 
rule  to  the  present  condition  of  India,  and  it  suggests 
much  to  encourage  for  Christianity.  But  few  new 
temples  are  erected,  while  the  old  ones  are  fast  going 
to  ruins.  A coat  of  paint  and  whitewash  is  annually 
allowed  to  temples  of  peculiar  sanctity  and  resort, 
while  the  majority  are  left  to  the  decaying  power  of 
time.  There  is  the  absence  of  that  spirit  of  zeal  and 
self-sacrifice  for  their  faith  which  will  compel  parents 
and  guardians  to  keep  their  children  at  home,  or  expend 
an  amount  for  their  education  rather  than  send  them 
to  a missionary  institution,  where  there  is  every  pros- 
pect of  having  their  faith  in  Hindooism  shaken,  and  in 
Christianity  confirmed.  Instances  have  occurred  in 
which  the  conversion  of  one  or  more  pupils  has  led  to  a 
withdrawal  of  all  the  other  scholars  ; but  the  mission- 


318 


INDIA. 


ary  has  but  to  wait  a little  and  there  will  be  a general 
return  of  the  absentees.  Mass  meetings  have  been 
held  at  Calcutta  and  other  places,  in  which  speeches 
have  been  made  of  a character  most  denunciatory  of  the 
Bible  and  its  teachers,  and  pledges  formed  of  crushing 
the  whole  system.  But  most  signal  failure  has  al- 
ways  been  the  result.  Of  the  moneys  pledged  not  one 
per  cent,  is  paid,  and  the  resolutions  have  turned  out 
to  be  “ vox  et  preterea  nihil.”  These  things  are  noticed 
by  intelligent  Hindoos,  and  many  of  them  speak  out 
publicly  and  boldly.  A letter  addressed  not  long  since 
by  a native  of  Calcutta  to  the  “ Dhurma  Subha,”  an 
association  formed  for  the  protection  of  Hindooism, 
contained  sentences  like  these  : “ Oh,  holy  men,  boast 
no  more  that  you  are  Hindoos  ! Do  you  think  that 
your  people  will  remain  faithful  to  the  religion  of  their 
fathers  ? Give  up  all  such  vain  hopes.  The  Padres 
are  wandering  in  bands  through  the  lanes  and  streets 
of  Calcutta  in  order  to  destroy  the  Hindoo  religion,  and 
greedy  boys,  like  hungry  fishes,  are  caught  by  the  hook 
of  their  sorceries.  Many  youth  have  given  up  their 
family  caste  and  religion,  and  have  been  initiated  into 
the  mysteries  of  the  Bible.  Last  week  another  boy 
lifted  his  icing  and  flew  to  the  tree  of  the  love  of  Jesus 
Christ!  "We  cannot  find  fault  with  the  missionaries, 
for  it  is  the  glory  of  their  religion  that  they  have  crossed 
seven  oceans  and  thirteen  seas*  to  come  into  this  coun- 
try, and  are  now  expending  immense  sums  in  educa- 
tion of  the  people.  Our  religion,  having  no  means  of 
# A proverbial  expression. 


LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA.  319 

defending  itself,  is  dying  and  going  to  its  last  home.''' 
Sucli  a state  of  things  as  now  described  is  altogether 
new  to  India,  and  indicates  a change  of  feeling  most 
encouraging  to  the  heart  of  those  who  desire  the  down- 
fall of  that  ancient  but  destructive  superstition. 

The  existence  in  India  of  a Christian  church  corn- 
posed  of  converted  Hindoos  is  another  consideration 
which  casts  a cheering  light  upon  the  cause  of  truth 
in  that  land.  It  is  no  longer  problematical  whether 
the,  natives  of  Hindostan  are  susceptible  of  impression 
by  the  arguments  and  motives  of  the  Gospel.  The 
possibility  of  their  evangelization  is  settled  by  the  fact 
that  Hindooism  and  Mohamedanism  have  yielded  con- 
verts to  Christianity.  The  Brahmin  and  Soodra  have 
been  cleansed  by  a holier  ablution  than  by  the  waters 
of  the  Ganges  ; and  sitting  down  at  the  table  of  the 
Lord,  have  eaten  of  one  bread  and  drank  of  one  cup  in 
remembrance  of  Jesus.  One  of  the  north  of  India 
missionaries  states  the  number  of  Protestant  Christians 
in  the  Bengal  Presidency  and  northwest  provinces  to 
exceed  twelve  thousand.  The  Secretary  of  the  Church 
Missionary  Society  (Rev.  Mr.  Tucker)  estimates  the 
native  Christians  of  Southern  India  at  fifty  thousand. 
It  is  difficult  to  gain  an  estimate  altogether  correct  and 
faultless,  and  still  more  difficult  to  ascertain  how  large 
The  proportion  of  those  who  “ have  a name  to  live.” 
But  making  all  lawful  and  required  deductions,  many 
thousands  will  remain  as  evidence,  not  to  be  gainsaid, 
that  the  Most  High  has  not  disinherited  his  children 
there,  unworthy  though  they  have  rendered  themselves 


320 


INDIA. 


of  the  Divine  favor.  Among  the  natives  of  India  there 
are  jewels  which  will  shine  brightly  and  forever  in  the 
Redeemer’s  crown  of  glory.  That  country  is  yet  to 
form  part  of  that  universal  empire  of  which  the  Lord 
Jesus  is  Saviour  and  King. 

To  these  considerations  may  be  added  the  interest 
expressed,  by  all  Christian  denominations,  in  the  spiri- 
tual prospects  of  the  Hindoos,  the  comparatively  large 
number  of  missionaries  sent  among  them,  the  invari- 
able success  of  t'heir  efforts  whenever  carried  on  with 
perseverance  and  zeal,  the  extensive  circulation  of 
Bibles  and  Tracts,  and  other  agencies,  which,  if  space 
allowed,  I would  gladly  illustrate. 

I am  not  ignorant  of  the  fact,  nor  would  I attempt 
its  concealment,  that  this  subject  has  shades , as  well 
as  lights.  The  Hindoo,  with  his  volumes  of  revealed 
truth,  his  multitude  of  propitiatory  sacrifices,  his  fes- 
tival days  and  deities,  numerous  and  imposing,  and 
his  millions  of  fellow-believers,  can  hardly  be  made  to 
believe  that  all  are  deceived,  and  tho  whole  system  a 
falsehood  and  deception.  Then  comes  in  the  system 
of  caste,  with  its  terrific  denunciations  against  all 
who  dare  to  abjure  the  national  faith,  and  attach 
themselves  to  the  creed  of  strangers  and  foreigners. 
Upon  this  follows  the  certainty  that  persecution,  in 
some  of  its  hydra  forms,  will  follow  the  act  of 
baptism.  To  all  which  may  be  added  a literature,  ex- 
tensive and  antiquated,  to  which  the  Hindoo  triumph- 
antly appeals,  with  the  question,  How  can  we,  who 


LIGHTS  AND  SHADES  OF  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 


321 


live  in  the  iron  age  of  learning,  disbelieve  and  discard 
that  creed  which  in  the  golden  age  was  deemed  divine 
in  origin,  and  supreme  in  excellence?”  These  things 
operate  as  barriers  to  the  progress  of  truth,  and  it  is 
on  account  of  these  that  the  present  missionary  corps 
is  so  much  like  a “ beleaguering  army,  that  has  as 
yet  been  skirmishing  around  the  walls  of  a mighty 
fortress,  who  have  just  succeeded  in  taking  a few 
stragglers  as  prisoners,  and  have  begun  to  open  some 
of  their  batteries,  to  breach  the  walls,  but  who  well 
know  that  many  more  arduous  struggles  must  be  en- 
dured, and  that  many  a hero  must  fall  before  the  ene- 
my’s citadel  is  taken  ! 

But  when  we  consider  that  the  Orovemment  of  * 
India  gives  the  most  ample  protection  to  missionaries 
of  all  denominations,  in  the  peaceable  prosecution  of 
their  holy  object — that  a disunion  is  fast  being  effected 
between  governmental  patronage  and  the  national  re- 
ligion, the  latter  being  left  to  stand  or  fall  on  its  own 
merits — that  a most  extensive  and  happy  change  has 
taken  place  in  the  character  and  consequent  influence 
of  European  residents,  civil,  military,  and  ecclesiasti- 
cal— that  the  impression  is  wide-spread  and  deep, 
among  all  intelligent  and  thoughtful  Hindoos,  that 
their  system  cannot  endure  a close  contact  with  Chris- 
tianity— that  the  Christian  Church  has  obtained  a 
footing  in  that  land,  and  attached  to  itself  scarcely 
less  than  50,000  nominal  disciples — that  the  whole 
array  of  evangelizing  agencies,  as  Schools,  the  Press, 
Bibles  and  Tract  Circulation,  and  Preaching,  in  its 
14* 


322 


INDIA. 


many  forms,  is  in  operation — that  the  whole  of  Chris- 
tendom, without  regard  to  creed  or  nation,  is  mani- 
festing a deep  and  practical  interest  in  the  welfare  of 
the  Hindoos,  and  sending  thither  teachers  of  their 
faith — when  these  facts  come  before  us,  they  tend  to 
dissipate  the  dark  clouds  of  discouragement  and  de- 
pression. “ The  walls  of  Jerusalem,  compactly  built 
together,  did  not  fall  at  once,  under  the  battering-rams 
of  the  Romans.  Blow  succeeded  blow,  before  any  im- 
portant impression  was  made.  But  at  length  the  huge 
stones  were  loosed  and  shaken,  and,  in  spite  of  the 
desperate  courage  and  skill  of  the  defenders,  the  inner 
wall  was  reached  ; it  toppled  to  its  foundation,  and  a 
breach  was  opened  into  the  heart  of  the  city.”  So 
with  Hindooism — it  has  been  besieged,  and  an  under- 
mining process  is  going  on,  which,  with  the  Divine 
blessing,  will  go  on,  until  it  shall  be  known  but  on 
the  pages  of  history.  While,  therefore,  it  cannot  be 
denied  that  the  “ night  ” of  error  and  superstition  still 
broods  over  that  land,  we  may  say,  without  the  aid  of 
prophetic  vision,  “ The  morning  cometh .” 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 

The  interest  felt  by  Christendom  in  India — St.  Thomas — Roman  Ca- 
tholic Missions — Society  for  Propagating  the  Gospel — Danish  Mis- 
sionary Society — English  Baptist  Missionary  Society — London  Mis- 
sionary Society — Scottish  Missionary  Society — Church  Missionary 
Society — Free  Church  of  Scotland  Missions — American  Board  of  Com- 
missioners for  Foreign  Missions — American  Baptist  Missionary  Society 
— Presbyterian  Foreign  Missionary  Society — Free  Will  Baptist  Mis- 
sions— Evangelical  Lutheran  Missions — Concluding  Remarks. 

The  interest  felt  by  the  whole  of  Christendom  in 
the  spiritual  position  and  prospects  of  the  Hindoos,  is  a 
fact  full  of  hope  to  that  benighted  and  unhappy  people. 
A nation  that  has,  from  any  cause,  lost  the  earnest 
sympathy  of  the  Christian  Church,  and  is  debarred 
wholly  or  in  part  from  a place  in  her  prayers  and 
evangelizing  endeavors,  is  in  a very  deplorable  and  hap- 
less state.  Such  is  not  the  case  with  India.  I know 
of  no  part  of  the  vast  Christian  community  which  is 
not  engaged  directly  and  earnestly  in  bettering  the 
condition  of  that  idolatrous  country.  The  late  Bishop 
Heber  favored  the  opinion  that  St.  Thomas  preached 
the  Gospel  in  India,  and  was  martyred  at  a place 


324 


INDIA. 


named  Meilapoor,  near  the  city  of  Madras.  In  that 
village  is  a small  rocky  knoll  with  a Roman  Catholic 
church  upon  it,  which,  in  honor  of  this  apostle  and 
early  martyr,  is  called  St.  Thom6.  As  early  as  the 
fourteenth  century,  the  Church  of  Rome  sent  forth  her 
emissaries  to  that  land  ; and  with  such  zeal  and  ear- 
nestness were  their  efforts  prosecuted  under  Robert  de 
Nobili,  Francis  Xavier,  with  other  Ecclesiastics,  Car- 
melites, Capuchins,  Augustinians  and  Jesuits,  that  in 
connection  with  that  communion  alone  are  not  less 
than  six  hundred  thousand  natives.  Most  of  these  are 
the  descendants  of  families  converted,  centuries  back, 
to  the  creed  of  Rome,  the  conversions  from  heathenism 
to  that  faith  being  at  the  present  time  very  few. 

I would  request  the  reader’s  attention,  during  the 
remainder  of  this  chapter,  to  a rapid  view  of  Protestant 
Missions  as  they  have  been  and  still  are  conducted 
in  that  country.  The  various  organizations  will  be 
named  in  the  order  of  their  relative  age. 

T. 

The  “ Society  for  the  propagation  of  the  Gospel 
in  foreign  parts,”  was  chartered  by  King  William  III., 
June  16,  1701.  Its  India  stations  are  Vepery,  (an 
environ  of  Madras,)  Tanjore,  Trichinopoly,  Vellore, 
Cuddalore  and  Tinnevelly,  with  Bishop’s  College  at. 
Calcutta. 

II. 

The  “ Danish  Missionary  Society,”  was  established 


CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 


325 


in  1705,  by  Frederick  IV.  of  Denmark,  and  had 
for  its  primary  object  to  make  known  the  Gospel  of 
Christ  among  the  Hindoos  on  the  Coromandel  coast. 
The  missionaries  who  have  enjoyed  the  patronage  of 
this  Sooiety  have  been  men  eminent  for  talents  and 
piety.  The  venerable  names  of  Ziegenbalg,  Plutscho, 
Grundler,  Schubse,  Schwartz,  Gericke,  Jonicke,  Koh- 
loff,  Rottler,  Camraoeren  and  others,  their  colleagues, 
will  be  honored  so  long  as  faith,  zeal,  and  self-sacrifice 
are  esteemed  among  men. 

III. 

The  “ English  Baptist  Missionary  Society”  was 
the  product  of  a volume  from  the  pen  of  Rev.  Andrew 
Fuller,  entitled  “ The  Gospel  of  Christ  worthy  of  all 
acceptation ,”  and  a discourse  from  Mr.  (afterwards  Dr.) 
Carey,  from  Isaiah,  liv.  2,  3,  and  having  as  its  topic 
this  important  sentiment,  “ Expect  great  things  from 
God  ; attempt  great  things  for  God.”  On  the  2d  of 
October,  1792,  in  the  humble  village  of  Kittering,  this 
noble  institution  of  Christian  benevolence  had  its  be- 
ginning in  a series  of  resolutions  adopted  by  Ryland, 
Fuller,  SutclifF,  Pearce,  and  men  of  kindred  aims  and 
hopes.  On  the  13th  of  June,  of  the  same  year,  Revds. 
John  Thomas  and  William  Carey,  sailed  for  the  East 
Iudies.  My  readers  are  too  familiar  with  the  names 
of  Carey,  Marshman,  Ward,  Yates,  Pearce,  their  place 
of  abode — the  world-renowned  Serampore — and  their 
great  success  in  Bible  translations,  to  require  any 
farther  details  in  regard  to  their  operations.  Besides 


326 


INDIA. 


Serampore  this  Society  have  stations  at  Calcutta, 
Cutwa,  Digah,  and  Monghyr,  at  each  of  which  is  a 
Christian  church,  with  schools,  and  systematic  Bible 
and  Tract  distribution. 

IY. 

The  “ London  Missionary  Society”  was  established 
in  1795,  and  consisted,  at  its  formation,  of  Christians 
of  several  denominations,  though  now  conducted  al- 
most entirely  on  the  plan  of  discipline  adopted  by  the 
body  of  independent  Dissenters.  This  most  useful 
organization  had  its  origin  in  the  zeal  enkindled  with- 
in the  heart  of  Dr.  Bogue,  Rev.  Mr.  Steven,  and  a few 
others,  by  letters  received  from  Carey  and  Thomas — a 
remarkable  instance  of  the  diffusive  benefit  of  Chris- 
tian benevolence.  In  addition  to  successful  establish- 
ments in  the  South  Sea  Islands  and  South  Africa,  this 
Society  has  stations  at  Benares,  Burhampore,  Chin- 
surah,  Kidderpore,  Surat,  Madras,  Vizagapatam,  Cud- 
dapah,  Chittoor,  Bolgaum,  Bellary,  Bungalore,  and 
Travancore.  From  the  year  1798,  when  the  Rev. 
Mr.  Forsyth  was  sent  to  Calcutta,  to  the  present  hour, 
this  Institution  has  been  doing  much  for  the  natives 
and  Eurasians  of  India. 

V. 

The  “ Scottish  Missionary  Society”  was  formed  at 
Edinburgh  in  February,  1796,  and  though  limited  in 
its  sphere  of  operations  has  had  a useful  career.  Its 
missions  in  the  East  Indies  are  at  Bankote,  sixty  miles 
south  from  Bombay,  Sevendroog  and  Bombay. 


CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 


327 


VI. 

In  the  year  1801  was  instituted  the  “ Church  Mis- 
sionary Society,”  of  a kindred  spirit  and  aim 
with  that  of  the  London  Society  ; but  conducted  solely 
on  the  principles  of  the  Church  of  England.  It  is  un- 
derstood to  be  the  organ  of  the  Low  Church  as  the 
Gospel  Propagation  Society  is  of  the  High  Church 
party  of  that  religious  denomination.  In  addition  to 
Africa  and  Australia,  this  Society  has  many  devoted 
and  successful  agents  in  Northern  India,  at  Burdwan, 
Buxar,  Benares,  Chunar,  Delhi,  Agra,  Surruckpore, 
and  Meerut ; and  in  Southern  India  at  Madras,  Tinne- 
velly,  and  Travancore.  ^The  Rev.  Mr.  Rhenius,  one 
of  the  most  eminent  of  India  missionaries,  the  transla- 
tor of  the  New  Testament  Scriptures,  author  of  various 
tracts  and  Christian  treatises,  was  long  connected  with 
this  Society. 

VII. 

When  the  disruption  took  place  in  the  Established 
Church  of  Scotland,  the  seceders,  calling  themselves 
the  “ Free  Church  of  Scotland,”  attracted  to  them- 
selves the  entire  corps  of  Scottish  missionaries  in 
India.  Among  them  was  the  Rev.  Dr.  Duff  of  Calcutta, 
the  Rev.  Dr.  Wilson  of  Bombay,  and  the  less  eminent, 
though  not  less  zealous  and  indefatigable  and  success- 
ful  servants  of  God,  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Anderson, 
Braidwood,  and  Johnson  of  Madras.  Instruction  of 
the  young  rather  than  preaching  to  adults  has  charac- 
terized the  efforts  of  these  missionaries,  and  with  their 


328 


INDIA. 


zeal  and  unwearied  self-devotion  they  cannot  fail  to 
succeed. 


To  these  may  be  added  the  “ German  Missionary  So- 
ciety,” having  stations  in  the  southern  districts  and 
on  the  western  coast,  with  others  of  little  note,  though 
useful,  in  their  way. 

The  American  Churches  are  represented  in  India  by 
five  societies,  of  which  the  first  in  age  is  that  of  the 
“ American  Board  of  Commissioners  for  Foreign 
Missions.”  This  board  met  for  the  first  time  at  Far- 
mington, Conn.,  September  5th,  1810.  The  present 
centre  of  its  extensive  operations  is  Boston,  Mass.,  its 
presiding  officer  Hon.  Theodore  Frelinghuyaen,  LL.D., 
its  secretaries  Rufus  Anderson,  D.D.,  Rev.  Selah  B. 
Treat,  and  Swan  L.  Pomroy,  D.D.,  assisted  by  a Pru- 
dential Committee.  The  large  place  which  India  has 
has  held  in  the  evangelistic  efforts  of  this  Society 
will  appear  from  the  following  table,  which  contains 
the  names  of  all  persons,  ministerial,  lay,  and  assistants, 
who  have  been  sent  under  its  direction  to  the  Mahrattas, 
in  and  around  Bombay,  to  Jaffna  in  Northern  Ceylon, 
to  Madura  and  Madras  on  the  continent. 


vm. 


Bombay. 


U 

tl 


Reverend  Horatio,  and  Mrs.  R.  F.  Bardwe ", 


Bombay. 


CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 


329 


Reverend  Daniel,  and  Mrs.  Susan  Poor, 

“ James,  li  Sarah  Richards, 

“ Benjamin  C.  “ Sarah  M.  Meigs, 

“ Edward  Warren, 

1817. 

Reverend  John,  and  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Nichols, 

“ Allen,  “ Mary  L.  Graves, 

Miss  Philomela  Thurston, 

1819. 

Reverend  Miron,  and  Mrs.  Harriet  L.  Winslow, 
“ Levi,  “ Mary  C.  Spaulding, 

“ Henry,  “ Lydia  N.  Woodward, 

u John(M.D.),u  Harriet  W.  Scudder, 

1820. 

Mr.  James  Garret, 

4 

1823. 

Reverend  Edmund,  and  Mrs.  C.  E.  Frost, 

1827. 

Reverend  David  O.,  and  Mrs.  M.  W.  Allen, 

“ Cyrus,  “ Miss  A.  F.  Stone, 

Miss  Cynthia  Farrar, 


Ceylon. 

u 

u 

u 


Bombay 

u 

u • 


Ceylon. 

u 

a 

u 


Ceylon. 


Bombay. 


Bombay. 

u 

u 


1830. 

Reverend  William,  and  Mrs.  Elizabeth  H.  Hervey,  Bombay. 

“ William,  “ Nancy  W.  Ramsey,  “ 

“ Hollis,  “ C.  H.  Read,  “ 

1832. 

Reverend  George  W.,  and  Mrs.  F.  W.  Boggs.  Bombay. 

Mr.  William  C.,  “ Mary  L.  Sampson,  “ 


1833. 

Reverend  George  H.,  and  Mrs.  Mary  R.  Apthorp,  Ceylon. 
“ Henry  R.,  “ Nancy  L.  Hoisington,  “ 

“ Samuel.  “ Elizabeth  C.  Hutchings,  “ 


330 


INDIA. 


Reverend  William,  and  Mrs.  Lucy  B.  Todd, 

Ceylon. 

“ Eastman  S., 

“ Lucy  B.  Miner, 

u 

Nathan  (M.D.), 

“ Harriet  W.  Ward, 

a 

Reverend  James  R., 

“ Margaret  E.  Eckard, 

a 

1834. 

Reverend  Sendol  B.,  and  Mrs.  Maria  L.  Munger, 

Bombay . 

“ Alanson  C., 

“ Frances  A.  Hall, 

Ceylon . 

Mr.  Amos  A., 

“ A.  W.  Abbott, 

Bombay • 

“ George  W., 

“ E.  B.  Hubbard, 

<c 

Miss  Orpah  Graves, 

(4 

“ Abigail  H.  Kimball, 

a 

1835. 

Reverend  John  M.  S.,  and  Mrs.  Harriet  J.  Perry, 

Ceylon. 

“ John  J., 

“ Mary  H.  Lawrence, 

a 

“ Robert  0., 

“ Mary  B.  P wight, 

<« 

Mrs.  Catherine  W.  Winslow, 

Madras . 

1837. 

Reverend  Henry,  and  Mrs.  C.  H.  Cherry, 

Madura. 

“ Edward,  “ 

E.  K.  Cope, 

a 

“ Nathaniel  L.,  “ 

Julia  A.  J.  Crane, 

u 

“ Clarendon  F.,  “ 

S.  B.  Muzzy, 

u 

“ William,  “ 

E.  F.  Tracy, 

a 

“ Ferd.  De  W.  “ 

Jane  Ward, 

u 

And  afterwards  at  Madras 

John  (M.D.) , and  Mrs.  Mary  S.  Steele, 

Madura 

And  Miss  Steele,  since  1840,  at 

Jaffna. 

1839. 

Reverend  Ebenezer,  and  Mrs.  Nancy  G.  Burgess, 

Bombay. 

“ Ozro, 

“ Jane  H.  French, 

u 

“ Robert  W., 

“ Hannah  D.  Hume, 

u 

Mr.  Phineas  R., 

“ Abigail  M.  Hunt, 

Madras. 

Miss  Eliza  Agnew, 

Ceylon. 

“ Sarah  F.  Brown, 

u 

“ Jane  E.  Lathrop, 

a 

CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 


331 


1841. 

Reverend  Samuel  G.,  and  Mrs.  Anna  C.  Whittlesey,  Ceylon. 

“ Robert,  “ Martha  E.  Wyman,  “ 

“ J.  C.,  “ Mary  S.  Smith.  “ 

1844. 

Reverend  Horace  S.,  and  Mrs.  Martha  E.  Taylor,  Madura. 

“ Henry  M.,  “ Fanny  L.  Scudder,  Madras. 

1846. 

Reverend  James,  and  Mrs.  Elizabeth  C.  Herrick,  Madura. 


it 

Edward, 

44 

Nancy  A.  Webb, 

44 

a 

John, 

a 

Jane  B.  Rendall, 

44 

(4 

George  W., 

44 

Rebecca  N.  M'Millan, 

44 

a 

A.  H.. 

44 

Elizabeth  S.  Fletcher, 

<4 

44 

Wm.  W. 

44 

Susan  R.  Howland, 

U 

44 

Royal  G., 

44 

Eliza  J.  Wilder, 

Ahmcdnugger 

44 

Samuel  G., 

44 

Abby  W.  Fairbank, 

4» 

44 

A.  H., 

44 

Martha  R.  Hazen, 

44 

44 

John  E., 

44 

Charlotte  M.  Chandler, 

Madura 

44 

George, 

44 

Ann  J.  Ford, 

44 

44 

Wm.  W. 

44 

Catherine  E.  Scudder, 

Ceylon. 

“ Enrotas  P.  Hastings, 

Dr.  Samuel  F.  Green, 

1847. 

Reverend  George  Bowen, 

“ William,  and  Mrs.  Lucy  M.  Wood, 

1848. 

Reverend  John  W.,  and  Mrs.  Harriet  L.  Dallas, 

Dr.  Charles  S.,  “ Henrietta  M.  Shelton, 

Reverend  Joseph  T.,  <!  Elizabeth  A.  Noyes, 

“ Cyrus  T.,  “ Susan  L.  Mills. 

“ Thomas  S.,  “ Martha  Burwell, 

Of  these  one  hundred  and  fifty  persons,  forty  are 
deceased,  eighty-five  still  connected  with  the  mission, 


a 

a 

Bombay . 

Madras . 
Madura, 
Ceylon, 

44 

(4 


332 


INDIA. 


while  the  rest  are  in  their  native  country,  invalided,  01 
as  pastors.  Of  the  company  leaving  in  1815,  the  Rev. 
Messrs.  Meigs  and  Poor  are  still  toiling  on  with  zeal  and 
hopefulness.  Of  the  reinforcement  sent  in  1819,  Rev. 
Messrs.  Winslow  and  Scudder  have  resided  at  Madras, 
since  1835,  being  the  honored  founders  of  the  Ameri- 
can Madras  Mission  ; and  Rev.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Spaulding 
still  have  the  efficient  and  successful  charge  of  the 
Female  Boarding  School  at  Oodooville,  Jaffna,  assisted 
by  Miss  Agnew.  By  a singular  concurrence  of  re- 
verse events,  of  the  twenty-four  who  went  to  India 
during  the  years  1830,  ’32  and  ’33,  but  one  person  is 
on  the  field — Mr.  Miner,  at  Jaffna. 

Would  the  reader  make  himself  more  fully  ac- 
quainted with  the  past  history  and  present  condition 
of  the  various  missionary  stations  of  this  Board  in 
India,  he  will  do  well  to  read,  among  other  works, 
The  Christian  Brahmin , by  Rev.  Hollis  Read,  and 
published  in  1836,  a work  replete  with  much  informa- 
tion, both  respecting  the  interesting  convert  Babajee, 
and  the  Hindoos  generally  ; “ Journal  of  a Mission- 
ary Tour  in  India,  by  Rev.  Wm.  Ramsay,  published 
in  the  same  year,  an  admirable  description  of  mission- 
ary itineracy ; “ Memoirs  of  Mrs.  Winslow which 
none  of  my  readers  ought  to  omit  reading ; “ Ten 
Years  in  Ceylon  and  Southern  India,  containing 
much  respecting  the  theory  of  Hindooism  not  to  be 
found  in  any  other  American  work  ; “ Conquest  of 
India  by  the  Church,  by  Rev.  S.  B.  Munger,  which, 
with  the  admirable  appeals  from  the  Rev.  D.  Scudder, 


CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA. 


333 


cannot  be  read  without  awakening  emotions  of  letes- 
tation  for  that  false  faith,  pity  for  its  enslaved  votaries, 
and  an  earnest  desire  that  the  Truth  may  set  them 
free. 

The  “ American  Baptist  Board  of  Foreign  Mis- 
sions ” was  called  into  existence  by  an  important 
change  which  took  place  in  the  theological  views  of 
the  Rev.  Messrs.  Judson  and  Rice,  during  their  voyage 
to  India,  as  Missionaries  of  the  American  Board.  The 
organization  took  place  at  Philadelphia,  on  the  18th 
of  May,  1814.  Its  present  centre  is  Boston,  its  Presi- 
dent the  Hon.  George  N.  Briggs,  with  Solomon  Peck, 
D.D.,  and  Rev.  Edward  Bright,  as  Secretaries. 

Until  the  year  1S35,  the  operations  of  this  Board 
were  restricted  to  the  Burmese  and  Chinese  empires — 
but  in  that  year,  the  Rev.  S.  S.  and  Mrs.  Day  were  sent 
on  a mission  to  the  natives  of  Southern  India,  speak- 
ing the  Teloogoo  language.  After  residing  for  a time 
at  Madras,  they  removed  to  Nelloor,  a large  sea-board 
town,  about  a hundred  miles  north  from  the  metropolis. 
In  1840  they  were  joined  by  the  Rev.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Yan 
Husen  ; and  they  labored  patiently,  and  with  some 
degree  of  encouragement  until  1845,  when  ill  health 
compelled  Mr.  Yan  H.  to  relinquish  his  labors,  and  re- 
turn to  America,  where  he  now  is,  a hopeless  invalid. 
Mr.  Day  soon  followed,  but  his  health  being  sufficient- 
ly restored,  he  reembarked  in  1848,  accompanied  by 
Rev.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Jewett, — and  all  are  now  applying 
themselves  with  unwearied  diligence  and  zeal,  to  the 


334 


INDIA. 


people  of  that  idolatrous  town.  May  God  bless  them 
more  and  more. 

The  “ Board  of  Foreign  Missions  of  the  Presby- 
terian Church  in  the  United  States,”  was  instituted 
June  7th,  1837,  having  been  preceded  by  the  “ West- 
ern Foreign  Missionary  Society ,”  which  held  its  first 
annual  meeting  in  the  city  of  Pittsburg,  May  9th, 
1833.  The  present  locality  of  the  board  is  New  York 
city,  its  President  Archibald  Alexander,  D.D.,  its  Se- 
cretaries, Walter  Lowrie,  Esq.,  and  Rev.  John  C. 
Lowrie,  and  its  missionaries,  past  and  present,  in 
India  are  as  follows  : 


1833. 

Reverend  John  C.,  and  Mrs.  Lowrie,  Lodiana. 

“ William,  “ Reed,  “ 

This  company  have  all  deceased  except  Mr.  Lowrie,  who  is  associated 
with  his  honored  father  in  the  Secretaryship  of  the  Society. 


1834. 


Reverend  James,  and  Mrs.  Wilson, 

Agra. 

“ John,  “ Newton, 

Lahore. 

Miss  Julia  A.  Davis  (since  Mrs.  Goadby), 

Orissa. 

1835. 

Reverend  James,  and  Mrs.  M'Ewan, 

Allahabad. 

“ James  R.,  “ Campbell, 

Saharunpoor. 

“ Jesse  M.,  “ Jamieson, 

Amballa. 

“ William  S.,  “ Rogers, 

Lodiana. 

“ Joseph,  “ Porter, 

a 

1836. 

Reverend  H.,  and  Mrs.  Morrison, 

Amballa. 

“ Henry  R.,“  Wilson, 

Futtehgurh. 

Mr.  James,  and  Mrs.  Craig, 

Saharunpoor , 

Mr.  Rees,  “ Morris, 

Lodiana. 

Reverend  Joseph,  “ Caldwell, 

Saharunpoor 

CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA 


335 


1838. 

Reverend  Joseph,  and  Mrs.  Warren, 

“ John  E.,  “ Freeman, 

“ James  L.  “ Scott, 

1840. 

Reverend  John  C.,  and  Mrs.  Rankin, 

“ William  H.  “ M'Auley, 
“ Joseph,  “ Owen, 

Miss  Jane  Vanderveer, 


1841. 

Reverend  John,  and  Mrs.  Wray, 

“ Levi,  “ Janvier, 

1842. 

Willis  Green  M.D., 


1843. 

Reverend  John  J.,  and  Mrs.  Walsh, 

1846. 

Reverend  Adolph,  and  Mrs.  Randolph, 

“ David  “ Irving, 

“ Augustus  H.  Seeley, 

“ Robert  M.  Munnis, 

1847. 

Reverend  A.  Alexander,  and  Mrs.  Hodga. 
“ Charles  W.  Forman, 

1848. 

Reverend  Julius  F.  Ullman, 

“ John  S.,  and  Mrs.  Woodside, 


Allahabad. 

a 

u 


Agra. 

Furrukhabail. 

Allahabad. 

u 


Allahabatl. 

Lodiana, 


Lodiana. 


Mynpuric. 


Lodiana. 

Futtehgurh. 

Furrukhabad. 

Allahabad. 


Allahabad. 

Lahore. 


Futtehgurh. 

Saharunpoor. 


336 


INDIA. 


1850. 


Reverend  Horatio  W.,  and  Mrs.  Shaw, 


Allahabad. 


Lawrence  G.,  “ Hay, 

Robert  S.,  “ Fullerton. 

D.  Elliot,  “ Campbell, 

James  H.  Orbison, 


Futtehgurh. 

Furrukhabad. 

Lodiana. 


a 


These  stations  it  will  be  observed,  are  all  in  the  ex- 
treme North,  near  the  base  of  the  Himalayah  Moun- 
tains, and  reached  by  the  way  of  Calcutta  and  the 
Granges.  For  an  interesting  account  of  the  rise  and 
progress  of  that  efficient  mission,  with  a description  of 
the  -vicissitudes  and  perils  attagding  a trip  up  the 
sacred  stream,  the  reader  is  referred  to  a volume  from 
the  pen  of  my  worthy  friend  the  Rev.  Mr.  Lowrie,  the 
pioneer  to  that  country,  and  at  present  an  executive 
officer  in  the  Society,  with  which  he  has  been  connect- 
ed since  its  foundation. 

The  “ Free  Will  Baptist  Foreign  Missionary  So- 
ciety” was  organized  in  the  year  1833,  the  zeal  which 
called  it  into  being  being  enkindled  by  the  “ Macedo- 
nian call”  of  the  Rev.  Mr.  Sutton,  a missionary  among 
the  people  of  Orissa  in  South  Bengal.  Mr.  S.  visited 
this  country,  and  upon  his  return  to  India  in  the  year 
1835,  was  accompanied  by  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Noyes  and 
Phillips,  with  their  wives.  In  the  year  1839,  Mr. 
Otis  R.  and  Miss  Batchelder,  and  Miss  Hannah  W. 
Cummings,  were  sent  to  that  interesting  but  needy 


The  Evangelical  Lutherans  have  commenced  mis- 
sionary operations  at  Gruntoor,  having  as  their  efficient 


field. 


CHRISTIAN  MISSIONS  IN  INDIA.  337 

and  devoted  agents  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Hyer  and  Gunn 
and  Mrs.  Gunn.  Much  encouragement  has  attended 
their  efforts  thus  far. 

With  this  large  array  of  means  in  operation,  the 
reader  is  expecting  to  hear  of  results  proportionally 
abundant  and  gratifying.  In  forming  a judgment 
upon  this  subject  we  must  not  overlook  the  obstacles 
with  which  the  Christian  missionary  has  to  contend  in 
the  language,  the  system  of  caste,  a false  philosophy, 
an  antiquated  and  venerated  theology,  together  with 
the  dense  population,  so  far  exceeding  in  proportionate 
numbers  the  few  who  are  sent  for  their  instruction. 
The  whole  missionary  corps  of  India,  able-bodied  and 
ripe  for  action,  cannot  exceed  one  hundred  and  fifty  at 
the  farthest — the  population  is  about  one  hundred  and 
fifty  millions,  and  speaking  twenty  different  lan- 
guages. When  I tell  my  reader  that  the  whole  num- 
ber of  converts  to  Christianity,  excluding  the  members 
of  tho  Church  of  Rome,  cannot  exceed  ten  thousand, 
let  him  not  be  surprised  and  disheartened,  but  rather 
be  thankful  that  against  such  fearful  odds  such  re- 
sults have  been  gained.  England  requires  two  hun- 
dred thousand  well-disciplined  troops  to  subjugate  to 
her  dominion  the  flesh  and  blood  of  India.  And  now, 
because  some  few  scores  of  soldiers  of  the  cross  have 
not  taken  from  Satan  and  all  his  principalities  and 
powers,  in  these  his  high  places  of  abomination  and 
sin,  this  his  most  loyal  province,  and  are  not  now  with 
the  millions  of  its  redeemed  people,  shouting  high  and 


338 


INDIA. 


jubilant  songs  of  conquest,  there  are,  forsooth,  those 
who  begin  to  wonder  at  the  protraction  of  the  fight, 
and  to  despond  of  conquest.  Reader,  let  me  entreat 
you  not  to  be  of  that  number.  India  belongs  to  truth 
and  goodness,  though  for  a time  in  the  power  of  error 
and  sin  ; and  the  time  is  coming  when  the  Almighty 
will  assert  His  rights  and  reclaim  His  dominion. 
In  His  name,  and  by  His  direction,  measures  are  in 
progress  which  tend  to  this  blessed  consummation. 
Far  be  it  from  the  writer’s  wish  that  one  who  pe- 
ruses his  pages  close  his  mind  to  facts  however  dis- 
couraging and  sad  ; but  let  him  look  also  at  the  en- 
couragements— let  him  read  the  previous  list  and  see 
if  he  does  not  find  the  name  of  a son,  daughter,  brother, 
sister,  or  other  beloved  friend,  from  whose  tombstone 
there  comes  an  appeal  that  India  be  cared  for — with 
faith,  and  prayer,  and  self-sacrifice.  If,  after  all  this, 
any  are  disposed  still  to  despond,  let  them  remember 
Calvary,  and  say : “ From  the  cross  came  the  crown, 
out  of  the  grave  came  heaven,  through  the  gibbet’s 
shame  came  the  Church’s  glory.”  As  it  was  in  Judea, 
so  is  it  in  India.  Though  there  be  night  the  “ morn- 
ing cometh.”  This  must  be  our  motto,  to  warm  our 
zeal  and  nerve  our  arm,  to  cheer  our  despondency  and 
strengthen  our  faith — “ faint  yet  pursuing.” 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 


GLOSSARY: 

OR,  VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS  AND  TERMS  IN  COMMON  USE  BY 
WRITERS  ON  INDIA,  ARRANGED  IN  ALPHABETICAL  ORDER. 

A. 

Adawlet — A court  of  justice,  civil  or  criminal. 

Ameer — A noblemau,  a prince. 

Ameen — A guardian,  arbitrator. 

Amildar — A collector,  or  ruler. 

Anna — A silver  coin  about  three  cents  in  value. 

Annicut — A dam. 

Avatar — An  incarnation. 

Acbar — A native  newspaper. 

Aumeer — A collector  of  revenue. 

Ayah — A nurse-maid. 

B. 

Baboo — Title  of  a Hindoo  gentleman. 

Bagee — Name  of  a grain. 

Bang — Hemp,  an  intoxicating  mixture  made  from  hemp. 
Bangy — A stick  carried  across  the  shoulders  with  slings 
at  both  ends  for  burdens,  heavy  mail  bag. 
Banyan — A shopkeeper. 

Batta — Allowance  to  troops  in  the  field. 

Bazar — Market,  grocery  store. 

Beastie — One  who  carries  water  in  a skin. 

\ 


340 


INDIA. 


Beebee — Lady. 

Begum — A lady  of  rank,  a princess. 

Brinjarry — Carriers  of  rice. 

Bungalow — A thatched  cottage. 

Bandy — A gig  or  cart,  (usually  drawn  by  oxen-J 
Bangle — A bracelet. 

Begah — Land  measure. 

Boolee — A large  well. 

Boosa — Camel’s  food. 

Budgerow — A large  cabined  boat  used  on  the  Ganges. 
Bund ur — A harbor. 


c. 

Carcoon — The  register  of  the  collections  under  a Zimindar 
Catamaran — A water  craft  used  on  the  Bay  of  Bengal. 
Cawny — A ground  measure  equal  to  1 1-4  acres. 

Cazee — A Mohamedan  judge. 

Chokedar — A watchman. 

Choultry — A building  for  public  purposes. 

Chun  am — Lime,  whitewash. 

Circar — A district,  a superintendent. 

Compound — An  enclosure,  a front  yard. 

Conicopilly — An  accountant. 

Cooly — A laborer,  porter,  hire. 

Coss — A measure,  averaging  two  miles. 

Crore — Ten  millions. 

Cumbly — A blanket. 

Cutchery — A town  hall,  a court. 

Cutwal — The  chief  officer  of  the  police  in  a town. 
Chattah — Umbrella. 

Chowny — A whisp  for  driving  off  flies. 


D. 

Dacoit — An  attack  made  by  robbers. 

Dawk — Post  for  letters  or  bearers. 

Dewan — Minister,  steward. 

Dirzee — The  household  tailor. 

Doab — A tract  of  country  between  two  rivers. 
Dobash — An  interpreter. 


CLOSSARV. 


341 


Dooly — A light  description  of  palankeen  made  of  canvas. 
Dandee — A boatman,  (applied  to  those  on  the  Ganges.) 
Duffadar — Officer,  equivalent  to  lieutenant. 

Durbar — A court  where  a levee  is  held. 

Durman — A gate  keeper. 

F. 

Fakeer — A Mohamedan  devotee,  literally  a beggar. 
Foujdar — The  military  governor  of  a town  or  district. 

G. 

Ganja— Hemp,  an  intoxicating  mixture  used  for  drinking  and 
smoking. 

Ghee — Clarified  butter. 

Ghurny — An  Indian  hour,  twenty-four  minutes 
Gobrun — The  porch  tower  of  a pagoda,  a gate. 

Godown — W arehouse,  storeroom. 

Gom  aster — Agent. 

Gooroo — Spiritual  guide. 

Ghaut — A landing  place,  a pass  of  a mountain,  or  a range 
of  hills. 

Gram — A kind  of  grain. 

Griffin — Descriptive  title  of  a foreigner  during  his  first  year 
in  India. 


H. 

Hackery — A native  bullock  carnage. 
Harem — A woman’s  apartments. 
Havildar — Equivalent  to  sergeant. 
Hircarrah — A courier,  a messenger. 
Hooka — A pipe. 

Howdah — A seat  on  an  elephant. 


J. 

Jaghire — Land  granted  in  the  way  of  pension. 
Jemidar — An  officer  in  the  army. 

Jungle — A thicket,  land  covered  with  brushwood- 


342 


INDIA. 


K 


Khan — A prince  or  lord. 
Khas — A noble,  private. 
Khelant — A robe  of  honor. 
Kist — A tax. 

Khitmutgar — A footman. 


L 


Lack — A hundred  thousand. 

Lascar — A native  porter. 

Lubbie — A descendant  of  Arab  settlers  on  the  Coromandel 
Coast. 


M. 

Mamoul — Custom,  usage. 

Mantra — A charm,  a spell. 

Maund — Name  of  a weight,  about  25  lbs. 

Maher-rajah — Great,  king. 

Mofutssil — The  country  in  opposition  to  town. 
Moollah-^A  learned  man,  answering  to  the  word  doctor. 
Munsy — A judge. 

Musnud — A throne. 


N. 

Nabob — A governor  of  a district,  deputy. 
Naick — A chief. 

Nizam — Administrator,  governor. 
Nullah — A streamlet,  watercourse. 
Nunjah — Dry  cultivation. 

Nuzzee — A gift. 


P. 


Paddy — Rice  in  the  husk. 

Pagoda — A Hindoo  idol  temple,  also  name  of  a coin. 
Palankeen — A litter  or  sedan. 


GLOSSARY. 


343 


Parcherry — A pariah  village. 

Peon — A footman,  a constable. 

Pariah — A stranger,  an  outcast. 

Pergunnah — A subdivision  of  a Zulla. 

Parwanal — A pass,  permit,  or  warrant. 

Peishwa — A leader,  foreman. 

Pice — A small  copper  coin,  one-twelfth  part  of  an  arman. 
Pettah — A native  town  near  a fort 
Phansegar — A thug,  (which  sec.) 

Polare — The  headman  of  a village. 

Poojah — Worship. 

Pucca — Brick. 

Punka — A large  fan  suspended  from  the  ceiling. 

Purana — Indian  mythological  poem. 

Pundit — Learned  man,  title  of  a Brahmin  lawyer. 


Q. 


Qui-hi — Who  waits  ? (Applied  to  Calcuttians.) 


R. 

Rajah — Hindoo  prince  or  king. 

Ramazun — An  epic  poem  describing  the  exploits  of  Rama. 
Ranee — Hindoo  princess  or  queen. 

Rao — A prince. 

Rupee — A silver  coin  whose  value  is  about  fifty  cents. 
Ryot — A tenant  (of  land,)  subject. 

Rutt — A car,  chariot. 


S. 


Sahib — Master,  sir,  lord. 

Sanyassy — A Hindoo  devotee. 

Seer — A weight  or  measure  equal  to  two  lbs. 
Sepoy — A native  soldier. 

Serishtadar — Title  of  a revenue  officer. 

Sh astras — Hindoo  sacred  books  and  laws. 
Shastry — An  expounder  of  Hindoo  law. 
Shroff — A money  changer,  banker. 


344 


INDIA. 


Sirdar — A chief  commander. 

Subadar — Governor  of  a province,  officer  of  highest  rank 
in  the  native  army. 

Sudder — Chief,  Supreme. 

Syrang — Captain,  overseer. 

Soodra — Fourth  of  the  Hindoo  castes. 

Suwarree — Retinue. 


T. 

Tasildar — A collector,  tax  gatherer. 

Talook — A manor,  division  of  land. 

Tanadar — A station  man,  police  officer. 

Tank — An  artificial  pond,  or  small  lake. 

Tanna — A watchhouse. 

Tappal — A post,  for  letters  or  hearers. 

Thakoor — A lord,  chief. 

Thug — A robber,  cheat,  applied  in  the  western  provinces  to 
stragglers  on  the  highway. 

Tattee — A mat  made  of  cuscos  grass. 

Tindal — A tent  pitcher,  captain  of  a coast  vessel. 

Tope — A clump  of  trees. 

Tonjon — A chaise-like  palanquin. 

Tusseldar — A taxman. 


V. 

Vakeel — An  ambassador,  agent,  lawyer. 
Vizier — A minister  of  state. 

Vedas — Hindoo  scriptures. 


Y. 

Yogi — Religious  mendicants. 


Z. 


Zenindar — A landholder. 
Zillah — A district. 
Zemindary — A province. 


finis. 


